Experion PKS

Control Builder Components Reference

EPDOC-XX15-en-430A
December 2013

Release 430
 Document Release Issue Date
EPDOC-XX15-en-430A 430 0 December 2013

Disclaimer
This document contains Honeywell proprietary information. Information contained herein is to be used solely
for the purpose submitted, and no part of this document or its contents shall be reproduced, published, or
disclosed to a third party without the express permission of Honeywell International Sàrl.
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated
in its written agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any direct, special, or consequential damages. The information
and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2013 - Honeywell International Sàrl

2 www.honeywell.com
Contents

1 About This Document .......................................................................................................................... 11

2 Control Builder Components .............................................................................................................. 13
2.1 Component Categories and Types .................................................................................................................... 14
2.2 Hardware relation category ............................................................................................................................... 15
2.2.1 Physical equipment block types ......................................................................................................... 16
2.3 Functional relation category ............................................................................................................................. 18
2.3.1 Functional block types ....................................................................................................................... 18
2.4 Component Libraries ........................................................................................................................................ 20
2.4.1 Auxiliary (AUXILIARY) Library ..................................................................................................... 20
2.4.2 Device Control (DEVCTL) Library .................................................................................................. 21
2.4.3 Data Acquisition (DATAACQ) Library ............................................................................................. 21
2.4.4 Input/Output Channel (IOCHANNEL) Library ................................................................................ 21
2.4.5 Exchange Library (ControlNet Interoperability) ............................................................................... 21
2.4.6 Pulse Input Channel/Module Library ................................................................................................ 21
2.4.7 Input/Output Module (IOMODULE) library ..................................................................................... 21
2.4.8 Logic (LOGIC) Library ..................................................................................................................... 23
2.4.9 Math (MATH) Library ....................................................................................................................... 24
2.4.10 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) ................................................................................................ 24
2.4.11 Power Generation (POWERGEN) library ....................................................................................... 25
2.4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) ........................................................................................... 25
2.4.13 Series C Input/Output Library ......................................................................................................... 26
2.4.14 Regulatory Control (REGCTL) library ........................................................................................... 28
2.4.15 Sequential Control Module (SCM) library ...................................................................................... 29
2.4.16 System (SYSTEM) Library ............................................................................................................. 29
2.4.17 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Library .................................................................. 29
2.4.18 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Library .............................................................................................. 29
2.4.19 Utility (UTILITY) Library .............................................................................................................. 29
2.4.20 Rail I/O Modules -Series H (RAIL_IO_HAZ) Library ................................................................... 30
2.4.21 HART I/O Modules (HARTIO) Library .......................................................................................... 30
2.4.22 DeviceNet Interface (DNETIF) Library .......................................................................................... 30
2.4.23 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library ......................................................................................... 30
2.4.24 Rail I/O Modules - Series A (RAIL_IO) Library ............................................................................ 30
3 Reference Data for Functional Block Types ...................................................................................... 31
3.1 Auxiliary Blocks ............................................................................................................................................... 32
3.1.1 AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block ........................................................................................ 32
3.1.2 AUXSUMMER (Auxiliary Summer) block ...................................................................................... 35
3.1.3 CTUD (Counter Up/Down) Block ..................................................................................................... 36
3.1.4 DEADTIME block ............................................................................................................................. 38
3.1.5 ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced Auxiliary Calculation) block ............................................................... 39
3.1.6 ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General Linearization) block ................................................................... 41
3.1.7 FLOWCOMP (Flow Compensation) block ....................................................................................... 42
3.1.8 GENLIN (General Linearization) block ............................................................................................ 43
3.1.9 LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block ............................................................................................................ 44
3.1.10 ROC (Rate of Change) block ........................................................................................................... 45
3.1.11 SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) block .............................................................................................. 45

3
CONTENTS

3.1.12 Selection methods ............................................................................................................................ 49

3.1.13 TOTALIZER block .......................................................................................................................... 50
3.2 Device Control Block ....................................................................................................................................... 52
3.2.1 DEVCTL (Device Control) block ..................................................................................................... 52
3.3 Data Acquisition Block ..................................................................................................................................... 55
3.3.1 DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block ................................................................................................ 55
3.4 IO Channel Blocks ............................................................................................................................................ 59
3.4.1 AICHANNEL .................................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.2 AOCHANNEL .................................................................................................................................. 59
3.4.3 DICHANNEL .................................................................................................................................... 60
3.4.4 DOCHANNEL .................................................................................................................................. 60
3.4.5 PWMCHANNEL ............................................................................................................................... 61
3.4.6 SIFLAGARRCH ................................................................................................................................ 62
3.4.7 SINUMARRCH ................................................................................................................................. 62
3.4.8 SITEXTARRCH ................................................................................................................................ 63
3.5 Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability) ............................................................................................... 65
3.5.1 REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block .............................................................................. 65
3.5.2 REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block .......................................................................... 65
3.5.3 REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block ............................................................................... 66
3.5.4 RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block ............................................................................. 67
3.5.5 RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block ........................................................................ 67
3.5.6 RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block ............................................................................. 68
3.6 HART DEVICE Block ..................................................................................................................................... 69
3.6.1 HART DEVICE (Generic HART Device) ......................................................................................... 69
3.7 Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks ................................................................................................................ 71
3.7.1 Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff ................................................................................................ 71
3.7.2 Pulse Input Channel ........................................................................................................................... 72
3.7.3 Pulse Input Totalizer .......................................................................................................................... 72
3.7.4 Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 ..................................................................... 73
3.7.5 Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01 ............................................................................................. 74
3.7.6 PI Channel ......................................................................................................................................... 75
3.8 Logic Blocks ..................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.8.1 AND block ......................................................................................................................................... 78
3.8.2 CHECKBAD block ........................................................................................................................... 78
3.8.3 CHECKBOOL block ......................................................................................................................... 79
3.8.4 CHGEXEC (Change Execution) block ............................................................................................. 79
3.8.5 CONTACTMON (Contact Monitoring) block .................................................................................. 80
3.8.6 DELAY block .................................................................................................................................... 81
3.8.7 EQ (Equal) block ............................................................................................................................... 81
3.8.8 FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) block ................................................................................................. 82
3.8.9 GE (Greater than or Equal to) block .................................................................................................. 82
3.8.10 GT (Greater Than) block ................................................................................................................. 83
3.8.11 LE (Less than or Equal to) block ..................................................................................................... 83
3.8.12 LIMIT block .................................................................................................................................... 84
3.8.13 LT (Less Than) block ....................................................................................................................... 84
3.8.14 MAX block ...................................................................................................................................... 85
3.8.15 MAXPULSE block .......................................................................................................................... 85
3.8.16 MIN block ........................................................................................................................................ 85
3.8.17 MINPULSE block ........................................................................................................................... 86
3.8.18 MUX (Multiplexer) block ................................................................................................................ 86
3.8.19 MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) block ............................................................................................. 87
3.8.20 MVOTE (Majority Voting) block .................................................................................................... 87
3.8.21 NAND block .................................................................................................................................... 87
3.8.22 NE (Not Equal) block ...................................................................................................................... 88

4 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

3.8.23 nOON (n out of N voting) block ...................................................................................................... 89

3.8.24 NOR block ....................................................................................................................................... 89
3.8.25 NOT block ....................................................................................................................................... 90
3.8.26 OFFDELAY block ........................................................................................................................... 90
3.8.27 ONDELAY block ............................................................................................................................ 91
3.8.28 OR block .......................................................................................................................................... 91
3.8.29 PULSE block ................................................................................................................................... 91
3.8.30 QOR (Qualified OR) block .............................................................................................................. 92
3.8.31 ROL (Rotate Output Left) block ...................................................................................................... 92
3.8.32 ROR (Rotate Output Right) block ................................................................................................... 93
3.8.33 RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block ................................................................................... 93
3.8.34 RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger) block ................................................................................................ 93
3.8.35 SEL (Binary Selection) block .......................................................................................................... 94
3.8.36 SELREAL (Real Selection) block ................................................................................................... 94
3.8.37 SHL (Shift Output Left) block ......................................................................................................... 94
3.8.38 SHR (Shift Output Right) block ...................................................................................................... 95
3.8.39 SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block ....................................................................................... 95
3.8.40 STARTSIGNAL block ..................................................................................................................... 96
3.8.41 TRIG (Rising or Falling edge Trigger) block .................................................................................. 96
3.8.42 WATCHDOG block ......................................................................................................................... 97
3.8.43 XOR block ....................................................................................................................................... 97
3.8.44 2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block ....................................................................................................... 98
3.9 Math Blocks ...................................................................................................................................................... 99
3.9.1 ABS block .......................................................................................................................................... 99
3.9.2 ADD block ......................................................................................................................................... 99
3.9.3 DIV block ........................................................................................................................................ 100
3.9.4 EXP block ........................................................................................................................................ 100
3.9.5 LN block .......................................................................................................................................... 101
3.9.6 LOG block ....................................................................................................................................... 101
3.9.7 MOD block ...................................................................................................................................... 102
3.9.8 MUL block ....................................................................................................................................... 102
3.9.9 NEG block ....................................................................................................................................... 102
3.9.10 POW block ..................................................................................................................................... 103
3.9.11 ROUND block ............................................................................................................................... 103
3.9.12 SQRT block ................................................................................................................................... 104
3.9.13 SUB block ...................................................................................................................................... 104
3.9.14 TRUNC block ................................................................................................................................ 105
3.9.15 ROLLAVG block ........................................................................................................................... 105
3.10 Power Generation Blocks ............................................................................................................................. 106
3.10.1 GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) block ............................................................... 106
3.10.2 HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block .............................................................................. 107
3.10.3 LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block ......................................................................... 111
3.10.4 LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block ................................................................................ 112
3.10.5 MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block .............................................................................................. 114
3.10.6 SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block ...................................................................... 115
3.10.7 VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control) block .............................................................. 118
3.11 Regulatory Control Blocks ........................................................................................................................... 121
3.11.1 AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) block ............................................................................................... 121
3.11.2 ENHREGCALC (Enhanced Regulatory Control Calculator) block .............................................. 125
3.11.3 FANOUT block .............................................................................................................................. 131
3.11.4 OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block ............................................................................................ 134
3.11.5 PID block ....................................................................................................................................... 138
3.11.6 PIDER block .................................................................................................................................. 143
3.11.7 PID-PL block ................................................................................................................................. 148

5
CONTENTS

3.11.8 PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block ................................................................................................... 153

3.11.9 POSPROP (Position Proportional) block ...................................................................................... 159
3.11.10 PULSECOUNT block .................................................................................................................. 164
3.11.11 PULSELENGTH block ................................................................................................................ 165
3.11.12 RAMPSOAK block ..................................................................................................................... 167
3.11.13 RATIOBIAS block ....................................................................................................................... 171
3.11.14 RATIOCTL block ........................................................................................................................ 176
3.11.15 REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) block .............................................................................................. 180
3.11.16 REGCALC (Regulatory Control Calculator) block ..................................................................... 181
3.11.17 REGSUMMER (Regulatory Control Summer) ........................................................................... 187
3.11.18 REMCAS block ........................................................................................................................... 192
3.11.19 SWITCH block ............................................................................................................................ 196
3.12 Sequential Control Module Blocks ............................................................................................................... 201
3.12.1 HANDLER Block .......................................................................................................................... 201
3.12.2 STEP Block ................................................................................................................................... 202
3.12.3 SYNC Block .................................................................................................................................. 203
3.12.4 TRANSITION Block ..................................................................................................................... 204
3.13 System Blocks .............................................................................................................................................. 206
3.13.1 CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control) ..................................................................... 206
3.13.2 SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block (Sequential Control) ............................................. 207
3.13.3 Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block .......................................................................................... 209
3.13.4 Unit Control Module (UCM) Block .............................................................................................. 209
3.13.5 Master Recipe (MR) Block ............................................................................................................ 209
3.13.6 Proxy Master Recipe (MR) Block ................................................................................................. 209
3.13.7 Proxy FTEB Block ........................................................................................................................ 210
3.13.8 Proxy Node .................................................................................................................................... 210
3.13.9 Proxy Sequential Control Module (SCM) Block ........................................................................... 210
3.13.10 Proxy Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block .............................................................................. 210
3.14 Thermodynamic Utility Function Block ....................................................................................................... 211
3.14.1 STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block .......................................................................................... 211
3.15 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Block ................................................................................. 213
3.15.1 UCNOUT block ............................................................................................................................. 213
3.15.2 EUCNOUT block .......................................................................................................................... 214
3.16 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks ............................................................................................................ 215
3.16.1 HIWAYOUT block ........................................................................................................................ 215
3.17 Hiway Responder Block (HRB) ................................................................................................................... 216
3.17.1 Basic Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB) ...................................... 216
3.17.2 Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI) .............................................. 217
3.17.3 Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG) ............................................. 217
3.18 Utility Blocks ................................................................................................................................................ 218
3.18.1 ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - Alarm Annunciator) block .................................................... 218
3.18.2 ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - Alarm Annunciator) block .................................................... 219
3.18.3 DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition) block ........................................................................................... 220
3.18.4 EXECTIMER ................................................................................................................................ 221
3.18.5 FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) block ........................................................................................ 222
3.18.6 FLAG block ................................................................................................................................... 223
3.18.7 FLAGARRAY block ..................................................................................................................... 224
3.18.8 MESSAGE block ........................................................................................................................... 224
3.18.9 NUMERIC block ........................................................................................................................... 226
3.18.10 NUMERICARRAY block ........................................................................................................... 226
3.18.11 PUSH block ................................................................................................................................. 226
3.18.12 TEXTARRAY block .................................................................................................................... 227
3.18.13 TEXTCOMMENT (Text Comment) block ................................................................................. 228
3.18.14 TIMER block ............................................................................................................................... 228

6 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

3.18.15 TYPECONVERT block ............................................................................................................... 229

3.19 EtherNet/IP channel blocks .......................................................................................................................... 231
3.19.1 EtherNet/IP IO channel blocks ...................................................................................................... 231
3.19.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay channel blocks .................................................................................. 233
4 Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types .................................................................... 237
4.1 Control Processor Module Block .................................................................................................................... 238
4.1.1 CPM Block (C200 Controller) ......................................................................................................... 238
4.1.2 C200E Controller ............................................................................................................................. 240
4.1.3 C300 Block ...................................................................................................................................... 242
4.1.4 Application Control Environment (ACE) Block ............................................................................. 245
4.2 Control Execution Environment Block .......................................................................................................... 246
4.2.1 CEEC200 Block ............................................................................................................................... 246
4.2.2 CEEC200E Block ............................................................................................................................ 248
4.2.3 CEEC300 Block ............................................................................................................................... 251
4.2.4 C300 - 20mS CEE ........................................................................................................................... 255
4.2.5 CEEACE Block ............................................................................................................................... 258
4.3 Input/Output Link Interface Module Block .................................................................................................... 259
4.3.1 IOLIM block .................................................................................................................................... 259
4.4 Input/Output Link Block ................................................................................................................................. 260
4.4.1 IOLINK block .................................................................................................................................. 260
4.4.2 IOLINK Block (C300 Controller) ................................................................................................... 262
4.4.3 IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE) ............................................................................................... 265
4.5 OLE for Process Control Server Block .......................................................................................................... 268
4.5.1 OPC block ........................................................................................................................................ 268
4.6 Inter Cluster Gateway Block .......................................................................................................................... 269
4.6.1 Inter Cluster Gateway (ICG) Block ................................................................................................. 269
4.7 Redundancy Module Block ............................................................................................................................ 272
4.7.1 RM block ......................................................................................................................................... 272
4.8 Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block ............................................................................................... 274
4.8.1 FTEB block ...................................................................................................................................... 274
4.9 Input Type I/O Module Blocks ....................................................................................................................... 277
4.9.1 TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Input) ........................... 277
4.9.2 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 (6 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Isolated - Analog Input) ........................ 277
4.9.3 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 (16 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Input) .............. 278
4.9.4 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 (16 Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Input) .............................. 279
4.9.5 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated - Digital Input) ............................... 280
4.9.6 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated - Digital Input) .......................................... 281
4.9.7 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 (16 Channel - 120Vac Isolated - Digital Input) ...................................... 282
4.9.8 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 (16 Channel - 220Vac Isolated - Digital Input) .................................... 283
4.9.9 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 (8 Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic Input) .................................................. 284
4.9.10 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Diagnostic Input) ............................................... 285
4.9.11 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) ........................................................ 286
4.9.12 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input) ........................................................ 287
4.9.13 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 (6 Channel - RTD Input) ....................................................................... 288
4.10 Output Type I/O Module Blocks .................................................................................................................. 290
4.10.1 TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Output) ................... 290
4.10.2 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA - Analog Output) ........................................ 291
4.10.3 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 (6 Channel - 10V - Analog Output) ................................................... 291
4.10.4 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 (8 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Output) ......... 292
4.10.5 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 (16 Channel - 120/220Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Output) ............... 293
4.10.6 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated Digital Output) .......................... 294
4.10.7 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated Digital Output) ..................................... 295
4.10.8 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 (16 Channel - 120/220Vac Isolated - Digital Output) ....................... 296
4.10.9 TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 (8 Channel - 120Vac- Diagnostic Output) ......................................... 297

7
CONTENTS

4.10.10 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc- Diagnostic Output) ...................................... 298

4.10.11 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Relay
Output) ................................................................................................................................................. 299
4.10.12 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 (16 Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Contact Output) ...... 300
4.11 Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block ....................................................................................... 302
4.11.1 TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Array Channel Function Blocks) ..................................... 302
4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks ........................................................................................... 303
4.12.1 AICHANNEL (PMIO) block ........................................................................................................ 303
4.12.2 HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block ...................................................................................................... 304
4.12.3 AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block ....................................................................................................... 306
4.12.4 HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) block .................................................................................................... 307
4.12.5 DICHANNEL (PMIO) block ........................................................................................................ 309
4.12.6 DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block ....................................................................................................... 310
4.12.7 HLAI block .................................................................................................................................... 310
4.12.8 HLAIHART block ......................................................................................................................... 312
4.12.9 LLMUX block ............................................................................................................................... 313
4.12.10 STI_MV block ............................................................................................................................. 314
4.12.11 AO16 block .................................................................................................................................. 315
4.12.12 AO16HART block ....................................................................................................................... 317
4.12.13 DI24V block ................................................................................................................................ 318
4.12.14 DISOE block ................................................................................................................................ 319
4.12.15 DI block ....................................................................................................................................... 320
4.12.16 DO32 block .................................................................................................................................. 321
4.13 Series C Input/Output (Series C I/O) Blocks ................................................................................................ 322
4.13.1 AICHANNEL (Series C) ............................................................................................................... 322
4.13.2 AOCHANNEL (Series C) ............................................................................................................. 323
4.13.3 DICHANNEL (Series C) ............................................................................................................... 325
4.13.4 DOCHANNEL (Series C) ............................................................................................................. 325
4.13.5 AI-HART ....................................................................................................................................... 326
4.13.6 AI-LLMUX .................................................................................................................................... 327
4.13.7 AI-LLAI ......................................................................................................................................... 327
4.13.8 AO-HART ...................................................................................................................................... 329
4.13.9 DI-HV ............................................................................................................................................ 329
4.13.10 DI-24 ............................................................................................................................................ 330
4.13.11 DO-24B ........................................................................................................................................ 330
4.14 Speed Protection Module (SPM) .................................................................................................................. 331
4.14.1 Speed Protection Module (SPM) Block ........................................................................................ 331
4.14.2 SP_AI ............................................................................................................................................. 331
4.14.3 SP_AO ........................................................................................................................................... 332
4.14.4 SP_DI ............................................................................................................................................. 333
4.14.5 SP_DO ........................................................................................................................................... 334
4.14.6 SP_SPDVOTE ............................................................................................................................... 335
4.14.7 SP_SPEED ..................................................................................................................................... 337
4.15 Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module ........................................................................................................ 339
4.15.1 Servo Positioner Valve Module (SVPM) Block ............................................................................ 339
4.15.2 SVP_AI .......................................................................................................................................... 339
4.15.3 SVP_AO ........................................................................................................................................ 340
4.15.4 SVP_DI .......................................................................................................................................... 341
4.15.5 SVP_REGCTL .............................................................................................................................. 342
4.16 Universal Input/Output (UIO) Module ......................................................................................................... 346
4.16.1 UIO module ................................................................................................................................... 346
4.17 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) Blocks ................................................................................................. 350
4.17.1 PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master device) Block .......................................... 350
4.17.2 PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag Array Channel) Block ........................... 353
4.17.3 PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Numeric Array Channel) Block ..................... 354

8 www.honeywell.com
 CONTENTS

4.17.4 PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text Array Channel) Block ............................ 355
4.18 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Blocks .............................................................................................. 358
4.18.1 PROFIBUS Module Gateway (PGM) Block ................................................................................. 358
4.18.2 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Secondary Block ............................................................... 358
4.18.3 Protocol Block (PBLINK) ............................................................................................................. 358
4.18.4 Device Support Block (DSB) ........................................................................................................ 358
4.18.5 PROFIBUS Input/Output Module (PIOM) Block ......................................................................... 358
4.18.6 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library ....................................................................................... 359
4.18.7 PBAICHANNEL ........................................................................................................................... 359
4.18.8 PBAOCHANNEL .......................................................................................................................... 359
4.18.9 PBDICHANNEL ........................................................................................................................... 359
4.18.10 PBDOCHANNEL ........................................................................................................................ 359
4.19 Foundation FieldBus Interface Module (FIM) Blocks ................................................................................. 360
4.19.1 FIM Block ...................................................................................................................................... 360
4.19.2 FIMS Block ................................................................................................................................... 360
4.19.3 FIM4 Block .................................................................................................................................... 360
4.19.4 FIM4SEC Block ............................................................................................................................ 360
4.19.5 FIM8 Block .................................................................................................................................... 360
4.19.6 FIM Block ...................................................................................................................................... 360
4.19.7 FFLINK ......................................................................................................................................... 361
4.20 Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM) Block .................................................................. 362
4.20.1 EHPM block .................................................................................................................................. 362
4.21 EtherNet/IP blocks ........................................................................................................................................ 364
4.21.1 Input and output type EtherNet/IP I/O module blocks .................................................................. 364
4.21.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay module blocks ................................................................................... 373
4.22 ControlLogix and UDT blocks ..................................................................................................................... 376
4.22.1 User Defined Tag block ................................................................................................................. 376
4.22.2 ControlLogix gateway block ......................................................................................................... 377
5 Notices ................................................................................................................................................ 379
5.1 Documentation feedback ................................................................................................................................ 380
5.2 How to report a security vulnerability ............................................................................................................ 381
5.3 Support and other contacts .............................................................................................................................. 382
5.4 Training classes ............................................................................................................................................... 385

9
CONTENTS

10 www.honeywell.com
1 About This Document

This document provides a brief technical reference for function blocks configured through Control Builder. It
includes a list of configurable parameters associated with a given block.

Revision history
Revision Date Description
A December 2013 Initial release of document.

11
1 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

12 www.honeywell.com
2 Control Builder Components

Related topics
“Component Categories and Types” on page 14
“Hardware relation category” on page 15
“Functional relation category” on page 18
“Component Libraries” on page 20

13
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.1 Component Categories and Types

We divide the Control Builder components into these two major categories:
• “Functional relation category” on page 18
• “Hardware relation category” on page 15

14 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.2 Hardware relation category

The hardware relation category includes the physical equipment block types provided in Control Builder. These
block types let you quickly integrate the related control hardware into your control strategy. Figure 1 shows the
physical equipment that relates to the corresponding hardware relations covered in this document for a typical
non-redundant system. Figure 2 shows the physical equipment that relates to the corresponding hardware
relations for a typical redundant system.

Figure 1: Physical Equipment reference for corresponding hardware component in typical non-redundant system architecture.

15
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

Figure 2: Physical Equipment reference for corresponding hardware component in typical redundant system architecture.

2.2.1 Physical equipment block types

Table 1 identifies the physical equipment block types provided to represent corresponding major control
hardware components. The Control Execution Environment (CEE) block is included as one of these block types
because of its relationship with the Control Processor, although it is a functional type more than a physical one.

Table 1: Physical equipment block types.

Physical Equipment Blocks

Type Description
“Control Processor Module Block” on page 238 Defines name/location and Control Execution
Environment (CEE) assignment for Primary and
Secondary CPMs in connected C200 Controllers. This
CPM is redundancy compliant.
“Control Execution Environment Block” on page 246 Supports block execution and communications in given
CPM.
“Input Type I/O Module Blocks” on page 277 Provides links for I/O channels to interface physical I/O
module to given Control Processor Module. This includes
Series R, Series H, Series A and HART Input modules.
“Output Type I/O Module Blocks” on page 290 Provides links for I/O channels to interface physical I/O
module to given Control Processor Module. This includes
Series R, Series H, Series A and HART Output modules.

16 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

Physical Equipment Blocks

Type Description
“Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081” on Serves as the interface board between the C200 Process
page 73 Controller and field transducers such as tachometers, flow
meters, and magnetic pickups.
“Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01” on page 74 Serves as an interface between the C300 Controller and
pulsed output transducers such as tachometers, flow
meters, and magnetic pickups.
“Redundancy Module Block” on page 272 Defines name/location of Primary and Secondary
Redundancy Modules in Redundant Chassis Pair. This
module is redundancy compliant.
“Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block” on page 274 Provides link to Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) supervisory
network. This includes C200 Process Controller and
Fieldbus Interface Module chassis.
“Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block” on Provides configuration and communication software to
page 302 enable devices to communicate via an ASCII serial
protocol to perform bi-directional data exchange directly
with the Control Processor.
“Input/Output Link Interface Module Block” on page 259 Provides links for Process Manager I/O channels to
interface physical Input/Output Processors (IOPs) to given
controller.
“Input/Output Link Block” on page 260 Supports interface communications in given IOLIM.
“IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE)” on page 265 Defines communication path to external OPC server.
“Inter Cluster Gateway Block” on page 269 Makes CDA data from one Experion cluster available to a
second Experion cluster, allowing regulatory control
cascades to span separate Experion clusters
“Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks” on page 303 Provides links for I/O channels to interface physical I/O
Processors to given I/O Link Interface Module.
“Series C Input/Output (Series C I/O) Blocks” on page 322 Provides links for Series C I/O channels to interface series
C I/O modules with the C300.
“Speed Protection Module (SPM)” on page 331 Provides links to Honeywell's Safety Manager as well as
Modbus TCP native devices and serial RTU devices
through a Modbus TCP gateway/bridge.

17
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.3 Functional relation category

Our Control Builder application includes comprehensive libraries of function blocks that streamline the control
strategy configuration process. You simply “drag and drop” selected blocks into a Control Module and/or
Sequential Control Module container to emulate the necessary functional requirements of your process.
Please refer to Control Building Guide for details about how to configure a control strategy.
The functional relation category conveniently groups function blocks according to a related functional block
type or component library. The component libraries provide a convenient way to group related function blocks
for easy access and reference.
Figure 3 shows the general graphic orientation and Windows look-and-feel of the Control Builder application
for reference.

Figure 3: Typical view of control module configuration in Control Builder.

2.3.1 Functional block types

Table 2 identifies the functional block types used to represent a group of corresponding function blocks
provided in Control Builder. These block types are used as a way to simplify information retrieval for a given
function block, and do not necessarily correspond to an actual Control Builder function.

18 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

Table 2: Functional block types

Functional Block
Type Description
“Auxiliary Blocks” on page 32 Includes block types for performing auxiliary control functions, such
as: calculation, general linearization and totalization.
“Data Acquisition Block” on page 55 Provides signal conditioning for a process input value from another
function block.
“Device Control Block” on page 52 Provides a multi-input/multi-output function that provides an interface
to discrete devices such as motors, pumps, solenoid valves, and motor-
operated valves.
“IO Channel Blocks” on page 59 Includes channel block types (analog input, analog output, digital input,
digital output, pulse width modulator) to represent I/O points that are
device independent; each I/O channel type has a standard interface with
control function blocks.
This category also includes array channel blocks to support
communications with the associated Serial Interface Module and the
connected Field Terminal Assembly (FTA) device. You assign an array
channel block to one of the SIM block's 32 channels as well as
designating which of the two FTAs it is associated with. The array
channel block types are flag, numeric, and text.
“HART DEVICE Block” on page 69 Provides a standard interface to the HART AI module TC-HAI081and
HART AO module TC-HAO081.
“Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks” on Provides a standard interface to the Pulse Input Module TC-
page 71 MDP081/TK-MDP081.
“Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability)” Includes block types for performing ControlNet Interoperability
on page 65 functions, such as: Flag, Numeric and Text storage.
“Logic Blocks” on page 77 Provides a set of Boolean, selection and comparison functions to be
used as a basis for integrated logic control.
“Math Blocks” on page 99 Provides a set of math functions to be used for basic calculations.
“Power Generation Blocks” on page 106 Includes block types for building control strategies that support power
generation applications.
“Regulatory Control Blocks” on page 121 Includes block types for building internal control loops.
“Sequential Control Module Blocks” on Includes block types for building a sequential control function.
page 201
“System Blocks” on page 206 Control Module (CM) is a Control Builder “container” that uses
predefined continuous (discrete) control function blocks to define a
given process control strategy.
Sequential Control Module (SCM) is a Control Builder “container” that
uses predefined sequential control function blocks to define the
sequential operation for a given process control strategy.
“Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Provides a configurable function for creating regulatory control cascade
Block” on page 213 strategies between the Application Control Environment (ACE)
supervisory controller and Process Manager controllers residing on a
Universal Control Network in a connected TPS system.
“Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks” on Includes block types for creating regulatory control cascade strategies
page 215 between the Application Control Environment (ACE) supervisory
controller and Data Hiway controllers residing on a Data Hiway in a
connected TPS system
“Utility Blocks” on page 218 Includes block types for performing utility control functions, such as:
status flag, numeric storage and timer capabilities. Blocks have been
added for message, data array, and parameter type convert support.

19
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.4 Component Libraries

Related topics
“Auxiliary (AUXILIARY) Library” on page 20
“Device Control (DEVCTL) Library” on page 21
“Data Acquisition (DATAACQ) Library” on page 21
“Input/Output Channel (IOCHANNEL) Library” on page 21
“Exchange Library (ControlNet Interoperability)” on page 21
“Pulse Input Channel/Module Library” on page 21
“Input/Output Module (IOMODULE) library” on page 21
“Logic (LOGIC) Library” on page 23
“Math (MATH) Library” on page 24
“Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI)” on page 24
“Power Generation (POWERGEN) library” on page 25
“Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO)” on page 25
“Series C Input/Output Library” on page 26
“Regulatory Control (REGCTL) library” on page 28
“Sequential Control Module (SCM) library” on page 29
“System (SYSTEM) Library” on page 29
“Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Library” on page 29
“Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Library” on page 29
“Utility (UTILITY) Library” on page 29
“Rail I/O Modules -Series H (RAIL_IO_HAZ) Library” on page 30
“HART I/O Modules (HARTIO) Library” on page 30
“DeviceNet Interface (DNETIF) Library” on page 30
“PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library” on page 30
“Rail I/O Modules - Series A (RAIL_IO) Library” on page 30

2.4.1 Auxiliary (AUXILIARY) Library

The Auxiliary Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional
Block Types” on page 31.

• “AUXCALC (Auxiliary • “Reference Data for Functional • “CTUD (Counter Up/Down)

Calculation) block” on page 32 Block Types” on page 31 Block” on page 36
• “CTUD (Counter Up/Down) • “ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced • “ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General
Block” on page 36 Auxiliary Calculation) block” on Linearization) block” on page 41
page 39
• “ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General • “GENLIN (General Linearization) • “LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block” on
Linearization) block” on page 41 block” on page 43 page 44
• “ROC (Rate of Change) block” on • “SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) • “TOTALIZER block” on page 50
page 45 block” on page 45

20 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.4.2 Device Control (DEVCTL) Library

The Device Control Library includes the “DEVCTL (Device Control) block” on page 52. A detailed description
is given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data
for Functional Block Types” on page 31.

2.4.3 Data Acquisition (DATAACQ) Library

The Data Acquisition Library includes the “DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block” on page 55. A detailed
description is given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled
“Reference Data for Functional Block Types” on page 31.

2.4.4 Input/Output Channel (IOCHANNEL) Library

The Input/Output Channel Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in
the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for
Functional Block Types” on page 31.

• “AICHANNEL” on page 59 • “DOCHANNEL” on page 60

• “AOCHANNEL” on page 59 • “PWMCHANNEL” on page 61
• “DICHANNEL” on page 60 • “SIFLAGARRCH” on page 62
• “SINUMARRCH” on page 62 • “SITEXTARRCH” on page 63

2.4.5 Exchange Library (ControlNet Interoperability)

The Exchange Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional
Block Types” on page 31.

• “REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block” on • “RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block” on
page 65 page 67
• “REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block” on • “RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block”
page 65 on page 67
• “REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block” on • “RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block” on
page 66 page 68

2.4.6 Pulse Input Channel/Module Library

• “Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff” on page 71

• “Pulse Input Channel” on page 72
• “Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081” on page 73
• “Pulse Input Totalizer” on page 72

2.4.7 Input/Output Module (IOMODULE) library

The Input/Output Module Library includes the Input/Output Module (IOM) function blocks listed below. Blocks
are identified by the given Honeywell model number. The models with a TC prefix are not conformally coated

21
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

and those with a TK prefix are conformally coated. Detailed descriptions are presented in the following section
titled “Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types” on page 237.

IOM Function Blocks Number of Type Rating Isolated

Channels
“TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 8 HART / Non-HART Analog 10 V and 4 to 20 Yes
channel HART - 10V / 4 to Input mA
20mA - Analog Input)” on
page 277
“TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 8 HART / Non-HART Analog 10 V and 4 to 20 No
channel HART - 10V / 4 to Output mA
20mA - Analog Output)” on
page 290
“TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 (8 8 Diagnostic Input 120 Vac Yes
Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic
Input)” on page 284
“TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 (16 16 Digital Input 120 Vac No
Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated -
Digital Input)” on page 279
“TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 (16 16 Digital Input 120 Vac Yes
Channel - 120Vac Isolated -
Digital Input)” on page 282
“TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 (32 32 Digital Input 24 Vdc No
Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated -
Digital Input)” on page 280
“TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 (16 16 Diagnostic Input 24 Vdc Yes
Channel - 24Vdc Diagnostic
Input)” on page 285
“TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 (16 16 Digital Input 24 Vdc Yes
Channel - 24Vdc Isolated -
Digital Input)” on page 281
“TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 (6 6 Analog Input 10 V and 4 to 20 Yes
Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA mA
Isolated - Analog Input)” on
page 277
“TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 (16 16 Analog Input 10 V and 4 to 20 No
Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non- mA
Isolated - Analog Input)” on
page 278
“TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 (16 16 Digital Input 220 Vac Yes
Channel - 220Vac Isolated -
Digital Input)” on page 283
“TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 (6 6 Resistance Temperature Resistance Yes
Channel - RTD Input)” on Detector (RTD) Input
page 288
“TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 (6 6 Thermocouple Input Low level mV No
Channel - Thermocouple Input)”
on page 286
“TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 (6 6 Thermocouple Input Low level mV No
Channel - Thermocouple Input)”
on page 287
“TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 (8 8 Diagnostic Output 120 Vac Yes
Channel - 120Vac- Diagnostic
Output)” on page 297

22 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

IOM Function Blocks Number of Type Rating Isolated

Channels
“TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 (16 16 Digital Output 120/220 Vac No
Channel - 120/220Vac Non-
Isolated - Digital Output)” on
page 293
“TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 (16 16 Digital Output 120/220 Vac Yes
Channel - 120/220Vac Isolated -
Digital Output)” on page 296
“TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 (16 16 Diagnostic Output 24 Vdc Yes
Channel - 24Vdc- Diagnostic
Output)” on page 298
“TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 (32 32 Digital Output 24 Vdc No
Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated
Digital Output)” on page 294
“TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 (16 16 Digital Output 24 Vdc Yes
Channel - 24Vdc Isolated Digital
Output)” on page 295
“TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 (8 8 Relay Output 24 Vdc and Yes
Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5-150Vdc, 120/220 Vac
10-265Vac Isolated - Relay
Output)” on page 299
“TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 (16 16 Contact Output 24 Vdc and Yes
Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac 120/220 Vac
Isolated - Contact Output)” on
page 300
“TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 (6 6 Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
Channel - 4 to 20mA - Analog
Output)” on page 291
“TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 (6 6 Analog Output 10 V Yes
Channel - 10V - Analog Output)”
on page 291
“TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 (8 8 Analog Output 10 V and 4 to 20 No
Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non- mA
Isolated - Analog Output)” on
page 292
“TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up Up to 32 FTA Bi-directional data exchange Modbus FTA or
to 32 Array Channel Function Array Points with devices using ASCII A-B FTA
Blocks)” on page 302 serial protocol
communications

2.4.8 Logic (LOGIC) Library

The Logic Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the subsequent
functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional Block
Types” on page 31.

• “AND block” on page 78 • “MIN block” on page 85 • “ROL (Rotate Output Left) block”
on page 92
• “CHECKBAD block” on page 78 • “MINPULSE block” on page 86 • “ROR (Rotate Output Right)
block” on page 93
• “CHECKBOOL block” on page 79 • “MUX (Multiplexer) block” on • “RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-
page 86 FLOP) block” on page 93

23
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

• “CHGEXEC (Change Execution) • “MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) • “RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger)
block” on page 79 block” on page 87 block” on page 93
• “CONTACTMON (Contact • “MVOTE (Majority Voting) block” • “SEL (Binary Selection) block” on
Monitoring) block” on page 80 on page 87 page 94
• “DELAY block” on page 81 • “NAND block” on page 87 • “SELREAL (Real Selection)
block” on page 94
• “EQ (Equal) block” on page 81 • “NE (Not Equal) block” on page 88 • “SHL (Shift Output Left) block” on
page 94
• “FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) • “nOON (n out of N voting) block” • “SHR (Shift Output Right) block”
block” on page 82 on page 89 on page 95
• “GE (Greater than or Equal to) • “NOR block” on page 89 • “SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-
block” on page 82 FLOP) block” on page 95
• “GT (Greater Than) block” on • “NOT block” on page 90 • “STARTSIGNAL block” on
page 83 page 96
• “LE (Less than or Equal to) block” • “OFFDELAY block” on page 90 • “TRIG (Rising or Falling edge
on page 83 Trigger) block” on page 96
• “LIMIT block” on page 84 • “ONDELAY block” on page 91 • “WATCHDOG block” on page 97
• “LT (Less Than) block” on page 84 • “OR block” on page 91 • “XOR block” on page 97
• “MAX block” on page 85 • “PULSE block” on page 91 • “2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block”
on page 98
• “MAXPULSE block” on page 85 • “QOR (Qualified OR) block” on
page 92

2.4.9 Math (MATH) Library

The Math Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the subsequent
functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional Block
Types” on page 31.

• “ABS block” on page 99 • “LOG block” on page 101 • “ROUND block” on page 103
• “ADD block” on page 99 • “MOD block” on page 102 • “SQRT block” on page 104
• “DIV block” on page 100 • “MUL block” on page 102 • “SUB block” on page 104
• “EXP block” on page 100 • “NEG block” on page 102 • “TRUNC block” on page 105
• “LN block” on page 101 • “POW block” on page 103 • “ROLLAVG block” on page 105

2.4.10 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI)

The Peer Control Data Interface Library includes the PCDI device and Array Request Channel function blocks
listed below. Detailed descriptions are provided in the following section titled “Reference Data for Physical
Equipment Block Types” on page 237.

• “PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master • “PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface
device) Block” on page 350 Numeric Array Channel) Block” on page 354
• “PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag • “PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text
Array Channel) Block” on page 353 Array Channel) Block” on page 355

24 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.4.11 Power Generation (POWERGEN) library

The Power Generation library includes the function blocks listed in the following table. Detailed descriptions
are given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the section titled “Reference Data for
Functional Block Types” on page 31.

• “GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) • “MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block” on page 114
block” on page 106
• “HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block” on • “SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block” on
page 107 page 115
• “LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block” on • “VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control)
page 111 block” on page 118
• “LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block” on • “STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block” on page 211
page 112

2.4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO)

The Process Manager Input/Output Module (PMIO) Library includes the Input/Output Processor (IOP) function
blocks listed below. Blocks are identified by block name and by Honeywell model number. The models with a
MU prefix are not conformally coated and those with a MC prefix are conformally coated. Detailed descriptions
are presented in the following section titled “Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types” on page 237.

IOP and Related Channel Number of Type Rating CE Compliant

Function Blocks Channels
“AICHANNEL (PMIO) block” n/a Represents an AI point. n/a n/a
on page 303
“HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block” n/a Represents a HART AI or n/a n/a
on page 304 non-HART AI point.
“AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block” n/a Represents an AO point. n/a n/a
on page 306
“HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) n/a Represents a HART AO or n/a n/a
block” on page 307 non-HART AO point.
“DICHANNEL (PMIO) block” n/a Represents a DI point. n/a n/a
on page 309
“DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block” n/a Represents a DO point. n/a n/a
on page 310
“HLAI block” on page 310, MU- 16 High Level Analog Input 0 to 5 V Yes
PAIH01, MU/MC-PAIH02, or
1 to 5 V
MU/MC-PAIH03
0.4 to 2 V
4 to 20 mA
“HLAIHART block” on 16 HART Analog Input 0 to 5 V Yes
page 312,
1 to 5 V
MC-PHAI01
0.4 to 2 V
4 to 20 mA
LLAI, MU-PAIL01, MU/MC- 8 Low Level Analog Input T/C, RTD, or Yes
PAIL02 Voltage

25
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

IOP and Related Channel Number of Type Rating CE Compliant

Function Blocks Channels
“LLMUX block” on page 313, 32 Low Level Analog T/C, RTD, or Yes
Multiplexer linear mV
MU/MC-PLAM02
RHMUX, MU/MCPRHM01 32 Remote Hardened T/C, Linear mV Yes
Multiplexer
“STI_MV block” on page 314, 16 Smart Transmitter Interface Honeywell DE Yes
Multivariable protocol
MU/MC-PSTX03
“AO16 block” on page 315, 16 Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
MU/MC-PAOY22
“AO16HART block” on 16 HART Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
page 317
MC-PHAO01
AO8, MU-PAOX01, MU- 8 Analog Output 4 to 20 mA Yes
PAOX02, or MU/MC-PAOX03
“DI24V block” on page 318, 32 Digital Input 24 Vdc Yes
MU-PDIX01, MU/MC-PDIX02,
or MU/MC-PDIY22
“DISOE block” on page 319, 32 Digital Input Sequence of 24 Vdc, 120 Vac, Yes
Events or 240 Vac
MU/MC-PDIS12
“DI block” on page 320, MU- 32 Digital Input 120 Vac or 240 Yes
PDIX01, or MU/MCPDIX02 Vac
“DO32 block” on page 321 32 Digital Output 24 Vdc isolated, Yes
or 240 Vac/125
MU/MC-PDOY22
Vdc relay
DO16, MU-PDOX01 or 16 Digital Output 24 Vdc, 3-30 Vdc, Yes
MU/MC-PDOX02 31-200 Vdc,
120/240 Vac, 120
Vac/125 Vdc
relay, or 240
Vac/125 Vdc relay

2.4.13 Series C Input/Output Library

Attention
The CEE C300 - 20mS CEE controller does not support PMIO modules.

The Series C Input/Output Module (Series C I/O) Library includes the Series C Input/Output Module (IOM)
function blocks, Speed Protection Module (SPM), and Servo Valve Positioner Module (SVPM) listed below.
Blocks are identified by block name and by Honeywell model number. The models with a CU prefix are not
conformally coated and those with a CC prefix are conformally coated. Detailed descriptions are presented in
the following section titled “Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types” on page 237.

IOM and Related Channel Function Number of Type

Blocks Channels
AICHANNEL (Series C) n/a The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on
one of the following Series C Processors: “AI-HART” on
page 326; “AI-LLMUX” on page 327,“AI-LLAI” on page 327
AOCHANNEL (Series C) n/a The AO channel block represents a single analog input point on
the Series C “AO-HART” on page 329 Processor

26 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

IOM and Related Channel Function Number of Type

Blocks Channels
DICHANNEL (Series C) n/a The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on
a Series C “DI-HV” on page 329, or “DI-24” on page 330
Processor.
DOCHANNEL (Series C) n/a The DO channel block represents a single discrete input point
on a Series C “DO-24B” on page 330 I/O Processor
PI (Series C) n/a The PI channel block represents a single pulse input point on a
Series C Pulse Input Module.
“AI-HART” on page 326 16 High Level Analog Input with HART
CU-PAIH01
CC-PAIH01
“AI-LLMUX” on page 327 64 Low Level Mux Input
CU-PAIM01
CC-PAIM01
“AI-LLAI” on page 327 16 Low Level Analog Input
CC-PAIM51
“AO-HART” on page 329 16 Analog Output with HART IOP
CU-PAOH01
CC-PAOH01
“DI-HV” on page 329 32 High Voltage Digital Input (IOM supports both 120 and 240
volts AC)
CU-PDIH01
CC-PDIH01
“DI-24” on page 330 32 Low Voltage Digital Input (24 volts DC)
CU-PDIL01
CC-PDIL01
“DO-24B” on page 330 32 Bussed Low Voltage Digital Output (24 volts DC)
CU-PDOB01
CC-PDOB01
SP_AI (Series C) n/a The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on
Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_AO (Series C) n/a The AO channel block represents a single analog output point
on the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_DI (Series C) n/a The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on
the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_DO (Series C) n/a The DO channel block represents a single discrete output point
on the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
SP_SPEED (Series C) n/a The SP_SPEED channel represents a pulse input on the Speed
Protection (SP) Module.
SP_SPDVOTE (Series C) n/a The SP_SPDVOTE channel performs voting logic functionality
on the speed inputs.
SVP_AI (Series C) n/a The AI channel represents an LVDT/RVDT input or a single
analog input on the Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module.
SVP_AO (Series C) n/a The AO channel supports unipolar and bipolar current output
besides the standard 4-20 mA analog output supported by
Series-C AO-IOM.

27
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

IOM and Related Channel Function Number of Type

Blocks Channels
SVP_DI (Series C) n/a The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on
the Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module.
SVP_REGCTL (Series C) n/a The SVP_REGCTL channel block performs the regulatory
control function for valve positioning.
SP IOM 26 Speed Protection Module (SPM) supports the following
channels.
CC-PSP401
• 8 AI channels (SP_AI)
• 1 AO channel (SP_AO)
• 8 DI channels (SP_DI)
• 4 DO channel (SP_DO)
• 4 Speed channel (SP_SPEED)
• 1 voting logic channel (SP_SPDVOTE)
SVP IOM 8 Servo Valve Positioner Module (SVPM) supports the following
channels.
CC-PSV201
• 2 LVDT / RVDT / Analog input channels (SVP_AI)
• 2 Digital input channels (SVP_DI)
• 2 Servo / Analog output channels (SVP_AO)
• 2 Regulatory control channels (SVP_REGCTL)
UIO IOM 32 In the Universal Input/Output Module, each channel can be
configured as one of the following channels.
CC-PUIO01
• Analog Input channel
• Analog Output channel
• Digital Input channel
• Digital Output channel

2.4.14 Regulatory Control (REGCTL) library

The Regulatory Control Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional
Block Types” on page 31.

• “AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) • “ENHREGCALC (Enhanced • “FANOUT block” on page 131

block ” on page 121 Regulatory Control Calculator)
block” on page 125
• “PIDER block” on page 143 • “OVRDSEL(Override Selector) • “PID block” on page 138
block” on page 134
• “POSPROP (Position Proportional) • “PID-PL block” on page 148 • “PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block”
block” on page 159 on page 153
• “RAMPSOAK block” on page 167 • “PULSECOUNT block” on • “PULSELENGTH block” on
page 164 page 165
• “REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) • “RATIOBIAS block” on page 171 • “RATIOCTL block” on page 176
block” on page 180
• “REMCAS block” on page 192 • “REGCALC (Regulatory Control • “REGSUMMER (Regulatory
Calculator) block” on page 181 Control Summer)” on page 187
• “SWITCH block” on page 196

28 www.honeywell.com
 2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.4.15 Sequential Control Module (SCM) library

The Sequential Control Module Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are
given in the subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for
Functional Block Types” on page 31.

• “HANDLER Block” on page 201 • “STEP Block” on page 202 • “TRANSITION Block” on
page 204

2.4.16 System (SYSTEM) Library

The System Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the subsequent
functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional Block
Types” on page 31.

• “CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control)” on • “SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block

page 206 (Sequential Control)” on page 207

2.4.17 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Library

The Universal Control Network Interface Library includes the “UCNOUT block” on page 213 and the
“EUCNOUT block” on page 214. A detailed description is given in the subsequent functional entity block type
headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional Block Types” on page 31.

2.4.18 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Library

The Hiway Interface Library includes the function block listed below. A detailed description is given in the
subsequent functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional
Block Types” on page 31.

• “HIWAYOUT block” on page 215

2.4.19 Utility (UTILITY) Library

The Utility Library includes the function blocks listed below. Detailed descriptions are given in the subsequent
functional entity block type headings in the following section titled “Reference Data for Functional Block
Types” on page 31.

• “ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - • “ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - • “DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition)

Alarm Annunciator) block” on Alarm Annunciator) block” on block” on page 220
page 218 page 219
• “FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) • “FLAG block” on page 223 • “FLAGARRAY block” on
block” on page 222 page 224
• “MESSAGE block” on page 224 • “NUMERIC block” on page 226 • “NUMERICARRAY block” on
page 226
• “PUSH block” on page 226 • “TEXTARRAY block” on page 227 • “TEXTCOMMENT (Text
Comment) block” on page 228
• “TIMER block” on page 228 • “TYPECONVERT block” on
page 229

29
2 CONTROL BUILDER COMPONENTS

2.4.20 Rail I/O Modules -Series H (RAIL_IO_HAZ) Library

The Series H I/O Library includes the IOM blocks associated with the RIOM-H components designed for use in
locations with potentially explosive atmospheres. Please refer to the Series H Rail I/O Implementation Guide for
complete details about the Series H I/O Modules.

2.4.21 HART I/O Modules (HARTIO) Library

The HART I/O Library includes the interface blocks for linking HART compatible devices with the Experion
PKS system through Chassis I/O. Please refer to the HART I/O Implementation Guide for complete details about
the Chassis HART I/O components.

2.4.22 DeviceNet Interface (DNETIF) Library

The DeviceNet Interface Library includes the interface blocks associated with linking DeviceNet devices with
the Experion PKS system through the interface modules. Please refer to the DeviceNet Interface Implementation
Guide for complete details about the DeviceNet Interface components.

2.4.23 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library

The PROFIBUS Interface Library includes the interface blocks associated with linking PROFIBUS devices
with the Experion PKS system through the interface modules. Refer to the PROFIBUS Interface Implementation
Guide for complete details about the PROFIBUS Interface components.

2.4.24 Rail I/O Modules - Series A (RAIL_IO) Library

The Series A I/O Module library includes the IOM blocks associated with the RIOM-A components designed
for use in general purpose locations. Please refer to the Series A Rail I/O Implementation Guide for complete
details about the Series A I/O Modules.

30 www.honeywell.com
3 Reference Data for Functional Block Types

This section provides detailed reference data for each functional block type that is part of the functional relation
category for the Control Builder. It presents the block types associated with a given component library. The
reference data is organized alphabetically by component library/ block type, and then alphabetically within each
type by the function block name.
The reference data for each block covers these topics, as applicable:
• description
• function
• inputs and input ranges
• outputs and output ranges
• parameters
Note that the data varies, based on what is pertinent for each block.

Related topics
“Auxiliary Blocks” on page 32
“Device Control Block” on page 52
“Data Acquisition Block” on page 55
“IO Channel Blocks” on page 59
“Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability)” on page 65
“HART DEVICE Block” on page 69
“Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks” on page 71
“Logic Blocks” on page 77
“Math Blocks” on page 99
“Power Generation Blocks” on page 106
“Regulatory Control Blocks” on page 121
“Sequential Control Module Blocks” on page 201
“System Blocks” on page 206
“Thermodynamic Utility Function Block” on page 211
“Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Block” on page 213
“Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks” on page 215
“Hiway Responder Block (HRB)” on page 216
“Utility Blocks” on page 218
“EtherNet/IP channel blocks” on page 231

31
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.1 Auxiliary Blocks

Related topics
“AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block” on page 32
“AUXSUMMER (Auxiliary Summer) block” on page 35
“CTUD (Counter Up/Down) Block” on page 36
“DEADTIME block” on page 38
“ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced Auxiliary Calculation) block” on page 39
“ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General Linearization) block” on page 41
“FLOWCOMP (Flow Compensation) block” on page 42
“GENLIN (General Linearization) block” on page 43
“LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block” on page 44
“ROC (Rate of Change) block” on page 45
“SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) block” on page 45
“Selection methods” on page 49
“TOTALIZER block” on page 50

3.1.1 AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block

Description Lets you write up to eight expressions for computing a Process Variable (PV) value.
Function Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and functions and may
perform arithmetic or logic operations, test conditions, etc.
Status information is made available for input as well as the expression results.
You can assign the result of an expression, a status, or an input to PV and PVSTS parameters
which are then processed like the result of any other Auxiliary function block.
Inputs Accepts up to six optional inputs (P[1] to P[6]) - none are required.
• No inputs are required
• All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks.
• The number of process input connections are equal to the number of inputs; the default is 1.
• Configure P inputs contiguously (without breaks) in arrays.
Outputs Produces these outputs according to the values you assign to them.
• PV and its status PVSTS, as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to other
function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.
• Up to eight expression results (C[1] to C[8])
Operators and Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for reference.
Functions
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For example, “CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”,
Identification or “CM57.PID100.MODE”.
In effect, tag names allow expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any
data type. However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression.
The expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression containing
an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as follows:
• TagName.'text'

32 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Expression Rules • Must include full tag.parameter name for P inputs in the expression and enclose
identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example,
CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[1] * CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[2] is valid.
• Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign with the current
syntax) For example, “CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]” is invalid.
• Each expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically stored
in a “C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of the first
expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc. You can use these
results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example, you could use C[1] as an input
to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
• You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional assignments) in any
order as long as types match or can be converted.
• You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not required.
• You can use all data types in expressions, including enumerations. They are all treated as
numeric types.
• You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the arrays.
• A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression descriptor
parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which use the CONST[1…8]
parameters, are affected if you change the values of these parameters on the Constants tab.
• With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and Experion Server
points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the Expressions.
• With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter references,
ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the parentheses “()”to specify
array index. However, when you write the expressions using the other non-CEE points you
can use the brackets “[].”
Parameters C[1..8] NAME
CONFIGCODE[1..8] ORDERINCM
CONFIGDESC[1..8] P[1..6]
CONFIGSTS[1..8] PSTS[1..6]
PV
CONST[1…8]
PVFORMAT
CONSTACCLOCK
PVSRC
CONSTENABLE PVSTS
CSTS[1..8] PVSTSFL.BAD
DESC PVSTSFL.MAN
EUDESC PVSTSFL.NORM
EXECCODE[1..8] PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
EXECDESC PVSTSSRC
EXECDESC[1..8] PVVALSTS
EXECSTS
EXECSTS[1..8]
EXPR[1..8]

EXPRDESC[1…8]
EXPRPCODE[1..8]
HIALM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the AUXCALC Block.

33
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Attention
Do not use equality operands = and <> to compare FLOAT64 and FLOAT32 floating point values in expressions. Use
inequality operands Less Than (<), Less Than or Equal To (<=), Greater Than (>), or Greater Than or Equal To (>=)
instead.

Table 3: Expression Operators and Functions Reference

Operators Description
Unary +-
Binary Arithmetic + - * / MOD (x MOD y) ^ (x^y)
Logical AND OR NOT
Relational = <> <= >= < >
Conditional ? : (For example, X ?Y : Z; similar to IF, THEN, ELSE)
Parenthesis ()
Array Syntax []
Unary Functions
ABS absolute value LOG Base 10 logarithm of a number
ATN arc tangent RND round value
1
COS cosine SGN sign of value (returns -1,0 or +1)
EXP e to the power of x SIN1 sine
INT convert to integer SQR square of a number
ISFIN is finite SQRT square root
ISNAN is Not a Number TAN1 tangent
LN Natural logarithm of a number (log to
the base of e)
Multiple Argument Functions
MIN minimum of n arguments (ignore bad MID medium value of n arguments (average of
values). middle values for even n).
If this function has a NAN argument If this function has a NAN argument (bad
(bad value), it returns NaN. value), it returns NaN.
MAX maximum of n arguments (ignore bad MUL product of n arguments
values).
This function ignores NaN values. However,
If this function has a NAN argument if all agruments are NaN, then it returns 1.
(bad value), it returns NaN.
AVG average of n arguments. SUM sum of n arguments.
This function ignores NaN values. This function ignores NaN values. However,
However, if all arguments are NaN, if all agruments are NaN, then it returns 0.
then it returns NaN.
String Support Functions
LEN Returns an integer length of the string NUMSTR Takes the input parameter, casts it to a
Float64 and converts it to a string
MIDS Takes a string, an integer starting STRNUM Takes the string input parameter and converts
position and an integer length. The it to a Float64
function returns the specified portion
of the original string.

1
Be sure you specify the trigonometric functions cosine, sine, and tangent in radians and not degrees.

34 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Operators Description
Time Support Functions
ABSTOD Takes an absolute time data type and DTIMNUM Takes a delta TIME data type and returns a
strips off the year and date and returns 64-bit float representing the number of
a 64-bit float representing the time of milliseconds.
day in milliseconds.
NOW Returns the current local date and NUMDTIM Takes a 64-bit float representing some
time as an absolute time data type number of milliseconds and converts it to a
delta TIME data type.
NUMTIM Takes a 64-bit float representing the STRTIM Takes a string input parameter and converts it
number of milliseconds since Jan 1, to an Absolute time. The string must be in the
1972 and converts it to absolute same format as an Absolute time constant.
TIME data type.
TOD Returns the current local time of day TIMNUM Takes an Absolute TIME data type and
as Time of Day data type returns a 64-bit float representing the total
number of milliseconds since Jan 1, 1972.
UTCTOD Returns the current UTC time of day UTCNOW Returns the current UTC date and time of day
as Time of Day data type as an absolute time data type

Case Sensitive Strings for Special Value Constants

NAN IEEE NaN value
+INF IEEE + Infinity value
-INF IEEE - Infinity value
PI PI (3.14159. . .)
E e (2.718. . .)

3.1.2 AUXSUMMER (Auxiliary Summer) block

Description Lets you configure up to ten separate inputs to calculate a process variable (PV) value that can
be scaled and biased.
Function The AUXSUMMER block fetches values from other function blocks and determines their
statuses in every execution cycle of the Control Module. It evaluates up to ten inputs and
determines their statuses. It derives values for PV and PV status based on its calculation of the
inputs and the configuration entries for the overall PV scale factor (CPV) and overall PV bias
factor (DPV) parameters.
Inputs This function block accepts as many as ten inputs (P[1…10]).
• At least one input (P[i]) must be configured for the block to operate.
• All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks
• The number of process input connections (NUMPINPT) that can be made to other blocks is
equal to the number of inputs. The default is 1.
Outputs This block produces the following outputs:
• PV and its status, PVSTS

35
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters C[1..10] PDESC

CPV PENABLE
D[1..10] PSTS[1..10]
DESC PSUB
DPV PV
EUDESC PVFORMAT
NUMPINPT PVSTS
NAME PVSTSFL.BAD
ORDERINCM PVSTSFL.MAN
P[1..10] PVSTSFL.NORM
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the AUXSUMMER
Block.

3.1.3 CTUD (Counter Up/Down) Block

Description A new general purpose Up-Down Counter (CTUD) is introduced in the Auxiliary library to
simplify event count strategies. The counter function block starts functioning based on the
configured algorithm. The count inputs may be wired to other function blocks or stored by a
program.
Function The CTUD block is an up-down counter function block. The counter of the CTUD block can
change its state (Up or Down) depending on the configuration of Count Up Flag (CNTUPFL)
and Count Down Flag (CNTDNFL) parameter.
The counting also depends on a valid IN (ININT32/INFLOAT64) configuration if the input is
fed through wired connection.
Up-down counting is evaluated as edge trigger quantity or level trigger quantity depending on
the value configured for Count On Level (CNTLVLFL) Parameter.
The CTUD Block supports pause (PAUSEFL), load (LOADFL) and reset (RESETFL) operation
for the counter.
If the Count Up and Count Down flags are set to “TRUE”, the same block execution results in a
net internal counter change of zero.
Inputs • The CTUD block accepts a combination of Integer 32, Boolean, and Float 64 inputs.
• Either of ININT32 or INFLOAT64 can be used during block execution. Selection of which
IN parameter to use is determined by Input Specifier (SELINT32FL) parameter.
– If SELINT32FL is set to “TRUE”, value of ININT32 parameter is used.
– If SELINT32FL is set to “FALSE”, value of INFLOAT64 parameter is used.
• All inputs are processed synchronously with the block execution.

36 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs • The current Counter output value is available in Float 64 (OUTFLOAT64) and Integer 32
(OUTINT32) formats.
• CARRYUPFL is set to TRUE for one block execution following a counter overflow.
• CARRYDNFL is set to TRUE for one block execution following a counter underflow.
• QUFL indicates count Up reached.
• QDFL indicates count Down reached
• The output values are fetched through a wired connection or read directly by a program.
• An output connection to an input that can be initialized does not create a back calculation or
function block connections.
The flag outputs (QUFL, QDFL, CARRYUPFL, and CARRYDNFL) are transitory.
Downstream blocks, which sample these outputs, should sample at a rate at least twice the
execution rate of the counter block in order to recognize all transitions.
Equations You can configure CNTEQN to specify how the block must handle the overflow and underflow
conditions.
• By default, Equation A is selected.
• Ideal configuration of the Equation D and H to start the counting is:
– For equation D - the input value must be greater than zero.
– For equation H - the input value must be less than zero.
If not, then the counter excludes a gap of zero to the input value in both equations.
Platforms supported Counter block can be used with the following Control Execution Environments (CEE).
• C300
• C200E
• ACE
• ACE-T
• SIM-C300
• SIM-C200E
• SIM-ACE
Parameters BLOCKTYPENAME EUDESC
BLOCKTYPNAME GLOBSCMMON
BLCKCOMMENT1 INCLAMPOPT
BLCKCOMMENT2 INFLOAT64
BLCKCOMMENT3 ININT32
BLCKCOMMENT4 OUTFLOAT64
CARRYDNFL OUTINT32
CARRYUPFL LOADFL
CBBLOCKPROP NUMBLOBS
CBBLOCKPROPI ORDERINCM
CNTDNFL PAUSEFL
CNTEQN QDFL
CNTLVLFL QUFL
CNTUPFL RESETFL
DESC SELINT32FL
DYNSTATE USERSYMNAME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the CTUD Block.

37
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.1.4 DEADTIME block

Description Provides calculated output (PV) in which value changes may be delayed from the time that the
corresponding change occurred in the P1 input. The delay time can be fixed, or it can vary as the
inverse of another input (P2).
Function Applies a fixed or variable delay to a process input value
Inputs Requires on input value (P1); a second input (P2) is optional.
• P1 and P2 must be fetched from other function blocks
Outputs Produces the following output:
• PV and it's status, PVSTS and PVSTSFL
Operators and Table 4 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for reference.
Functions
Delay Table Is used to accomplish the desired delays in the input (P1). P1 values are stored and shifted
through the table at a rate that is calculated to produce the desired Deadtime. The table-shift rate
is derived from the following information:
• The sample rate of the P1 value (TS). This is the execution rate of the function block.
• The delay time (DELAYTIME). If fixed delay is selected, user specifies the delay; if
variable delay is selected, the delay is derived from P2.
• The number of entries to use in the delay table (NUMLOC). The table has a maximum of 60
entries, but the user may request to use fewer than that (by sorting to NUMLOC).
Delay Type Two types of delay are supported:
• Fixed Delay
• Variable Delay
Parameters C1 NUMLOC
C2 NAME
CPV ORDERINCM
CUTOFF.LM P1
D1 P1STS
D2 P2
DELAYTABLE[1..60] P2STS
DELAYTIME PV
DELAYTYPE PVFORMAT
DPV PVSTS
EUDESC PVSTSFL.BAD
INITREQ PVSTSFL.NORM
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
PVVALSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DEADTIME
Block.

38 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.1.5 ENHAUXCALC (Enhanced Auxiliary Calculation) block

Description The ENHAUXCALC block provides the following enhancements over the AUXCALC block.
• Expands existing arrayed input parameters PSTS and P from six to ten.
• These arrayed parameters are added to correspond to each of the ten inputs.
– Input Description
– Scaling Factor
– Enable/Disable Switch
– PSUB Substitute Parameter
– PP Scaled Input
• Both the ENHAUXCALC and AUXCALC blocks are optimized so that expressions use
memory based on the number of expressions configured, pcode size of each expression, the
number of references in the expression and the offset needed for each expression.
Function Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and functions and may
perform arithmetic or logic operations, test conditions, etc.
Status information is made available for input as well as the expression results.
You can assign the result of an expression, a status, or an input to PV and PVSTS parameters
which are then processed like the result of any other Auxiliary function block.
Inputs Accepts up to 10 optional inputs (P[1] to P[10]) - none are required.
• No inputs are required
• All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks.
• The number of process input connections are equal to the number of inputs; the default is 1.
• Configure P inputs contiguously (without breaks) in arrays.
Outputs Produces these outputs according to the values you assign to them.
• PV and its status PVSTS, as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to other
function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.
• Up to eight expression results (C[1] to C[8])
Operators and “AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block” on page 32 lists the expression operators and
Functions functions supported by this block for reference.
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For example,“CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”,
Identification or “CM57.PID100.MODE”.
In effect, tag names allow expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any
data type. However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression.
The expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression containing
an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as follows:
• TagName.'text'
The size of each expression in the ENHAUXCALC block is limited to 255 characters. You can
use the following additional arrayed parameters in expressions.
• CP[1..10]
• PP[1..10]
• PENABLE[1..10]
• PSUB[1..10]
• PCODESIZE[1..8]
• NUMSRCCONN[1..8]

39
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Expression Rules • Must include full tag.parameter name for P inputs in the expression and enclose
identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example,
CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[1] * CM151.AUXCALC BLOCK.P[2] is valid.
• Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign with the current
syntax) For example,“CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]” is invalid.
Each expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically stored
in a“C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of the first
expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc. You can use these
results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example, you could use C[1] as an input
to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
• You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional assignments) in any
order as long as types match or can be converted.
• You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not required.
• You can use all data types in expressions except for Time data types. They are all treated as
numeric types.
• You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the arrays.
• A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression descriptor
parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which use the CONST[1…8]
parameters, are affected if you change the values of these parameters on the Constants tab.
• With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and Experion Server
points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the Expressions.
• With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter references,
ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the parentheses “()”to specify
array index. However, when you write the expressions using the other non-CEE points you
can use the brackets “[].”
Parameters C[1..8] PCODESIZE[1..8]
CONFIGCODE[1..8] PCONN[1..10]
CONFIGDESC[1..8] PDESC[1..10]
CONFIGSTS[1..8] PENABLE[1..10]
PP[1..10]
CONST[1…8]
PSTS[1..10]
CONSTACCLOCK
PSUB[1..10]
CONSTENABLE PV
CP[1..10] PVFORMAT
CSTS[1..8] PVSRC
DESC PVSTS
EUDESC PVSTSFL.ALL
EXECCODE[1..8] PVSTSFL.BAD
EXECDESC[1..8] PVSTSFL.MAN
EXECSTS[1..8] PVSTSFL.NORM
EXPR[1..8] PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
PVSTSSRC
EXPRDESC[1…8]
PVVALSTS
NAME
SRC
NUMSRCCONN[1..8]
ORDERINCM
P[1..10]

40 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter. Refer to the
Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ENHAUXCALC Block.

3.1.6 ENHGENLIN (Enhanced General Linearization) block

Description Calculates an output value (PV) as a function of the input value (P1) and ACTLINSEG parameter
value based on configured linear coefficients. It can be any function represented by up to 12
continuous, linear segments defined with 13 monotonic value pairs.
Function Typically used to provide a linearized PV (in engineering units) for a sensor actuator, or process
with nonlinear characteristics. The ACTLINSEG parameter is used to select the linearization
segment tables to define the input-output relationship curves.
This block can also be used to characterize functions of a single parameter, such as heat transfer
vs. flow rate, or efficiency as a function of load. It is particularly useful when the relationship of
the input to engineering units is empirically determined.
Input Two input values are required:
• P1 must be fetched from another function block.
• ACTLINSEG parameter value can be user-defined or fetched from another function block.
Outputs • PV, and PVSTS that displays the status of the PV.
• Boolean flag (PVSTSFL.BAD) to indicate to other function blocks, that this block's PV status
is bad.
Platform Supported The ENHGENLIN block is supported on the following platforms.
• C300 (20 ms CEE and 50 ms CEE)
• C200E
• ACE
• SIM-C200E
• SIM-C300
Parameters ACTLINSEG PV
COMMIT PVFORMAT
DESC PVSTS
DIFFVALUE PVSTSFL.BAD
ENBTUNE PVSTSFL.MAN
EUDESC PVSTSFL.NORM
IN[1..4][0..12] PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
NAME PVVALSTS
NUMLINSEG RESTORE
NUMSEGS[1..4] TEMPIN[1..4][0..12]
NUMSEGS [INDEX] TEMPOUT[1..4][0..12]
ORDERINCM VIEWLINSEG
OUT[1..4][0…12]
P1
P1STS

41
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ENHGENLIN Block.
The ENHGENLIN block is typically applicable in the C200E and C300 (20ms CEE and 50ms
CEE) controllers, and ACE controllers. The ENHGENLIN block is not supported in the C200
controller.

3.1.7 FLOWCOMP (Flow Compensation) block

Description Operates on uncompensated flow measurements of liquids, steam, gases or vapors. It computes
a flow compensation factor based on variations in parameters like temperature, pressure,
specific gravity, and molecular weight. The block derives a compensated flow value as its
output.
Function Offers you five different equations for calculating the flow compensation term (COMPTERM).
There is one equation for liquids, one for steam, and three for gases and vapors. Each equation
may require different inputs. For example, depending on which gases and vapors equation you
choose, one requires temperature and pressure measurements, another requires temperature,
pressure and specific gravity, and a third requires temperature, pressure and molecular weight.
Inputs • The PV Equation Type (PVEQN) you select determines the number of inputs that the
FLOWCOMP block requires.
– Equation A requires 2 inputs
– Equation B requires 3 inputs
– Equation C requires 4 inputs
– Equation D requires 4 inputs
– Equation E requires 5 inputs
• All inputs must be fetched from other function blocks
Outputs This block produces the following outputs:
• PV and its status, PVSTS

42 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADCOMPTERM.FL P
BADCOMPTERM.PR P0
BADCOMPTERM.SV PSTS
CF1 PV
CF2 PVCHAR
COMPHILM PVEQN
COMPLOLM PVFORMAT
COMPTERM PVSTS
CPV PVSTSFL.BAD
DESC PVSTSFL.MAN
EUDESC PVSTSFL.NORM
F PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
FSTS Q
G QSTS
GSTS RG
HIALM.PR RMW
HIALM.SV RP
HIALM.TYPE RQ
INALM RT
MAXCYCLE RX
MW T
MWSTS T0
NUMPINPT TSTS
NAME X
ORDERINCM XSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FLOWCOMP
Block.

3.1.8 GENLIN (General Linearization) block

Description Calculates an output value (PV) as a function of the input value (P1) based on a separate
function that can be represented by 2 to 13 user-defined coordinates. (You specify the IN and
OUT values of each coordinate to make a segment.) The input value (P1) is then compared with
the input range of each segment and the output is set at the intersection of the input with the
appropriate segment.
Function Typically used to provide a linearized PV (in engineering units) for a sensor with nonlinear
characteristics. Block can also be used to characterize functions of a single parameter, such as
heat transfer versus flow rate, or efficiency as a function of load. It is particularly useful when
the relationship of the input to engineering units is empirically determined.
Input One input value (P1) is required:
• P1 must be fetched from another function block.
• Number of process input connections is 1.
Outputs PV and its status, PVSTS, as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD, to indicate to other
function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.

43
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Segment Extension The first and last segments are treated as if they are infinitely extended. This means, if P1 is less
than IN[0] or greater than IN (NUMSEGS), PV is computed by assuming that the slope in the
appropriate segment continues from the intersection point.
Parameters DESC PV
EUDESC PVFORMAT
IN[0..12] PVSTS
NAME PVSTSFL.BAD
NUMSEGS PVSTSFL.MAN
ORDERINCM PVSTSFL.NORM
OUT[0..12] PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
P1 PVVALSTS
P1STS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GENLIN Block.

3.1.9 LEADLAG (Lead Lag) block

Description May be configured to apply a lead-time and two lag-time compensation factors to a process
input value.
Function Provides dynamic lead-lag compensation to the P1 input. It supports one lead compensation and
two lag compensation factors. There is a time constant for each compensation factor. Specifying
a zero value for any time constant will suppress the corresponding compensation.
Input One input value (P1) is required:
• P1 must be fetched from another function block.
Outputs The following output is produced:
• PV and its status, PVSTS and PVSTSFL
Equations This function block only supports one equation - a single input filtered with one lead
compensation and two lag compensations. There is a time constant for each compensation
factor. Specifying a zero value for any time constant will suppress the corresponding
compensation.
Parameters CPV P1STS
DPV PV
DESC PVFORMAT
EUDESC PVSTS
INITREQ PVSTSFL.BAD
LAG1TIME PVSTSFL.MAN
LAG2TIME PVSTSFL.NORM
LEADTIME PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
NAME PVVALSTS
ORDERINCM
P1
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LEADLAG Block.

44 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.1.10 ROC (Rate of Change) block

Attention
The ROC block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.

Description It is desirable to prevent a random change in the output sequence. The Rate of Change block is a
computational block used on the input side of Control blocks for limiting the input variable to
the block (typically SP). In Power plants, speed control of HT motors requires control without
exceeding the rate of change of the current. In some temperature control applications, dynamic
profiling is needed based on the deviation of SP and the actual temperature.
Function • If the input variation is more than the rate trip limit in either direction, the rate of change of
output is limited to the change specified by the rate trip limits. The output changes at the
specified rate limits until the value is equal to the input variable.
• PVROCBYPASSFL is provided in the function block to BYPASS the rate trip limit
• If the rate limits are NaN, then limits are not applied and PV is set to P1.
• This block provides a Bad PV alarm based on the status of the output
• For an invalid input (=NaN), rate limiting is not done and the output is NaN.
• With R410, ROC block allows you to configure individual values for the on-delay time and
off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced
for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Input • P1 - Process Input 1.
• PVROCPOSLM - Indicates a positive PV rate of change limit
• PVROCNEGLM - Indicates a negative PV Rate of Change limit
Outputs • PVROCPOSFL - This flag turns ON when the rate limiting is in the positive direction.
• PVROCNEGFL - This flag turns ON when the rate limiting is in the negative direction.
• PV - Output of ROC.
• BADPVFL - This flag is set when a bad input is received at the block.
Parameters P1STS P1
PV PV
PVFORMAT PVEUHI
PVSTS PVEULO
PVSTSFL.BAD PVROCNEGFL
PVSTSFL.MAN PVROCBYPASSFL
PVSTSFL.NORM PVROCPOSLM
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN PVROCPOSFL
PVVALSTS PVROCNEGLM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROC Block.

3.1.11 SIGNALSEL (Signal Selector) block

Description Lets you select one of up to six inputs using configured selection criteria, or allows you to
average two or more of the inputs.

45
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function The Signal Selector function block accepts as many as six input signals, and may be configured
to do one of the following on these inputs:
• Select the input with the minimum value.
• Select the input with the maximum value.
• Select the median input.
• Calculate the average of the inputs.
• Select an input based on the value of an external control signal; i.e., act as a multiplexor.
With this option, the function block accepts two to six inputs plus a control signal.
• Force the function block output to Bad.
The SIGNALSEL block provides a number of configuration options, which makes it extremely
flexible. Some examples of how it can be used are:
• Select the middle of three inputs. If one input goes Bad, calculate the average of the
remaining two; and, if two inputs go Bad, force the output to Bad.
• Calculate the average of two inputs. If the difference between the inputs exceeds a certain
value for more than “x” seconds, issue an alarm; and, if it exceeds another value for more
than “y” seconds, force the output to Bad.
• Select from two inputs, based on a Boolean value pushed from another function block. Also
provide bumpless switching between the inputs.
• With R410, SIGNALSEL block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
However, you can configure only identical deadband units for all the alarms.
Inputs This function block accepts between two to six selectable inputs, P[1..6]. Minimum two inputs
(P[1] and P[2]) are required.
If the block acts as a multiplexor then additionally a multiplex-selector input (MUXSEL) is also
required.
All inputs shall be fetched from other input blocks
The minimum number of inputs is two. If less than two inputs are connected a warning “At least
two inputs need to be connected” shall be given during load, and activation of the block shall be
prevented
If the total number of valid inputs.(NUMINPTS) goes less than the value of the configurable
parameter Minimum Valid Inputs (NMIN), the output of the block shall go bad.
The NMIN parameter applies only to the following selection methods: MIN, MAX, MED, or
AVG, and is not applicable if the selection method is MUX or Force selection is performed.

46 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Input Ranges and The function block always ignores Bad inputs (NaN). In addition, the user may choose to ignore
Limits the “n” highest (IGNORHI) or/and “m” lowest (IGNORLO) inputs. These values can be from
Logic blocks and user programs may also store to it - hence, the number of ignored inputs may
be dynamic.
• If all the inputs are ignored, output shall go Bad.
• If the total number of inputs to be ignored (n+m) is equal to or greater than the total number
of connected inputs, a warning message “IGNORHI+IGNORLO should be less than the
number of connected inputs” will be given during load and activation of the block will be
prevented. During the running state, for the same condition, a non-critical error with the
same error message is displayed and the previous value of IGNORHI or IGNORLO
(whichever is causing the error) is retained
The user may also choose to ignore inputs that are outside user-specified ignore limits.
Ignore Limit Checking
Ignore Limit is the maximum allowable range between the lowest and highest input. Inputs that
are outside this range (IGNORLM) for more than a specified time (IGNORTM) are ignored.
The SIGNALSEL block performs ignore limit checking as follows:
• It ignores Bad inputs (NaN), and the highest and lowest inputs (defined by IGNORHI and
IGNORLO).
• If there are no remaining inputs, ignore limit checking is not done for the block.
• It calculates a “center value” from the inputs that remain:
– If the number of remaining inputs is odd, the “center value” = the median input.
– If the remaining inputs is even, “center value” = the average of the middle two inputs.
• It calculates a high and low ignore limit from specified limit (IGNORLM):
– High ignore limit = “center value” + IGNORLM / 2
– Low ignore limit = “center value” - IGNORLM / 2
• It compares each of the remaining inputs with the high and low ignore limits.
• If an input is outside the ignore limits for more than IGNORTM (the ignore time) seconds,
the function block updates the appropriate parameters (the ignored input flags IGNORD,
IGNORDFL[1…6] and the current number of valid inputs CURPINPT). As a result, the
input will be ignored in future processing (i.e., Input Selection).
• The center value, high and low ignore limits shall be computed every cycle of execution of
the block.
• Inputs that have been ignored on exceeding ignore limits, shall become valid again when
their value returns back within the high and low ignore limits.
If there are only two remaining inputs, and the difference between them exceeds the ignore
limit, the block's output (PV) is set to NaN.
IGNORHI, IGNORLO and ignore limit checking shall not be applicable for the MUX selection
method.
Outputs This auxiliary PV block produces an output PV and its status, PVSTS
The output parameter SELINP denotes which input, if any has been selected as the output.
The Ignore Input feature produces the following output flags
• The flag IGNORD indicates if any of the inputs is ignored or not.
• The parameter IGNORDFL[1..6] provides individual flags for each input indicating if it was
ignored
Equation Options The method for selecting inputs is determined by the configuration parameter SELMETHOD,
whose values are tabulated below. Detailed operations of the selection methods are provided in
the section “Selection methods” on page 49
Method Processing
MIN Select the input with the minimum value.
Ignored inputs are excluded.

47
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

MAX Select the input with the maximum value.

Ignored inputs are excluded.
MED Select the median input. Ignored inputs are
excluded.
AVG Calculate the average of the inputs. Ignored
inputs are excluded.
MUX Select an input based on the Multiplex value;
i.e., act as a multiplexor. Inputs are not ignored.
Force-Select:
• The operator or a user program may override the selection method and “force select” a
particular input using the FRCPERM, FRCREQ, and FRCSEL parameters.
• Force-select may override only the following selection methods: MIN, MAX, MED, or AVG
and is not applicable if the selection method is MUX.
• If the force selected input is not connected, then the PV value goes Bad (NaN) and the
respective unconnected input remains selected
• Ignore Inputs, Ignore limit checking, NMIN and deviation alarming are not applicable
during force selection. Also the deviation alarm state should return to normal.
Bumpless Input Switching
The function block may be configured to provide bumpless switching between inputs. If so
configured, the block will ramp to the new input value when any of the following occur:
• The selected input changes.
• The number of valid inputs changes.
Ramping rate (PVRATE) is specified in rate of change per minute. PV shall ramp at this rate to
the new value. If the ramp rate is zero bumping would occur. Ramping can be disabled by
setting ramp rate to NaN.

48 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 IGNORDHI

BLCKCOMMENT2
IGNORDLO
BLCKCOMMENT3
MEDOPT
BLCKCOMMENT4
MUXSEL
BOOLMUX
NAME
CURPINPT
NMIN
DESC
NUMPINPT
DEVALM.ALL
ORDERINCM
DEVALM.DB
P[1..6]
DEVALM.FL
PDESC[1..10]
DEVALM.PR
PSTS[1..6]
DEVALM.SV
PV
DEVALM.TM
PVFORMAT
DEVALM.TMO PVRATE
DEVALM.TP PVSTS
PVSTSFL.ALL
DEVLM
PVSTSFL.BAD
DEVTM
PVSTSFL.MAN
EUDESC
PVSTSFL.NORM
FRCPERM
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
FRCREQ
SELDESC
FRCSEL
SELIN
IGNORD
SELMETHOD
IGNORDFL[1..6]
IGNORDHI
IGNORDLO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SIGNALSEL
Block.

3.1.12 Selection methods

MIN
• The output (PV) gets the minimum value of all the valid (not ignored) inputs.
• The selected input shall be the input that has this minimum value.
• If two or more inputs have the minimum value then the selected input would be the input with the highest
index. For instance, if P[2] and P[5] have the minimum value then the selected input would be P[5].

MAX
• PV gets the maximum value of all the valid inputs.
• The selected input shall be the input that has this maximum value.
• If two or more inputs have the maximum value then the selected input would be the input with the highest
index. For instance, if P[2] and P[5] have the maximum value then the selected input would be P[5].

49
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

AVG
• PV shall be the average of only the valid inputs.
• The selected input shall be None because PV is a calculated value and not any input by itself.

MED
• All the valid inputs are arranged in ascending order and median value is taken as PV.
• If odd number of valid inputs is present then the middle value will be the PV and the selected input shall be
the respective input.
• If even number of valid inputs is present then the PV shall be any one of the following depending on the
parameter ‘Median Option for Middle Two Inputs (MEDOPT)’:
• If MEDOPT is MIN, then PV shall be the minimum of the middle two values and the respective input shall
be selected input.
• If MEDOPT is MAX, then PV shall be the maximum of the middle two values and the respective input shall
be selected input.
• If MEDOPT is AVG, then PV shall be the average of the middle two values and selected input shall be none
because average is computed.

Attention
While arranging in ascending order, if two inputs have same value then the input that comes first in order 1 to 6
precedes the other.

MUX
• A Boolean flag BOOLMUX is employed to choose between Integer Mux selection and Boolean Mux
selection. If the flag is set to On, Boolean selection will be performed, otherwise Integer selection will
performed.
• In Integer Mux selection, a control signal MUXSEL (multiplex-selector) is required, which shall be user
configurable or fetched from other function block, or user programs could also store to it.
• If the fetched or configured MUXSEL value goes invalid, such as greater than the number of process inputs,
then the previous valid value of MUXSEL is retained and the respective input remains selected.
• If the fetched or configured MUXSEL is valid, but the input corresponding to MUXSEL is not connected,
then the PV value goes bad (NaN) and the respective unconnected input remains selected.
• In Boolean Mux selection, the SELXFL[1..6] flags are scanned from 1 to 6 and the block selects an input
whose corresponding SELXFL flag is first On.
• If the Boolean selected input is not connected, then the PV value goes bad (NaN) and SELIN will have the
index of unconnected input.
• And, if none of the SELXFL flag is on (but only the BOOLMUX is on and SELMETHOD is Mux), then the
PV value goes bad (NaN) and SELIN's value will have None value.
• Bad inputs may also be selected.
• Ignoring of Inputs and deviation alarming are not applicable for MUX. Also, the deviation alarm state
should return to normal.
• PV gets the value of the selected input.
• If the value of the input denoted by the control signal is Bad, then the PV also goes Bad.

3.1.13 TOTALIZER block

Description Periodically adds an input value (P1) to an accumulator value (PV); sets status flags to indicate
when accumulator value is “near”, “nearer”, “nearest” the user specified target value.

50 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Typically used to accumulate flows. For situations where flow transmitter may not be precisely
calibrated near zero-flow value, a zero-flow cutoff feature is provided such that when P1 is
below the cutoff value it clamps to 0 (zero).
Block also supports warm restart.
Input One input (P1) is required:
• P1 is the value to be accumulated -- input value may be real, integer or Boolean, but is
stored as a real number.
• P1 must be fetched from another block.
• Number of process input connections is 1.
Outputs The following outputs are produced:
• Accumulated value (PV) and its status (PVSTS), as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD,
to indicate to other function blocks, that this block's PV status is bad.
• Flags, indicating if accumulated value has reached user-specified target value or one of the
accumulator deviation trip points (ACCTVFL and ACCDEV.FL(1-4]).
Equations You can configure PVEQN to specify how the block should handle bad input and warm restarts.
Specific handling combinations for a given PVEQN selection are:
Equation Bad Input Handling Warm Restart Handling
EqA Use zero if input is bad. Continue after input turns valid
EqB Use last good value if input is bad Continue after input turns valid
EqC Stop if the input is bad and set PV to Continue after input turns valid
NaN
EqD Use zero if input is bad. Stop after a warm restart
EqE Use last good value if input is bad Stop after a warm restart
EqF Stop if the input is bad and set PV to Stop after a warm restart
NaN
Parameters ACCDEV.FL[1..4] PV
ACCDEV.TP[1..4] PVEQN
ACCTV PVFORMAT
ACCTVFL PVSTS
C1 PVSTSFL.BAD
CMDATTR PVSTSFL.NORM
COMMAND PVSTSFL.NORM
CUTOFF.LM PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
DESC PVVALSTS
EUDESC RESETFL
HIALM RESETVAL
LASTGOOD STARTFL
NAME STATE
OLDAV STOPFL
ORDERINCM TIMEBASE
P1
P1STS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TOTALIZER
Block.

51
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.2 Device Control Block

Related topics
“DEVCTL (Device Control) block” on page 52

3.2.1 DEVCTL (Device Control) block

Description Provides multi-input, multi-output function for interfacing to discrete devices such as motors,
pumps, solenoid valves and motor-operated valves. The Device Control block contains built-in
structures for handling interlocks and supports display of the interlock conditions in group,
detail and graphic displays.
Function Allows the manipulation of sets of digital outputs and interprets corresponding feedback of
digital inputs represented by the state parameter PV (Current Feedback State).
Operation consists of transmitting commands represented by state parameter OP (commanded
output state), monitoring PV, and producing alarms based on various configurations, such as if
PV has not achieved state commanded in OP.
Provides safety interlocks, individual state interlocks, initialization manual, maintenance
statistics, and batch level 1 drive functions.
Inputs May have from 0 to 4 inputs (DI [1..4]); each input is a Boolean value that represents the state of
other block output or a field DICHANNEL block.
Outputs May have from 0 to 3 outputs. Each output can be Boolean (DO[1..3]) or pulsed (PO[1..3]). You
can only connect a DO[1..3] or a PO[1..3] to any one output at a time.
• You can connect the Boolean output DO[1..3] to a Boolean parameter in any other function
block or to the DO.SO in the DOCHANNEL block.
• You can only connect the pulsed output PO[1..3] to a DO.ONPULSE or DO.OFFPULSE in
the DOCHANNEL block.
• Note that you can only connect one Boolean (DO[1..3]) or one pulsed (PO[1..3]) output to
any one DOCHANNEL block as a DO.SO or DO.ONPULSE or DO.OFFPULSE,
respectively.
Alarms An available set of PV state alarms may be configured to represent Bad PV or disagreements
between the commanded output state (OP) and the feedback state (PV). A variety of override
alarms are also available. Each of these alarms possesses all the standard attributes of system
alarms.

52 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ASTEPID MOMSTATE

BADPVALM.FL NAME
BADPVALM.PR NORMMODE
BADPVALM.SV NORMMODEATTR
BYPASS NULLPVFL
BYPPERM NUMDINPUTS
CLROPREQFL NUMDOUTS
CMDDISALM.FL NUMSIOVRD
CMDDISALM.PR NUMSTATES
CMDDISALM.SV NUMTRANS[0..2]
CMDDISALM.TM[0..2] OFFNRMALM.FL
CMDFALALM.FL OFFNRMALM.PR
CMDFALALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV
CMDFALALM.SV OI[0..2]
CMDFALALM.TM[0..2] OIALM.FL[0..2]
CONTROLREQ OIALM.OPT[0..2]
DESC OIALM.PR[0..2]
DI[1..4] OIALM.SV[0..2]
DIPVMAP[0..15] OP
DO[1..3] OPCMD[0..2]
EUDESC OPDOMAP[0..3][1..3]
GOP OPFINAL
GOPFINAL OPREQ
GOPREQ OPTYPE
GOPSCADA ORDER
GPV ORDERINCM
GPVAUTO PI[0..2]
HIALM.PR PO[1..3]
HIALM.SV POCONNECTED[1..3]
HIALM.TYPE PULSEWIDTH[1..3]
HOLDOPT PV
INALM PVAUTO
INBETFL PVFL[0..2]
INITCONNECTD[1..3] PVSOURCE
INITMAN PVSRCOPT
INITOPOPT PVSTS
INITREQ[0..2] REDTAG
LASTGOPREQ RESETFL
LASTOPREQ RESTARTOPT
LASTOPTYPE SAFEOP
LASTREQFL SAFEREDTAG
LASTSTEP SEALOPT

53
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

LOCALMAN SI
MAINTOPT SIALM.FL
MAXTIME[0..2] SIALM.OPT
MAXTRANS[0..2] SIALM.PR
MODE SIALM.SV
MODEATTR STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM STATETEXT[0..6]
MODEATTRFL.OPER STATETIME[0..2]
MODEATTRFL.PROG STOPOPT
MODETRACK UNCMDALM.FL
UNCMDALM.PR
UNCMDALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DEVCTL Block.

54 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.3 Data Acquisition Block

Related topics
“DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block” on page 55

3.3.1 DATAACQ (Data Acquisition) block

Description Processes a specified process input value (P1) with or without filtering into an output value
(PV).
Function Normally configured to fetch process input from an AI device, controller or another function
block; it performs the following major functions:
• Brings input data and updates the input (P1) and its status P1STS. If input provides value
only, P1STS is derived from the value.
• PV characterization option lets you configure Linear or Square Root conversion on the P1
input, if required.
• Low signal cut off function lets you configure a low cutoff value for P1 with Linear or
Square Root PV characterization.
• Performs filtering (P1FILTTIME) and clamping (P1CLAMPOPT) on P1 through parameters
P1FILTTIME and P1CLAMPOPT, and stores the result in PVAUTO.
• Generates alarm flags when PV exceeds any of a number of user-specified alarm trip points
for more than a designated time interval.
• PV source selection option (PVSOURCE) supports automatic, manual, and substitute. A PV
source selection of manual means an operator can store a value to the output (PV). A
selection of substitute means a user program can store a value to PV.
Input Requires one process input value (P1) that must be fetched from another block.
• Number of process input connections (NUMPINT) is 1.
• P1STS provides the status of P1.
Input Ranges and • PVEUHI and PVEULO define the full range of P1 in engineering units.
Limits
– PVEUHI is 100% of full scale value.
– PVEULO is 0% of full scale value.
• PVEXHILM and PVEXLOLM define the high and low limits of P1in engineering units.
– If P1 clamping is desired (P1CLAMPOPT = Enable), the block clamps the input within
PVEXHILM and PVEXLOLM.
Output Produces an output value (PV) and its status (PVSTS).
Alarm Processing With R410, DATAACQ block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Block may be configured to generate an alarm when PV exceeds one of various trip points
(XXXX.TP parameters) for more than a specified time.
• Parameters with the following suffixes also apply to alarm processing:
– XXXX.DB, XXXX.DBU (deadband, deadband units)
– XXXX.FL (alarm flag)
– XXXX.PR (priority)
– XXXX.SV (severity)
– XXXX.TP (trip point)
– XXXX.CT (alarm count)
Where XXXX stands for one of the following:

55
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

PVHIALM PVLLALM PVHISIGCHG

PVHHALM ROCPOSALM PVLOSIGCHG
PVLOALM ROCNEGALM Bad PV Alarm

56 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB PVHHALM.TM

ALMDBU PVHHALM.TMO
ALMTM PVHHALM.TP
BADPVALM.FL PVHIALM.DB
BADPVALM.PR PVHIALM.DB
BADPVALM.SV PVHIALM.DBU
BADPVALM.TM PVHIALM.FL
BADPVALM.TMO PVHIALM.PR
PVHIALM.SV
DESC
PVHIALM.TM
EUDESC
HIALM.PR PVHIALM.TMO
HIALM.SV PVHIALM.TP
HIALM.TYPE PVHISIGCHG.CT
INALM PVHISIGCHG.TP
INSBLOCK[1..10] PVLLALM.DB
INSFAILFL PVLLALM.DBU
INSFAIL.PR PVLLALM.FL
INSFAIL.SV PVLLALM.PR
LASTGOODPV PVLLALM.SV
LOCUTOFF PVLLALM.TM
NAME
PVLLALM.TMO
ORDERINCM
PVLLALM.TP
NUMINSERT
PVLOALM.DB
P1
PVLOALM.DBU
P1CLAMPOPT
PVLOALM.FL
P1EU
PVLOALM.PR
P1FILTINIT
PVLOALM.SV
P1FILTTIME
PVLOALM.TM
P1STS
PVLOALM.TMO
PV
PVLOALM.TP
PVAUTO
PVLOSIGCHG.CT
PVAUTOSTS
PVLOSIGCHG.TP
PVCHAR
PVP
PVEUHI
PVSOURCE
PVEULO
PVSRCOPT
PVEXHIFL
PVSTS
PVEXHILM
PVSTSFL.BAD
PVEXLOFL
PVSTSFL.MAN
PVEXLOLM
PVSTSFL.NORM
PVFORMAT
PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
PVHHALM.DB
PVVALSTS
PVHHALM.DBU

57
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

PVHHALM.FL ROCNEGALM.FL
PVHHALM.PR ROCNEGALM.PR
PVHHALM.SV ROCNEGALM.SV

ROCNEGALM.TM
ROCNEGALM.TMO
ROCNEGALM.TP
ROCPOSALM.FL
ROCPOSALM.PR
ROCPOSALM.SV

ROCPOSALM.TM
ROCPOSALM.TMO
ROCPOSALM.TP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DATAACQ Block.

58 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.4 IO Channel Blocks

Related topics
“AICHANNEL” on page 59
“AOCHANNEL” on page 59
“DICHANNEL” on page 60
“DOCHANNEL” on page 60
“PWMCHANNEL” on page 61
“SIFLAGARRCH” on page 62
“SINUMARRCH” on page 62
“SITEXTARRCH” on page 63

3.4.1 AICHANNEL

Description Provides standard analog interface to control function blocks.

Function 1. Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
2. Assigns BAD status to PV parameter when appropriate.
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Parameters BADCAL IOMCONN
BADCODE OHMOFFSET
CALBIAS ORDERINCM
CJOFFSET OVERRANGE
DEBUG PV
FETCHMODE PVRAW
FREEZETIME PVSTS
IOCTYPE PVVALSTS
UNDERRANGE
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated”with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with the physical AI hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.2 AOCHANNEL

Description Provides a standard analog output signal for operating final control elements.
Function • Brings OP data from connected blocks and conveys OP data to be stored in an associated
IOM block.
• Reverses OP direction if OPTDIR option is REVERSE.
• Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
• Assigns safe value if STS parameter is BAD or UNCERTAIN.
• Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if AOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications error
occurs.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.

59
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.

Parameters BACKCALCOUT INITVAL
BADCAL IOCSTATE
BADCODE IOCTYPE
CALIBALL IOMCONN
CALBIAS OP
COMMFAILFL OPFINAL
DEBUG OPSOURCE
FETCHMODE OPTDIR
FREEZETIME ORDERINCM
INITREQ
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with physical AO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.3 DICHANNEL

Description Provides a standard digital interface to control blocks.

Function • Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
• Assigns Bad status to PV parameter when appropriate
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Parameters BADCODE IOCTYPE
BADPV IOMCONN
COS NOFIELDPWR
DEBUG ORDERINCM
FETCHMODE PVFL
FREEZETIME PVSTS
HWFAULT PVVAL
INBADOPT PVVALSTS
IOCSTATE WIREOFF
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with physical Digital Input hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.4 DOCHANNEL

Description Generates status output [0 or 1), pulsed output (ON or OFF) for specified pulse time based on
origin of input and parameters.

60 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • Brings SO or PO from connected blocks and stores value in an associated IOM block.
• Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
• Stops SO if INTREQ is TRUE
• Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if DOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications error
occurs.
• You can configure PO to be Direct or Reverse by connecting ONPULSE or OFFPULSE pin.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT IOCSTATE
BADCODE IOCTYPE
COMMFAILFL IOMCONN
DEBUG NOFIELDPWR
DOMSO NOLOAD
DOTYPE OFFPULSE
FETCHMODE ONPULSE
FREEZETIME ORDERINCM
INITREQ SHORT
INITVAL SO
LASTSERIAL SOSOURCE
VERIFYLOST
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.5 PWMCHANNEL

Description Provides a pulse width modulated output signal for operating final control elements in
combination with a DO Module.
Function • Brings OP data from connected block and stores data in an associated IOM block.
• Reverses OP direction if OPTDIR option is REVERSE.
• Sends out a pulse based on the configured pulse width period (PWMPERIOD) with its duty
cycle determined by the OP data.
• Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
• Assigns safe value if status parameter is BAD or UNCERTAIN.
• Sets INITREQ to TRUE (ON) value if CM containing PWMC block or IOM block is
inactive or a communications error occurs. If communication fails, the pulse function
terminates. So, be sure you select the proper SHED VALUE for the DOM channel to reflect
the desired inactive digital state.
Inputs OP value from another block. Typically, output in 0 to 100% from a PID block, which indicates
the proportion of time period that the output will be turned on.
Outputs Pulsed (real) value

61
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters COMMFAILFL NOFIELDPWR

DOMSO NOLOAD
FETCHMODE OP
INITREQ ORDERINCM
INITREQLATCH PWMPERIOD
INITVAL SHORT
IOCNUMBER VERIFYLOST
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.6 SIFLAGARRCH

Description Provides a read/write interface to a Boolean array of data from a serial device.
Function • Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field device. Or, reads
data from the associated field device and makes it available to the connected block.
• Supports up to 512 Boolean values(PVFL[1..512] from the device.
• Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time.
• Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and generates a
detailed error code (ERRORCODE).
• Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL) and initialization request flag (INITREQ) parameters to
mirror the status of the ERRFL parameter - data is valid or invalid.
Inputs Boolean value from device or another block
Outputs Boolean value
Parameters AUXDATA[0..7] IOCSTATE
BADCODE IOCTYPE
BADPVFL IOMCONN
DEVADDR NFLAG
ERRCODE ORDERINCM
ERRFL PVFL[1..512]
FETCHMODE PVSTS
INITREQ STARTINDEX
IOCNUMBER WRITEOPT
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SIM block that
interfaces with physical FTA A and FTA B hardware at execution runtime. Use channels 0-15
for FTA A and channels 16-31 for FTA B. For optimum performance, assign channels to SIM
block for given FTA contiguously. For example, if you have four SIFLAGARRCH blocks to use
with the FTA A, assign them to SIM block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.7 SINUMARRCH

Description Provides a read/write interface to a Numeric array of data from a serial device.

62 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field device. Or, reads
data from the associated field device and makes it available to the connected block.
• Provides Numeric values of the type 64-bit floating point, but data from the device can be of
type 32-/64-bit floating point (Real: 4-byte), 32-bit integer (Integer: 2-byte), or Boolean
(Byte: 1-byte).
• Supports up to 64 Numeric values (PV [1..64] from the device. Since the maximum size of
the interface to the device is 64 bytes, the number of Numerics (NNUMERIC) per data type
is 0 to 16 for Real, 0 to 32 for Integer, or 0 to 64 for Byte type register in the device.
• Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time.
• Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and generates a
detailed error code (ERRORCODE).
• Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL) and initialization request flag (INITREQ) parameters to
mirror the status of the ERRFL parameter - data is valid or invalid.
Inputs Up to 64 bytes of Real, Integer, or Byte type data from the device. (Block always provides
Numeric values of 64-bit floating point type.)
Outputs See above.
Parameters AUXDATA[0..7] IOCNUMBER
BADCODE IOCSTATE
BADPVFL IOCTYPE
DEVADDR IOMCONN
ERRCODE NNUMERIC
ERRFL ORDERINCM
FETCHMODE PV[1..64]
INITREQ PVSTS[1..64]
STARTINDEX
WRITEOPT
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SIM block that
interfaces with physical FTA A and FTA B hardware at execution runtime. Use channels 0-15
for FTA A and channels 16-31 for FTA B. For optimum performance, assign channels to SIM
block for given FTA contiguously. For example, if you have four SINUMARRCH blocks to use
with the FTA A, assign them to SIM block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.4.8 SITEXTARRCH

Description Provides a read/write interface to a Text (or String) array of data from a serial device.

63
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field device. Or, reads
data from the associated field device and makes it available to the connected block.
• Supports up to 8 Text values (STR[1..8]) from the device. Since the maximum size of the
interface to the device is 64 bytes, the valid range of values depends on the combination of
number of string values (NSTRING) and length of string values (STRLEN) as follows.
– If NSTRING is 1 and STRLEN is 64, valid STR[1..8] range is 1.
– If NSTRING is 2 and STRLEN is 32, valid STR[1..8] range is 1 to 2.
– If NSTRING is 4 and STRLEN is 16, valid STR[1..8] range is 1 to 4.
– If NSTRING is 8 and STRLEN is 8, valid STR[1..8] range is 1 to 8.
• Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time.
• Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and generates a
detailed error code (ERRORCODE).
• Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL) and initialization request flag (INITREQ) parameters to
mirror the status of the ERRFL parameter - data is valid or invalid.
Inputs Up to 8 string values depending on whether the length of the string is 8, 16, 32, or 64 characters.
Outputs See above.
Parameters AUXDATA[0..7] IOCNUMBER
BADCODE IOCSTATE
BADPVFL IOCTYPE
DEVADDR IOMCONN
ERRCODE NSTRING
ERRFL ORDERINCM
FETCHMODE STARTINDEX
INITREQ STR[1..8]
STRLEN
WRITEOPT
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SIM block that
interfaces with physical FTA A and FTA B hardware at execution runtime. Use channels 0-15
for FTA A and channels 16-31 for FTA B. For optimum performance, assign channels to SIM
block for given FTA contiguously. For example, if you have four SITEXTARRCH blocks to use
with the FTA A, assign them to SIM block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

64 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.5 Exchange Blocks (ControlNet Interoperability)

Related topics
“REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block” on page 65
“REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block” on page 65
“REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block” on page 66
“RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block” on page 67
“RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block” on page 67
“RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block” on page 68

3.5.1 REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block

Description Provides storage for up to 512 Boolean output flags. The value can be accessed as a simple
Boolean (Off or On) using the PVFL[n] or PVVALSTS[n] parameters. Where“n” is the number
of the flag.
Function Used to define two separate states (Off/On) to indicate status of a particular input.
Number of flag values (NFLAG) is user configurable.
Current state of flags can be changed/read using flag value (PVFL[n] or PVVALSTS[n])
(Boolean).
Inputs/Outputs Boolean output flags (PVFL[0..511])
Boolean output flags (PVVALSTS[0..511])
Parameters COMMAND ERRINFO
DHCHANNEL FILENUM
DHDESTLINK LASTRESPTM
DHFL NFLAG
DHNODE ORDERINCM
DHSRCLINK PATH
DONEFL PVFL[0..511]
ERRCODE PVVALSTS[0..511]
ERRFL READYFL
SENDFL
Associated Block “REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block” on page 65 and “REQTEXTARRAY
(Request Text Array) block” on page 66
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REQFLAGARRAY Block.

3.5.2 REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block

Description Provides storage for up to 64 integers or floating point values that are accessible through the
corresponding PV configuration parameter (PV[n]). Where“n” is the number of the numeric.
Function Use outputs (PV[0..63]) as source parameters to provide predefined analog constants to other
function blocks. A bad numeric output parameter typically has the value NaN (Not-a-Number).
Number of Numeric Values (NNUMERIC) is user configurable.

65
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs/Outputs Up to 64 outputs (PV[0..63]), depending on the number of numeric values (NNUMERIC)

configured
Parameters COMMAND LASTRESPTM
DHCHANNEL NNUMERIC
DHDESTLINK ORDERINCM
DHFL PATH
DHNODE PV[0..63]
DHSRCLINK PVSTS[0..63]
DONEFL PVVALSTS[0..63]
ERRCODE READYFL
ERRFL SENDFL
ERRINFO TGTDATATYPE
FILENUM
Associated Block “REQFLAGARRAY (Request Flag Array) block” on page 65 and “REQTEXTARRAY
(Request Text Array) block” on page 66
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the REQNUMARRAY
Block.

3.5.3 REQTEXTARRAY (Request Text Array) block

Description Provides storage for up to 64 ASCII characters that are accessible through the corresponding
string configuration parameter (STR[n]). Where“n” is the number of the text string.
Function • Provides predefined text (STR[0..7]) strings to other blocks.
• Number of string values (NSTRING) is user configurable.
• The length of the text strings (STRLEN) is user configurable to 64 characters
• Supports a maximum size of 64 two-byte characters.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 8 output strings (STR[0..7]), depending on the number of string (NSTRING) and length of
string (STRLEN) values configured.
Parameters COMMAND ERRINFO
DHCHANNEL FILENUM
DHDESTLINK LASTRESPTM
DHFL NSTRING
DHNODE ORDERINCM
DHSRCLINK PATH
DONEFL READYFL
ERRCODE SENDFL
ERRFL STR[0..7]
STRLEN
Associated Block “REQNUMARRAY (Request Number Array) block” on page 65 and “REQFLAGARRAY
(Request Flag Array) block” on page 65.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REQTEXTARRAY Block.

66 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.5.4 RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block

Description The Flag Array Block is used to read or write an array of up to 512 BOOLEAN values.
Function The Response Array function blocks can be used to respond to requests from third-party devices
using the PCCC or CIP protocols. These function blocks will be loaded to and run in the CPM,
and will have the ability to have data values read and written by third-party devices.
Inputs/Outputs The Response Array Blocks are configured with the address used by the remote device to
reference its data and the data size. The configuration information cannot be modified at run-
time. If changes must be made to the configuration of a Response Array Block, these changes
must be made in the Project Database and the block must be reloaded to the controller for the
changes to take effect. These blocks are not internally triggered, data reads and writes occur as a
result of external communications requests. They are also not Alarming Blocks and so cannot
generate Alarms by themselves. No fragmentation or re-assembly is done either in the blocks
themselves.
Parameters FILENUM PVFL[0..511]
NFLAG PVVALSTS[0..511]
ORDERINCM
Associated Block “RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block” on page 67 and “RSPTEXTARRAY
(Response Text Array) block” on page 68.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RSPFLAGARRAY
Block.

3.5.5 RSPNUMARRAY (Response Number Array) block

Description The Numeric Array Block is used to read or write an array of up to 64 integer or single precision
float values.
Function The Response Array function blocks can be used to respond to requests from third-party devices
using the PCCC or CIP protocols. These function blocks will be loaded to and run in the CPM,
and will have the ability to have data values read and written by third-party devices.
Inputs/Outputs The Response Array Blocks are configured with the address used by the remote device to
reference its data and the data size. The configuration information cannot be modified at run-
time. If changes must be made to the configuration of a Response Array Block, these changes
must be made in the Project Database and the block must be reloaded to the controller for the
changes to take effect. These blocks are not internally triggered, data reads and writes occur as a
result of external communications requests. They are also not Alarming Blocks and so cannot
generate Alarms by themselves. No fragmentation or re-assembly is done either in the blocks
themselves.
Parameters CIPNAME ORDERINCM
DATATYPE PV[0..63]
FILENUM PVSTS[0..63]
NNUMERIC
Associated Block “RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block” on page 67 and “RSPTEXTARRAY
(Response Text Array) block” on page 68.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RSPNUMARRAY
Block.

67
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.5.6 RSPTEXTARRAY (Response Text Array) block

Description The Text Array Block is used to read or write an array of up to 64 ASCII characters.
Function The Response Array function blocks can be used to respond to requests from third-party devices
using the PCCC or CIP protocols. These function blocks will be loaded to and run in the CPM,
and will have the ability to have data values read and written by third-party devices.
Inputs/Outputs The Response Array Blocks are configured with the address used by the remote device to
reference its data and the data size. The configuration information cannot be modified at run-
time. If changes must be made to the configuration of a Response Array Block, these changes
must be made in the Project Database and the block must be reloaded to the controller for the
changes to take effect. These blocks are not internally triggered, data reads and writes occur as a
result of external communications requests. They are also not Alarming Blocks and so cannot
generate Alarms by themselves. No fragmentation or re-assembly is done either in the blocks
themselves.
Parameters FILENUM STR[0..7]
NSTRING STRLEN
ORDERINCM
Associated Block “RSPFLAGARRAY (Response Flag Array) block” on page 67 and “RSPNUMARRAY
(Response Number Array) block” on page 67.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RSPTEXTARRAY
Block.

68 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.6 HART DEVICE Block

Related topics
“HART DEVICE (Generic HART Device)” on page 69

3.6.1 HART DEVICE (Generic HART Device)

Description Identifies the physical HART Device for the CPM to provide links to associated IOM.
Function Defines type of HART field device, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one point, as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission to or from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to or from physical device.
Parameters ASSOCIOMLOC HARTDEVSTATUS
ASSOCPROCDEF HARTFLAGS
BINITIALIZE HARTREVNO
BLKASSOCSTATUS HWREVNO
DATE IOMBLOCK
DATEFORMAT IOMCHANNEL
DESCRIPTOR MANUFACTURER
DEVICEIDNO MESSAGE
DEVICELOC MODE
DEVICETYPE NOREQUESTPREAMBLES
DEVREVNO PVRANGELOW
DEVSPCBIT[0..135] PVRANGEHIGH
DIGFV PVRANGEUNITS
DIGFVDESC SLOT0DDESC
DIGFVUNITS SLOT0UNITS
DIGPV SLOT0VALUE
DIGPVDESC SLOT1DESC
DIGPVUNITS SLOT1UNITS
DIGSV SLOT1VALUE
DIGSVDESC SLOT2DESC
DIGSVUNITS SLOT2UNITS
DIGTV SLOT2VALUE
DIGTVDESC SLOT3DESC
DIGTVUNITS SLOT3UNITS
FINALASSNO SLOT3VALUE
HARTCOMMCHNFAIL SWREVNO
TAG

69
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

70 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.7 Pulse Input Channel/Module Blocks

Related topics
“Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff” on page 71
“Pulse Input Channel” on page 72
“Pulse Input Totalizer” on page 72
“Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081” on page 73
“Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01” on page 74
“PI Channel” on page 75

3.7.1 Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff

Description Standard Interface to channels 6-7 of the Pulse Input IOM.

Function The three main functions of channels 6-7 are:
• Pulse Count (PULSECOUNT) - both raw count and Engineering Unit converted values.
• Frequency value (PV) in Engineering Units
• Digital Output (fast cutoff)
Inputs If the Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff is running it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV, TV and SO
from its associated Pulse Input Module. If the associated IOM does not exist in the CPM, fail-
safe values are set.
Outputs After Input Processing, the Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff will send commands to the
IOM function block.
If multiple commands are sent to the device, the execution order in the Pulse Input firmware will
be:
1. Reset Counter
2. Write Output Value
3. Write Target Value
Parameters AV IOCTYPE
AVRAW IOMCONN
AVRAWSTS ORDERINCM
AVSTS PULSEMODE
BADCODE PV
BADSO PVSTS
C1 PVVALSTS
C2 RESETFL
C3 SAFEOUTPUT
DEBUG SO
EDGEDETECT SOCMDOFF
FETCHMODE SOCMDON
FREEZETIME TIMEBASE
FREQPERIOD TV
IOCNUMBER TVPROC
VOLTAGE

71
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Associated “Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081” on page 73, “Pulse Input Channel” on
page 72, and “Pulse Input Totalizer” on page 72.
Block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.7.2 Pulse Input Channel

Description Standard interface to channels 0-5 of the Pulse Input IOM function block.
Function The three main functions of channels 0-5 are:
• Pulse count - both raw count and Engineering Unit converted values
• Frequency value in Engineering Units
• Pulse Length measurement in Engineering Units
Inputs If the PIC function block is running, it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV, PL and CHANSTS from its
associated PIM function blocks. If the associated IOM does not exist in the CPM; fail-safe
values are used.
Outputs If RESETFL is set, the PIC function block will pass this command to the associated PIM
function block.
RESETFL will then be reset regardless of whether the associated IOM exists.
Parameters AV FREQPERIOD
AVRAW IOCTYPE
AVRAWSTS IOMCONN
AVSTS ORDERINCM
BADCODE PL
C1 PLSTS
C2 PULSEMODE
C3 PV
DEBUG PVSTS
EDGEDETECT RESETFL
FETCHMODE TIMEBASE
FREEZETIME VOLTAGE
Associated “Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081” on page 73, “Pulse Input Channel with
Fast Cutoff” on page 71, and “Pulse Input Totalizer” on page 72.
Block
Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of corresponding PIM block that
interfaces with the physical pulse input hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.7.3 Pulse Input Totalizer

Description Periodically adds an input value (P1) to an accumulator value (PV). Sets status flags to indicate
when accumulator value is“near”, “nearer”, “nearest” to the user-specified target value.
Function Typically used to accumulate flows. For situations where flow transmitter may not be precisely
calibrated near zero-flow value, a zero flow cutoff feature is provided such that when P1 is
below the cutoff value it clamps to 0 (zero).
Inputs One input (P1) is required:
P1 is the value to be accumulated - input value must be an integer value.
P1 must be fetched from another function block.

72 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs The following outputs are produced:

Accumulated value (PV) and its status (PVSTS), as well as a Boolean flag, PVSTSFL.BAD to
indicate to other function blocks that this block's PV status is bad.
Flags, indicating if accumulated value has reached user-specified target value or one of the
accumulator deviation trip points (ACCTVFL and ACCDEV.FL[1..4])
Equations Parameter PVEQN may be configured to specify how the block should handle bad input and
warm restarts. Specific handling combinations for a given PVEQN selection are listed in the
Control Builder Components Theory document.
Parameters ACCDEV.FL[1..4] PV
ACCDEV.TP[1..4] PVEQN
ACCTV PVFORMAT
ACCTVFL PVSTS
C1 PVSTSFL.BAD
C2 PVSTSFL.MAN
CMDATTR PVSTSFL.NORM
COMMAND PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
CUTOFF.LM PVVALSTS
LASTGOOD RESETFL
OLDAV RESETVAL
ORDERINCM STARTFL
P1 STATE
P1STS STOPFL
Associated Block “Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081” on page 73, “Pulse Input Channel” on
page 72, and “Pulse Input Channel with Fast Cutoff” on page 71.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.7.4 Pulse Input Module Block TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081

Description Defines the name/location and channel specifics for all Pulse Input Modules in the Control
Processor.
Function Supports the configuration of the TC-MDP081/TK-MDP081 Pulse Input module and acts as the
interface between Pulse Input Channel blocks and controller's IO Manager.
Inputs Every execution cycle the Pulse Input Module block gets the current assembly sent from the
Pulse Input device using IO Manager services.
Outputs Every 50 ms, the Pulse Input Module block sends assembly data to the Pulse Input device using
IO Manager services.

73
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMDISCONN

ASACONNSTS NUMSHUTDOWN
ASAERRCODE ORDERINCEE
ASAERRINFO ORDERINCM
AV[0..7] PERIOD
AVRAW[0..7] PHASE
BADSO[6..7] PL[0..5]
C1[0..7] PRODTYPE
C2[0..7] PULSEMODE[0..5]
C3[0..5] PV[0..7]
CATNUMBER RESETFL[0..7]
CEESTATE SAFEOUTPUT[6..7]
DESC SCANASSOCDSP
DLCNBSLOT SCANCTRLLVL
EDGEDETECT[0..7] SCANEUHI
ESTWEIGHT SCANEULO
EXECSTATE SCANGRPDTL
EUDESC SCANPNTDTL
FREQPERIOD[0..7] SO[6..7]
INALM TIMEBASE[0..7]
IOCTYPE TV[6..7]
IOMSLOT TVPROC[6..7]
IOMTYPE TVRAW[6..7]
KEYWORD ULCNBMAC
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV VOLTAGE[0..7]
NUMCHANS
NUMCONN
Associated Block “Pulse Input Totalizer” on page 72, “Pulse Input Channel” on page 72, and “Pulse Input Channel
with Fast Cutoff” on page 71.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.7.5 Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01

Description Acts as an interface between the C300 Controller and pulsed output transducers such as
tachometers, flow meters, and magnetic pickups.
Function • Provides highly accurate frequency/period calculations of inputs for certain frequency
ranges.
• Supports pulse multiplexing that enables Prover pulses to be generated by copying the
selected good pulses to the Prover pulse output.
• Supports Dual Pulse Integrity in accordance with ISO6551:1996 Level A which is required
to support interfacing of custody transfer meters with pulse outputs.
Inputs Based on the configured module scan rate, the IOLINK collects all the process input data using
the IOL Interface services.

74 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Data consumed by this module is sent through the IOL Interface as it is received.
Parameters ACTUALPROVERSIGNAL IOMSTSA
AVSTS IOMSTSB
AVRAWSTS IOMTYPE
BLCKCOMMENT1 IOPDESCA
BLCKCOMMENT2 IOPLOCATION
BLCKCOMMENT3 IOREDOPT
BLCKCOMMENT4 MAINTAINONFAULT
CHNLNAME NUMCHANS
CONFIGPROVERSIGNAL NUMSIGS
CPUFREEAVGA PARNERINCOMPATIBLEA
CPUFREEAVGB PARNERINCOMPATIBLEB
CPUFREEMINA PLSTS
CPUFREEMINB PRIMARYSIG
CTRLCONFIRM REASONSET
DESC REDDATAA
FWINVALIDA REDDATTAB
FWINVALIDB RESETFL
GROUP.NUMPARAMS RDNAUTOSYNC
HIST.NUMPARAMS SCANCTRLLVL
IOLINK SCANGRPDTL
IOLINKCOLOR SCANRATE
IOMBTREVA SCANPNTDTL
IOMCOMMAND SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFWREVA SECONDARYSIG
IOMHWREVA SECSOGSECLVL
IOMLHFSTA SERIALNUMA
IOMNUM TREND.NUMPARAMS
IOMOPERA TVRAW
IOMOPERB TYPEINVALIDA
IOMPLD2REVA TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTATE
Associated Block “PI Channel” on page 75
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.7.6 PI Channel

Description The PI channel block represents a single pulse input point on a Series C Pulse Input Module.
Function • Pulse count - both raw count and Engineering Unit converted values.
• Frequency calculation in Engineering Units.
• Pulse Length measurement in Engineering Units.
• Digital output (fast cutoff).

75
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs • When the PI channel block is configured for pulse input type, it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV,
PVSTS, and PL from its associated Pulse Input Module.
• When the PI channel is configured for fast cutoff, it fetches AVRAW, AV, PV, PVSTS, TV,
and SO from its associated Pulse Input Module.
In both scenarios, if the associated Pulse Input Module does not exist in the C300 Controller,
fail-safe values are set.
Outputs • When the PI channel is configured as pulse input type, if RESETFL is set, the PIC function
block will pass this command to the associated PIM function block. RESETFL will then be
reset regardless of whether the associated PIM exists or not.
• When the PI channel is configured for fast cutoff, after input processing, the PI channel
sends commands to the Pulse Input Module function block.
If multiple commands are sent to the device, the execution order in the Pulse Input firmware
is as follows:
– Reset counter
– Write output value
– Write target value
Parameters ASSOCCHANNEL IOPTYPE
AV PL
AVRAW PTEXECST
BADAVRAW PULSEINTYPE
BADPVFL PULSEMODE
BADSO PV
CHANNUM PVSTS
CONTAINEDIN SO
C1 SAFEOUTPUT
C2 SOCMDOFF
C3 SOCMDON
DEVICELOCATION
TV
EDGEDETECT
TVPROC
ENPULSEWIDTHREJ
VOLTAGE
FREQPERIOD
INPUTSTREAM
IOP
Associated Block “Pulse Input Module Block CC-PPIX01” on page 74
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

76 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8 Logic Blocks

Related topics
“AND block” on page 78
“CHECKBAD block” on page 78
“CHECKBOOL block” on page 79
“CHGEXEC (Change Execution) block” on page 79
“CONTACTMON (Contact Monitoring) block” on page 80
“DELAY block” on page 81
“EQ (Equal) block” on page 81
“FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) block” on page 82
“GE (Greater than or Equal to) block” on page 82
“GT (Greater Than) block” on page 83
“LE (Less than or Equal to) block” on page 83
“LIMIT block” on page 84
“LT (Less Than) block” on page 84
“MAX block” on page 85
“MAXPULSE block” on page 85
“MIN block” on page 85
“MINPULSE block” on page 86
“MUX (Multiplexer) block” on page 86
“MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) block” on page 87
“MVOTE (Majority Voting) block” on page 87
“NAND block” on page 87
“NE (Not Equal) block” on page 88
“nOON (n out of N voting) block” on page 89
“NOR block” on page 89
“NOT block” on page 90
“OFFDELAY block” on page 90
“ONDELAY block” on page 91
“OR block” on page 91
“PULSE block” on page 91
“QOR (Qualified OR) block” on page 92
“ROL (Rotate Output Left) block” on page 92
“ROR (Rotate Output Right) block” on page 93
“RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block” on page 93
“RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger) block” on page 93
“SEL (Binary Selection) block” on page 94
“SELREAL (Real Selection) block” on page 94
“SHL (Shift Output Left) block” on page 94
“SHR (Shift Output Right) block” on page 95
“SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block” on page 95
“STARTSIGNAL block” on page 96
“TRIG (Rising or Falling edge Trigger) block” on page 96
“WATCHDOG block” on page 97
“XOR block” on page 97
“2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block” on page 98

77
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.1 AND block

Description Provides an up to 8-input AND algorithm, meaning that it performs the

Boolean operation of conjunction. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the
capability of being optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns the Boolean value output (OUT) ON only when all inputs (IN[1], IN[2],
…, IN[8]) are ON. Therefore:
• If all inputs (IN[1..8]) are ON, then: OUT = ON.
• If any input (IN[x]) is OFF, then: OUT = OFF.
If input is inverted, then:
• Actual_IN[x] = NOT (IN[x])
• Else, Actual_IN[x] = IN[x]
Where x equals any valid input.
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] OUT
OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
ON ON ON
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
INPTINVSTS[1..8] OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each
parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
AND Block.

3.8.2 CHECKBAD block

Description Provides bad input handling for desired input.

Function Checks if input (IN) value equals NaN.
• If IN = NaN
• Then, OUT = ON
• Else, OUT = OFF
Inputs IN = Real number
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the CHECKBAD
Block.

78 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.3 CHECKBOOL block

Description Evaluates the input connections and passes these input values through to its associated outputs
based on specific configuration settings.
Function Determines the action to be taken in the event of an invalid input. If the value of INSTS[1..8] is
kBadValSts, the value passed through the block, from IN[1..8] to OUT[1..8], will be modified
based on the configuration of the BADINACT[1..8] parameter.
Also, the Inactive Input Detection Threshold, ( INACTINDETTM[n]) parameter is used, in
conjunction with BADINACT[n] as the amount of time that must expire before the block
determines if it should take the configured Bad Input Action. During this detection time, the
inputs status must be continually INACTIVE in order for the action to be taken. When the input
is INACTIVE for less than this time, no action is taken. If the input goes INACTIVE again, the
time starts counting over. This time is configured in seconds and has a range of 0-8000 seconds.

If BADINACT is configured as OFF then OUT[1..8] is

set equal to OFF
If BADINACT is configured as ON
then OUT[1..8] is set equal to ON
If BADINACT is configured as HoldLast then OUT[1..8]
is set equal to LASTIN[1..8]
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN[1..8] BADINACT[1..8]
INACTINDETTM[1..8] BADINDETTM[1..8]
INSTS[1..8] BADINACTMINTM[1..8]
INSRC[1..8] OUT[1..8]
LASTIN[1..8] OUTSTS[1..8]
LASTINSTS[1..8]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the CHECKBOOL
Block.

3.8.4 CHGEXEC (Change Execution) block

Attention
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for the list of function blocks qualified to run under change driven
execution.

Description The CHGEXEC block helps in optimizing the performance of control modules (CM) used
exclusively for logic computation. CHGEXEC is used to create CM logic strategies which
execute most of their logic by exception, thereby reducing the average processing power
consumed by the strategy. It runs within the CEE on the C300 controller, C200E controller, and
ACE controller.

79
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function The CHGEXEC block enables the design of change driven logic strategies within CMs. Some of
the key functionalities of the CHGEXEC block are as follows:
• Supports up to 32 change detected Boolean inputs.
• Supports output of captured inputs to downstream blocks to prevent consumption of
inconsistent data during CM execution.
• Supports a cascade output that allows operation of multiple CHGEXEC instances to be
coordinated.
• Supports a slow, periodic, background execution for convenience in strategy design.
• Supports engineer-only test options which allow strategy designers to force it to suspend
background execution or to execute continuously in the absence of input changes.
Inputs DATA: Supports 32 change detected Boolean inputs.
Outputs • Supports output of captured inputs to downstream blocks to prevent consumption of
inconsistent data during CM execution.
• Supports a cascade output that allows operation of multiple CHGEXEC instances to be
coordinated.
Parameters AUTOPERIOD DATA[1..32]
AUTOPHASE EXITOPT
BLCKCOMMENT1 LASTDATA[1..32]
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMDATA
BLCKCOMMENT3 TESTOPT
BLCKCOMMENT4 TRIGGER
CHGINDEX
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the CHGEXEC
Block.

3.8.5 CONTACTMON (Contact Monitoring) block

Attention
The CONTACTMON block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.

Description The Contact Monitoring function block is used for limit switches with NO and NC Contact with
the same activation mechanism. In most cases, the limit switch serves some critical applications.
When both digital inputs are ON or OFF at the same time indicating that the switch is
malfunctioning, an alarm needs to be generated to attract immediate attention to the problem.
This functionality is achieved using the Contact Monitoring function block.
Function • Enables alarm generation whenever the state of both inputs is same or different based on the
normal state configuration.
• Provides the input switch status as OUT1 and OUT2.
• With R410, CONTACTMON block allows you to configure individual values for the on-
delay time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO)
is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Inputs IN[1..2] - Input parameter corresponding to the NO and NC Contact of the same micro switch
Outputs • PVFL - gives the negated XOR results of IN[1] and IN[2].
• OUT1 - Tracks IN[1] when both inputs of COC are not ON.
• OUT2 - Tracks IN[2] when both inputs of COC are not ON.

80 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters HIALM.PR OFFNRMALM.TM

HIALM.SV OFFNRMALM.TMO
HIALM.TYPE PV
IN[1,2] PVFL
INALM STATE0
NORMAL OUT1
OFFNRMALM.FL OUT2
OFFNRMALM.SV STATE1
OFFNRMALM.PR STATETEXT[0..1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the CONTACTMON
Block.

3.8.6 DELAY block

Description Provides the ability to delay the output (OUT) response to the given input (IN) by one sample
time delay.
Function The OUT always follows the input (IN) action after one sample time delay.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN OUT
ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DELAY Block.

3.8.7 EQ (Equal) block

Description Provides a 2-input Compare Equal (with deadband range) function, meaning that it compares
two inputs for equality within a specified deadband range or, for single input, a designated trip
point (TP) parameter.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when the two inputs (IN[1] and IN[2]) are considered
equal within a specified deadband range or, for single input, a designated trip point (TP)
parameter..
Inputs IN[1..2] = real numbers
• If only 1 input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter TP and the
value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
• If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT = INBADOPT.
• DEADBAND1, DEADBAND2 and TP have the same data types as the inputs.
• DEADBAND1 and DEADBAND2 must satisfy this constraint: 0 <= DEADBAND1 <=
DEADBAND2
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-
safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.

81
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters DEADBAND1 NUMOFINPUTS

DEADBAND2 ORDERINCM
IN[0..2] OUT
INBADOPT TP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the EQ Block.

3.8.8 FTRIG (Falling-edge Trigger) block

Description Falling-edge Trigger Block -- sets the output (OUT) to ON following the ON-to-OFF transition
of the input and stays ON until the next execution cycle, at which time it returns to OFF.
Function Provides falling edge change detection, thereby turning the output ON if an ON-to-OFF
transition is detected.
Input IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FTRIG Block.

3.8.9 GE (Greater than or Equal to) block

Description Provides a 2-input Compare Greater Than or Equal (with deadband) function, meaning it checks
to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than or equal to either a second input (IN[2]) or,
for single input, a designated trip point parameter.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than or
equal to a second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP) as
follows:
• If IN[1] >= IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
• If IN[1] < (IN[2] - DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
• If (IN[2] - DEADBAND) < IN[1] < IN[2], then output is not changed.
Inputs IN[1..2] = Real numbers
• If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter TP and
the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
• If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
• DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Output OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-
safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND ORDERINCM
IN[0..2] OUT
INBADOPT TP
NUMOFINPUTS

82 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GE Block.

3.8.10 GT (Greater Than) block

Description Provides a 1- or 2-input Compare Greater Than (with deadband) function, meaning that it
checks to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than either a second input (IN[2]) or, for
single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is greater than a
second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP) as follows:
• If IN[1] > IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
• If IN[1] <= (IN[2] - DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
• If (IN[2] - DEADBAND) < IN[1] <= IN[2], then: OUT is not changed.
Input IN[1..2] = Real numbers
• If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter TP and
the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
• If IN[1] and/or IN[2]are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
• DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-
safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND ORDERINCM
IN[0..2] OUT
INBADOPT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GT Block.

3.8.11 LE (Less than or Equal to) block

Description Provides a 2-input Compare Less Than or Equal (with deadband) function, meaning it checks to
see if one designated input (IN[1]) is less than or equal to either a second input (IN[2]) or, for
single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is less than or equal
to a second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP) as follows:
• If IN[1] <= IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
• If IN[1] > (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
• If IN[2] < IN[1] <= (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: output is not changed.
Inputs IN[1..2] = Real numbers
• If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter TP and
the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
• If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
• DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.

83
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-
safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND ORDERINCM
IN[0..2] OUT
INBADOPT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LE Block

3.8.12 LIMIT block

Description Provides a 3-input limit function, meaning that it provides an output that is maintained within a
specified range as defined by user-specified minimum and maximum values.
Function Provides an output that is maintained within a specified range as follows:
• MIN <= OUT <= MAX
• If IN = NaN, then, OUT = NaN
Inputs IN = real number
Output OUT = real number maintained within a specified range
Parameters IN MIN
MAX ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LIMIT Block..

3.8.13 LT (Less Than) block

Description Provides a 1- or 2-input Compare Less Than (with deadband) function, meaning that it checks to
see if one designated input (IN[1]) is less than either a second input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a
designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when one designated input (IN[1]) is less than a second
input (IN[2]) or, for single input, a designated trip point parameter (TP) as follows:
• If IN[1] < IN[2], then: OUT = ON.
• If IN[1] >= (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: OUT = OFF.
• If IN[2] <= IN[1] < (IN[2] + DEADBAND), then: OUT is not changed.
Inputs IN[1..2] = Real numbers
• If only one input connection is configured, an input port is displayed for parameter TP and
the value of TP is used instead of IN[2].
• If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
• DEADBAND and TP have the same data type as that of the inputs.
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-
safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.

84 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters DEADBAND ORDERINCM

IN[0..2] OUT
INBADOPT TP
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LT Block.

3.8.14 MAX block

Description Provides an 8-input MAX function, meaning that it provides an output that is the maximum
value of eight inputs.
Function Used to isolate the highest value of multiple input values and use it as a designated output value.
This block ignores NaN inputs.
Inputs IN[1..8] = Real numbers
Output OUT = Real number
Parameters EUDESC NUMOFINPUTS
HIALM ORDERINCM
IN[1..8] OUT
INPTINVSTS[1..8]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MAX Block.

3.8.15 MAXPULSE block

Description Provides a maximum time limit pulse output (OUT) each time the input (IN) transitions from
OFF to ON. You specify the maximum output pulse width (PULSEWIDTH) in seconds through
configuration.
Function Used to limit the output (OUT) pulse to a maximum width.
• If the input (IN) pulse time is less than or equal to the specified PULSEWIDTH time, IN is
assumed to equal one output (OUT) pulse.
• If the IN pulse time is greater than the specified PULSEWIDTH time, OUT pulse terminates
at end of specified PULSEWIDTH time.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN OUT
ORDERINCM PULSEWIDTH
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MAXPULSE
Block.

3.8.16 MIN block

Description Provides an 8-input MIN function, meaning that it provides an output that is the minimum value
of eight inputs.

85
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Used to isolate the lowest value of multiple input values and use it as a designated output value.
This block ignores NaN inputs.
Inputs IN[..8] = Real numbers
Output OUT = Real number
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
NUMOFINPUTS OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MIN Block.

3.8.17 MINPULSE block

Description Provides a minimum time limit pulse output (OUT) each time the input (IN) transitions from
OFF to ON. You specify the minimum output pulse width (PULSEWIDTH) in seconds through
configuration.
Function Used to define the minimum output (OUT) pulse width.
• If the input (IN) pulse time is less than or equal to the specified PULSEWIDTH time, output
(OUT) pulse width equals the specified PULSEWIDTH time.
• If the IN pulse time is greater than the specified PULSEWIDTH time, OUT pulse width
tracks IN pulse time, so OUT pulse exceeds specified PULSEWIDTH time.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN OUT
ORDERINCM PULSEWIDTH
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MINPULSE
Block.

3.8.18 MUX (Multiplexer) block

Description Provides an up to 8-input Extensible Multiplexer algorithm, meaning that it selects 1 of “n”
inputs depending on a separate input K.
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) to a particular input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) depending on the
value of a separate input K. Input K is clamped at 0 and 7.
Truth Table K OUT
0 IN1
1 IN2
n-1 INn
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
K = 8-bit unsigned integer.
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
K OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MUX Block.

86 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.19 MUXREAL (Real Multiplexer) block

Description Provides an up to 8-input real Multiplexer algorithm, meaning that it selects 1 of“n” inputs
depending on a separate input K.
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) to a particular input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) depending on the
value of a separate input K. Input K is clamped at 0 and 7.
Truth Table K OUT
0 IN1
1 IN2
n-1 INn
Inputs IN[..8] = Real numbers
K = 8-bit unsigned integer.
Outputs OUT = real number
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
K OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MUXREAL
Block.

3.8.20 MVOTE (Majority Voting) block

Description Provides an output (MAJ) value that equals the value of the majority of the inputs (IN[1..8]) and
sets another output (DISCREP) to ON if not all inputs agree for a specified time (DELAY). You
specify the time (DELAYTIME) in seconds through configuration. You must also specify the
number of inputs (NUMOFINPUTS) through configuration.
Function Sets the MAJ output equal to the value of the majority of the inputs (IN[1..8]).
Sets the DISCREP output to ON, if not all inputs agree during the specified time (DELAY).
DELAY is a unit integer with time unit in seconds.
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value.
Outputs MAJ, DISCREP =Boolean value
Parameters DELAYTIME MAJ
DISCREP NUMOFINPUTS
IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MVOTE Block.

3.8.21 NAND block

Description Provides an up to 8-input NAND algorithm, meaning that it performs an inverted AND function.
Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) OFF only when all inputs (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) are ON;
therefore:
• If all inputs are ON, then: OUT = OFF.
• If any input is OFF, then: OUT = ON.

87
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] OUT

OFF OFF ON
OFF ON ON
ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF
Inputs IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8] = digital signals
Output OUT = digital signal controlled by status of the input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINC
M
INPTINVSTS[1..8]
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NAND Block.

3.8.22 NE (Not Equal) block

Description Provides a 2-input Compare Not Equal (with deadband range) function, meaning that it checks
to see if one designated input (IN[1]) is not equal to either a second input (IN[2]) or, for single
input, a designated trip point parameter (TP).
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON only when the two inputs (IN[1] and IN[2]) are not
considered equal within a specified deadband range.
• If ABS (IN[1] -IN[2]) <= DEADBAND1, then: OUT = OFF.
• Else, if ABS (IN[1] -IN[2]) > DEADBAND2, then: OUT = ON.
• If IN[1] and/or IN[2] are NaN (Not a Number), OUT is set to INBADOPT.
• DEADBAND1 and DEADBAND2 must satisfy the following constraint: 0<=
DEADBAND1 <= DEADBAND2.
• DEADBAND1, DEADBAND2, and TP = real numbers.
Inputs IN[1] and IN[2] = real numbers
• If there is only one input, then IN[2] = TP.
Output OUT = Boolean value.
Comparison blocks set their outputs to a configurable INBADOPT that defines the output fail-
safe value when any input is NaN. This is required, since it is not specified whether the
comparison is ordered or unordered.
Parameters DEADBAND1 NUMOFINPUTS
DEADBAND2 ORDERINCM
IN[0..2] OUT
INBADOPT TP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NE Block.

88 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.23 nOON (n out of N voting) block

Description n (N)-out-of-N (IN) voting block; outputs are computed as follows:

• VOTED output is set to ON if at least n (N) inputs are ON, otherwise it is set to OFF.
• ORED output is set to ON if any input is ON, otherwise it is set to OFF.
• ALARM output is a pulse output -- every time an input turns ON, a fixed pulse (of the
pulsewidth specified by PULSEWIDTH parameter) is generated, provided the total number
of inputs which are ON is less than n.
Function Provides VOTED, ORED and ALARM outputs in support of logical functions.
Inputs IN[1..20] = Boolean value
N = 8-bit unsigned integer (range = 1-5)
• There can be a maximum of 20 inputs (IN = 20)
Outputs • VOTED, ORED = Boolean state (ON or OFF) as determined by the inputs.
• ALARM = pulse output, width specified by parameter PULSEWIDTH. PULSEWIDTH is a
unit integer with time unit in seconds
Parameters ALARM ORDERINCM
IN[1..20] ORED
N PULSEWIDTH
VOTED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the nOON Block.

3.8.24 NOR block

Description Provides an up to 8-input NOR algorithm, meaning that it performs an inverted OR function.
Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) OFF if any one input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) is ON; therefore:
• If all inputs are OFF, then: OUT = ON.
• If any one input is ON, then: OUT = OFF.
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] OUT
OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
ON ON OFF
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean values
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by status of input signals
Parameters INPTINVSTS[1..8] ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NOR Block.

89
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.25 NOT block

Description Provides a NOT algorithm, meaning it performs an inversion function.

Function Reverses the state of a digital input (IN) such that the output (OUT) is the complement of the
single input; therefore:
• OUT = opposite of IN
– If IN = ON, then: OUT = OFF.
– If IN = OFF, then OUT = ON.
Truth Table IN OUT
OFF ON
ON OFF
Input IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = complement of input signal (Boolean)
Parameters EUDESC ORDERINCM
HIALM OUT
IN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NOT Block.

3.8.26 OFFDELAY block

Description When the input state changes from ON to OFF, an internal timer starts counting down the delay
specified by DLYTIME. When it times out, the input is monitored again, and if it is still OFF,
the output is set OFF, When the input state transitions too ON, the output is set to ON
immediately and the timer is shut off.
Function Used to delay the input by a specified delay time after an ON/OFF device transitions from the
ON state to the OFF state.
• Delay time in seconds is specified by the DELAYTIME parameter.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
• No delay is provided when the input goes from the OFF state back to the ON state.
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
When the input transitions from the OFF state to the ON state, the output is set to ON
immediately.
Parameters DELAYTIME ORDERINCM
IN OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the OFFDELAY
Block.

90 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.27 ONDELAY block

Description When the input state changes from OFF to ON, an internal timer starts counting down the delay
specified by DLYTIME. When it times out, the input is monitored again, and if it is still ON, the
output is set ON, When the input state transitions to OFF, the output is set to OFF immediately
and the timer is shut off.
Function Used to delay the input by a specified delay time after an ON/OFF device transitions from the
OFF state to the ON state.
• Delay time in seconds is specified by the DELAYTIME parameter.
Input IN = Boolean value
• No delay is provided when the input goes from the ON state back to the OFF state.
Output OUT = Boolean value
• When the input transitions from the ON state to the OFF state, the output is set to OFF
immediately.
Parameters DELAYTIME ORDERINCM
IN OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ONDELAY Block.

3.8.28 OR block

Description Provides an up to 8-input OR algorithm, meaning that it performs the inclusive OR Boolean
function. Each input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted, if
required.
Function Turns the digital output (OUT) ON if any one input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) is ON; therefore:
• If all inputs are OFF, then: OUT = OFF.
• If any one input is ON, then: OUT = ON.
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] OUT
OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON
ON ON ON
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
INPTINVSTS[1..8] OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the OR Block.

3.8.29 PULSE block

Description Provides a fixed pulse output (OUT) each time the input (IN) transitions from OFF to ON. You
specify the fixed output pulse width (PULSEWIDTH) in seconds through configuration.

91
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Used to define the fixed output (OUT) pulse width.

• If the input (IN) pulse time is less than or equal to the fixed PULSEWIDTH time, output
(OUT) pulse width equals the fixed PULSEWIDTH time.
• If the IN pulse time is greater than the fixed PULSEWIDTH time, OUT pulse width is
restricted to the fixed PULSEWIDTH time. Another output pulse cannot be generated until
the preceding pulse has completed.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN OUT
ORDERINCM PULSEWIDTH
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PULSE Block.

3.8.30 QOR (Qualified OR) block

Description Qualified-OR provides an (N + 1)-input generic qualified-OR function, meaning that the output
(OUT) is turned ON if a certain number (k) of total inputs (IN[n]) is ON. Each input (IN[1],
IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns the output (OUT) ON if a specified number (K) of total inputs is ON.
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] IN[3] IN[4] IN[5] K OUT
ON ON OFF ON OFF 3 ON
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value
K = 1 to 8 (Integer)
Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by status of input signals.
Parameters IN[1..8] K
INPTINVSTS[1..8] ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the QOR Block.

3.8.31 ROL (Rotate Output Left) block

Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is rotated to the left by the number of bits (N)
specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by rotating the bits in the input (IN) left by the number
of bits (N) specified.
• OUT = IN left rotated by N bits, circular.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
N OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROL Block.

92 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.32 ROR (Rotate Output Right) block

Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is rotated to the right by the number of bits (N)
specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by rotating the bits in the input (IN) right by the
number of bits (N) specified.
• OUT = IN right rotated by N bits, circular.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
N OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROR Block.

3.8.33 RS (Reset dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block

Description Provides a bistable Reset Dominant flip-flop as defined in the IEC DIS 1131-3 standard.
Function Specifies the output (Q) of the flip-flop as a function of the input S (Set), the input R (Reset),
and the last state of Q.
Truth Table S R Q
0 (OFF) 0 (OFF) No Change
0 (OFF) 1 (ON) 0 (OFF)
1 (ON) 0 (OFF) 1 (ON)
1 (ON) 1 (ON) 0 (OFF)
Inputs S and R = Boolean value
Output Q = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Parameters ORDERINCM Q RS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RS Block.

3.8.34 RTRIG (Rising edge Trigger) block

Description Rising-edge Trigger sets the output (OUT) to ON following the OFF-to-ON transition of the
input (IN) and stays at ON until the next execution cycle, at which time it returns to OFF.
Function Provides rising edge change detection, thereby turning the output ON if an OFF-to-ON transition
is detected.
Input IN = Boolean value
Output OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
OUT

93
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RTRIG Block.

3.8.35 SEL (Binary Selection) block

Description Provides a 3-input selector function, meaning it selects 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2]) depending
on the separate input G.
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) equal to the value of 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2]), depending on
the value of a separate input (G).
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] G OUT
IN[1] IN[2] OFF IN[1]
IN[1] IN[2] ON IN[2]
Inputs IN[1..2] =Boolean value
G = Boolean value
Output OUT =Boolean value depending on the values of IN[1] and IN[2].
Parameters G INPTINVSTS[1..2]
IN[0..2] ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SEL Block.

3.8.36 SELREAL (Real Selection) block

Description Provides a 3-input selector function, meaning it selects 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2]) depending
on the separate input (G).
Function Sets the actual output (OUT) equal to the value of 1 of 2 inputs (IN[1] or IN[2]), depending on
the value of a separate input (G).
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] G OUT
IN[1] IN[2] OFF IN[1]
IN[1] IN[2] ON IN[2]
Inputs IN1 and IN2 = real numbers
G = Boolean value
Output OUT = Real number
Parameters G ORDERINCM
IN[0..2] OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SELREAL Block.

3.8.37 SHL (Shift Output Left) block

Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is shifted to the left by the number of bits (N)
specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits (N) through
configuration.

94 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by shifting the bits in the input (IN) left by the
number of bits (N) specified.
• OUT = IN left shifted by N bits, zero filled on right.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
N OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SHL Block.

3.8.38 SHR (Shift Output Right) block

Description Provides a 16-bit integer output (OUT) that is shifted to the right by the number of bits (N)
specified from the 16-bit integer input (IN). You specify the number of bits through
configuration.
Function Used to shift out bits in the output (OUT) by shifting the bits in the input (IN) right by the
number of bits (N) specified.
• OUT = IN right shifted by N bits, zero filled on left.
Inputs IN = 16-bit integer only
Output OUT = 16-bit integer
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
N OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SHR Block.

3.8.39 SR (Set dominant SR-FLIP-FLOP) block

Description Provides a bistable Set Dominant flip-flop as defined in the IEC DIS 1131-3 standard.
Function Specifies the output (Q) of the flip-flop as a function of the input S (set), the input R (Reset),
and the last state of Q.
Truth Table S R Q
0 (OFF) 0 (OFF) No Change
0 (OFF) 1 (ON) 0 (OFF)
1 (ON) 0 (OFF) 1 (ON)
1 (ON) 1 (ON) 1 (ON)
Inputs S and R = Boolean values
Outputs Q = Boolean value controlled by the status of the input signals.
Parameters ORDERINCM Q
PVERSION R
S
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SR Block.

95
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.40 STARTSIGNAL block

Description Supports handling of restarts within Control Modules (CM). Can be used within any CM to
provide better control over how the module initializes in response to events such as Cold or
Warm restart.
Function Supports an enumeration-valued summary parameter named RESTART. The normal value for
the RESTART parameter is NONE. Following a transition, it shows a value other than NONE
until the end of the first block execution. The possible enumeration values for RESTART are as
follows:
NONE (0)
CMLOAD (1)
CMACTIVE (3)
CEECOLD (4)
CEEWARM (5)
CEESWITCH (6)
Inputs Boolean value
Outputs RESTART = Enumerated value
Parameters ANYRESTARTFL CMACTIVEFL
CEECOLDFL CMLOADFL
CEESWITCHFL ORDERINCM
CEEWARMFL RESTART
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the STARTSIGNAL
Block.

3.8.41 TRIG (Rising or Falling edge Trigger) block

Description Sets the output (OUT) to ON following the OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF transition of the input
(IN) and stays at ON until the next execution cycle, at which time it returns to OFF.
Function Provides edge change detection, thereby turning the output ON if an OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF
transition is detected. This block assumes that the input is starting at its OFF stage the first time
it is activated.
Inputs IN = Boolean value
Outputs OUT = Boolean value
Parameters IN ORDERINCM
OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TRIG Block.

96 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.8.42 WATCHDOG block

Description Monitors other system functions or remote devices and sets the output (OUT) to ON if the
monitored function or device fails to communicate.
Example: Applications like TotalPlant Batch uses the Watchdog item to determine the
communication between TotalPlant Batch server (TPB) and Experion controllers.

Note
TotalPlant Batch (TPB) is a legacy batch product that is not available for new sale.
However, Honeywell continues to support the existing TotalPlant Batch (TPB)
customer. New batch customers are recommended to buy the Experion Batch Manager
(EBM).

Watchdog also provides a Watchdog protocol in Experion, which is simple set/reset protocol.
The application such as TPB server sets the Watch dog by writing one to the watchdog item. The
Experion controller accessed through the data server is referred as TPB Phase Data Interface on
Experion. It is expected to reset the watchdog to zero when a non-zero value is detected.
Therefore, when you reset the watch dog values, TPB server can detect the presence of a healthy
controller. However, the controller can detect the presence of a healthy TPB server by periodic
setting of the watchdog.
If the controller determines that the TPB server has not written to the watchdog for a long period
of time, then it assumes that the TPB server is no longer available and responds by holding all
active phases within. If the TPB server detects that the controller does not reset the watchdog, it
assumes that communication to all tags defined in the data server connection is not reliable.
Batches using any of these tags is in response when the communication problems that occur.
Function Used to monitor other system functions or remote devices.
• Monitored function or device must set IN parameter to ON within a specified time interval
(DELAYTIME), otherwise it is assumed to have failed and output (OUT) is set to ON. The
DELAYTIME is an integer with unit time in seconds.
• If output (OUT) is ON, it is reset to OFF as soon as IN is set to ON.
Input IN = Boolean value (ON/OFF)
Output OUT = Boolean value (ON/OFF)
Parameters DELAYTIME ORDERINCM
IN OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the WATCHDOG
Block.

3.8.43 XOR block

Description Provides an up to 8-input XOR algorithm, meaning it performs the exclusive OR function. Each
input (IN[1], IN[2], …, IN[8]) has the capability of being optionally inverted, if required.
Function Turns output (OUT) ON only if an odd number of inputs are ON; otherwise, OUT is OFF.
Truth Table IN[1] IN[2] OUT
OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF
Inputs IN[1..8] = Boolean value

97
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs OUT = Boolean value controlled by the status of input signals.

Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
INPTINVSTS[1..8] OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theoryfor more information on the XOR Block.

3.8.44 2OO3 (2 out of 3 voting) block

Description 2-out-of-3 Voting block - outputs (DISCREP and MAJ) are determined as follows:
• DISCREP = NOT (IN[1] = IN[2] = IN[3]) for duration >= DELAY
• MAJ = value held by the majority of the inputs.
Function Sets the output (DISCREP) to ON if NOT all inputs agree for a specified time duration
(DELAY); otherwise, it is set to OFF.
Inputs IN[1..3] = Boolean values
Outputs DISCREP & MAJ = Boolean values
Parameters DELAYTIME MAJ
DISCREP ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the 2003 Block.

98 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.9 Math Blocks

Related topics
“ABS block” on page 99
“ADD block” on page 99
“DIV block” on page 100
“EXP block” on page 100
“LN block” on page 101
“LOG block” on page 101
“MOD block” on page 102
“MUL block” on page 102
“NEG block” on page 102
“POW block” on page 103
“ROUND block” on page 103
“SQRT block” on page 104
“SUB block” on page 104
“TRUNC block” on page 105
“ROLLAVG block” on page 105

3.9.1 ABS block

Description Provides the Absolute Value function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the absolute value of the user connected input (IN[1]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Absolute value of IN1
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ABS Block.

3.9.2 ADD block

Description Provides the N-input add function.

99
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Sums the value of the number of inputs (IN[1..8]) configured by the user as the output (OUT).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..8] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Sum of (IN1, 1N2, ..INn
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ADD Block.

3.9.3 DIV block

Description Provides the divide function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the quotient of input 1 (IN[1]) divided by input 2 (IN[2]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals). Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example,
divide by zero. If bad input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired
input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Quotient of IN1 divided by IN2.
Parameters IN[1..2] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DIV Block.

3.9.4 EXP block

Description Provides the exponent function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the exponent of the user connected input (IN[1]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value

100 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Output OUT = e to the power of IN1.

Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the EXP Block.

3.9.5 LN block

Description Provides the natural logarithm function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the natural logarithm of the user connected input (IN[1],
log to the base of e).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Natural logarithm of IN1 (log to the base of e)
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LN Block.

3.9.6 LOG block

Description Provides the logarithm function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the base 10 logarithm of the user connected input
(IN[1]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Base 10 logarithm of IN1.
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LOG Block.

101
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.9.7 MOD block

Description Provides the modulo function.

Function At runtime, the user connected inputs (IN[1], IN[2]) are truncated to integer and the output
(OUT) becomes the Remainder of IN[1] divided by IN[2].
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Remainder of IN1 divided by IN2
OUT = NaN for divide by zero, NaN, or infinity value inputs
Parameters IN[1..2] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MOD Block.

3.9.8 MUL block

Description Provides the N-input multiply function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the Product of the user connected inputs (IN[1..8]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..8] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Product of (IN1, 1N2, ..INn
Parameters IN[1..8] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
NUMOFINPUTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MUL Block.

3.9.9 NEG block

Description Provides the negative function.

102 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the negative (-) equivalent of the user connected input
(IN[1]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = - (IN1)
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NEG Block.

3.9.10 POW block

Description Provides the raise to power function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input 1 (IN[1]) raised to the power
the user connected input 2 (IN[2]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = IN1 raised to the power of IN2.
Parameters IN[1..2] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the POW Block.

3.9.11 ROUND block

Description Provides the round up function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input (IN[1]) rounded up to the
nearest integer value.
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.

103
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Input IN[1] = Input connection value

Output OUT = REAL number of (IN1 rounded up to the nearest integer number)
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ROUND Block.

3.9.12 SQRT block

Description Provides the square root function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the square root of the user connected input (IN[1]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = Square root of IN1
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SQRT Block.

3.9.13 SUB block

Description Provides the subtract function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input 1 (IN[1]) minus the user
connected input 2 (IN[2]).
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1..2] = Input connection value
Output OUT = IN2 minus IN2
Parameters IN[1..2] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SUB Block.

104 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.9.14 TRUNC block

Description Provides the truncate function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the user connected input (IN[1]) rounded down to the
nearest integer value.
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for Reals).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN[1] = Input connection value
Output OUT = REAL number of (IN1 rounded down to the nearest integer number)
Parameters IN[1] ORDERINCM
NAME OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TRUNC Block.

3.9.15 ROLLAVG block

Description Provides the rolling average function.

Function At runtime, the output (OUT) becomes the quotient of sum of all good samples (IN) divided by
number of good samples.
Math blocks execute a self describing and expression-less math function based on the user's
configuration within a control strategy in Control Builder with minimum and more efficient
memory usage.
When a block cannot fetch a value from the input connection, the value defaults to a failsafe
value (NaN for FLOAT64s).
Math functions use existing capabilities to process infinity. For example, divide by zero. If bad
input handling is desired, use the Logic CHECKBAD block on the desired input.
Input IN = Input connection value (FLOAT64 double-precision floating-point number).
Output OUT = Quotient of sum of all good values in buffer (IN) divided by number of good values in
buffer (FLOAT64 double-precision floating-point number).
Parameters ROLLAVGBAD ROLLMULTIPLE
ROLLAVGOK ROLLAVGSZ
ROLLBFBASE ROLLAVGRST
ROLLBUF IN
ROLLFRBASE ORDERINCM
ROLLFREQ OUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RollAvg Block.

105
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.10 Power Generation Blocks

Related topics
“GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) block” on page 106
“HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block” on page 107
“LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block” on page 111
“LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block” on page 112
“MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block” on page 114
“SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block” on page 115
“VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control) block” on page 118

3.10.1 GRPCAPRBK (Group Capability and Runback ) block

Attention
The GRPCAPRBK block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers

Description A Coordinated Master Control (CMC) scheme includes a Unit Load Demand Scheme that uses
unit capability and runback rate to ensure that the unit load increase or decrease is executed
within the limits that are safe for the operation of a Boiler- Turbine-Generator (BTG) unit.The
unit load demand scheme is a part of CMC scheme that receives the load demand from load
dispatcher and checks the demand signal against the allowable operating limits for the unit and
the minimum load desired. During online operation, the demand can also be Runback in the
event of loss of auxiliary equipment such as losing one forced draft fan, which limits the load
carrying capability of the unit.
All the auxiliary equipment like ID Fan, FD Fan, PA Fan, primary/secondary Air Pre Heaters,
BCW Pump, Turbine, CEP Pump, CW Pump, Mills, and so on are monitored continuously for
unit capability because each group of equipment is compared with the Load SP and the
minimum is selected as the SP to the Unit Capability ramp generator. When one of the
equipment trips, the SP to the Unit capability ramp generator comes down correspondingly. The
output of the Ramp Generator is brought down by runback action. The runback rate depends
upon the equipment that has tripped.
The Group Capability and Runback function block provides the Group Capability and Group
Runback Rate of the configured number of equipment. The block accepts configurable number
of equipments' status inputs and desired unit load set point.
Function • Provides the capability for a group of similar equipment depending upon the equipment
status.
• Provides the Group Capability and Group Runback Rate for the configured number of
equipments.
• Accepts configurable number of equipments' input status and desired unit load set point.
• Provides a configurable parameter NUMBEROFEQP which represents the number of
equipments used for input connection to the block.
• Enables the user to configure equipment OFF state Capability Value (OFFCAP) and ON
state Capability Value (ONCAP) for individual equipment.
• Generates a Safe output flag when the load setpoint input status bad or all equipement on/off
staus are bad.
• Generates alarm for Run back Active when out capability is less than unit load set point
Inputs • LOADSP - Load Set point. The input LOADSP of this block can be from any Regulatory
Control block like AUTOMAN, SWITCH or RATIOBIAS.
• DI[1..10]- DI of this block can be from any block with digital output.

106 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs • OUTCAP - Output capability of a group of equipment

• RUNBKACTFL - Runback control flag
• ROCLM - Current ROC Limit
• SAFEOPTRIGFL- Safe output triggered
Parameters CAPVALOPT RBROCLM
CAPSAFEVAL ROCLM
DISTS[1..10] ROCLMOPT
GCBLOCKSINCM ROCSAFELM
HIALM.PR RUNBKACTALM.FL
HIALM.SV RUNBKACTALM.PR
HIALM.TYPE RUNBKACTALM.SV
INALM RUNBKACTFL
LOADSPSTS SAFEOPALM.FL
LOADSP SAFEOPALM.PR
NUMBEROFEQP SAFEOPALM.SV
OFFCAP[1..10] SAFEOPTRIGFL
ONCAP[1..10]
OUTCAP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the GRPCAPRBK
Block.

3.10.2 HTMOTOR (HT Motor Drive Control) block

Attention
The HTMOTOR block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers.

Description The HTMOTOR Control block is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) customized to meet the HT Motor Drive control requirements found in power plants.
The HTMOTOR block is designed to accept inputs and interlocks pertaining to a conventional
HTMOTOR drive and its switchgear and is capable of controlling the drive through outputs
governed by predetermined logic.
Function Processes inputs typically from a HT Switch Gear, Local and Unit Control Panel, equipment
protection related feedback, process related interlocks and generates output based on
predetermined logic.
Supports control of HT Motor drives from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ (through
SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or a combination of all these options.
Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and equipment or process interlocks
tripping.
Built-in First Up Logic to determine the cause of trip and built-in interlocks with vibration,
winding and bearing temperature.
Optional feedback and trip time recording.
Maintenance statistics similar to those in the Device Control block.
Preserves Device Control functionality.

107
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs • Process Feedback (from HT Swgr): Motor RUN/STOP (MTR/MTS), MOTOR Trip
(MTT), Lockup Relay Reset (LRR), Breaker in Remote (BKR), Breaker in Service or Test
(BKS or BKT).
• Other Inputs : Local/Remote Selection Switch,LOCALRUN/STOP, AUTORUN/
STOP,SEQRUN/STOP, UCPRELease/OPEN/CLOSE, Console Run, Console Stop,
Permissives (PI[0,1]), STOP/RUN Process Interlocks(OI[0,1]),Bearing Temp Trip,Winding
Temp Trip,Vibration Trip.
Outputs Command RUN/STOP (Latched) and PORUN/STOP (Pulsed), Track Run/Stop/Trip feedback
time.

108 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters AUTOSTART MTT

AUTOSTOP MTR
AUTOSTOPACTED MTS
AUTONOCMD MTTACTED
ASTEPID NORMMODE
BACKCALCIN NORMMODEATTR
BADPVALM.SV NULLPVFL
BADPVALM.FL NUMALLTRANS
BADPVALM.PR NUMSIOVRD
BRNGTEMTRIP NUMTRANS
BYPASS OI[0..1]
BKTBYPASS OIALM[0..2].FL
BKS OIALM[0..2].PR
BKT OIALM[0..2].OPT
BKR OIALM[0..2].SV
BRNGTEMPALM.PR OIACTED
BRNGTEMPTRIPACTED OP
BRNGTEMPALM.FL OPACTED
BRNGTEMPALM.OPT OPFINAL
BRNGTEMPALM.SV OPREQ
CMDDISALM.TM OPTYPE
CMDDISALM.SV OFFNRMALM.OPT
CMDDISALM.PR OFFNRMALM.FL
CMDDISALM.FL OFFNRMALM.PR
CMDFALALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV
CMDFALALM.TM PI[0..1]
CMDFALALM.FL PVAUTO
CLROPREQFL PVFL/
CMDRUN PVSOURCE
CMDSTOP PVSRCOPT
CONSSTARTRDY PORUN
DOVALSTS POSTOP
FIRSTUPACTED POSTOPCONNECTED
GOPACTED PORUNCONNECTED
GPVAUTO REDTAG
GOPSCADA REMOTESWITCH
GPV RESETFIRSTUP
GOPFINAL RESTARTOPT
GOP RESETFL
HIALM.SV RUNPULSEWIDTH
HIALM.PR RUNTIME
HIALM.TYPE SAFEREDTAG

109
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

HOLDOPT SEALOPT
INALM SEQSTOP
INITCONNECTD SEQSTOPACTED
INITMAN SI
INITOPOPT SIALM.OPT
INITOPAFTLD SEQSTART
INITREQ SIALM.FL
LASTREQFL SIALM.SV
LASTOPTYPE SIALM.PR
LASTOPREQ SIACTED
LASTSTEP STARTOPT
LASTGOPREQ STOPOPT
LOCALMAN STOPTIME
LOCALSWITCH STOPPULSEWIDTH
LOCALSTART TRIPTIME
LOCALSTOPACTED TRKNUMTRANS
LOCALSTOP TRKSTATETIME
LRR TRKSIOVRD
LRRACTED UCPREL
LRRALM.FL UCPSTART/
LRRALM.PR UCPSTOP
LRRALM.SV UCPSTOPACTED
LRRALM.OPT UNCMDALM.FL
MODE UNCMDALM.PR
MODETRACK UNCMDALM.SV
MODEATTR VIBRTRIP
MODEATTRCHGFL VIBTRIPACTED
MODEATTRFL.PROG VIBRALM.FL
MODEATTRFL.OPER VIBRALM.PR
MODEATTRFL.NORM VIBRALM.SV
MOTORTRIPALM.FL VIBRALM.OPT
MOTORTRIPALM.PR WDGTEMPTRIP
MOTORTRIPALM.SV WDGTEMPTRIPACTED
MOTORTRIPALM.OPT WDGTEMPALM.FL
WDGTEMPALM.PR
WDGTEMPALM.SV
WDGTEMPALM.OPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the HTMOTOR Block.

110 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.10.3 LEVELCOMP (Drum Level Computation) block

Attention
The LEVELCOMP block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers

Description In power plants, the Drum Level is measured indirectly in terms of differential pressure (DP),
and the level is computed based on the measured DP. DP to Level computation techniques are
employed in Level measurements in Boiler Drums, Deaerators, and HP Heaters, where the
process fluid is at high pressure and temperature. In such cases, the Level component is
measured in terms of DP across the measuring setup. It is also assumed that the vessel remains
in a saturated state of the process fluid. The pressure inside the container is measured and the
density of Steam and Water are derived from this pressure input using an algorithm. Based on
Density and DP, the level is computed using the equation of continuity. This new block
computes Drum level from the measured DP and other field specific constants.
Function • The Drum Level Computation function block computes the drum level from the measured
DP, Pressure and other field specific constants.
• The block has an algorithm for generating steam and water density from the given Pressure
input as long as the pressure input is good.
• The Level Status (PV) becomes bad when one of the input's status becomes bad and PV is
not be computed.
• Enables the user to select ENGUNIT for DP, Pressure, WETLEGTEMP, and drum level.
Inputs • DP - Differential Pressure of the Drum
• PRESSURE - Pressure Input
Outputs • PV - Drum Level in Engineering Units
• PVP - Drum level in %
• DENSTEAM - Density of steam in drum
• DENWATER - Density of water in drum
• DENWATERREF - Density of WETLEG water
Parameters BADPVALM.PR INALM
BADPVALM.SV PRESSURE
BADPVALM.FL PV
DP PVEUHI
DPSLOPE PVEULO
DPBIAS PRSLOPE
DENWATERREF PRBIAS
DPENGUNIT PVP
DENWATER PVSTS
DENSTEAM PRENGUNIT
NUMBEROFEQP PVENGUNIT
HIALM.PR STNDPIPELEN
HIALM.SV TMPENGUNIT
HIALM.TYPE WETLEGTEMP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LEVELCOMP
Block.

111
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.10.4 LTMOTOR (LT Motor Drive Control) block

Attention
The LTMOTOR block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers.

Description The LTMOTOR Control FB is derived from the Device Control block in Experion (DEVCTL)
customized to meet the LT Motor Drive control requirements found in power plants. The
LTMOTOR FB is designed to accept inputs and interlocks pertaining to a conventional
LTMOTOR drive's MCC and is capable of controlling the drive through outputs governed by
predetermined logic.
Function • Process inputs typical from a MCC, Local and Unit Control Panel, Process related interlocks
and generate output based on predetermined logic.
• Supports control of LT Motor drives from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ (through
SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or any combination of all these options.
• Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and process interlocks tripping.
• Optional feedback and trip time recording.
• Maintenance Statistics similar to those in the Device Control block.
• Preserves Device Control functionality.
Inputs • Process Feedback (from MCC): Motor RUN/STOP (MTR/MTS) and MOTOR Trip
(MTT).
• Other Input: Local/Remote Selection Switch, LOCALRUN/STOP, AUTORUN/STOP,
SEQRUN/STOP, UCPRELease/OPEN/CLOSE, STOP/RUN Permissives (PO [0,1]),
STOP/RUN Interlocks(OI[0,1]) and Track Run/Stop/Trip feedback time.
Outputs Command RUN/STOP (Latched) and PORUN/STOP (Pulsed).

112 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ASTEPID MOTORTRIPALM.SV

AUTOSTART MTR
AUTOSTOP MTS
BACKCALCIN MTT
BADPVALM.FL NORMMODE
BADPVALM.PR NORMMODEATTR
BADPVALM.SV NULLPVFL
BYPASS NUMALLTRANS
BYPERM NUMSIOVRD
CLROPREQFL NUMTRANS
CMDDISALM.FL OFFNRMALM.FL
CMDDISALM.PR OFFNRMALM.OPT
CMDDISALM.SV OFFNRMALM.PR
CMDDISALM.TM OFFNRMALM.SV
CMDFALALM.FL OI[0..1]
CMDFALALM.PR OIALM[0..2].FL
CMDFALALM.SV OIALM[0..2].OPT
CMDFALALM.TM OIALM[0..2].PR
CMDRUN OIALM[0..2].SV
CMDSTOP OP
CONSSTARTRDY OPFINAL
DOVALSTS OPREQ
GOP OPTYPE
GOPFINAL PI[0..1]
GOPREQ PORUN
GOPSCADA POSTOP
GPV POSTOPCONNECTED
GPVAUTO PV
HIALM.PR PVAUTO
HIALM.SV PVFL/
HIALM.TYPE PVSOURCE
HOLDOPT PVSRCOPT
INALM REDTAG
INITCONNECTD REMOTESWITCH
INITMAN RESTARTOPT
INITOPAFTLD RESETFL
INITOPT RUNPULSEWIDTH
INITREQ RUNTIME
LASTGOPREQ SEQSTART
LASTOPREQ SEQSTOP
LASTOPTYPE SI
LASTREQFL SIALM.FL

113
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

LASTSTEP SIALM.SV
LOCALMAN SIALM.OPT
LOCALSTART SIALM.PR
LOCALSTOP STARTOPT
LOCALSWITCH STOPOPT
MODE STOPPULSEWIDTH
MODEATTR STOPTIME
MODEATTRCHGFL TRIPTIME
MODEATTRFL.NORM TRKNUMTRANS
MODEATTRFL.OPER TRKSIOVRD
MODEATTRFL.PROG TRKSTATETIME
MODETRACK UCPREL
MOTORTRIPALM.FL UCPSTART
MOTORTRIPALM.OPT UCPSTOP
MOTORTRIPALM.PR; UNCMDALM.FL
UNCMDALM.PR
UNCMDALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the LTMOTOR Block.

3.10.5 MAINIBV (Main IBV Logic) block

Attention
The MAINIBV block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers

Description Main IBV logic is required for huge valves which hav a small bypass valve connected across the
main valve port. The main valve opens only when the bypass valve opens fully and a sufficient
time is allowed to equalize the pressure across the main valve ports. The Main IBV block
receives a command from the operator, processes the commands and schedules it to the IBV and
Main valve with a predetermined logic built into it.
In the Main IBV logic function block, there is a user configurable DELAY parameter for
providing the time delay before releasing an open command to the Main valve from the moment
the IBV open feedback is sensed by the block. The feedback can be open limit switch of IBV.
The bypass valve in not kept open if the main valve open command fails. A user configurable
timer is provided to close the IBV in such eventualities.
Function • The Main IBV block receives a command from the OPER or PROG, processes it and
schedules the command to the IBV and Main valve with a predetermined logic built into it.
• An open sequence failure alarm is triggered in case an OPEN command fails to open the
Main valve.
• A close sequence failure alarm is triggered in case a CLOSE command failed to close Main
valve.
• A BADPV alarm is triggered in case IBV open feedback or Main close feedback is in BAD
state.
• The Main IBV commands the Drive Control blocks for further operation of the Main and
IBV valve.

114 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs • OPENSEQ - Open Sequence command from PROGRAM to the valve system.
• CLOSESEQ - Close Sequence command from PROGRAM to the valve system.
• IBVOPNFDBK - IBV open feed back switch
• MAINCLOSEFDBK - Main valve close feedback switch.
Outputs • OPENIBV\CLOSEIBV - Open\Close Command to IBV drive control.
• OPENMAIN\CLOSEMAIN - OPEN\CLOSE command to Main Valve drive control.
Parameters BADPVALM.FL MAINCLOSEFDBKSTS
BADPVALM.PR MAINVLVFDBKTO
BADPVALM.SV MODE
CLOSEIBV MODEATTR
CLOSEMAIN MODEATTRFL.NORM
CLROPREQFL MODEATTRFL.OPER
CLOSESEQ MODEATTRFL.PROG
CLOSESEQALM.FL NORMMODE
CLOSESEQALM.PR NORMMODEATTR
CLOSESEQALM.SV OP
DELAY OPENIBV
HIALM.PR OPENMAIN
HIALM.SV OPENSEQ
HIALM.TYPE OPENSEQALM.FL
IBVOPNFDBK OPENSEQALM.PR
IBVOPNFDBKSTS OPENSEQALM.SV
IBVVLVFDBKTO SEQSTATUS
INALM
MAINCLOSEFDBK
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MAINIBV Block.

3.10.6 SOLENOID (Solenoid Valve Drive Control) block

Attention
The SOLENOID block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers

Description The Solenoid Valve Control FB is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) customized to meet the Solenoid Valve control requirements commonly found in a
power plant. The Solenoid FB is designed to accept inputs and interlocks pertaining to a
conventional solenoid and is capable of controlling the valve through output governed by
predetermined logic.
Function • Processes feedback from the field, Local and Unit Control Panel, process related interlocks
and generates output based on predetermined logic.
• Supports control of Solenoid valve from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ (through
SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or a combination of all these options.
• Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and interlocks tripping.
• Provides latched OPEN commands to the MCC/solenoid and the Outputs are reset only on
issuance of a CLOSE command.
• Preserves Device Control functionality.

115
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs • Process Feedback: Limit Switch OPEN/CLOSE.

• Other Inputs: Local/Remote Selection Switch,LOCALOPEN/CLOSE, AUTOOPEN/
CLOSE, SEQOPEN/CLOSE, UCPRELease/OPEN/CLOSE, Close/Open Permissives
(PO[0,1]) and Close/Open Interlocks(OI[0,1]).
Outputs CMPOPEN(latched), OP, PV, NUMTRANS[0,1], NUMSIOVRD

116 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ASTEPID MODEATTR

AUTOCLOSE MODEATTRCHGFL
AUTOOPEN MODEATTRFL.NORM
BACKCALCIN MODEATTRFL.OPER
BADPVALM.FL MODEATTRFL.PROG
BADPVALM.PR MODETRACK
BADPVALM.SV NORMMODE
BYPASS NORMMODEATTR
BYPERM NULLPVFL
CLROPREQFL NUMALLTRANS
CMDDISALM.FL NUMSIOVRD
CMDDISALM.PR NUMTRANS
CMDDISALM.SV OFFNRMALM.FL
CMDDISALM.TM OFFNRMALM.OPT
CMDFALALM.FL OFFNRMALM.PR
CMDFALALM.PR OFFNRMALM.SV
CMDFALALM.SV OI[0..1]
CMDFALALM.TM OIALM[0..2].FL
CMDOPEN OIALM[0..2].OPT
CMDSTOP OIALM[0..2].PR
CONSOPENRDY OIALM[0..2].SV
DOVALSTS OP
GOP OPFINAL
GOPFINAL OPREQ
GOPREQ OPTYPE
GOPSCADA PI[0..1]
GPV PV
GPVAUTO PVAUTO
HIALM.PR PVFL/
HIALM.SV PVSOURCE
HIALM.TYPE PVSRCOPT
HOLDOPT REDTAG
INALM REMOTESWITCH
INBETFL RESTARTOPT
INITCONNECTD RESETFL
INITMAN SAFEREDTAG
INITOPAFTLD SEALOPT
INITOPT SI
INITREQ SIALM.FL
LASTGOPREQ SIALM.SV
LASTOPREQ SIALM.OPT
LASTOPTYPE SIALM.PR

117
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

LASTREQFL STARTOPT
LASTSTEP STOPOPT
LOCALCLOSE TRKNUMTRANS
LOCALMAN TRKSIOVRD
LOCALOPEN UCPCLOSE
LOCALSWITCH UCPOPEN
LTC UCPREL
LTO UNCMDALM.FL
MODE UNCMDALM.PR
UNCMDALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SOLENOID Block.

3.10.7 VALVEDAMPER (Valve/Damper Drive Control) block

Attention
The VALVEDAMPER block can only be used with C300 Controllers. It is not supported for use on C200 Controllers

Description The Valve/Damper Control FB is derived from the Device Control block in Experion
(DEVCTL) and customized to meet the motor operated Valve or Damper control requirements
of Power Plants. The ValveDamper FB is designed to accept inputs and interlocks pertaining to a
conventional valve and is capable of controlling the valve through outputs governed by
predetermined logic.
Function • Processes inputs from MCC, process feedback, Local and Unit Control Panel (UCP),
process related interlocks and generate output based on predetermined logic.
• Supports control of Valve/Damper from the Unit or Local Control Panel, in SEQ (through
SCM) or AUTO mode or from Operator Station or a combination of all these options.
• Generates an alarm based on active states, output command and interlocks tripping.
• Provides optional torque switch based command cut-off for tight shut off of valves and
standard limit switch based command cut-off for normal valves.
• Optional feedback (OPEN and CLOSE feedback) time recording.
• Maintenance Statistics similar to those in the Device Control block.
• It withdraws the command when feedback is achieved to command initiate.
• Preserves Device Control functionality.
Inputs • Process Feedback: Limit Switch OPEN/CLOSE, Torque Switch OPEN/CLOSE, MOTOR
Trip from switch gear and Winding temperature switch.
• Other Inputs: Local/Remote Selection Switch,LOCALOPEN/CLOSE, AUTOOPEN/
CLOSE, AUTONOCMD, SEQOPEN/CLOSE, SEQNOCMD, UCPREL/OPEN/
CLOSE,Close/Open Permissives (PO[0..2]), Close/Open Interlocks(OI[0..1]),Torque switch
enabled (for Tight Shut-Off),Torque Switch for Protection and Track Open/Close feedback
time.
Outputs POOPEN, POCLOSE, CMDOPEN, CMDCLOSE, OP, PV, NUMTRANS[0,1,2],
NUMALLTRANS, NUMSIOVRD, OPENFEEDBKTIME, CLOSEFEEDBKTIME

118 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ASTEPID NUMTRANS

AUTOCLOSE OFFNRMALM.FL
AUTONOCMD OFFNRMALM.OPT
AUTOOPEN OFFNRMALM.PR
BACKCALCIN OFFNRMALM.SV
BADPVALM.FL OI[0..1]
BADPVALM.PR OIALM[0..2].FL
BADPVALM.SV OIALM[0..2].OPT
BYPASS OIALM[0..2].PR
BYPERM OIALM[0..2].SV
CLOSEFEEDBKTIME OP
CLOSEPULSEWIDTH OPENFEEDBKTIME
CLROPREQFL OPENPULSEWIDTH
CMDCLOSE OPFINAL
CMDDISALM.FL OPREQ
CMDDISALM.PR OPTYPE
CMDDISALM.SV PI[0..1]
CMDDISALM.TM POCLOSE
CMDFALALM.FL POCLOSECONNECTED
CMDFALALM.PR POOPEN
CMDFALALM.SV POOPENCONNECTED
CMDFALALM.TM PV
CMDOPEN PVAUTO
CONSOPENRDY PVFL/
DOVALSTS PVSOURCE
GOP PVSRCOPT
GOPFINAL REDTAG
GOPREQ REMOTESWITCH
GOPSCADA RESTARTOPT
GPV RESETFL
GPVAUTO SAFEREDTAG
HIALM.PR SEALOPT
HIALM.SV SEQCLOSE
HIALM.TYPE SEQNOCMD
HOLDOPT SEQOPEN
INALM SI
INBETFL SIALM.FL
INITCONNECTD SIALM.SV
INITMAN SIALM.OPT
INITOPAFTLD SIALM.PR
INITOPOPT STARTOPT
INITREQ STOPOPT

119
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

LASTGOPREQ TRKCLOSEFEEDBKTIME
LASTOPREQ TRKNUMTRANS
LASTOPTYPE TRKOPENFEEDBKTIME
LASTREQFL TRKSIOVRD
LASTSTEP TSC
LOCALCLOSE TSC
LOCALMAN TSCALM.FL
LOCALOPEN TSCALM.OPT
LOCALSWITCH TSCALM.PR
LTC TSCALM.SV
LTO TSENABLED
MODE TSFORPROT
MODEATTR TSO
MODEATTRCHGFL TSOALM.FL
MODEATTRFL.NORM TSOALM.OPT
MODEATTRFL.OPER TSOALM.PR
MODEATTRFL.PROG TSOALM.SV
MODETRACK UCPCLOSE
MOTORTRIPALM.FL UCPOPEN
MOTORTRIPALM.OPT UCPREL
MOTORTRIPALM.PR UNCMDALM.FL
MOTORTRIPALM.SV UNCMDALM.PR
NORMMODE UNCMDALM.SV
NORMMODEATTR WTS
WTSALM.FL
NULLPVFL
WTSALM.OPT
NUMALLTRANS
WTSALM.PR
NUMSIOVRD
WTSALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the VALVEDAMPER
Block.

120 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.11 Regulatory Control Blocks

Related topics
“AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) block ” on page 121
“ENHREGCALC (Enhanced Regulatory Control Calculator) block” on page 125
“FANOUT block” on page 131
“OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block” on page 134
“PID block” on page 138
“PIDER block” on page 143
“PID-PL block” on page 148
“PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block” on page 153
“POSPROP (Position Proportional) block” on page 159
“PULSECOUNT block” on page 164
“PULSELENGTH block” on page 165
“RAMPSOAK block” on page 167
“RATIOBIAS block” on page 171
“RATIOCTL block” on page 176
“REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) block” on page 180
“REGCALC (Regulatory Control Calculator) block” on page 181
“REGSUMMER (Regulatory Control Summer)” on page 187
“REMCAS block” on page 192
“SWITCH block” on page 196

3.11.1 AUTOMAN (Auto Manual) block

Description Applies a user-specified gain and bias as well as a calculated bias (OPBIAS.FLOAT) to the
output. The user-specified values can be fixed or external. A fixed value is stored manually or
by a program, and an external value is brought from another function block.
Function Provides control initialization and override feedback processing. Typically used either:
• in cascade control strategy where an upstream block may not accept an initialization request
from its secondary,
• between FANOUT block and a final control element to provide“bumpless” output on return
to cascade.
With R410, AUTOMAN block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband units for all the alarms.

121
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on the input (X1). If the X1 value is not updated
within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
• Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
• Requests the X1 primary to initialize.
Note that this block does not support mode shedding on timeout and therefore the
TMOUTMODE parameter is not applicable to this block.
But the mode shedding of this block occurs indirectly depending on the BADCTLOPT
parameter value as timeout processing, setting the input value to Bad (NaN).
• When BADCTLOPT = No_Shed, there is no mode shedding on timeout.
• When BADCTLOPT = SHEDHOLD/SHEDHIGH/SHEDLOW/SHEDSAFE, the mode
sheds to manual.
Note that time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and
disabled by setting it to zero.
Inputs • X1 = initializable input which must come from another function block; an operator cannot
set it.
• XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X1:
– XEUHI is the value that represents 100% of full scale.
– XEULO is the value that represents 0% of full scale.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its CV range
to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track its own input range (XEUHI and
XEULO).
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define the normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV
range; these are user-specified values. OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated
result (CV) exceeds them or another function block or user program attempts to store an OP
value that exceeds them. However, an operator may store an OP value that is outside these
limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a percent
of the CV range. These are user-specified values. Operator is prevented from storing an OP
that exceeds these limits.

122 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB NUMSEC

ALMDBU OP
ALMTM OPBIAS
ARWNETIN OPBIAS.FIX
ARWNET[1..8]
OPBIAS.FLOAT
ARWOP
OPBIAS.RATE
ARWOPIN
OPEU
ASTEPID
OPEXHIFL
BADCTLALM.FL
OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.PR
OPEXLOFL
BADCTLALM.SV
OPEXLOLM
BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLFL OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLOPT OPHIALM.PR
OPHIALM.SV
BADOCOPT
OPHIALM.TM
BADOCOPTENB
OPHIALM.TMO
COMPUTEARW
OPHIALM.TP
CTLINIT
OPHIFL
CTLSTATE
OPHILM
CV
OPLOALM.DB
CVEUHI
OPLOALM.DBU
CVEULO
OPLOALM.FL
CVTYPE
OPLOALM.PR
DESC
OPLOALM.SV
ESWENB
OPLOALM.TM
ESWFL.AUTO
ESWFL.BCAS OPLOALM.TMO
ESWFL.CAS OPLOALM.TP
ESWFL.MAN OPLOFL
ESWPERM OPLOLM
EUDESC OPMINCHG
FBORSTS OPREQ
GAINHILM OPROCLM
GAINLOLM OPROCNEGFL
HIALM.PR OPROCPOSFL
HIALM.SV OPTYPE
HIALM.TYPE ORDERINCM
HOLDOPT OUTIND
HOLDRATE OUTTYPE
HOLDVAL PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE

123
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INALM PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
INITMAN PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
INITREQ[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
INITVAL[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
INSBLOCK[1..10] PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
INSFAILALM.FL REDTAG
INSFAILALM.PR RESTARTOPT
INSFAILALM.SV SAFEOP
INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
K SECDATAIN.EUHI
LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.EULO
LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.HISELECT
LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.INITSTS
LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.INITVAL
LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODE SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEAPPL[1..4] SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEATTR SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEATTRFL.PROG SIALM.FL
MODECHANGE SIALM.OPT
MODEFL.AUTO SIALM.PR
MODEFL.BCAS SIALM.SV
MODEFL.CAS SIFL
MODEFL.MAN SIOPT
MODEFL.NORM STARTOPT
MODEPERM STARTRATE
MODEREQ STARTVAL
MODETRACK STOPOPT
NAME STOPRATE
NORMMODE STOPVAL
NORMMODEATTR TMOUTFL
NUMINSERT TMOUTTIME
NUMPRI
UNCMDCHGALM.FL

UNCMDCHGALM.OPT

UNCMDCHGALM.PR

UNCMDCHGALM.SV
X1
X1P
X1STS

124 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

XEUHI
XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the AUTOMAN
Block.

3.11.2 ENHREGCALC (Enhanced Regulatory Control Calculator) block

Description • Lets you write up to eight expressions for creating custom algorithms for Calculated
Variable (CV) calculations.
• Provides an interface to windup, initialization and override feedback processing, so you can
add user-defined control blocks to your control strategies.
• The ENHREGCALC block provides the following enhancements over the REGCALC
block.
– Expands existing arrayed input parameters XSTS, XCONN and X.
– These arrayed parameters are added to correspond to each of the ten inputs.
Input Description
Enable/Disable Switch
XSUB Substitute Parameter
– An initializable Set Point (SP) input parameter with limit checking and SP ramping is
added. Also, the X[1] input is converted to a general purpose input
– Mode can be placed in Automatic so operator or program can supply SP.
– This block uses memory based on the number of expressions configured, pcode size of
each expression and the number of references in the expression.
Function • Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and functions; and
may perform arithmetic or logic operations.
• You can write expressions for calculating CV under normal, initialization and override
feedback conditions. Or, you can write expressions which produce initialization and
override feedback values for this block and its primaries.
• You can assign the result of an expression or an input to any assignable output that produces
the same outputs as every other regulatory control block. You can assign the same input to
multiple outputs.
• With R410, ENHREGCALC block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new
parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay
time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, this block performs timeout monitoring on SP. If the SP input value is not
updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL)
• Holds SP at its last good value.
• Requests the SP primary to initialize.
• Sheds to a user-specified timeout mode (MODE = TMOUTMODE).
The ENHREGCALC block sets its cascade request flag (CASREQFL), if SP times out and
sheds to AUTOmatic mode.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.

125
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Control Initialization Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition, the
secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However, you can disable
the SECINITOPT so the block ignores initialization requests from the secondary.
If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = CVINIT (assignable output)
• Builds an initialization request for the designated primaries, using INITREQ and INITVAL
(both assignable outputs).
Override Feedback If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector (OVRDSEL) block, it
Processing receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override feedback value
and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the selected or unselected
strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks. However, you can disable the
SECINITOPT so the block ignores override requests from the secondary.
When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = CVORFB (assignable output)
• Computes a feedback value for SP input:
– feedback value for SP = ORFBVAL (assignable output)
– feedback status for SP = ORFBSTS (assignable output)
If ORFBVAL and ORFBSTS are not assigned and this block has a secondary, the ORFBVAL
and ORFBSTS received from the secondary are used to compute ORFBVAL for the primary.
Inputs The following inputs are optional and they only accept real data types.
• SP - An initializable input. If Mode is CAScade, SP is pulled from another function block. If
Mode is AUTO, it may be stored by the operator or a user program.
• X[1] through X[10] general purpose inputs.
• XWHIFL - An external windup high flag.
• XWLOFL - An external windup low flag.
Input Ranges SPEUHI and SPEULO define the full range of SP input in engineering units. This block applies
no range checking, since it assumes that SP is within SPEUHI and SPEULO. If this function is
required, you must write an expression for it.
• SPEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
• SPEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.

126 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units.
If this block has a secondary, it uses the secondary's input range through BACKCALC to set its
CV range. If it does not have a secondary, you must define the range through CVEUHI and
CVEULO.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of the CV
range (user-specified values).
– OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another
block or user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them.
– Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a percent
of the CV range (user-specified values).
– Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.
Assignable Outputs You can assign expression results and/or inputs to the following outputs.
• CV - This block's CV under normal operating conditions.
• CVINIT - This block's CV during initialization.
• CVORFB - This block's CV during override (in unselected path).
• INITREQ - Initialization request flag, to be provided to the primary.
• INITVAL - Initialization value, to be provided to the primary.
• ORFBVAL - Override feedback value, to be provided to the primary.
• ORFBSTS - Override feedback status, to be provided to the primary.
Operators and “AUXCALC (Auxiliary Calculation) block” on page 32 lists the expression operators and
Functions functions supported by this block for reference.
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name. For example, “CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”,
Identification or “CM57.PID100.MODE”.
In effect, tag names allow expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any
data type. However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression.
The expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression
containing an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as follows:
• TagName.'text'

127
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Expression Rules • Must include full tag.parameter name for X inputs in the expression and enclose
identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example, CM151.REGCALC
BLOCK.X[1] * CM151.REGCALC BLOCK.X[2] is valid.
• Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign with the current
syntax) For example, “CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]” is invalid.
Each expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically stored
in a “C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of the first
expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc. You can use these
results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example, you could use C[1] as an input
to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
• You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional assignments) in any
order as long as value types match or can be converted.
• You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not required.
• You can use all data types in expressions, including enumerations. They are all treated as
numeric types.
• You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the arrays.
• A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression descriptor
parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which use the CONST[1…8]
parameters, are affected if you change the values of these parameters on the Constants tab.
• With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and Experion Server
points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the Expressions.
• With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter references,
ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the parentheses “()”to specify
array index. However, when you write the expressions using the other non-CEE points you
can use the brackets “[].”

128 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB NUMSEC

ALMDBU OP
ALMTM OPBIAS
ARWNETIN OPBIAS.FIX
ARWNET[1..8] OPBIAS.FLOAT
ARWOP OPBIAS.RATE
ARWOPIN OPEU
ASTEPID OPEXHIFL
BADCTLALM.FL OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.PR OPEXLOFL
BADCTLALM.SV OPEXLOLM
OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.TM
OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLFL
OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLOPT
OPHIALM.SV
BADOCOPT
OPHIALM.TM
BADOCOPTENB
OPHIALM.TMO
C[1..8]
OPHIALM.TP
CASREQFL
OPHIFL
COMPUTEARW
OPHILM
CONFIGCODE
OPLOALM.DB
CONFIGDESC
OPLOALM.DBU
CONFIGSTS
OPLOALM.FL
CONST[1…8] OPLOALM.PR
OPLOALM.SV
CONSTACCLOCK
OPLOALM.TM
CONSTENABLE
OPLOALM.TMO
CSTS[1..8]
OPLOALM.TP
CTLINIT
OPLOFL
CTLSTATE
OPLOLM
CV
OPMINCHG
CVEUHI
OPREQ
CVEULO
OPROCLM
CVINIT
OPROCNEGFL
CVINITSRC
OPROCPOSFL
CVORFB
OPTOL
CVORFBSRC
OPTYPE
CVSRC
ORDERINCM
CVTYPE
ORFBSTSSRC
DESC
ORFBVALSRC
ESWENB

129
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

ESWFL.AUTO OUTIND
ESWFL.BCAS PUSHSP
ESWFL.CAS REDTAG
ESWFL.MAN RESTARTOPT
ESWPERM SAFEOP
EUDESC SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
EXECCODE[1..8] SECDATAIN.EUHI
EXECDESC[1..8] SECDATAIN.EULO
EXECSTS[1..8] SECDATAIN.HISELECT
EXPR[1..8] SECDATAIN.INITSTS
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
EXPRDESC[1…8]
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
FBORSTS
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
GAINHILM
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
GAINLOLM
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
HIALM.PR
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
HIALM.SV
SECINITOPT[1..8]
HIALM.TYPE
SIALM.FL
HOLDOPT
SIALM.OPT
HOLDRATE
SIALM.PR
HOLDVAL
SIALM.SV
INALM
SIFL
INITMAN
SIOPT
INITREQ[1..8]
SP
INITREQSRC
SPEUHI
INITVAL[1..8]
SPEULO
INITVALSRC
SPFORMAT
INSBLOCK[1..10]
SPHIFL
INSFAILALM.FL
SPHILM
INSFAILALM.PR
SPLOFL
INSFAILALM.SV
SPLOLM
INSFAILFL
SPP
K
SPRATEREQ
LASTMODEREQ
SPREQ
LASTOPREQ
SPTOL
LASTOPTYPE
SPTV
LASTREQFL
SPTVNORMRATE
LASTSPREQ
SPTVOPT
LASTSPTVREQ
SPTVP
LASTSTEP
SPTVRATE
MODE
SPTVREQ
MODEAPPL[1..4]
SPTVSTATE
MODEATTR

130 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

MODEATTRFL.NORM SPTVTIME
MODEATTRFL.OPER STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.PROG STARTRATE
MODECHANGE STARTVAL
MODEFL.AUTO STOPOPT
MODEFL.BCAS STOPRATE
MODEFL.CAS STOPVAL
MODEFL.MAN TMOUTFL
MODEFL.NORM TMOUTMODE
MODEPERM TMOUTTIME
MODEREQ
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODETRACK
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
NAME
NORMMODE UNCMDCHGALM.PR
NORMMODEATTR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
NUMINSERT X[1..10]
NUMPRI XB[1..10]
XDESC[1..10]
XENABLE[1..10]
XK[1..10]
XKB[1..10]
XSTS[1..10]
XSUB[1..10]
XWHIFL
XWLOFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ENHREGCALC
Block.

3.11.3 FANOUT block

Description Uses one input and provides up to eight initializable outputs. It may also have up to eight
secondaries, since there is one secondary per initializable output. You may specify a separate
gain, bias, and rate for each output. Each specified value can be fixed or external. A fixed value
is stored manually or by a program, and an external value is brought from another function
block. This block calculates a separate floating bias for each output following an initialization or
mode change. This provides a “bumpless” transition for each output.
Function Provides a “bumpless” output for each of up to 8 outputs following initialization or mode
changes.
With R410, FANOUT block allows you to configure individual values for the on-delay time and
off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for
individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.

131
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on X1. If the X1 value is not updated within a
predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
• Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
• Requests the X1 primary to initialize (through BACKCALCOUT).
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Input • X1 = initializable input which must come from another function block; an operator cannot
set it.
• XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X1:
– XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs May have up to 8 initializable outputs as follows:
• OP[1..8] = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU[1..8] = Calculated output in engineering units.
Note that the default OP[1], [2] connection pins are exposed on the blocks and the implicit/
hidden connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter
(OPX[1..8]/OPEUX[1..8]) connection when required.
Output Ranges CVEUHI[1..8] and CVEULO[1..8] define the full range of CV[1..8] in engineering units --
block has separate output range for each output based on the input range of each secondary.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define the normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of the
CV range; these are user-specified values -- the same limits apply to all outputs. An operator
may store an OP value that is outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a percent
of the CV range; these are user-specified values -- the same limits apply to all outputs and
operator is prevented from storing an OP that exceeds these limits.
Windup Processing • If all secondaries are in high windup, block propagates a high windup status to its primary
(ARWNET[1..8] = Hi)
• If all secondaries are in low windup, block propagates a low windup status to its primary
(ARWNET[1..8] = Lo)
• If at least one secondary has a normal windup status or is in high windup and another is in
low, block propagates a normal windup status to its primary.
If the gain is reversed for one of the outputs, then high windup on that output is the same as low
windup on the others.

132 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ARWMULTOP[1..8] MODETRACK

ARWNET[1..8] NAME
ARWNETIN NORMMODE
ARWOP NORMMODEATTR
ARWOPIN NUMINSERT
ASTEPID NUMPRI
BADCTLALM.FL NUMSEC
BADCTLALM.PR OP[1..8]
BADCTLALM.SV OPBIAS[1..8]
OPBIAS[1..8].FIX
BADCTLALM.TM
OPBIAS[1..8].FLOAT
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPBIAS[1..8].RATE
BADCTLFL
OPEU[1..8]
BADCTLOPT
OPEXHIFL[1..8]
BADOCOPT
OPEXHILM
BADOCOPTENB OPEXLOFL[1..8]
CASREQFL OPEXLOLM
COMPUTEARW OPHIFL[1..8]
CTLINIT OPHILM
CTLSTATE OPLOFL[1..8]
CV[1..8] OPLOLM
CVEUHI[1..8] OPMINCHG
CVEULO[1..8] OPREQ
CVTYPE OPROCLM
DESC OPROCNEGFL[1..8]
ESWENB OPROCPOSFL[1..8]
ESWFL.AUTO OPTYPE
ESWFL.BCAS ORDERINCM
ESWFL.CAS OUTIND
ESWFL.MAN OUTTYPE
ESWPERM PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
EUDESC PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
FBORSTS PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
GAINHILM PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
GAINLOLM PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
HIALM.SV PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
HIALM.TYPE REDTAG
HOLDOPT RESTARTOPT
HOLDRATE SAFEOP
HOLDVAL SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INALM SECDATAIN.EUHI
INITMAN SECDATAIN.EULO

133
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INITREQ[1..8] SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
K[1..8] SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
LASTMODEREQ SECINITOPT[1..8]
LASTOPREQ SIALM.FL
LASTOPTYPE SIALM.OPT
LASTREQFL SIALM.PR
LASTSTEP SIALM.SV
MODE SIFL
MODEAPPL[1..4] SIOPT
MODEATTR SPHILM
MODEATTRFL.NORM STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.OPER STARTRATE
MODEATTRFL.PROG STARTVAL
MODECHANGE STOPOPT
MODEFL.AUTO STOPRATE
MODEFL.BCAS STOPVAL
MODEFL.CAS TMOUTFL
MODEFL.MAN TMOUTMODE
MODEFL.NORM TMOUTTIME
MODEPERM
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODEREQ
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT

UNCMDCHGALM.PR

UNCMDCHGALM.SV
X1
X1P
X1STS
XEUHI
XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FANOUT Block.

3.11.4 OVRDSEL(Override Selector) block

Description Provides override feedback data to every block in an upstream cascade control strategy. Also
provides bypass processing, control initialization, and override feedback propagation.

134 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Accepts up to four inputs (primaries) and selects the one with the highest or lowest value.
With R410, OVRDSEL block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on all inputs X[1] through X[4] that are not
bypassed. If an input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the
following timeout processing.
• Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
• Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
• Requests the input's primary to initialize.
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Inputs Accepts up to 4 inputs -- X[1] through X[4].
• At least 2 inputs (X1 and X2) are required, others are optional.
• You can configure a 15-character description for each input.
• The inputs must come from other function blocks; an operator cannot store to them.
Input Ranges • XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of inputs.
– XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
secondary, it brings the secondary'ls input range through the BACKCALC and sets its CV range
to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track its own input range (XEUHI and
XEULO).
• OPHILM and OPLOLM (user-specified values) define normal high and low limits for OP as
a percent of the CV range.
– OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another
block or user program attempts to store an OP value exceeding them.
– Operator may store an OP value outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM (user-specified values) define the extended high and low
limits for OP as a percent of the CV range.
– Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.

135
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB OPBIAS

ALMDBU OPBIAS.FIX
ALMTM OPBIAS.FLOAT
ARWNET[1..8] OPBIAS.RATE
ARWOP OPEU
ASTEPID OPEXHIFL
BADCTLALM.FL OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.PR OPEXLOFL
BADCTLALM.SV OPEXLOLM
BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLFL OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLOPT OPHIALM.PR
BADOCOPT OPHIALM.SV
BADOCOPTENB OPHIALM.TM
BADINPTOPT[1..4] OPHIALM.TMO
CONTROLREQ OPHIALM.TP
COMPUTEARW OPHIFL
CTLEQN OPHILM
CTLINIT OPLOALM.DB
CTLSTATE OPLOALM.DBU
CV OPLOALM.FL
CVEUHI OPLOALM.PR
CVEULO OPLOALM.SV
CVTYPE OPLOALM.TM
DESC OPLOALM.TMO
ESWENB OPLOALM.TP
ESWFL.AUTO OPLOFL
ESWFL.BCAS OPLOLM
ESWFL.CAS OPMINCHG
ESWFL.MAN OPREQ
ESWPERM OPROCLM
EUDESC OPROCNEGFL
FBORSTS OPROCPOSFL
HIALM.PR OPTYPE
HIALM.SV ORBYPASSFL[1..4]
HIALM.TYPE ORBYPPERM
HOLDOPT ORDERINCM
HOLDRATE OROFFSET
HOLDVAL OROPT
INALM OUTIND
INITMAN OUTTYPE

136 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INITREQ[1..8] PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
INITVAL[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
INSBLOCK[1..10] PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
INSFAILALM.FL PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
INSFAILALM.PR PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
INSFAILALM.SV PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
INSFAILFL REDTAG
LASTMODEREQ RESTARTOPT
LASTOPREQ SAFEOP
LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.EUHI
LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.EULO
MODE SECDATAIN.HISELECT
MODEAPPL[1..4] SECDATAIN.INITSTS
MODEATTR SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODECHANGE SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEFL.AUTO SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
MODEFL.BCAS SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEFL.CAS SELXDESC
MODEFL.MAN SELXFL[1..4]
MODEFL.NORM SELXINP
MODEPERM SIALM.FL
MODEREQ SIALM.OPT
MODETRACK SIALM.PR
NAME SIALM.SV
NORMMODE SIFL
NORMMODEATTR SIOPT
NUMINSERT STARTOPT
NUMPRI STARTRATE
NUMSEC STARTVAL
OP STOPOPT
STOPRATE
STOPVAL
TMOUTFL
TMOUTTIME
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV

137
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

X[1..4]
XEUHI
XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the OVRDSEL Block.

3.11.5 PID block

Description Operates as a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller and supports the Ideal form of
calculating the PID terms.
Function Accepts 2 analog inputs -- process variable (PV) and set point (SP); produces output calculated
to reduce the difference between PV and SP. Provides anti-windup protection, control
initialization and override feedback processing.
With R410, PID block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband, deadband
unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received within a
predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
• Holds the SP value at its last good value.
• Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
• Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL).
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Inputs Required number of inputs is determined by this block's mode:
• If Mode = Cascade, 2 inputs are required - PV and SP. Both must be pulled from other
function blocks.
• If Mode = Auto or Man, only PV is required. PV must be pulled from another function
block; the user cannot store to it.
• SP contains set point value in engineering units; SPP contains value in percent.
– If Mode = Auto, operator or user program may store to either SP or SPP.
• SP is an initializable input; PV is non-initializable.
Input Ranges and • PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also define the
Limits engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the same range.
– PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
• SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
– Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user program
attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to appropriate limit and sets
primary's windup status.

138 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:

• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges and CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
Limits secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its CV range
to that. If it has no secondary, you must specify CVEUHI and CVEULO range.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV range
(user-specified values).
– OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or user program
attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may store OP value outside these
limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent of CV
range (user-entered values).
– Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
Equation Options • Equation A - Proportional, Integral, and Derivative on error.
• Equation B -- Proportional and Integral on error and Derivative on changes in PV.
• Equation C -- Integral on error and Proportional and Derivative on changes in PV.
• Equation D -- Integral only.
• Equation E -- Proportional only; this equation supports the following two options that affect
CV:
– Output bias processing which adds fixed and floating bias to unbiased CV.
– Reverse-control action causes the sign of the unbiased CV to be reversed.
Gain Options If equation A, B, or C is selected, any of the following gain options may be chosen:
• Linear Gain -- provides proportional control action that is equal to a constant (K) times the
error.
• Gap Gain -- used to reduce sensitivity of control system when PV is in user-specified band
(gap) around set point.
• Nonlinear Gain -- control action is proportional to square of error, rather than error itself.
• External Gain -- gain (K) is modified by input value that can come from the process, another
block or user program.
Direct or Reverse • Direct action -- increase in error increases output (OP).
Control • Reverse action -- increase in error decreases output (OP).

139
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB OPBIAS

ADVDEVALM.DBU OPBIAS.FIX
ADVDEVALM.FL OPBIAS.FLOAT
ADVDEVALM.PR OPBIAS.RATE
ADVDEVALM.SV OPEU
ADVDEVALM.TM OPEXHIFL
OPEXHILM
ADVDEVALM.TMO
OPEXLOFL
ADVDEVALM.TP
OPEXLOLM
ADVDEVOPT
OPHIALM.DB
ADVSP
OPHIALM.DBU
ADVSPP
OPHIALM.FL
ALMDB
OPHIALM.PR
ALMDBU
OPHIALM.SV
ALMTM
OPHIALM.TM
ARWNET[1..8]
ARWOP OPHIALM.TMO
ASTEPID OPHIALM.TP
BADCTLALM.FL OPHIFL
BADCTLALM.PR OPHILM
BADCTLALM.SV OPLOALM.DB
OPLOALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TM
OPLOALM.FL
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPLOALM.PR
BADCTLFL
OPLOALM.SV
BADCTLOPT
OPLOALM.TM
BADOCOPT
OPLOALM.TMO
BADOCOPTENB
OPLOALM.TP
CASREQFL
OPLOFL
COMPUTEARW
OPLOLM
CTLACTN
OPMINCHG
CTLEQN
OPREQ
CTLINIT
OPROCLM
CTLSTATE
OPROCNEGFL
CV
OPROCPOSFL
CVEUHI
OPTYPE
CVEULO
ORDERINCM
CVTYPE
OUTIND
DELCV
OUTTYPE
DESC
PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
DEV
PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
DEVHIALM.DB
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
DEVHIALM.DBU
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL

140 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

DEVHIALM.FL PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
DEVHIALM.PR PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
DEVHIALM.SV PUSHSP
DEVHIALM.TM PV
PVEUHI
DEVHIALM.TMO
PVEULO
DEVHIALM.TP
PVFORMAT
DEVLOALM.DB
PVMANOPT
DEVLOALM.DBU
PVP
DEVLOALM.FL
PVSTS
DEVLOALM.PR
PVSTSFL.BAD
DEVLOALM.SV
PVSTSFL.MAN
DEVLOALM.TM
PVSTSFL.NORM
DEVLOALM.TMO
PVSTSFL.UNCER
DEVLOALM.TP
PVTRAKOPT
EQNEUNITSOPT
PVTRAKOPTAI
ESWENB
REDTAG
ESWFL.AUTO
RESTARTOPT
ESWFL.BCAS
SAFEOP
ESWFL.CAS
SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
ESWFL.MAN
SECDATAIN.EUHI
ESWPERM
SECDATAIN.EULO
EUDESC
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
FBORSTS
SECDATAIN.INITSTS
GAINHILM
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
GAINLOLM
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
GAINOPT
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
GAPHILM
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
GAPLOLM
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
HIALM.PR
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
HIALM.SV
SECINITOPT[1..8]
HIALM.TYPE
SIALM.FL
HOLDOPT
SIALM.OPT
HOLDRATE
SIALM.PR
HOLDVAL
SIALM.SV
INALM
SIFL
INITMAN
SIOPT
INITREQ[1..8]
SP
INITVAL[1..8]
SPEUHI
INSBLOCK[1..10]
SPEULO
INSFAILALM.FL
SPFORMAT
INSFAILALM.PR
SPHIFL
INSFAILALM.SV

141
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INSFAILFL SPHILM
K] SPLOFL
KLIN SPLOLM
KMODIFEXT SPP
KMODIFGAP SPRATEREQ
KMODIFNL SPREQ
LASTGOODPV SPTV
LASTMODEREQ SPTVDEVFL
LASTOPREQ SPTVDEVMAX
LASTOPTYPE SPTVNORMRATE
LASTRATEREQ SPTVOPT
LASTREQFL SPTVP
LASTSPREQ SPTVRATE
LASTSPTVREQ SPTVREQ
LASTSTEP SPTVSTATE
LEGACYGAP SPTVTIME
MODE STARTOPT
MODEAPPL[1..4] STARTRATE
MODEATTR STARTVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM STOPOPT
MODEATTRFL.OPER STOPRATE
MODEATTRFL.PROG STOPVAL
MODECHANGE T1
MODEFL.AUTO T1HILM
MODEFL.BCAS T1LOLM
MODEFL.CAS T2
MODEFL.MAN T2HILM
MODEFL.NORM T2LOLM
MODEPERM TMOUTFL
MODEREQ TMOUTMODE
MODETRACK TMOUTTIME
NAME
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
NLFORM
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
NLGAIN
NORMMODE UNCMDCHGALM.PR
NORMMODEATTR UNCMDCHGALM.SV
NUMINSERT
NUMPRI
NUMSEC
OP

142 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PID Block.

3.11.6 PIDER block

Description Operates as a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller that accepts a reset feedback

signal, a tracking value, and a tracking control switch. It supports the same Ideal form of
calculating the PID terms as the PID block. It also prevents windup when the secondary does not
propagate windup status or control initialization data back to the primary of a remote (foreign)
controller.
Function It accepts five analog inputs - a process variable (PV), a set point (SP), a reset feedback value
(RFB), a tracking value (TRFB), and a tracking control switch (S1). The difference between PV
and SP is the error and this block calculates a control output (OP) that should drive the error to
zero.
With R410, PIDER block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband, deadband
unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received within a
predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
• Holds the SP value at its last good value.
• Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
• Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL).
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Inputs Required number of inputs is determined by this block's mode:
• If Mode is CAScade, five inputs are required - PV, SP, RFB, TRFB and S1.
• If Mode is AUTOmatic or MANual, PV, RFB, TRFB and S1 are required.
• SP contains set point value in engineering units; SPP contains value in percent.
– If Mode = Auto, operator or user program may store to either SP or SPP.
• SP is the only initializable input; other inputs are non-initializable.
• RFB and TRFB must be pulled from another block, you cannot store to them. The RFB
input is optional. If the PIDER block is used for external tracking features only, the RFB
input is not required.
• S1 can be triggered by another function block or set by a user-written program.
Input Ranges and • PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also define the
Limits engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the same range.
– PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
• SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
– Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user program
attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to appropriate limit and sets
primary's windup status.
• The RFB and TRFB values typically come from a remote controller. The PIDER block
applies no range check for these parameters.
• The S1 input is a Boolean flag and the values are only On and Off.

143
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs The block does not support output initialization, and therefore cannot have a secondary.
Initialization only occurs when the tracking control switch (S1) is On.
Block has following outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges and CVEUHI and CVEULO must be specified by the user. The specified values must match the
Limits engineering units (EU) range of the RFB and TRFB signals, which are the range of the remote
(foreign) controller or secondary.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV range
(user-specified values).
– OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or user program
attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may store OP value outside these
limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent of CV
range (user-entered values).
– Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
• MAXRFBDEV is the maximum deviation allowed between CV and RFB, in percent. It is
used to provide windup protection for OP.
– If the scaled, integrated deviation of CV from RFB exceeds MAXRFBDEV in the
positive direction, the PIDER block sets the output windup status (ARWOP) to High,
which will prevent CV from going higher. If the deviation exceeds MAXRFBDEV in
the negative direction, it sets ARWOP to Low, which will prevent CV from going lower.
This occurs only if the tracking control switch (S1) is Off.
Equation Options • Equation A - Proportional, Integral, and Derivative on error.
• Equation B -- Proportional and Integral on error and Derivative on changes in PV.
• Equation C -- Integral on error and Proportional and Derivative on changes in PV.
• Equation D -- Integral only.
• In addtion to the PID equations above, the PIDER block supports equation variations
depending on the status of the tracking switch (S1).
– Output bias processing which adds fixed and floating bias to unbiased CV.
– Reverse-control action causes the sign of the unbiased CV to be reversed.
Gain Options If equation A, B, or C is selected, any of the following gain options may be chosen:
• Linear Gain -- provides proportional control action that is equal to a constant (K) times the
error.
• Gap Gain -- used to reduce sensitivity of control system when PV is in user-specified band
(gap) around set point.
• Nonlinear Gain -- control action is proportional to square of error, rather than error itself.
• External Gain -- gain (K) is modified by input value that can come from the process, another
block or user program.
Direct or Reverse • Direct action -- increase in error increases output (OP).
Control • Reverse action -- increase in error decreases output (OP).

144 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB NLGAIN

ADVDEVALM.DBU NORMMODE
ADVDEVALM.FL NORMMODEATTR
ADVDEVALM.PR NUMINSERT
ADVDEVALM.SV NUMPRI
ADVDEVALM.TM NUMSEC
OP
ADVDEVALM.TMO
OPBIAS
ADVDEVALM.TP
OPBIAS.FIX
ADVDEVOPT
OPBIAS.FLOAT
ADVSP
OPBIAS.RATE
ADVSPP
OPEU
ALMDB
OPEXHIFL
ALMDBU
OPEXHILM
ALMTM
OPEXLOFL
ARWNET[1..8]
OPEXLOLM
ARWNETIN[1..8]
OPHIALM.DB
ARWOP
OPHIALM.DBU
ARWOPIN
OPHIALM.FL
ASTEPID
OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLALM.FL
OPHIALM.SV
BADCTLALM.PR
OPHIALM.TM
BADCTLALM.SV
OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLALM.TM
OPHIALM.TP
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPHIFL
BADCTLFL
OPHILM
BADCTLOPT
OPLOALM.DB
CASREQFL
OPLOALM.DBU
COMPUTEARW
OPLOALM.FL
CTLACTN
OPLOALM.PR
CTLEQN
OPLOALM.SV
CTLINIT
OPLOALM.TM
CTLSTATE
CV OPLOALM.TMO
CVEUHI OPLOALM.TP
CVEULO OPLOFL
CVTYPE OPLOLM
DELCV OPMINCHG
DESC OPREQ
DEV OPROCLM
DEVHIALM.DB OPROCNEGFL
DEVHIALM.DBU OPROCPOSFL
DEVHIALM.FL OPTOL

145
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

DEVHIALM.PR OPTYPE
DEVHIALM.SV ORDERINCM
DEVHIALM.TM OUTIND
OUTTYPE
DEVHIALM.TMO
PUSHSP
DEVHIALM.TP
PV
DEVLOALM.DB
PVEUHI
DEVLOALM.DBU
PVEULO
DEVLOALM.FL
PVFORMAT
DEVLOALM.PR
PVMANOPT
DEVLOALM.SV
PVP
DEVLOALM.TM
PVSTS
DEVLOALM.TMO
PVSTSFL.BAD
DEVLOALM.TP
PVSTSFL.MAN
ESWENB
PVSTSFL.NORM
ESWFL.AUTO
PVSTSFL.UNCER
ESWFL.BCAS
PVTRAKOPT
ESWFL.CAS
PVTRAKOPTAI
ESWFL.MAN
REDTAG
ESWPERM
RESTARTOPT
EUDESC
RFB
FBORSTS
S1
GAINHILM
SAFEOP
GAINLOLM
SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
GAINOPT
SECDATAIN.EUHI
GAPHILM
SECDATAIN.EULO
GAPLOLM
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
HIALM.PR
SECDATAIN.INITSTS
HIALM.SV
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
HIALM.TYPE
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
HOLDOPT
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
HOLDRATE
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
HOLDVAL
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
INALM
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
INITMAN
SECINITOPT[1..8]
INITREQ[1..8]
SIALM.FL
INITVAL[1..8]
SIALM.OPT
INSBLOCK[1..10]
SIALM.PR
INSFAILALM.FL
SIALM.SV
INSFAILALM.PR
SIFL
INSFAILALM.SV
SIOPT
INSFAILFL
SP
K

146 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

K1 SPEUHI
KLIN SPEULO
KMODIFEXT SPFORMAT
KMODIFGAP SPHIFL
KMODIFNL SPHILM
LASTGOODPV SPLOFL
LASTMODEREQ SPLOLM
LASTOPREQ SPP
LASTOPTYPE SPRATEREQ
LASTRATEREQ SPREQ
LASTREQFL SPTOL
LASTSPREQ SPTV
LASTSPTVREQ SPTVDEVFL
LASTSTEP SPTVDEVMAX
LEGACYGAP SPTVNORMRATE
MAXRFBDEV SPTVOPT
MODE SPTVP
MODEAPPL[1..4] SPTVRATE
MODEATTR SPTVREQ
MODEATTRFL.NORM SPTVSTATE
MODEATTRFL.OPER SPTVTIME
MODEATTRFL.PROG STARTOPT
MODECHANGE STARTRATE
MODEFL.AUTO STARTVAL
MODEFL.BCAS STOPOPT
MODEFL.CAS STOPRATE
MODEFL.MAN STOPVAL
MODEFL.NORM T1
MODEPERM T1HILM
MODEREQ T1LOLM
MODETRACK T2
NAME T2HILM
NLFORM T2LOLM
TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE
TMOUTTIME
TRFB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PIDER Block.ck.

147
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.11.7 PID-PL block

Description A regulatory control block combining the functionality of PID controller with a robust, model-
based, predictive controller and optimizer, Profit Loop PKS. In many cases, Profit Loop PKS
provides superior control and should be used in place of the standard PID algorithms.
See the Control Builder Components Theory, Regulatory Control section, PID-PL (Profit Loop
PKS) Block for a discussion of benefits.
Function Belongs to a class of controllers known as “model predictive control.” These controllers rely on
a dynamic model to predict future movement in the process variable. If the predicted PV does
not meet the control objectives (maintain at current setpoint), control action is taken to realign
the PV with its objectives. In contrast, a PID controller uses past and current error trajectories to
restore the PV to its SP within one control move, regardless of the long-term consequences of
the move.
With R410, PID-PL block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband, deadband
unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
See the Control Builder Components Theory, Regulatory Control section, PID-PL (Profit Loop
PKS) Block for a discussion of benefits.
Timeout Monitoring The PID-PL block monitors for communication timeouts between primary and secondary
controllers of a cascade pair. This block uses the same methodology as the PID block. See
Timeout Monitoring for PID block for implementation details.
Inputs The PID-PL block requires two inputs: PV and SP. See Required Inputs for PID block for details
on these inputs.
For range control, the PID-PL block requires two additional inputs: SPHI and SPLO. These
parameters cannot be initialized. They can be pulled from another block, set through operator
entry, or stored by a user program.
Input Ranges and For PID or Profit Loop PKS setpoint control, the PID range limits apply. See Input ranges and
Limits limits for PID block for details.
For range control,
• PVEUHI and PVEULO define the engineering unit range for MODELPV, SP, SPHI, and
SPLO.
• SPHILM and SPLOLM define the operating limits in engineering units for SPHI, and
SPLO. If a value is entered outside these limits but within the engineering unit range, this
block clamps the value at its appropriate limit. Otherwise, an out of bounds error is
generated.
• SPHI and SPLO define the operating limits in engineering units for SP. The operator is
prevented from storing a setpoint value that is outside these limits. If the primary or a user
program attempts to store a value outside of the limits, this block clamps it to the
appropriate limit and sets the primary's windup status.
Outputs The PID-PL block supports a single initializable output. Like PID, this calculated output can be
either in percent, OP, or in engineering units, OPEU. See Initializable outputs for PID block for
more details.
Output Ranges and The output range of a PID-PL block is identical to the PID block. See Output ranges and limits
Limits for PID block for details.
Equation Options The PID-PL block supports the standard five PID equations (EqA through EqE) as well as the
Profit Loop equation, PROFITLOOP.
For details on the PROFITLOOP equation type, see the Control Builder Components Theory,
Regulatory Control section, PID-PL (Profit Loop PKS) Block for a discussion of benefits.
For details on the PID equations, see PID equations.

148 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Gain Options The gain options only apply for applicable PID equations A, B, or C. The PROFITLOOP
equation does not support the gain options.
See Gain options for use with PID equations.
Direct or Reverse A PID-PL block may be configured for direct-control action or reverse-control action,
Control effectively changing the sign of the controller gain. See Direct or reverse control for PID block
for implementation details.
With Profit Loop PKS, the sign of the controller gain is determined by the sign of the process
model gain. To prevent mismatch between the model gain and control action, changes to
CTLACTN are not allowed. Furthermore, when the model gain changes (including initial
loading of the function block), CTLACTN is set to match the new gain direction.
• A positive process model gain leads to reverse control action.
• A negative process model gain leads to direct control action.
Parameters All PID parameters apply to the PID-PL block. They are listed here. Parameters unique to the
PID-PL block are presented in bold.

149
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

ADVDEVALM.DB OPEXHIFL
ADVDEVALM.DBU OPEXHILM
ADVDEVALM.FL OPEXLOFL
ADVDEVALM.PR OPEXLOLM
ADVDEVALM.SV OPHIACTIVE
ADVDEVALM.TM OPHIALM.DB
ADVDEVALM.TMO OPHIALM.DBU
ADVDEVALM.TP OPHIALM.FL
ADVDEVOPT OPHIALM.PR
ADVSP OPHIALM.SV
ADVSPP OPHIALM.TM
ALMDB OPHIALM.TMO
ALMDBU OPHIALM.TP
ALMTM OPHIFL
ARWNET[1..8] OPHILM
ARWOP OPHILMOPT
ARWRATIO OPHIOPTOFFSET
ASTEPID OPLOACTIVE
BADCTLALM.FL OPLOALM.DB
BADCTLALM.PR OPLOALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.SV OPLOALM.FL
BADCTLFL OPLOALM.PR
BADCTLOPT OPLOALM.SV
BADOCOPT OPLOALM.TM
BADOCOPTENB OPLOALM.TMO
BADPVALM.FL OPLOALM.TP
BADPVALM.PR OPLOFL
BADPVALM.SV OPLOLM
BADCTLALM.TM OPLOLMOPT
BADCTLALM.TMO OPLOOPTOFFSET
BADPVALM.TP OPMINCHG
CALIBRATION OPREQ
CASREQFL OPROCLM
CLOSEDLOOPRESP OPROCNEGFL
COMPUTEARW OPROCPOSFL
CTLACTN OPTMODE
CTLEQN OPTSPEED
CTLINIT OPTYPE
CTLSTATE ORDERINCM
CTRLMODE OUTIND
CV OUTTYPE
CVEUHI PREDPVHIALM.FL

150 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

CVEULO PREDPVHIALM.PR
CVTYPE PREDPVHIALM.SV
D[1..5] PREDPVHIALM.TP
DELCV PREDPVLOALM.FL
DESC PREDPVLOALM.PR
DEV PREDPVLOALM.SV
DEVHIALM.DB PREDPVHIALM.TM
DEVHIALM.DBU PREDPVHIALM.TMO
DEVHIALM.FL PREDPVLOALM.TP
DEVHIALM.PR PRFRATIO
DEVHIALM.SV PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
DEVHIALM.TM PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
DEVHIALM.TMO PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
DEVHIALM.TP PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
DEVLOALM.DB PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
DEVLOALM.DBU PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
DEVLOALM.FL PROCDEADTIME
DEVLOALM.PR PROCDEADTIMEACT
DEVLOALM.SV PROCDEADTIMEBIAS
DEVLOALM.TM PROCGAINACT
DEVLOALM.TMO PROCGAINEU
DEVLOALM.TP PROCGAINMULT
ESWENB PROCGAINPCT
ESWFL.AUTO PROCGAINUNITS
ESWFL.BCAS PUSHSP
ESWFL.CAS PV
ESWFL.MAN PVASYNCOPT
ESWPERM PVEUHI
EUDESC PVEULO
FBORSTS PVFORMAT
GAINHILM PVMANOPT
GAINLOLM PVP
GAINOPT PVSTS
GAPHILM PVSTSFL.BAD
GAPLOLM PVSTSFL.MAN
HIALM.PR PVSTSFL.NORM
HIALM.SV PVSTSFL.UNCER
HIALM.TYPE PVTRAKOPT
HOLDOPT PVTRAKOPTAI
HOLDRATE REDTAG
HOLDVAL RESET
INALM RESETMODEL

151
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INITMAN RESTARTOPT
INITREQ[1..8] SAFEOP
INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.EUHI
INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.EULO
INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.INITVAL
K] SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
KLIN SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
KMODIFEXT SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
KMODIFGAP SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
KMODIFNL SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
LASTGOODPV SECINITOPT[1..8]
LASTMODEREQ SIALM.FL
LASTOPREQ SIALM.OPT
LASTOPTYPE SIALM.PR
LASTRATEREQ SIALM.SV
LASTREQFL SIFL
LASTSPREQ SIOPT
LASTSPTVREQ SP
LASTSTEP SPEUHI
LEGACYGAP SPEULO
MODE SPFORMAT
MODEAPPL[1..4] SPHI
MODEATTR SPHIACTIVE
MODEATTRFL.NORM SPHIFL
MODEATTRFL.OPER SPHILM
MODEATTRFL.PROG SPHILMOPT
MODECHANGE SPHIOPTOFFSET
MODEFL.AUTO SPHIRAMPRATE
MODEFL.BCAS SPLO
MODEFL.CAS SPLOACTIVE
MODEFL.MAN SPLOFL
MODEFL.NORM SPLOLM
MODELPV SPLOLMOPT
MODEPERM SPLOOPTOFFSET
MODEREQ SPLORAMPRATE
MODETRACK SPP
N[1..5] SPRATEREQ
NEWSAMPLE SPREQ
NLFORM SPTV

152 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

NLGAIN SPTVDEVFL
NORMMODE SPTVDEVMAX
NORMMODEATTR SPTVNORMRATE
NUMCOEFDEN SPTVOPT
NUMCOEFNUM SPTVP
NUMINSERT SPTVRATE
NUMPRI SPTVREQ
NUMSEC SPTVSTATE
OP SPTVTIME
OPBIAS STARTOPT
OPBIAS.FIX STARTRATE
OPBIAS.FLOAT STARTVAL
OPBIAS.RATE STEADYSTATEOP
OPENLOOPRESP STEADYSTATEOPEU
OPEU STEADYSTATEPV
OPEUMOVE STOPOPT
STOPRATE
STOPVAL
T1
T1HILM
T1LOLM
T2
T2HILM
T2LOLM
TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE
TMOUTTIME
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
UPDATEMODEL
VALVETRAVELRDCT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PID-PL Block.

3.11.8 PIDFF (PID Feedforward) block

Description The PIDFF block is like the PID block but it accepts a feedforward signal as an additional input.
You can configure the PIDFF block so the feedforward signal is added to or multiplied by the
normal PID algorithm's incremental output to meet your particular control requirements.

153
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • The multiplicative feedforward action is typically used to compensate for variations in
process gain that are caused by changes in the throughput. It is usually used with a lead/lag
relay to provide dynamic feedforward control for a given application. For example, if the
feed rate is doubled in a heating application, twice the amount of fuel might be required,
which is equivalent to doubling the process gain.
• Includes the feedforward signal (FF) in the calculation of the PID's incremental output
before the full value output is accumulated.
• With R410, PIDFF block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received within a
predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
• Holds the SP value at its last good value.
• Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
• Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets its Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL).
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Inputs • Requires both PV and FF inputs to provide its feedforward function. The PV and FF inputs
must be pulled from other blocks; you cannot store to them. The feedforward signal may
come from a field device (via an IA channel block) or an Auxiliary function block. Field
inputs are typically subjected to deadtime or lead-lag compensation before being connected
to the FF input of this block, which may be provided by the Deadtime or Lead-Lag
Auxiliary function blocks.
• The SP input is not required, since it does not have to be pulled from another function block.
– If Mode is CAScade and the SP is pulled from another function block, it receives its
value from an upstream primary and it is an initializable input.
– If Mode is CAScade and the SP is not connected to another function block, the value of
the SP is frozen at the last acquired value.
– If Mode is AUTOmatic, the SP value may be stored by the operator or a user program.
• SP is an initializable input; PV and FF are non-initializable.
Input Ranges and • PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also define the
Limits engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the same range.
– PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
• SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
– Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user program
attempts to store value outside limits, block clamps it to appropriate limit and sets
primary's windup status.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.

154 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Output Ranges and CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
Limits secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its CV range
to that. If it has no secondary, you must specify CVEUHI and CVEULO range.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV range
(user-specified values).
– OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or user program
attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may store OP value outside these
limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent of CV
range (user-entered values).
– Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
Equation Options • Equation A - Proportional, Integral, and Derivative on error.
• Equation B -- Proportional and Integral on error and Derivative on changes in PV.
• Equation C -- Integral on error and Proportional and Derivative on changes in PV.
• Equation D -- Integral only.
• Equation E -- Proportional only; this equation supports the following two options that affect
CV:
– Output bias processing which adds fixed and floating bias to unbiased CV.
– Reverse-control action causes the sign of the unbiased CV to be reversed.
Gain Options If equation A, B, or C is selected, any of the following gain options may be chosen:
• Linear Gain -- provides proportional control action that is equal to a constant (K) times the
error.
• Gap Gain -- used to reduce sensitivity of control system when PV is in user-specified band
(gap) around set point.
• Nonlinear Gain -- control action is proportional to square of error, rather than error itself.
• External Gain -- gain (K) is modified by input value that can come from the process, another
block or user program.
Direct or Reverse • Direct action -- increase in error increases output (OP).
Control • Reverse action -- increase in error decreases output (OP).

155
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB NLFORM

ADVDEVALM.DBU NLGAIN
ADVDEVALM.FL NORMMODE
ADVDEVALM.PR NORMMODEATTR
ADVDEVALM.SV NUMINSERT
ADVDEVALM.TM NUMPRI
NUMSEC
ADVDEVALM.TMO
OP
ADVDEVALM.TP
OPBIAS
ADVDEVOPT
OPBIAS.FIX
ADVSP
OPBIAS.FLOAT
ADVSPP
OPBIAS.RATE
ALMDB
OPEU
ALMDBU
OPEXHIFL
ALMTM
OPEXHILM
ARWNET[1..8]
OPEXLOFL
ARWOP
OPEXLOLM
ASTEPID
OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.FL
OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.PR
OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLALM.SV
OPHIALM.PR
BADCTLALM.TM
OPHIALM.SV
BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.TM
BADCTLFL
OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLOPT
OPHIALM.TP
BADOCOPT OPHIFL
OPHILM
BADOCOPTENB
OPLOALM.DB
BFF
OPLOALM.DBU
CASREQFL
OPLOALM.FL
COMPUTEARW
OPLOALM.PR
CTLACTN
OPLOALM.SV
CTLEQN
OPLOALM.TM
CTLINIT
OPLOALM.TMO
CTLSTATE
OPLOALM.TP
CV
OPLOFL
CVEUHI
OPLOLM
CVEULO
OPMINCHG
CVTYPE
OPREQ
DELCV
OPROCLM
DESC
OPROCNEGFL
DEV
OPROCPOSFL
DEVHIALM.DB

156 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

DEVHIALM.DBU OPTYPE
DEVHIALM.FL ORDERINCM
DEVHIALM.PR OUTIND
DEVHIALM.SV OUTTYPE
DEVHIALM.TM PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
DEVHIALM.TMO
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
DEVHIALM.TP
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
DEVLOALM.DB
PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
DEVLOALM.DBU
PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
DEVLOALM.FL
PUSHSP
DEVLOALM.PR
PV
DEVLOALM.SV
PVEUHI
DEVLOALM.TM
PVEULO
DEVLOALM.TMO
PVFORMAT
DEVLOALM.TP
PVMANOPT
ESWENB
PVP
ESWFL.AUTO
PVSTS
ESWFL.BCAS
PVSTSFL.BAD
ESWFL.CAS
PVSTSFL.MAN
ESWFL.MAN
PVSTSFL.NORM
ESWPERM
PVSTSFL.UNCER
EUDESC
PVTRAKOPT
FBORSTS
PVTRAKOPTAI
FF
REDTAG
FFOPT
RESTARTOPT
FFSTS
SAFEOP
GAINHILM
SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
GAINLOLM
SECDATAIN.EUHI
GAINOPT
SECDATAIN.EULO
GAPHILM
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
GAPLOLM
SECDATAIN.INITSTS
HIALM.PR
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
HIALM.SV
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
HIALM.TYPE
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
HOLDOPT
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
HOLDRATE
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
HOLDVAL
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
INALM
SECINITOPT[1..8]
INITMAN
SIALM.FL
INITREQ[1..8]
SIALM.OPT
INITVAL[1..8]
SIALM.PR
INSBLOCK[1..10]

157
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INSFAILALM.FL SIALM.SV
INSFAILALM.PR SIFL
INSFAILALM.SV SIOPT
INSFAILFL SP
K SPEUHI
KFF SPEULO
KLIN SPFORMAT
KMODIFEXT SPHIFL
KMODIFGAP SPHILM
KMODIFNL SPLOFL
LASTGOODPV SPLOLM
LASTMODEREQ SPP
LASTOPREQ SPRATEREQ
LASTOPTYPE SPREQ
LASTRATEREQ SPTV
LASTREQFL SPTVDEVFL
LASTSPREQ SPTVDEVMAX
LASTSPTVREQ SPTVNORMRATE
LASTSTEP SPTVOPT
LEGACYGAP SPTVP
MODE SPTVRATE
MODEAPPL[1..4] SPTVREQ
MODEATTR SPTVSTATE
MODEATTRFL.NORM SPTVTIME
MODEATTRFL.OPER STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.PROG STARTRATE
MODECHANGE STARTVAL
MODEFL.AUTO STOPOPT
MODEFL.BCAS STOPRATE
MODEFL.CAS STOPVAL
MODEFL.MAN T1
MODEFL.NORM T1HILM
MODEPERM T1LOLM
MODEREQ T2
MODETRACK T2HILM
NAME T2LOLM
TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE
TMOUTTIME

UNCMDCHGALM.FL

UNCMDCHGALM.OPT

158 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

UNCMDCHGALM.PR

UNCMDCHGALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PIDFF (PID
Feedforward) Block.

3.11.9 POSPROP (Position Proportional) block

Description Used to pulse two digital output devices (one for raise pulses and another for lower pulses) to
drive a process variable (PV) toward its set point (SP). The only valid output destinations are to
Digital Output Channel blocks or the Pulse Count and Pulse Length blocks.
Function • Typically used to step a valve open or closed, raise or lower a rotary device, or move the
plates of a pulp mill refiner together or apart.
• Compares the error signal (PV - SP) with an error deadband for the raise and lower
directions at an interval based on the configurable cycle time parameter (CYCLETIME).
You can also configure the raise and lower deadband values that are denoted as the
parameters ERRORDBR and ERRORDBL, respectively.
• Generates a raise pulse, when the PV is less than the SP minus the raise error deadband
(ERRORDBR); or a lower pulse, when the PV is greater than the SP plus the lower error
deadband (ERRORDBL) to reduce the error.
• The pulse duration determines the magnitude of a pulse - the longer the duration, the bigger
the pulse. The POSPROP block will not issue a raise or lower pulse that is longer than the
configured cycle time (CYCLETIME) or the respective maximum pulse time parameter
MAXPULSER or MAXPULSEL, whichever is smaller. The block uses the following values
in its pulse duration calculation.
– Error signal (PV - SP)
– Raise or lower gain setting (KR or KL)
– Raise or lower pulse stroke rate (RAISERATE or LOWERRATE)
– Additional raise or lower pulse time (RAISEDEADTM or LOWERDEADTM) based on
stiction compensation (STICTIONR or STICTIONL), when a motor starts up; or
backlash compensation (BACKLASHR or BACKLASHL), when a motor changes
direction.
– Minimum raise or lower pulse time (MINPULSER or MINPULSEL)
• With R410, POSPROP block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on SP. If a good SP value is not received within a
predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL)
• Holds the SP value at its last good value.
• Changes the mode to a user-specified TMOUTMODE.
• Requests the input's primary to initialize.
If SP times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets its Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL).
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.

159
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs The required number of inputs is determined by the mode of the POSPROP block.
• If Mode is CAScade, two inputs are required - PV and SP.
• If Mode is AUTOmatic or MANual, only PV is required.
– SP is an initializable input; PV is non-initializable.
– PV must be pulled from another block; you cannot store to it - typically it is connected
to the output of an auxiliary or data acquisition (DATAACQ) block.
– If Mode is CAScade, SP is pulled from another block; if Mode is AUTOmatic, it may be
stored by the operator.
– The POSPROP block may have one primary or none, depending on whether SP is
configured or not; there is one primary per initializable input.
The optional raise and lower flag inputs (RAISELMFL and LOWERLMFL) may be set
externally to inhibit raise and lower pulses, respectively. These optional inputs can be pulled
from other function blocks.
Input Ranges and • PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. They also define the
Limits engineering unit range of SP, since PV and SP are assumed to have the same range.
– PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
• SPHILM and SPLOLM define set point operating limits in engineering units.
Prevents operator from storing SP value outside limits; if primary or user program attempts to
store value outside limits, block clamps it to appropriate limit and sets primary's windup status.
Outputs The POSPROP block has the following initializable outputs:
• RAISETIME = Raise pulse duration.
• LOWERTIME = Lower pulse duration.
• PULSETIME = Pulse duration.
Output Ranges and The POSPROP block uses the maximum and minimum pulse parameters to define pulse
Limits duration ranges and limits.
• MAXPULSER and MAXPULSEL define the maximum pulse time in the Raise and Lower
directions, respectively. The POSPROP block will not issue a Raise/Lower pulse with a
duration that exceeds these values. If the output and CYCLETIME are greater than
MAXPULSER/MAXPULSEL, the output is clamped to MAXPULSER/MAXPULSEL.
• MINPULSER and MINPULSEL define the minimum pulse time in the Raise and Lower
directions, respectively. The POSPROP block will not issue a Raise/Lower pulse with a
duration that is less than these values. If the output is less than MINPULSER/MINPULSEL,
the output retains its old value.
(Note that the POSPROP block does not use these common regulatory control block range
and limit parameters: CVEUHI, CVEULO, OPHILM, OPLOLM, OPEXHILM, and
OPEXLOLM.)
Equation Options The POSPROP block generates Raise and Lower pulses at a rate specified by the configurable
cycle time (CYCLETIME) parameter. It calculates the pulse duration at the beginning of each
cycle depending on whether:
• The PVP is greater than (SPP - ERRORDBR) and the Raise limit flag (RAISELMFL) is
OFF, then issue a Raise pulse.
• The PVP is less than (SPP + ERRORDBL) and the Lower limit flag (LOWERLMFL) is
OFF, then issue a Lower pulse.
The PULSETIME output is set to either the RAISETIME or -LOWERTIME, when either
RAISETIME or LOWERTIME is non-zero.

160 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Control Initialization The POSPROP block accepts initialization information from its three initializable outputs:
RAISETIME, LOWERTIME, and PULSETIME. If any output requests initialization, the
POSPROP block sets its INITMAN parameter to ON. When no output requests initialization,
the POSPROP block sets its INITMAN parameter to OFF. When cycling resumes after
initialization, the Raise and Lower outputs are both set to OFF (or their normal states) and the
cycle time is restarted.
Override Feedback The POSPROP block does not propagate override feedback data. It ignores any override
Processing feedback requests.

161
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB MINPULSER

ADVDEVALM.DBU MODE
ADVDEVALM.FL MODEAPPL[1..4]
ADVDEVALM.PR MODEATTR
ADVDEVALM.SV MODEATTRFL.NORM
ADVDEVALM.TM MODEATTRFL.OPER
MODEATTRFL.PROG
ADVDEVALM.TMO
MODECHANGE
ADVDEVALM.TP
MODEFL.AUTO
ADVDEVOPT
MODEFL.BCAS
ADVSP
MODEFL.CAS
ADVSPP
MODEFL.MAN
ALMDB
MODEFL.NORM
ALMDBU
MODEPERM
ALMTM
MODEREQ
ARWNET[1..8]
MODETRACK
ARWOP
NAME
ASTEPID
NORMMODE
BACKLASHL
NORMMODEATTR
BACKLASHR
NUMINSERT
BADCTLALM.FL
NUMPRI
BADCTLALM.PR
NUMSEC
BADCTLALM.SV
OPREQ
BADCTLALM.TM
OPTYPE
BADCTLALM.TMO
ORDERINCM
BADCTLFL OUTTYPE
BADCTLOPT PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
CASREQFL PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
COMPUTEARW PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
CTLINIT PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
CVTYPE PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
CYCLETIME PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
DESC PULSECMD
DEV PULSECMDTEXT[0..2]
DEVHIALM.DB PULSETIME
DEVHIALM.DBU PV
DEVHIALM.FL PVEUHI
DEVHIALM.PR PVEULO
DEVHIALM.SV PVFORMAT
DEVHIALM.TM PVMANOPT
PVP
DEVHIALM.TMO
PVSTS
DEVHIALM.TP

162 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

DEVLOALM.DB PVSTSFL.BAD
DEVLOALM.DBU PVSTSFL.MAN
DEVLOALM.FL PVSTSFL.NORM
DEVLOALM.PR PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
DEVLOALM.SV RAISEDEADTM
DEVLOALM.TM RAISEDESC
RAISELMFL
DEVLOALM.TMO
RAISERATE
DEVLOALM.TP
RAISETIME
ERRORDBL
REDTAG
ERRORDBR
RESTARTOPT
ESWENB
SAFEOPCMD
ESWFL.AUTO
SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
ESWFL.BCAS
SECDATAIN.EUHI
ESWFL.CAS
SECDATAIN.EULO
ESWFL.MAN
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
ESWPERM
SECDATAIN.INITSTS
EUDESC
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
EXTRAPULSE
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
EXTRAPULSETM
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
FBORSTS
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
HIALM.PR
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
HIALM.SV
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
HIALM.TYPE
SECINITOPT[1..8]
HOLDOPT
SIALM.FL
HOLDRATE
SIALM.OPT
HOLDVAL
SIALM.PR
INALM
SIALM.SV
INITMAN
SIFL
INITREQ[1..8]
SIOPT
INITVAL[1..8]
SP
INSBLOCK[1..10]
SPEUHI
INSFAILALM.FL
SPEULO
INSFAILALM.PR
SPFORMAT
INSFAILALM.SV
SPHIFL
INSFAILFL
SPHILM
KL
SPLOFL
KR
SPLOLM
LASTGOODPV
SPP
LASTMODEREQ
SPRATEREQ
LASTOPREQ
SPREQ
LASTOPTYPE
SPTV
LASTRATEREQ

163
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

LASTREQFL SPTVDEVFL
LASTSPREQ SPTVDEVMAX
LASTSPTVREQ SPTVNORMRATE
LASTSTEP SPTVOPT
LOWERDEADTM SPTVP
LOWERDESC SPTVRATE
LOWERLMFL SPTVREQ
LOWERRATE SPTVSTATE
LOWERTIME SPTVTIME
MANPULSECMD STARTOPT
MANPULSETIME STARTRATE
MAXPULSEL STARTVAL
MAXPULSER STICTIONL
MINPULSEL STICTIONR
STOPOPT
STOPRATE
STOPVAL
TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE
TMOUTTIME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the POSPROP
(Position Proportional) Block.

3.11.10 PULSECOUNT block

Description The PULSECOUNT block generates pulses according to its pulse count control algorithm. The
pulsed outputs are usually fed to Digital Output Channel blocks.
Dual Pulse Train: A control algorithm turns on either a “raise” channel or a “lower” channel
after every execution of this algorithm. The output is modulated with a 50% duty-cycle pulse
train. The on-duration (or pulse length) is configured for the channel and is indicted with a
tuning parameter. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec increments.
Single Pulse Train: A single output channel is used to indicate the direction (raise or lower) of
the actuator. A second output channel is used to deliver a 50% duty cycle pulse train. The on-
duration (or pulse length) is configured for the channel and is indicted with a tuning parameter.
The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec increments.
Function • Typically used in conjunction with a POSPROP block to step a valve open or closed, raise
or lower a rotary device, or move the plates of a pulp mill refiner together or apart.
• The POSPROP block feeds the PULSETIME input parameter to the PULSECOUNT block.
This parameter is an internal structure that contains the pulse width specification (in
seconds). It also contains a Serial Number that changes every time there is a new pulse
width value. The PULSECOUNT block checks for a change in the Serial Number before
reacting to the pulse width specification.

164 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs • Requires a pulse time (PULSETIME) input from another block. A POSPROP block usually
supplies this.
• The POPERIOD input is user configurable in seconds.
• The PDELAYDIRCHG input is user configurable in seconds.
• The optional LOCALMAN input should come from another block in a logic strategy where
an ON condition means that the CEE is not controlling the output of the device.
Outputs The PULSECOUNT block has the following initializable outputs:
• PORAISE = Pulse output for Raise pulses. These pulses are generated if the pulse width
specified by the PULSETIME input is positive.
• POLOWER = Pulse output for Lower pulses. These pulses are generated if the pulse width
specified by the PULSETIME input is negative.
• PO = Pulse output for both Raise and Lower pulses. These pulses are generated as a logical
OR between the PORAISE and POLOWER pulses.
• PODIR = Direction for PO. This output is OFF for a Lower pulse and is ON for a Raise
pulse.
Parameters COMPUTEARW PODIR
CVTYPE POLOWER
INITMAN POPERIOD
INITREQ PORAISE
INSBLOCK[1..10] PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
INSFAILALM.FL PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
INSFAILALM.PR PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
INSFAILALM.SV PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
INSFAILFL PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
LOCALMAN PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
MODECHANGE PULSETIME
NAME SECDATAIN.HISELECT
NUMINSERT SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
ORDERINCM SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
OUTTYPE SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
PDELAYDIRCHG
PO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PULSECOUNT
Block.

3.11.11 PULSELENGTH block

Description Generates pulse trains according to its pulse length control algorithm. The pulsed outputs are
usually fed to Digital Output Channel blocks.
Dual Pulse Length: A control algorithm turns on either a “raise” channel or a “lower” channel
after every execution of this algorithm. The selected output stays on for a time period that is
calculated by the control algorithm. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec increments.
Single Pulse Length: A single output channel is used to indicate the direction (raise or lower)
of the actuator. A second output channel is used to indicate the calculated on-duration (or
length) of the pulse. The calculated on-duration will be in 10 msec increments.

165
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • Typically used in conjunction with a POSPROP block to step a valve open or closed, raise
or lower a rotary device, or move the plates of a pulp mill refiner together or apart.
• The POSPROP block feeds the PULSETIME input parameter to the PULSELENGTH
block. This parameter is an internal structure that contains the pulse width specification (in
seconds). It also contains a Serial Number that changes every time there is a new pulse
width value. The PULSELENGTH block checks for a change in the Serial Number before
reacting to the pulse width specification.
Inputs • Requires a pulse time (PULSETIME) input from another block. A POSPROP block
usually supplies this.
• The PDELAYDIRCHG input is user configurable in seconds.
• The optional LOCALMAN input should come from another block in a logic strategy
where an ON condition means that the CEE is not controlling the output of the device.
Outputs The PULSELENGTH block has the following initializable outputs:
• PORAISE = Pulse output for Raise pulses. These pulses are generated if the pulse width
specified by the PULSETIME input is positive.
• POLOWER = Pulse output for Lower pulses. These pulses are generated if the pulse width
specified by the PULSETIME input is negative.
• PO = Pulse output for both Raise and Lower pulses. These pulses are generated as a logical
OR between the PORAISE and POLOWER pulses.
• PODIR = Direction for PO. This output is OFF for a Lower pulse and is ON for a Raise
pulse.
Parameters COMPUTEARW PO
CTLSTATE PODIR
CVTYPE POLOWER
INITMAN PORAISE
INITREQ PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
INSBLOCK[1..10] PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
INSFAILALM.FL PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
INSFAILALM.PR PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
INSFAILALM.SV PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
INSFAILFL PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
LOCALMAN PULSETIME
MODECHANGE SECDATAIN.HISELECT
NAME SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
NUMINSERT SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
ORDERINCM SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
OUTTYPE
PDELAYDIRCHG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PULSELENGTH
Block.

166 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.11.12 RAMPSOAK block

Description Provides an output that tracks a user configured set point versus time profile. The block
supports up to 99 separate profiles with up to 50 user configured ramp and soak segment pairs
per profile, for a total of 60 segments (where each segment is one ramp or one soak)
Each ramp/soak pair is defined by a soak value (i.e., the target value for the ramp segment), a
ramp rate and a soak time. This lets you implement a set point program control function by
driving the set point of another regulatory control function block.
Function This function is also known as a “set point programmer” because the output follows a
sequence of user-programmed functions, and is typically used as the set point of a PID.
Typically used for automatic temperature cycling in furnaces and ovens. It can also be used for
automatic startup of units and for simple batch-sequence control where the batch sequence is
part of a process that is otherwise a continuous process. This block monitors an input value
(typically the PV of the PID), and guarantees that its output will not deviate from the input by
more than some user-specified limits.
This function block may be configured to execute a profile once and stop; repeat continuously
the same profile; or execute the next profile in order after completion of the current profile.
With R410, RAMSOAK block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Inputs Only requires a PV input for the guaranteed ramp option.
Input Ranges and PVEUHI and PVEULO define full range of PV in engineering units. The default range is 0 to
Limits 100.
• PVEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
• PVEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden connection
function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges and CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If this block has a
Limits secondary, it brings the secondary's input range through the BACKCALC and sets its CV
range to that. If it has no secondary, you must specify CVEUHI and CVEULO range.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV
range (user-specified values).
– OP clamps to limits if calculated CV exceeds them, or another block or user program
attempts to store OP value exceeding them; operator may store OP value outside these
limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as percent of
CV range (user-entered values).
Prevents operator from storing OP value that exceeds these limits.
that the RAMPSOAK block does not apply a floating bias to the output.
Guaranteed Ramp Rate If you configure a maximum ramp deviation (MAXRAMPDEV[n]) value for a given profile,
the RAMPSOAK block makes sure that the calculated output (CV) value does not deviate
from the input (PV) by more than the configured deviation value
Guaranteed Soak Time If you configure the maximum high soak deviation (MAXHISOAKDEV[n]) and/or the
maximum low soak deviation (MAXLOSOAKDEV[n]) value, the RAMPSOAK block makes
sure the calculated output (CV) value is at the proper value before it starts the soak timer.

167
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Event Timers You can configure up to 16 event flags (EVENTFL[n,e]) to provide Boolean outputs for a
specified time during a given ramp or soak segment in a given profile. This means you can
have up to 16 events per profile or a total of 160 events in 10 profiles.

168 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACTRAMPRATE[1..NUMPROFILES] NAME

[1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
NETELAPSEDTM
ACTSOAKTIME[1..NUMPROFILES]
NORMMODE
[1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
NORMMODEATTR
ACTSOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES]
[1..NUMRAMPSOAK] NUMEVENTS[1..NUMPROFILES]
ACTSTARTOP[1..NUMPROFILES] NUMINSERT
ACTSTARTSEG[1..NUMPROFILES] NUMPRI
ALMDB NUMPROFILES
ALMDBU NUMRAMPSOAK[1..NUMPROFILES]
ALMTM NUMSEC
ARWNET[1..8] OP
ARWOP OPBIAS
ASTEPID OPBIAS.FIX
BADOCOPT OPBIAS.FLOAT
BADOCOPTENB OPBIAS.RATE
CASREQFL OPEU
COMPUTEARW OPEXHIFL
CTLINIT OPEXHILM
CTLSTATE OPEXLOFL
CURPROFILEID OPEXLOLM
CURSEGID OPHIALM.DB
CURSEGTYP OPHIALM.DBU
CV OPHIALM.FL
CVEUHI OPHIALM.PR
CVEULO OPHIALM.SV
CVTYPE OPHIALM.TM
CYCLEOPT[1..NUMPROFILES] OPHIALM.TMO
DESC OPHIALM.TP
DEVHIALM.DB OPHIFL
DEVHIALM.DBU OPHILM
DEVHIALM.FL OPLOALM.DB
DEVHIALM.PR OPLOALM.DBU
DEVHIALM.SV OPLOALM.FL
DEVHIALM.TM OPLOALM.PR
DEVHIALM.TMO OPLOALM.SV
DEVHIALM.TP OPLOALM.TM
DEVLOALM.DB OPLOALM.TMO
DEVLOALM.DBU OPLOALM.TP
DEVLOALM.FL OPLOFL
DEVLOALM.PR OPLOLM
DEVLOALM.SV OPMINCHG
DEVLOALM.TM OPREQ

169
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

DEVLOALM.TMO OPROCLM
DEVLOALM.TP OPROCNEGFL
ESWENB OPROCPOSFL
ESWFL.AUTO OPTYPE
ESWFL.BCAS ORDERINCM
ESWFL.CAS OUTIND
ESWFL.MAN OUTTYPE
ESWPERM PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
EUDESC PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
EVENTBGNTIME[1..NUMPROFILES] PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
[1..NUMEVENTS]
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
EVENTENDTIME[1..NUMPROFILES]
PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
[1..NUMEVENTS]
PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
EVENTFL[1..NUMEVENTS]
PROFILEDESC[1..NUMPROFILES
EVENTSEGID[1..NUMPROFILES]
[1..NUMEVENTS] ]
FBORSTS PROFRESET
HIALM.PR PV
HIALM.SV PVEUHI
HIALM.TYPE PVEULO
HOLDCMD PVSTS
HOLDOPT RAMPRATE[1..NUMPROFILES]
HOLDRATE [1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
HOLDVAL REDTAG
INALM REMSOAKTIME
INITMAN RESETTIMR
INITREQ[1..8] RESTARTOPT
INITVAL[1..8] SAFEOP
INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.EUHI
INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.EULO
INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.INITSTS
LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.INITVAL
LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MAXHISOAKDEV[1..NUMPROFILES] SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
MAXLOSOAKDEV[1..NUMPROFILES] SECINITOPT[1..8]
MAXRAMPDEV[1..NUMPROFILES] SIALM.FL
MAXSOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES] SIALM.OPT
MINSOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES] SIALM.PR

170 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

MODE SIALM.SV
MODEAPPL[1..4] SIFL
MODEATTR SIOPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM SOAKTIME[1..NUMPROFILES]
[1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
MODEATTRFL.OPER
SOAKVAL[1..NUMPROFILES]
MODEATTRFL.PROG
[1..NUMRAMPSOAK]
MODECHANGE
STARTOP[1..NUMPROFILES]
MODEFL.AUTO
STARTOPT
MODEFL.BCAS
STARTRATE
MODEFL.CAS
STARTSEG[1..NUMPROFILES]
MODEFL.MAN
STARTVAL
MODEFL.NORM
STOPOPT
MODEPERM
STOPRATE
MODEREQ
STOPVAL
MODETRACK
TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE
TMOUTTIME
TOTALTIME[1..50]
TOTELAPSEDTM
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RAMPSOAK
Block.

3.11.13 RATIOBIAS block

Description Accepts a ratio value input (RT) and an input value (X1) to provide a calculated output based
on the ratio of the input variables plus a fixed and/or a floating bias. The input value must
come from another function block. In the Cascade mode, the ratio input value must come from
another function block; but, in the Automatic (Auto) Mode, an operator or user program can
set the ratio value.
Function Lets you implement a form of ratio control by using this block between two PID blocks. In this
case, the output from one PID block is used as the X1 input to the RATIOBIAS block and the
output from the RATIOBIAS block is used as the SP input to the second PID block.
With R410, RATIOBIAS block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.

171
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, this block performs timeout monitoring on both inputs (X1 and RT). If either
input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout
processing.
• If RT times out, block
– Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
– Holds RT at its last good value.
– Sheds to the configured timeout mode (TMOUTMODE).
– Requests the RT primary to initialize.
• If X1 times out, block
– Sets the X1 value to NaN. This causes CV to go to NaN, which results in the
initialization of the RT and X1 primaries.
If RT times out and the block sheds to Auto mode, block sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). When CASREQFL is set, it means the block is waiting to return to the cascade
mode, and will do so as soon as it gets a good X1 value. This is true only, if the original mode
was Cascade and the TMOUTMODE is Auto . If you change the mode, this clears the
CASREQFL and disables the return to cascade operation.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control Initialization Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition, the
secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However, you can
disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores initialization requests from the secondary.
If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = initialization value from the secondary,
• Calculates an initialization value for the X1 and RT primaries.
– INITVAL[1] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX / RT
– INITVAL[2] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX / INITVAL[1]
• Requests both primaries to initialize:
– INITREQ[1] = ON
– INITREQ[2] = ON
Override Feedback If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector (OVRDSEL) block,
Processing it receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override feedback
value and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the selected or
unselected strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks. However, you can
disable the SECINITOPT so the block ignores override requests from the secondary.
When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
• Computes a feedback value for X1 and RT primaries:
– feedback value for X1 = ORFBVAL - OPBIAS.FIX -OPBIAS.FLOAT / RT
– feedback value for RT = ORFBVAL - OPBIAS.FIX - OPBIAS.FLOAT / X1 override
feedback value
Inputs Required number of inputs is determined by this block's mode:
• If Mode = Cascade, 2 inputs are required - X1 and RT. Both must come from other
function blocks.
• If Mode = Auto or Man, only X1 is required. X1 must come from another function block;
an operator cannot set it.
• Both X1 and RT are initializable inputs. So, this block may have one or two primaries,
depending upon whether RT input is used or not.
• If mode = Auto, an operator or user program can set the RT value.

172 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Input Ranges • XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X1 inputs in engineering units. This block
applies no range checking, since it assumes that X1 is within XEUHI and XEULO.
– XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
• RTHILM and RTLOLM define the ratio limits for RT inputs in engineering units. An
operator is prevented from setting an RT value that is outside these limits. If the RT value
from a function block or user program is outside these limits, this block clamps the value
to the appropriate limit and sets RT primary windup status.
– RTHILM represents high ratio limit value.
– RTLOLM represents low ratio limit value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/
OPEUX) connection when required.
Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units.
If this block has a secondary, it uses the secondary's input range through BACKCALC to set
its CV range. If it does not have a secondary, its CV range tracks its own input range (XEUHI
and XEULO).
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of the CV
range (user-specified values).
– OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another
block or user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them.
– Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a
percent of the CV range (user-specified values).
– Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.

173
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB OP
ALMDBU OPBIAS
ALMTM OPBIAS.FIX
ARWNET[1..8] OPBIAS.FLOAT
ARWOP OPBIAS.RATE
ASTEPID OPEU
BADCTLALM.FL OPEXHIFL
BADCTLALM.PR OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.SV OPEXLOFL
OPEXLOLM
BADCTLALM.TM
OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLFL
OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLOPT
OPHIALM.PR
BADOCOPT OPHIALM.SV
BADOCOPTENB OPHIALM.TM
BSHILM
OPHIALM.TMO
BSLOLM
OPHIALM.TP
CASREQFL
OPHIFL
COMPUTEARW
OPHILM
CTLINIT
OPLOALM.DB
CTLSTATE
OPLOALM.DBU
CV
OPLOALM.FL
CVEUHI
OPLOALM.PR
CVEULO
OPLOALM.SV
CVTYPE
OPLOALM.TM
DESC
OPLOALM.TMO
ESWENB
OPLOALM.TP
ESWFL.AUTO
OPLOFL
ESWFL.BCAS
OPLOLM
ESWFL.CAS
OPMINCHG
ESWFL.MAN
OPREQ
ESWPERM
OPROCLM
EUDESC
OPROCNEGFL
FBORSTS
OPROCPOSFL
HIALM.PR
OPTYPE
HIALM.SV
ORDERINCM
HIALM.TYPE
OUTIND
HOLDOPT
OUTTYPE
HOLDRATE
PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
HOLDVAL
PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
INALM
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS

174 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INITMAN PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
INITREQ[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
INITVAL[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
INSBLOCK[1..10] RBOPTION
INSFAILALM.FL REDTAG
INSFAILALM.PR RESTARTOPT
INSFAILALM.SV RT
INSFAILFL RTHIFL
LASTMODEREQ RTHILM
LASTOPREQ RTLOFL
LASTOPTYPE RTLOLM
LASTREQFL SAFEOP
LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
MODE SECDATAIN.EUHI
MODEAPPL[1..4] SECDATAIN.EULO
MODEATTR SECDATAIN.HISELECT
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.INITSTS
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODECHANGE SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEFL.AUTO SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEFL.BCAS SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEFL.CAS SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
MODEFL.MAN SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEFL.NORM SIALM.FL
MODEPERM SIALM.OPT
MODEREQ SIALM.PR
MODETRACK SIALM.SV
NAME SIFL
NORMMODE SIOPT
NORMMODEATTR STARTOPT
NUMINSERT STARTRATE
NUMPRI STARTVAL
NUMSEC STOPOPT
STOPRATE
STOPVAL
TMOUTFL
TMOUTMODE
TMOUTTIME

UNCMDCHGALM.FL

UNCMDCHGALM.OPT

175
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

UNCMDCHGALM.PR

UNCMDCHGALM.SV
X1
XEUHI
XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RATIOBIAS
Block.

3.11.14 RATIOCTL block

Description Accepts the actual value of the controlled flow (X1), the actual value of the uncontrolled flow
(X2) and the target ratio between the flows (SP), and calculates the target value of the controlled
flow (OP) and the actual ratio between the flows (PV) as outputs.
Function Provides four user-selectable methods for calculating the ratio between the flows (PV). The
target value for the controlled flow (OP) is calculated according to the selected method for
calculating PV.
With R410, RATIOCTL block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring If mode is CAScade, the block performs time-out monitoring of the initializable input, SP. - if
good SP value is not received within a predefined time (TMOUTTIME), the block invokes
timeout processing as noted below.
If MODE is Cascade and SP times-out, the RATIOCTL block does the following:
• Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL)
• Holds SP at its last good value
• Changes the mode to a user-specified “timeout mode” (MODE = TMOUTMODE)
• Requests the SP primary to initialize (via BACKCALCOUT)
If SP times-out and the block sheds to Auto mode, it sets the Cascade Request flag
(CASREQFL). When CASREQFL is set, it means the block is waiting to return to the Cascade
mode, and will do so as soon as it fetches a good SP value.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control Initialization The RATIOCTL block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC.
In addition, the secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. (Note that
SECINITOPT may be used to ignore initialization requests from the secondary.)
If the secondary is requesting initialization, the RATIOCTL block:
• initializes its output:
– CV = initialization value from the secondary
Builds an initialization request for its primary based on CTLEQN selected.

176 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Override Feedback If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector block, it will receive
Processing override feedback data when any of the following occur.
• the block's windup state changes
• the block is requested to do a oneshot initialization
• the block's override status changes
The data consists of an override status, override feedback value and an override offset flag. The
status indicates if this block is in the selected or unselected strategy (as determined by the
Selector block). The offset flag only applies to PID-type function blocks.
When the override status changes from selected to unselected, this block does the following:
• Does not initialize its CV
• Computes a feedback value for the SP primary depending on the CTLEQN selected.
Inputs • A RATIOCTL block requires these three inputs:
– X1 - the actual value of the controlled flow.
– X2 - the actual value of the uncontrolled flow
– SP - the target ratio between the controlled and uncontrolled flows.
• The SP is an initializable input. This means the block can have one primary depending upon
whether the SP input is configured or not. There is one primary for each initializable input.
• The X1and X2 inputs must come from other function blocks. You cannot store to them.
• If Mode is Cascade, SP is pulled from another function block. If Mode is Automatic, it may
be stored by the operator or a user program.
Input Ranges • You must specify X1 and X2 engineering unit range, XEUHI and XEULO.
– XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of the X inputs in engineering units.
XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
• This block assumes X inputs are within XEUHI and XEULO - it applies no range check
• You must specify SPHILM and SPLOLM to define the set point limits, expressed as a ratio.
The operator is prevented from storing a set point value that is outside these limits. If the
primary or a user program attempts to store a value outside the limits, this block will clamp
it to the appropriate limit and set the input windup status.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units.
If this block has a secondary, it fetches the secondary's input range through BACKCALC and
sets its CV range to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO must be specified by
the user.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of the CV
range (user-specified values).
– OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another
block or user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them.
– Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a percent
of the CV range (user-specified values).
– Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.

177
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ADVDEVALM.DB OP
ADVDEVALM.DBU OPBIAS
ADVDEVALM.FL
OPBIAS.FIX
ADVDEVALM.PR
OPBIAS.FLOAT
ADVDEVALM.SV
OPBIAS.RATE
ADVDEVALM.TM
OPEU
OPEXHIFL
ADVDEVALM.TMO
OPEXHILM
ADVDEVALM.TP
OPEXLOFL
ADVDEVOPT
OPEXLOLM
ADVSP
OPHIALM.DB
ADVSPP
OPHIALM.DBU
ALMDB
OPHIALM.FL
ALMDBU
OPHIALM.PR
ALMTM
OPHIALM.SV
ARWNET[1..8]
OPHIALM.TM
ARWNETIN[1..8]
ARWOP
OPHIALM.TMO
ARWOPIN
OPHIALM.TP
ASTEPID
OPHIFL
BADCTLALM.FL
OPHILM
BADCTLALM.PR
OPLOALM.DB
BADCTLALM.SV
OPLOALM.DBU
OPLOALM.FL
BADCTLALM.TM
OPLOALM.PR
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPLOALM.SV
BADCTLFL
OPLOALM.TM
BADCTLOPT
OPLOALM.TMO
BADOCOPT
OPLOALM.TP
BADOCOPTENB
OPLOFL
CASREQFL
OPLOLM
COMPUTEARW
OPMINCHG
CTLEQN
OPREQ
CTLINIT
OPROCLM
CTLSTATE
OPROCNEGFL
CV
OPROCPOSFL
CVEUHI
OPTOL
CVEULO
OPTYPE
CVTYPE
ORDERINCM
DELCV
OUTIND
DESC
PUSHSP
DEV
PV

178 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

DEVHIALM.DB PVSTS
DEVHIALM.DBU REDTAG
DEVHIALM.FL RESTARTOPT
DEVHIALM.PR SAFEOP
DEVHIALM.SV SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
DEVHIALM.TM SECDATAIN.EUHI
SECDATAIN.EULO
DEVHIALM.TMO
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
DEVHIALM.TP
SECDATAIN.INITSTS
DEVLOALM.DB
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
DEVLOALM.DBU
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
DEVLOALM.FL
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
DEVLOALM.PR
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
DEVLOALM.SV
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
DEVLOALM.TM
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
SECINITOPT[1..8]
DEVLOALM.TMO
SIALM.FL
DEVLOALM.TP
SIALM.OPT
ESWENB
SIALM.PR
ESWFL.AUTO
SIALM.SV
ESWFL.BCAS
SIFL
ESWFL.CAS
SIOPT
ESWFL.MAN
SP
ESWPERM
SPEUHI
EUDESC
SPEULO
FBORSTS
SPFORMAT
GAINHILM
SPHIFL
GAINLOLM
SPHILM
HIALM.PR
SPLOFL
HIALM.SV
SPLOLM
HIALM.TYPE
SPP
HOLDOPT
SPRATEREQ
HOLDRATE
SPREQ
HOLDVAL
SPTV
INALM
SPTVDEVFL
INITMAN
SPTVDEVMAX
INITREQ[1..8]
SPTVNORMRATE
INITVAL[1..8]
SPTVOPT
INSBLOCK[1..10]
SPTVP
INSFAILALM.FL
SPTVRATE
INSFAILALM.PR
SPTVREQ
INSFAILALM.SV
SPTVSTATE
INSFAILFL

179
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

K1 SPTVTIME
K2 STARTOPT
LASTMODEREQ STARTRATE
LASTOPREQ STARTVAL
LASTOPTYPE STOPOPT
LASTRATEREQ STOPRATE
LASTREQFL STOPVAL
LASTSPREQ TMOUTFL
LASTSPTVREQ TMOUTMODE
LASTSTEP TMOUTTIME
MODE
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODEAPPL[1..4]
MODEATTR UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM
MODEATTRFL.OPER UNCMDCHGALM.PR
MODEATTRFL.PROG
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
MODECHANGE
X1
MODEFL.AUTO
X1BIAS
MODEFL.BCAS
X1KB
MODEFL.CAS
X1STS
MODEFL.MAN
X2
MODEFL.NORM
X2BIAS
MODEPERM
X2KB
MODEREQ
X2STS
MODETRACK
XEUHI
NAME
XEULO
NORMMODE
NORMMODEATTR
NUMINSERT
NUMPRI
NUMSEC
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the RATIOCTL Block.

3.11.15 REEOUT (Remote EEOUT) block

Description Supports regulatory cascades between regulatory control function blocks included in an ACE
supervisory controller control strategy and regulatory control points included in an ACE
supervisory controller strategy contained in another Experion cluster
Function The REEOUT block supports inter-cluster ACE to ACE regulatory cascades by connecting to
the Inter Cluster Gateway block in the secondary cluster using an OPC Gateway in the primary
cluster.

180 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs/Outputs • SPPIN: SP value in percent, derived from a regulatory control point in the FB's cluster
• SPPOUT: SP output to a regulatory control point in the secondary cluster, passed to the Inter
Cluster Gateway in the secondary cluster using an OPC Gateway in the primary cluster.
Regulatory points in the secondary cluster must be configured to allow their SP to be pushed
from the Inter Cluster Gateway resident in that cluster.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT SECDATAIN
BCOUT.ARWSTS SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.EUHI SECDATAIN.EUHI
BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.HISELECT SECDATAIN.HISELECT
BCOUT.INITREQ SECDATAIN.INITREQ
BCOUT.INITSTS SECDATAIN.INITSTS
BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.INITVAL
BCOUT.LOCALMAN SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
BCOUT.ONESHOT SECDATAIN.ONESHOT
BCOUT.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
BCOUT.ORFBVAL SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
BCOUT.OROFFSET SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
BCOUT.PROPOVRD SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
BLCKCOMMENT1 SPOUT
BLCKCOMMENT2 SPOUTSTS
BLCKCOMMENT3 SPPIN
BLCKCOMMENT4 USERSYMNAME
NAME
ORDERINCM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theoryfor more information on the REEOUT Block.

3.11.16 REGCALC (Regulatory Control Calculator) block

Description • Lets you write up to eight expressions for creating custom algorithms for Calculated
Variable (CV) calculations.
• Provides an interface to windup, initialization and override feedback processing, so you can
add user-defined control blocks to your control strategies.
Function • Each expression can contain any valid combination of inputs, operators and functions; and
may perform arithmetic or logic operations.
• You can write expressions for calculating CV under normal, initialization and override
feedback conditions. Or, you can write expressions which produce initialization and
override feedback values for this block and its primaries.
• You can assign the result of an expression or an input to any assignable output that produces
the same outputs as every other regulatory control block. You can assign the same input to
multiple outputs.
• With R410, REGCALC block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.

181
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, this block performs timeout monitoring on X[1]. If the X[1] input value is not
updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL)
• Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
• Requests the X1 primary to initialize.
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control Initialization Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition, the
secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However, you can disable
the SECINITOPT so the block ignores initialization requests from the secondary.
If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = CVINIT (assignable output)
• Builds an initialization request for the designated primaries, using INITREQ and INITVAL
(both assignable outputs).
Override Feedback If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector (OVRDSEL) block, it
Processing receives override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override feedback value
and an override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the selected or unselected
strategy. The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks. However, you can disable the
SECINITOPT so the block ignores override requests from the secondary.
When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = CVORFB (assignable output)
• Computes a feedback value for X1 input:
– feedback value for X1 = ORFBVAL (assignable output)
– feedback status for X1 = ORFBSTS (assignable output)
If ORFBVAL and ORFBSTS are not assigned and this block has a secondary, the ORFBVAL
and ORFBSTS received from the secondary are used to compute ORFBVAL for the primary.
Inputs The REGCALC block can function without any inputs. The following inputs are optional and
they only accept real data types.
• X[1] - An initializable input that must come from another block, an operator can not set it.
• X[2] through X[6] general purpose inputs.
• XWHIFL - An external windup high flag.
• XWLOFL - An external windup low flag.
Input Ranges XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of X[1] input in engineering units. This block applies
no range checking, since it assumes that X1 is within XEUHI and XEULO. If this function is
required, you must write an expression for it.
• XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
• XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden connection
function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX) connection
when required.

182 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units.
If this block has a secondary, it uses the secondary's input range through BACKCALC to set its
CV range. If it does not have a secondary, you must define the range through CVEUHI and
CVEULO.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of the CV
range (user-specified values).
– OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another
block or user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them.
– Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a percent
of the CV range (user-specified values).
– Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.
Assignable Outputs You can assign expression results and/or inputs to the following outputs.
• CV - This block's CV under normal operating conditions.
• CVINIT - This block's CV during initialization.
• CVORFB - This block's CV during override (in unselected path).
• INITREQ - Initialization request flag, to be provided to the primary.
• INITVAL - Initialization value, to be provided to the primary.
• ORFBVAL - Override feedback value, to be provided to the primary.
• ORFBSTS - Override feedback status, to be provided to the primary.
Operators and Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for reference.
Functions
Parameter You must specify a parameter by its full tag name.
Identification
For example, “CM25.PumpASelect.PVFL”, or “CM57.PID100.MODE”.
In effect, tag names allow expressions to have an unlimited number of inputs and work with any
data type. However, do not use more than six parameter references in an expression.
The expression syntax has been expanded. Delimiters (') can be used in an expression
containing an external reference component. The format for the delimiter usage is as follows:
• TagName.‘text’

183
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Expression Rules • Must include full tag.parameter name for X inputs in the expression and enclose
identification number in brackets instead of parenthesizes. For example, CM151.REGCALC
BLOCK.X[1] * CM151.REGCALC BLOCK.X[2] is valid.
• Expressions cannot contain an assignment operation (a colon and equal sign with the current
syntax)
For example, “CM1.PID1.MODE:=X[1]“ is invalid.
Each expression produces a single value (arithmetic or logical which is automatically stored
in a “C” parameter. For example, if you write four expressions, the result of the first
expression is stored in C[1], the result of the second is stored in C[2], etc. You can use these
results, by name, in succeeding expressions. In this example, you could use C[1] as an input
to expressions 2, 3, and 4.
• You can mix and nest all operators and functions (including conditional assignments) in any
order as long as value types match or can be converted.
• You can use blanks between operators and parameter names, but they are not required.
• You can use all data types in expressions, including enumerations. They are all treated as
numeric types.
• You must configure calculator expressions contiguously (without breaks) in the arrays.
• A short description can be provided for the expressions using the expression descriptor
parameter (EXPRDESC[1..8]). The results of the expressions, which use the CONST[1…8]
parameters, are affected if you change the values of these parameters on the Constants tab.
• With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and Experion Server
points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the Expressions.
• With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter references,
ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the parentheses “()”to specify
array index. However, when you write the expressions using the other non-CEE points you
can use the brackets “[].”

184 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB MODETRACK

ALMDBU NAME
ALMTM NORMMODE
ARWNET[1..8] NORMMODEATTR
ARWOP NUMINSERT
ASTEPID NUMPRI
BADCTLALM.FL NUMSEC
BADCTLALM.PR OP
BADCTLALM.SV OPBIAS
OPBIAS.FIX
BADCTLALM.TM
OPBIAS.FLOAT
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPBIAS.RATE
BADCTLFL
OPEU
BADCTLOPT
OPEXHIFL
BADOCOPT OPEXHILM
OPEXLOFL
BADOCOPTENB
OPEXLOLM
C[1..8]
OPHIALM.DB
CASREQFL
OPHIALM.DBU
COMPUTEARW
OPHIALM.FL
CONFIGCODE
OPHIALM.PR
CONFIGDESC
OPHIALM.SV
CONFIGSTS
OPHIALM.TM
CONST[1…8]
OPHIALM.TMO
CONSTACCLOCK OPHIALM.TP

CONSTENABLE OPHIFL

CSTS[1..8] OPHILM

CTLINIT OPLOALM.DB

CTLSTATE OPLOALM.DBU

CV OPLOALM.FL

CVEUHI OPLOALM.PR

CVEULO OPLOALM.SV

CVINIT OPLOALM.TM

CVINITSRC
OPLOALM.TMO
CVORFB
OPLOALM.TP
CVORFBSRC
OPLOFL
CVSRC
OPLOLM
CVTYPE
OPMINCHG
DESC
OPREQ
ESWENB
OPROCLM
ESWFL.AUTO
OPROCNEGFL
ESWFL.BCAS
OPROCPOSFL

185
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

ESWFL.CAS OPTYPE
ESWFL.MAN ORDERINCM
ESWPERM ORFBSTSSRC
EUDESC ORFBVALSRC
EXECCODE[1..8] OUTIND
EXECDESC[1..8] OUTTYPE
EXECSTS[1..8] PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
EXPR[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
EXPRDESC[1…8]
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
FBORSTS
PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
GAINHILM
PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
GAINLOLM
REDTAG
HIALM.PR
RESTARTOPT
HIALM.SV
SAFEOP
HIALM.TYPE
SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
HOLDOPT
SECDATAIN.EUHI
HOLDRATE
SECDATAIN.EULO
HOLDVAL
SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INALM
SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INITMAN
SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INITREQ[1..8]
SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
INITREQSRC
SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
INITVAL[1..8]
SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
INITVALSRC
SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
INSBLOCK[1..10]
SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
INSFAILALM.FL
SECINITOPT[1..8]
INSFAILALM.PR
SIALM.FL
INSFAILALM.SV
SIALM.OPT
INSFAILFL
SIALM.PR
K
SIALM.SV
LASTMODEREQ
SIFL
LASTOPREQ
SIOPT
LASTOPTYPE
STARTOPT
LASTREQFL
STARTRATE
LASTSTEP
STARTVAL
MODE
STOPOPT
MODEAPPL[1..4]
STOPRATE
MODEATTR
STOPVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM
TMOUTFL
MODEATTRFL.OPER
TMOUTMODE
MODEATTRFL.PROG
TMOUTTIME
MODECHANGE

186 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

MODEFL.AUTO UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODEFL.BCAS
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODEFL.CAS
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
MODEFL.MAN
MODEFL.NORM UNCMDCHGALM.SV
MODEPERM X[1..6]
MODEREQ XB[1..6]
XEUHI
XEULO
XK[1..6]
XKB[1..6]
XSTS[1..6]
XWHIFL
XWLOFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the REGCALC Block.

3.11.17 REGSUMMER (Regulatory Control Summer)

Description Lets you calculate an output value which is the sum of up to four input values.
Function The RegSummer algorithm calculates an output value which is the sum of up to four
inputs. Each of the inputs may be individually scaled. In addition, the output may be
scaled by an overall gain, and an overall bias may be added to the result.
With R410, REGSUMMER block allows you to configure individual values for the
deadband, deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A
new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the
off-delay time. However, you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the
alarms.
Timeout Monitoring If MODE = Cascade, RegSummer performs timeout monitoring on the initializable
input X(1). If X(1) is not updated within a predefined time, the block invokes timeout
processing.
For RegSummer in case of X1 timeout, X2 to X4 still fetch the values from the
upstream blocks.
The timeout time (in seconds) is specified by TMOUTTIME.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and
disabled by setting it to zero.
Timeout Processing If MODE is Cascade and X(1) times out, this block does the following:
• Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL)
• Sets the input value to Bad (NaN)
• Requests the X(1) primary to initialize
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout.

187
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs The RegSummer block accepts up to four inputs -- X(1) through X(4).
X(1) is an initializable input; all others are non-initializable. This X[1] input can be
connected to non-initializable inputs also. In this case there is no primary for this block.
The inputs must be pulled from other function blocks; the user cannot store to them.
This block has one primary. (There is one primary per initializable input.)
X[1] input connection is mandatory. If X[1] is not connected and the block is loaded an
error will be raised during load time saying “At least input one needs to be connected“
NUMXINPT represents the number of input connections that have been made to this
block
Input Ranges The user must specify an X-input engineering unit range, XEUHI and XEULO.
and Limits XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of the inputs. XEUHI is the value that
represents 100% of full scale, and XEULO is the value that represents 0%.
XEUHI and XEULO apply to all of the X-inputs.
This block assumes all of the X-inputs are within XEUHI and XEULO; it applies no
range-checks.
Outputs The RegSummer block has the following initializable outputs:
OP - Calculated output, in percent.
OPEU - Calculated output, in engineering units.
The user may create a connection to OP or OPEU, but not both. Therefore, this block
may have only one secondary. If the user does not create a connection to OP or OPEU,
then the block does not have a secondary. Alternately, if the user connects OP or OPEU
to a non-initializable input, then this block does not have a secondary
Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV, in engineering units.
If this block has a secondary, it fetches the secondary's input range via BACKCALC
and sets its CV range to that. If it has no secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track the
X-input range (XEUHI and XEULO).
Note: This block fetches the secondary's input range regardless of SECINITOPT (i.e.,
regardless of whether the secondary's initialization and override data will be used)
OPHILM and OPLOLM define the normal high and low limits for OP, as a percent of
the CV range. These are user-specified values.OP will be clamped to these limits if the
algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them, or another function block or user
program attempts to store an OP value that exceeds them. However, the operator may
store an OP value that is outside these limits.
OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP, as a
percent of the CV range. These are user-specified values.
The operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.
OPTOL allow the user to configure a tolerance limit for the manually entered OP. If the
difference betweenthe new OP value and the current OP value is greater than OPTOL
then confirmation is required from the user to store the new value.

188 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Equation Options CV is calculated as follows:

For 2 to 4 inputs:
CV = K * [XK(1) * X(1) + XK(2) * X(2) + XK(3) * X(3) + XK(4) * X(4)] + OPBIAS
For one input:
CV = K * X1 + B
where:
CV = Current full value of the output of this algorithm in engineering units
K = Overall gain for CV
XK(1..4) = Individual gain for each input
OPBIAS = total output bias (i.e., OPBIAS.FIX + OPBIAS.FLOAT)
X(1..4) = Current full values of each X-input in use.

189
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB OPHIALM.DB

ALMDBU OPHIALM.DBU
ALMTM OPHIALM.FL
ARWNET[1..8] OPHIALM.PR
ARWNETIN[1..8] OPHIALM.SV
ARWOP OPHIALM.TM
ARWOPIN
OPHIALM.TMO
ASTEPID
OPHIALM.TP
BADCTLALM.FL
OPHIFL
BADCTLALM.PR
OPHILM
BADCTLALM.SV
OPLOALM.DB
OPLOALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.TM
OPLOALM.FL
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPLOALM.PR
BADCTLFL
OPLOALM.SV
BADCTLOPT
OPLOALM.TM
BADOCOPT
OPLOALM.TMO
BADOCOPTENB
OPLOALM.TP
BLCKCOMMENT1
OPLOFL
BLCKCOMMENT2
OPLOLM
BLCKCOMMENT3
OPMINCHG
BLCKCOMMENT4
OPREQ
COMPUTEARW
OPROCLM
CTLINIT
OPROCNEGFL
CTLSTATE
OPROCPOSFL
CV
OPTOL
CVEUHI
OPTYPE
CVEULO
ORDERINCM
CVTYPE
OUTIND
DESC
OUTTYPE
ESWENB
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ARWSTS
ESWFL.AUTO
PRIMDATA.[1..8]. EUHI
ESWFL.BCAS
PRIMDATA.[1..8]. EULO
ESWFL.CAS
PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
ESWFL.MAN
PRIMDATA.[1..8].INITSTS
ESWPERM
PRIMDATA.[1..8].INITVAL
EUDESC
PRIMDATA.[1..8].LOCALMAN
FBORSTS
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
GAINHILM
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
GAINLOLM
PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
HIALM.PR
PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
HIALM.SV
REDTAG

190 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

HIALM.TYPE RESTARTOPT
HOLDOPT SAFEOP
HOLDRATE SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
HOLDVAL SECDATAIN.EUHI
INALM SECDATAIN.EULO
INITMAN SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INITREQ[1..8] SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.INITVAL
INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
INSERTSTS[1..10] SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
INSTYPE[1..10] SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
K SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
LASTMODEREQ SECINITOPT[1..8]
LASTOPREQ SIALM.FL
LASTOPTYPE SIALM.OPT
LASTREQFL SIALM.PR
LASTSTEP SIALM.SV
MODE SIFL
MODEAPPL[1..4] SIOPT
MODEATTR STARTOPT
MODEATTRFL.NORM STARTRATE
MODEATTRFL.OPER STARTVAL
MODEATTRFL.PROG STOPOPT
MODECHANGE STOPRATE
MODEFL.AUTO STOPVAL
MODEFL.BCAS TMOUTFL
MODEFL.CAS TMOUTMODE
MODEFL.MAN TMOUTTIME
MODEFL.NORM
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
MODEPERM
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
MODEREQ
MODETRACK UNCMDCHGALM.PR
NAME UNCMDCHGALM.SV
NORMMODE X[1..4]
NORMMODEATTR XDESC[1..4]
NUMINSERT XEUHI
NUMPRI XEULO
NUMSEC XK[1..4]
OP XSTS[1..6]
OPBIAS
OPBIAS.FIX

191
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

OPBIAS.FLOAT
OPBIAS.RATE
OPEU
OPEXHIFL
OPEXHILM
OPEXLOFL
OPEXLOLM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
REGSUMMER Block..

3.11.18 REMCAS block

Description Receives two inputs (X1 and X2), - X1 comes from a remote cascade source and X2 comes
from a backup cascade - performs timeout monitoring on both inputs, and normally operates in
Cascade mode.
Function Provides automatic switching between a remote and backup cascade - typically used with PID
block that normally gets its set point from a remote source, but sheds to a local source if there is
a communications failure.
With R410, REMCAS block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade or backup cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on both inputs (X1 and X2).
If either input value is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following
timeout processing. (Note that this block does not support the timeout shed mode parameter
TMOUTMODE.)
• If X1 times out, but X2 is good, block
– Sets the input timeout flag (TMOUTFL).
– Sets MODE to backup cascade.
– Sets the currently selected input (SELXINP) to X2.
– Requests the X1 primary to initialize.
• If X2 times out, but X1 is good, block
– Requests the X2 primary to initialize. Since mode is cascade and X1 is already the
currently selected input.
• If both inputs timeout, block
– Sets CV to NaN, which forces a “Bad Control” condition. The user specifies what
actions to take on Bad Control through the BADCTLOPT.
– Sets the currently selected input (SELXINP) to None.
– Requests both primaries to initialize.
If X1 times out and the block sheds to Backup Cascade mode, block sets the Cascade Request
flag (CASREQFL). When CASREQFL is set, it means the block is waiting to return to the
cascade mode, and will do so as soon as it brings a good X1 value.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.

192 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Control Initialization Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition, the
secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However,
SECINITOPT[1..8] may be used to ignore initialization requests from this secondary.
If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = initialization value from the secondary
• Builds an initialization request for X1 primary as:
– INITREQ[1] = ON
– INITVAL[[1] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
• Builds an initialization request for X2 primary as:
– INITREQ[2] = ON
– INITVAL[2] = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
Override Feedback If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector block, it receives
Processing override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override feedback value and an
override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the selected or unselected strategy.
The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks. However, SECINITOPT[1..8] may be
used to ignore override requests from the secondary.
When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
• Computes a feedback value for the selected primary.
– The selected primary feedback value = BACKCALCOUT.ORFBVAL - OPBIAS.FIX -
OPBIAS.FLOAT.
– The non-selected primary is propagated with“non-connected” status.
The Selected input of the REMCAS block gets the propagated ORFBSTS status of either
‘Selected or Not-Selected’ from the Override Selector secondary while the unselected primary
of the REMCAS block always gets non-connected status for Override Feedback status by the
REMCAS block, regardless of whether TRACKING is On or Off.
Inputs • X1 = initializable input from a remote source.
• X2 = initializable input from backup cascade.
• You can configure a description of up to 15 characters for each input.
Input Ranges • XEUHI and XEULO define the full range of inputs.
– XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
– XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Outputs Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges CVEUHI and CVEULO define the full range of CV in engineering units.
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of the CV
range (user-specified values).
– OP clamps to these limits if algorithm's calculated result (CV) exceeds them or another
block or user program attempts to store OP value exceeding them.
– Operator may store OP value outside these limits.
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define the extended high and low limits for OP as a percent
of the CV range (user-specified values).
– Operator is prevented from storing an OP value that exceeds these limits.

193
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB OPBIAS

ALMDBU OPBIAS.FIX
ALMTM OPBIAS.FLOAT
ARWNET[1..8] OPBIAS.RATE
ARWOP OPEU
ASTEPID OPEXHIFL
BADCTLALM.FL OPEXHILM
BADCTLALM.PR OPEXLOFL
BADCTLALM.SV OPEXLOLM
BADCTLALM.TM OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.TMO OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLFL OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLOPT OPHIALM.PR
BADOCOPT OPHIALM.SV
BADOCOPTENB OPHIALM.TM
CASREQFL OPHIALM.TMO
COMPUTEARW OPHIALM.TP
CTLINIT OPHIFL
CTLSTATE OPHILM
CV OPLOALM.DB
CVEUHI OPLOALM.DBU
CVEULO OPLOALM.FL
CVTYPE OPLOALM.PR
DESC OPLOALM.SV
ESWENB OPLOALM.TM
ESWFL.AUTO OPLOALM.TMO
ESWFL.BCAS OPLOALM.TP
ESWFL.CAS OPLOFL
ESWFL.MAN OPLOLM
ESWPERM OPMINCHG
EUDESC OPREQ
FBORSTS OPROCLM
HIALM.PR OPROCNEGFL
HIALM.SV OPROCPOSFL
HIALM.TYPE OPTYPE
HOLDOPT ORDERINCM
HOLDRATE OUTIND
HOLDVAL OUTTYPE
INALM PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
INITMAN PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
INITREQ[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
INITVAL[1..8] PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL

194 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INSBLOCK[1..10] PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
INSFAILALM.FL PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
INSFAILALM.PR REDTAG
INSFAILALM.SV RESTARTOPT
INSFAILFL SAFEOP
LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.EUHI
LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.EULO
LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.HISELECT
LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.INITSTS
MODE SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEAPPL[1..4] SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
MODEATTR SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
MODEATTRFL.NORM SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
MODEATTRFL.OPER SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
MODEATTRFL.PROG SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
MODECHANGE SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEFL.AUTO SELXDESC
MODEFL.BCAS SELXINP
MODEFL.CAS SIALM.FL
MODEFL.MAN SIALM.OPT
MODEFL.NORM SIALM.PR
MODEPERM SIALM.SV
MODEREQ SIFL
MODETRACK SIOPT
NAME STARTOPT
NORMMODE STARTRATE
NORMMODEATTR STARTVAL
NUMINSERT STOPOPT
NUMPRI STOPRATE
NUMSEC STOPVAL
OP TMOUTFL
TMOUTTIME
TRACKING
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
UNCMDCHGALM.PR
UNCMDCHGALM.SV
X1
X2
XDESC[1..2]
XEUHI

195
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

XEULO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the REMCAS Block.

3.11.19 SWITCH block

Description Accepts up to 8 initializable inputs (that is, primaries) and operates as a single-pole, 8-position
rotary switch.
• An Operator, user program or another block may change switch position.
Function Typically used to assign different primary to a secondary; allows user to select one from as
many as 8 inputs and outputs the selected value.
With R410, SWITCH block allows you to configure individual values for the deadband,
deadband unit, on-delay time, and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter
(xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time. However,
you can configure only identical deadband unit for all the alarms.
Timeout Monitoring In cascade mode, performs timeout monitoring on all inputs X[1] through X[8]. If an input value
is not updated within a predefined time, this block invokes the following timeout processing.
• Sets the “input timeout” flag (TMOUTFL).
• Sets the input value to Bad (NaN).
• Requests the input's primary to initialize.
This block does not support mode shedding on timeout.
Time-out monitoring is enabled by setting TMOUTTIME to a non-zero value, and disabled by
setting it to zero.
Control Initialization Block brings initialization requests from its secondary through BACKCALC. In addition, the
secondary may propagate oneshot initialization requests to this block. However,
SECINITOPT[1..8] may be used to ignore initialization requests from this secondary.
If the secondary is requesting initialization, block:
• Initializes its output:
– CV = initialization value from the secondary
• Builds an initialization request for selected primary as:
– INITREQ(s) = ON
– INITVAL(s) = CV - OPBIAS.FIX
• If TRACKING is ON, block also builds an initialization request for the non-selected
primaries as:
– INITREQ(n) = ON
– INITVAL(n) = CV - OPBIAS.FIX

196 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Override Feedback If this block is in a cascade strategy with a downstream Override Selector block, it receives
Processing override feedback data. The data consists of an override status, override feedback value and an
override offset flag. The status indicates if this block is in the selected or unselected strategy.
The offset flag only applies to PID type function blocks. However, SECINITOPT[1..8] may be
used to ignore override requests from the secondary.
When override status changes from selected to unselected, this block:
• Computes a feedback value for the selected primary.
– The selected primary feedback value = BACKCALCOUT.ORFBVAL - OPBIAS.FIX -
OPBIAS.FLOAT
– The non-selected primaries are propagated with “not selected” status.
The Selected input of the SWITCH block gets the propagated ORFBSTS status of either
‘Selected or Not-Selected’ from the Override Selector secondary while the unselected primary
of the SWITCH always gets non-connected status for Override Feedback status by the Switch
block, regardless of whether TRACKING is On or Off.
If this block and a primary are on the same node, this block propagates the override data to the
primary. If a primary is on a different node, this block stores the data in the BACKCALC packet
for that primary, which the primary brings on its next execution.
Inputs Accepts up to 8 initializable inputs -- X[1] through X[8].
• Inputs must be pulled from other blocks (cannot be stored).
• You can configure a description of up to 15 characters for each input.
• This block may have two to eight primaries, depending on the number of inputs that are
configured. (There is one primary per initializable input.)
Input Ranges and User must specify an X-input engineering unit range XEUHIandXEULO which defines the full
Limits range of inputs (for all X-inputs).
• XEUHI represents the 100% of full scale value.
• XEULO represents the 0% of full scale value.
Block provides its input range (XEUHI/XEULO) to the primaries through BACKCALC. The
primaries use this for their output range (CVEUHI/CVEULO).
Outputs Block has the following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units.
– User may specify a fixed bias to be added to the output.
– Block calculates floating bias to provide bumpless transition after input switching,
initialization or mode change.
Note that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/OPEUX)
connection when required.
Output Ranges • CVEUHI and CVEULO define full range of CV in engineering units. If block has no
secondary, CVEUHI and CVEULO track the “X” input range (XEUHI and XEULO).
• OPHILM and OPLOLM define normal high and low limits for OP as a percent of CV range
(user-specified values).
• OPEXHILM and OPEXLOLM define extended high and low limits for OP as a percent of
CV range (user-specified).
– Prevents operator from storing an OP that exceeds these limits.

197
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMDB OPEU

ALMDBU OPEXHIFL
ALMTM OPEXHILM
ARWNET[1..8] OPEXLOFL
ARWOP OPEXLOLM
ASTEPID OPHIALM.DB
BADCTLALM.FL OPHIALM.DBU
BADCTLALM.PR OPHIALM.FL
BADCTLALM.SV OPHIALM.PR
OPHIALM.SV
BADCTLALM.TM
OPHIALM.TM
BADCTLALM.TMO
OPHIALM.TMO
BADCTLFL
OPHIALM.TP
BADCTLOPT
OPHIFL
BADOCOPT
OPHILM
BADOCOPTENB OPLOALM.DB
BADINPTOPT[1..8] OPLOALM.DBU
COMPUTEARW OPLOALM.FL
CTLEQN OPLOALM.PR
CTLINIT OPLOALM.SV
CTLSTATE OPLOALM.TM
CV
OPLOALM.TMO
CVEUHI
OPLOALM.TP
CVEULO
OPLOFL
CVTYPE
OPLOLM
DESC
OPMINCHG
ESWENB
OPREQ
ESWFL.AUTO
OPROCLM
ESWFL.BCAS
OPROCNEGFL
ESWFL.CAS
OPROCPOSFL
ESWFL.MAN
OUTIND
ESWPERM
OPTYPE
EUDESC
ORDERINCM
FBORSTS
OUTTYPE
HIALM.PR
PRIM.[1..8].INITIALIZABLE
HIALM.SV
PRIMDATA.[1..8].HISELECT
HIALM.TYPE
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBSTS
HOLDOPT
PRIMDATA.[1..8].ORFBVAL
HOLDRATE
PRIMDATA.[1..8].OROFFSET
HOLDVAL
PRIMDATA.[1..8].PROPOVRD
INALM
REDTAG
INITMAN
RESTARTOPT

198 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

INITREQ[1..8] SAFEOP
INITVAL[1..8] SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
INSBLOCK[1..10] SECDATAIN.EUHI
INSFAILALM.FL SECDATAIN.EULO
INSFAILALM.PR SECDATAIN.HISELECT
INSFAILALM.SV SECDATAIN.INITSTS
INSFAILFL SECDATAIN.INITVAL
LASTMODEREQ SECDATAIN.LOCALMAN
LASTOPREQ SECDATAIN.ORFBSTS
LASTOPTYPE SECDATAIN.ORFBVAL
LASTREQFL SECDATAIN.OROFFSET
LASTSTEP SECDATAIN.PROPOVRD
MODE SECINITOPT[1..8]
MODEAPPL[1..4] SELXDESC
MODEATTR SELXFL[1..8]
MODEATTRFL.NORM SELXINP
MODEATTRFL.OPER SIALM.FL
MODEATTRFL.PROG SIALM.OPT
MODECHANGE SIALM.PR
MODEFL.AUTO SIALM.SV
MODEFL.BCAS SIFL
MODEFL.CAS SIOPT
MODEFL.MAN STARTOPT
MODEFL.NORM STARTRATE
MODEPERM STARTVAL
MODEREQ STOPOPT
MODETRACK STOPRATE
NAME STOPVAL
NORMMODE TMOUTFL
NORMMODEATTR TMOUTTIME
NUMINSERT TRACKING
NUMPRI
UNCMDCHGALM.FL
NUMSEC
UNCMDCHGALM.OPT
OP
OPBIAS UNCMDCHGALM.PR
OPBIAS.FIX UNCMDCHGALM.SV
OPBIAS.FLOAT X[1..8]
OPBIAS.RATE XDESC[1..8]
XEUHI
XEULO

199
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the SWITCH Block.

200 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.12 Sequential Control Module Blocks

Related topics
“HANDLER Block” on page 201
“STEP Block” on page 202
“SYNC Block” on page 203
“TRANSITION Block” on page 204

3.12.1 HANDLER Block

Description SCM HANDLER blocks are execution modules that group STEP and TRANSITION blocks.
• Multiple Handler blocks may be contained within an SCM block, each modeled as a set of
STEP and TRANSITION blocks, based on the following categories:
– Edit Handler
– Main Handler
– Check Handler
– Interrupt Handler
– Restart Handler
– Hold Handler
– Stop Handler
– Abort Handler
• Choices of which HANDLER block of each category to invoke are manifested through a
HANDLER block selection list on the SCM block.
• A HANDLER block is invoked when
– its invoke conditions, modeled in its Invoke TRANSITION block, are met
– when the SCM block is commanded to invoke the Handler (for example, the STOP
command causes the STOP Handler to execute).
Function Used to describe, group, and categorize sequential control behavior.
Parameters lt;CONFIGCODE INVOKT.HANDLE
CONFIGDESC NAME
CONFIGSTS NUM
DESC ORDERINCM
EXECCODE PROCESSED
EXECDESC STATE
EXECSTS TYPE
HANDLER
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the HANDLER
Block.

201
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.12.2 STEP Block

Description An SCM block which defines specific output actions.

• A specified output action usually generates a request to a control device to do something (for
example, open a valve, start a pump, set furnace temperature).
• The source value of each output can be an expression (thereby enabling calculations in each
output).
Function Organizes the output expressions of an SCM HANDLER block at a specific stage of the
HANDLER's execution thread.
Outputs • Up to 16 outputs may be defined per SCM STEP block.
• The STEP block whose outputs are active is called the Active Step.
Expressions You enter desired output expressions into the Step output configuration form. You compose an
output expression to include a target store destination for a source value and a source expression
that generates the value to be stored. (For example, cm1.pid1.sp := cm2.pid2.op + 50.0.) Source
expressions can evaluate to a Boolean value using a combination of arithmetic and logical
operators, to an arithmetic value using arithmetic operators, or may simply specify any scalar
value (Floating Point, Boolean, Enumeration) for comparison in a logical expression or as a
value to be stored to the target store destination. Parameters of other blocks can be referenced as
long as the block is already defined in the system database. Note that :
• String data types are supported.
• Enumerations and Boolean are supported, but values must be entered as integers. For
example:
– cm1.flag1.pvfl := 1 (PVFL is turned ON)
• With R410, non-CEE controllers such as PMD and Safety Manager, and Experion Server
points such as TPS and SCADA, can be configured in the Expressions.
• With R410, when you write the expressions using the TPS point's parameter references,
ensure that the TPS reference parameter is configured using the parentheses “()”to specify
array index. However, when you write the expressions using the other non-CEE points you
can use the brackets “[].”
Operators and Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for reference.
Functions

202 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACTIVEFL NUMOUTPUTS

ACTVTNTIME OP[1..16].CONFIGCODE
CONFIGCODE OP[1..16].CONFIGDESC
CONFIGDESC OP[1..16].CONFIGSTS
CONFIGSTS OP[1..16].DELAYTIME
DESC OP[1..16].DELAYTIMEREM
EUDESC OP[1..16].DESC
EXECCODE OP[1..16].EXECCODE
EXECDESC OP[1..16].EXECDESC
EXECSTS OP[1..16].EXECSTS
HANDLER OP[1..16].SRCEXPR
IC.BYPPERM OP[1..16].STATE
IC.BYPREQ OP[1..16].TYPE
IC.CONFIGCODE ORDERINCM
IC.CONFIGDESC PROCESSED
IC.CONFIGSTS SC.BYPPERM
IC.DESC SC.BYPREQ
IC.EXECCODE SC.CONFIGCODE
IC.EXECDESC SC.CONFIGDESC
IC.EXECSTS SC.CONFIGSTS
IC.EXPR SC.DESC
IC.FL SC.EXECCODE
IC.INVOKFL SC.EXECDESC
IC.OPT SC.EXECSTS
ID SC.EXPR
MAXTIME SC.FL
MAXTIMEFL SC.INVOKFL
MINTIME SC.OPT
NAME STATE
NEXTCOMP[1..10] TIME
NEXTHANDLE[1..10] UPDRESOPT
NEXTNUMBER
NUM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the STEP Block.

3.12.3 SYNC Block

Description The SYNC block lets you configure SCMs to have steps and transitions executing in parallel.
The sync block will synchronize the start and finish of a parallel section.

203
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function Waits until all preceding steps and transitions have completed before moving on the next
threads.
You can use SYNC blocks to be sure, that at a certain point in time, all previous threads are
synchronized before proceeding to the next set of steps and transitions. You can also use them to
start the next set of parallel steps and transitions.
Inputs/Outputs Sync blocks can have any combination of up to fifteen inputs and fifteen outputs (either step or
transition blocks).
Parameters CONFIGCODE NEXTCOMP[1..15]
CONFIGDESC NEXTHANDLE[1..10]
CONFIGSTS NEXTNUMBER
DESC NUMORDERINCM
EPREV PROCESSED
EUDESC STATE
EXECCODE
EXECDESC
EXECSTS
HANDLER
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the STEP Block.

3.12.4 TRANSITION Block

Description An SCM block that defines specific input conditions for a Handler.
• Input conditions and conjoining TRANSITION blocks define a distinct process state that
must be achieved in order for the output actions specified by the next STEP block to be
performed.
• The input conditions grouped into a TRANSITION block are the condition expressions that
direct sequential execution flow.
Nesting of Transitions may be required when a single Transition cannot accommodate all inputs
in required in a logical expression. Transition is considered Free Standing when the input pin,
DESC, and the Output pin, NEXTCOMP, are not connected to any other EBM component
Block.
For more information on Nesting Transition, see Sequential Control User's Guide.
Function Defines the distinct process state that must be achieved in order to allow the SCM HANDLER
to advance to the control step (that is, the STEP block) so that it can perform the output actions
specified.
Input Conditions • A maximum of 10 standard input conditions are supported per SCM TRANSITION block.
• The Invoke TRANSITION block in the MAIN HANDLER of the SCM block provides the
Start Conditions for the SCM.
• Logic gates may be AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, XOR, CONNECT, NONE, OFF, or ON.
– XOR must have two inputs.
– CONNECT and NOT have only one input -- the output is the same as the input and the
output is the logical negation of the input, respectively.
– NONE, ON, and OFF have no inputs.

204 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Expressions You enter desired condition expressions into the transition condition configuration form.
Condition expressions can evaluate to a Boolean value using a combination of arithmetic and
logical operators (for example, cm1.pid1.sp + cm2.pid2.op >= 50.0). Parameters of other blocks
can be referenced as long as the block is already defined in the system database. Note that:
• String data types are not supported.
• Enumerations and Boolean are supported, but values must be entered as integers. For
example:
– cm2.pid1.mode = 2 (Mode is compared to Cascade)
Operators and Table 3 lists the expression operators and functions supported by this block for reference.
Functions
Parameters C[1..10].BYPPERM CONFIGSTS
C[1..10].BYPREQ DESC
C[1..10].CONFIGCODE EUDESC
C[1..10].CONFIGDESC EXECCODE
C[1..10].CONFIGSTS EXECDESC
C[1..10].DESC EXECSTS
C[1..10].EXECCODE G[1..4].ALGID
C[1..10].EXECDESC G[1..4].FIRSTCOND
C[1..10].EXECSTS G[1..4].NUMINPTS
C[1..10].EXPR G[1..4].SO
C[1..10].FL HANDLER
C[1..10].GATEASGN NEXTCOMP
C[1..10].INVOKFL NEXTHANDLE
C1 NAME
CONFIGCODE NUM
CONFIGDESC NUMCONDS
ORDERINCM
PROCESSED
SO
STATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequential Control Module User Guide for more information on the TRANSITION
Block.

205
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.13 System Blocks

Related topics
“CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control)” on page 206
“SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block (Sequential Control)” on page 207
“Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block” on page 209
“Unit Control Module (UCM) Block” on page 209
“Master Recipe (MR) Block” on page 209
“Proxy Master Recipe (MR) Block” on page 209
“Proxy FTEB Block” on page 210
“Proxy Node” on page 210
“Proxy Sequential Control Module (SCM) Block” on page 210
“Proxy Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block” on page 210

3.13.1 CONTROL MODULE block (Continuous Control)

Description One of two system container blocks supported by CEE. It holds continuous and discrete function
blocks.
Function Configurable building block for defining control strategies. Lets you encapsulate strategies
according to function.
It provides these basic services for configured blocks:
• Serves as the unit of load for continuous and discrete control strategies.
• Transfers data between passive parameters that have no associated active connector.
• Executes component function blocks in an established order, which is configurable or
arbitrarily determined by the CM.
• Provides independent tag names component blocks their parameters.
• Serves the execution master for continuous and discrete control strategies.
vInputs Input parameters for component blocks that connect to other CMs and SCMs.
Outputs Output parameters for component blocks that connect to other CMs and SCMs.

206 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALIASOPT ORDERINLINK

ALMENBSTATE PHASE
BPS PRIMARYSIG
BPSDELAY QUALSTATE
BPSDELAYREM REASONSET
CBBLOCKPROP PREVLOADSTAT
CEESTATE SCALEPERIOD
CONTCUTOUT SCANASSOCDSP
CTRLCONFIRM SCANCTRLLVL
DESC SCANGRPDTL
ESTWEIGHT SCANPNTDTL
EUDESC SCMASTEP
EXECSTATE SCMID
FFPERIOD SCMNAME
PERIOD SCMOPT
PERIODSEC SCMSTATE
INALM SCRIPTOR
INSERTINDEX SECONDARYSIG
IOSCHEDOPT SECSIGSECLVL
JOURNALONLY STALECOUNT
KEYWORD UNITTEXT
LOADSTATE VERSION
LOGICINITOPT
NAME
NUMSIGS
ORDERINCEE
Starting in Experion R311.1, the LOGICINITOPT parameter is added to the Control Module's
Main configuration form to govern how outputs of the Logic blocks FTRIG, MAXPULSE,
MINPULSE, MVOTE, nooN, OFFDELAY, ONDELAY, PULSE, RTRIG, TRIG, and 2oo3 react
when they go through state transitions of activate, cold start, warm start, or RAM Retention
Restart (RRR).
Refer to the given Logic block description in the Control Builder Components Theory for more
information related to a given Logic block.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the Control Module
Block.

3.13.2 SEQUENTIAL CONTROL MODULE block (Sequential Control)

Description A system container block that consists of sequences of STEP and TRANSITION blocks grouped
by specific HANDLER blocks.
• The SCM block may only contain its own components (that is, HANDLER, STEP and
TRANSITION blocks); it cannot contain other basic blocks such as PID or logic blocks.
Function Used to organize normal- and exception-based sequential control logic.

207
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ABORTALM.FL INVFRMHNDTYP[1..8]

ABORTALM.PR INVFROMSTEP[1..8][1..15]
ABORTALM.SV INVFROMSTEPN[1..8][1..15]
ABORTLOCK INVREASON[1..8]
ACTIVEHANDLR[1..8] INVTHREAD[1..8]
ACTIVELOC.HANDLER INVTIME[1..8]
ACTIVELOC.HANDLERN KEYWORD
ACTIVELOC.HNDTYPE LOADSTATE
ACTIVELOC.STEP[1..15] MODE
ACTIVELOC.STEPN[1..15] MODEATTR
ACTIVELOC.TIME[1..15] NAME
ALIASBLKTYP[ ] NORMMODE
ALIASOPT NORMMODEATTR
ALIASPRMTYP[ ] NUMALIASES
ALMENBSTATE NUMHISTPARMS
AUXCMD NUMINSTANCES
AUXOPT NUMRECPARMS
AUXREQ NUMTHREADS
AUXREQDATA[1..5] NUMTRANS
AUXSTS ORDERINCEE
AUXUNIT ORDERINCM
CEESTATE PAUSEFL
CMDEXEC PERIOD
COMMAND PHASE
CONFIGCODE PREVLOADSTAT
CONFIGDESC RECDESC[1..50]
CONFIGSTS RECMATCODE[1..50]
CONTROLLOCK RECSCALE[1..50]
DESC RECTARGET[1..50]
ENBHANDLER[1..8] RECTARGETMAX[1..50]
ESTWEIGHT RECTARGETMIN[1..50]
EUDESC RESADDR[1..10]
EVALTRANS[1..10][1..10] RESADDRFUTRN[1..10]
EVALTRANSN[1..10][1..10] RESADDRFUTUR[1..10]
EXCMODEOPT RESADDRN[1..10]
EXECCODE RSTPROCESSED
EXECDESC SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTS SCANGRPDTL
FAILALM.FL SCANPNTDTL
FAILALM.PR SELHANDLER[1..8]
FAILALM.SV SELHANDLERN[1..8]

208 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

HIALM SSTEPLOCK
HIALM.PR STATE
HIALM.SV STEPALM.FL
HIALM.TYPE STEPALM.PR
HISTDESC STEPALM.SV
HISTTYPE[1..50] STOPALM.FL
HISTVALUE[1..50] STOPALM.PR
HOLDALM.FL STOPALM.SV
HOLDALM.PR TARGETSTEP[1..10]
HOLDALM.SV TIME[1..8]
INALM UNITTEXT
INSERTINDEX VERSION
INSTSELECT
INVCOND[1..8]
INVFRMHNDLER[1..8]
INVFRMHNDLRN[1..8]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Sequental Control Module User Guide for more information on the Sequential
Control Module Block.

3.13.3 Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.4 Unit Control Module (UCM) Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.5 Master Recipe (MR) Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.6 Proxy Master Recipe (MR) Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide

209
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

• Batch Implementation Guide

• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.7 Proxy FTEB Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.8 Proxy Node

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.9 Proxy Sequential Control Module (SCM) Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

3.13.10 Proxy Recipe Control Module (RCM) Block

Refer to the following documents for EBM-related documentation.
• Batch Overview and Planning Guide
• Batch Implementation Guide
• Sequential Control User’s Guide

210 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.14 Thermodynamic Utility Function Block

Related topics
“STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block” on page 211

3.14.1 STEAMPROP (Steam Property) block

Description In steam generators and utilities, thermodynamic efficiency is calculated to

optimize/maximize the efficiency of the plant operation. To calculate the
thermodynamic efficiency, you need the thermodynamic properties of steam/
water such as entropy, enthalpy, specific volume, and density for a given
pressure, temperature and the state of matter. The STEAMPROP function block
accepts temperature/pressure as inputs from measurement and provides entropy/
enthalpy, and so on, as outputs. These values can be used for efficiency
calculation and optimal operation. reduction in efficiency can additionally
indicate the health degradation of the thermodynamic system or plant
equipment. This block supports the following units of measuring system.
• SI in kJ/kg degree K
• Metric in kcal/kg degree C
• English in Btu/lb degree F
You can use any one of them while configuring the inputs as applicable. The
detailed display of this block includes graphical representation of steam tables.
For more information about the graphical representation of the STEAMPROP
block, refer to the STEAMPROP block detail displays topic in the Control
Building User's Guide.
Function Steam Property function block computes the thermodynamic quantities of water
and steam. The thermodynamic quantities of water and steam can be one of the
following:
• Enthalpy (H)
• Entropy (S)
• Pressure (P)
• Temperature (T)
• Specific volume (V)
• Steam quality/dryness fraction (X)
This function block uses the equations quoted in Industrial Formulation 1997
(IF-97) released by the International Association for the Properties of Water and
Steam (IAPWS). For more information about Industrial Formulation 1997
(IF-97), refer to the http://www.iapws.org/.
It uses different equations to compute the required output. For example, in case
of water, if the pressure and the temperature are the inputs to the block then the
following outputs can be computed.
• Enthalpy (H)
• Entropy (S)
• Specific volume (V)

211
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs Pressure (P)

Temperature (T)
Entropy (S)
Steam quality/dryness fraction (X)
For detailed information about the supported input types, refer to the Control
Builder Components Theory.
Outputs Specific volume (V)
Enthalpy (H)
Entropy (S)
Temperature (T)
For detailed information about the supported output types, refer to the Control
Builder Components Theory.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 PRESSURE
BLCKCOMMENT2 PRESSUREENGUNIT
BLCKCOMMENT3 PRESSUREIO
BLCKCOMMENT4 SPECIFICVOLUME
DESC SPECIFICVOLUMEENGUNIT
EUDESC SPECIFICVOLUMEIO
ENGUNITSYSTEM STEAM_WATER
ENTHALPY STEAMTYPE
ENTHALPYENGUNIT STEAMQUALITY
ENTHALPYIO STEAMQUALITYIO
ENTROPY TEMPERATURE
ENTROPYENGUNIT TEMPERATUREIO
ENTROPYIO TEMPERATUREENGUNIT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each
parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
STEAMPROP Block.

212 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.15 Universal Control Network Interface (UCNIF) Block

Related topics
“UCNOUT block” on page 213
“EUCNOUT block” on page 214

3.15.1 UCNOUT block

Description Supports Setpoint Control (SPC), Direct Digital Control (DDC), Remote Setpoint Control (RSP)
and Direct Digital Control with Remote Setpoint (DDCRSP) remote cascade types between the
regulatory control function blocks included in an ACE supervisory controller control strategy
and the regulatory control points included in a Process Manager controller.

Note
The UCNOUT block requires an OPC gateway or a TPN Server to communicate with
the Process Manager controller.

Function • Provides configurable connections and compatible data mapping between controllers.
• Translates secondary data (SECDATA) from Process Manager regulatory control points to
ACE controller compatible back calculation (BACKCALC) data.
• Participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for Process Manager regulatory control
point MODE changes.
• Forwards inputs from primary regulatory control blocks in ACE supervisory controller to
Process Manager regulatory control point.
Inputs/Outputs The remote cascade type (REMCASTYPE) selection determines which UCNOUT block inputs/
outputs to use through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT SECDATAIN
BCOUT.ARWSTS SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.EUHI SECDATAIN.CASREQ
BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN.CASSHED
BCOUT.INITREQ SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.EUSPAN100
BCOUT.ONESHOT SECDATAIN.INITREQ
BCOUT.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
BCOUT.ORFBVAL SECDATAIN.SECTYPE
BCOUT.OROFFSET SPOUT
CASSTS SPPIN
MODEOUT
NAME
OPIN
OPOUT
ORDERINCM
REMCASTYPE
RSPPIN

213
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the UCNOUT Block.

3.15.2 EUCNOUT block

Description Supports Setpoint Control (SPC), Direct Digital Control (DDC), Remote Setpoint Control (RSP)
and Direct Digital Control with Remote Setpoint (DDCRSP) remote cascade types between the
regulatory control function blocks included in an ACE/C300 supervisory controller control
strategy and the regulatory control points included in the Enhanced High-Performance Process
Manager (EHPM) Controller.

Note
The EUCNOUT block does not require an OPC gateway or a TPN server to
communicate with the EHPM.

Function • Provides configurable connections and compatible data mapping between controllers.
• Translates secondary data (SECDATA) from the EHPM regulatory control points to ACE/
C300 controller compatible back calculation (BACKCALC) data.
• Participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for the EHPM regulatory control point
MODE changes.
• Forwards inputs from primary regulatory control blocks in ACE/C300 supervisory controller
to the EHPM regulatory control point.
Inputs/Outputs The remote cascade type (REMCASTYPE) selection determines which EUCNOUT block
inputs/outputs to be used through the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT ORDERINCM
BCOUT.ARWSTS REMCASTYPE
BCOUT.EUHI RSPPIN
BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN
BCOUT.INITREQ SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.CASREQ
BCOUT.ONESHOT SECDATAIN.CASSHED
BCOUT.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.ORFBVAL SECDATAIN.EUSPAN100
BCOUT.OROFFSET SECDATAIN.INITREQ
CASSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
MODEOUT SECDATAIN.SECTYPE
NAME SPOUT
OPIN SPPIN
OPOUT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the EUCNOUT block.

214 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.16 Hiway Interface (HIWAYIF) Blocks

Related topics
“HIWAYOUT block” on page 215

3.16.1 HIWAYOUT block

Description Supports Setpoint Control (SPC) and Direct Digital Control (DDC), remote cascade types
between the regulatory control function blocks included in an ACE supervisory controller
control strategy and the Data Hiway regulatory control points. It participates in Remote Cascade
Request protocol for Data Hiway point mode changes.
Function • Provides configurable connections and compatible data mapping between controllers.
• Translates secondary data (SECDATA) from Data Hiway regulatory control points to ACE
controller compatible back calculation (BACKCALC) data.
• Participates in Remote Cascade Request protocol for Data Hiway regulatory control point
MODE changes.
• Forwards inputs it receives from the primary of a regulatory control function block in the
ACE controller to a Data Hiway regulatory control point.
Inputs/Outputs The remote cascade type (REMCASTYPE) selection determines which HIWAYOUT block
inputs/outputs to use through the Block Properties form in Control Builder.
Parameters BACKCALCOUT SECDATAIN
BCOUT.ARWSTS SECDATAIN.ARWSTS
BCOUT.EUHI SECDATAIN.CASREQ
BCOUT.EULO SECDATAIN.CASSHED
BCOUT.INITREQ SECDATAIN.EULO
BCOUT.INITVAL SECDATAIN.EUSPAN100
BCOUT.ONESHOT SECDATAIN.INITREQ
BCOUT.ORFBSTS SECDATAIN.INITVAL
BCOUT.ORFBVAL SECDATAIN.SECTYPE
BCOUT.OROFFSET SIMMODE
CASSTS SPOUT
MODEOUT SPPIN
NAME
OPIN
OPOUT
ORDERINCM
REMCASTYPE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the HIWAYOUT
Block.

215
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.17 Hiway Responder Block (HRB)

Hiway Responder Blocks are special purpose communication blocks that support transfer of Hiway messages
between the C300 Controller and the LCN EHB.
HRB blocks are automatically instantiated in Control Modules when Hiway slot emulations are created by the
HSE Creator Tool. They are then imported into Experion engineering repository database using Control Builder
along with their parent Control Module.
The HRB blocks are classified into two major categories.
• Algorithm Hiway Responder Block: Acts as an interface between the CEE native blocks and the EHB. HRB
receives data from the EHB and transfers it to the CEE native blocks for processing. They also read the
processed data from the CEE and update the HG point.
– Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG)
– Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI)
• Basic Controller Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB): Box HRB represents the HG box in
Experion.

Attention
• HRBs are available in the Control Builder library, in the folder HIWAYRB.
• Most HRB parameters are automatically configured. They are initially defined by the HSE Creator Tool and
should not be modified thereafter unless it is necessary to change the configuration of the emulation. If that is
done, the change should be injected into the HG point and points must be re-translated using the HSE Creator
Tool. Leaving HRB parameters in a consistent state is the responsibility of the user as this guideline is not
enforced by the system.
• Users should not modify parameters of native CEE blocks within the emulation from the Experion view.

Related topics
“Basic Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB)” on page 216
“Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI)” on page 217
“Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG)” on page 217

3.17.1 Basic Controller Hiway Box Hiway Responder Block (HRBBOX_CB)

The Basic Controller (CB) Hiway Box HRB is intended to execute by itself within a Control Module. The CM
so formed acts as the Hiway Box Slot Emulation (HBSE) of the CB. This HRB performs the following two
functions.
• Make available for LCN access those Hiway parameters which characterize the CB box as a whole such as
the CB Status Word, CB the Alarm Word and the CB Sample Time Counter.
• Serve as a conduit for data communication between the EHB and the algorithm HRBs assigned to the box
emulation.
The following parameters are available in the HRBBOX_CB block.
• BOXNUM
• BOXTYPE
• CARDTYPE[1]
• EHBADDED
• EHBADDEDIP
• EHBTHIS
• EHBTHISIP
• EHBRMIP1

216 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

• EHBRMIP2
• SLOTNUM
• HWYNUMTHIS
• HYNUMADDED
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference.

3.17.2 Analog Input Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_AI)

The Analog Input (AI) HRB is an algorithm HRB block which presents data of the CB AI emulation. It
transfers data between the native DATAACQ block and the Hiway Slot Memory (HSM).

Attention
In R430, the AI HRB works only with the emulations of the CB RV AI slot.

The following parameters are available in the HRBALG_AI block.

• ALGOREGSTATE
• BOXNUM
• BOXTYPE
• BOXCON
• DATAACQBLOCKID1
• HSWDESC
• HSWVALUE
• SLOTNUM
• SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference.

3.17.3 Regulatory Algorithm Hiway Responder Block (HRBALG_REG)

The Regulatory Hiway Responder Block communicates with its associated Box HRB to connect the HG point
on the LCN with native blocks in a Control Module assigned to a CEEC300. It is specifically designed to
present data of regulatory CEE blocks to the HG regulatory point.
• ALGOREGSTATE
• ALGOTYPE
• AUTOMAN
• BOXNUM
• BOXTYPE
• BOXCON
• DATAACQ1
• DATAACQ2
• HSWDESC
• HSWVALUE
• PID
• REMCAS
• SLOTNUM
• SLOTTYPE
For more information about the parameters, refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference.

217
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.18 Utility Blocks

Related topics
“ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - Alarm Annunciator) block” on page 218
“ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - Alarm Annunciator) block” on page 219
“DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition) block” on page 220
“EXECTIMER” on page 221
“FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) block” on page 222
“FLAG block” on page 223
“FLAGARRAY block” on page 224
“MESSAGE block” on page 224
“NUMERIC block” on page 226
“NUMERICARRAY block” on page 226
“PUSH block” on page 226
“TEXTARRAY block” on page 227
“TEXTCOMMENT (Text Comment) block” on page 228
“TIMER block” on page 228
“TYPECONVERT block” on page 229

3.18.1 ALMWINDOW (Alarm Window - Alarm Annunciator) block

Attention
The ALMWINDOW block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.

Description The Alarm Window (ALMWINDOW) function block accepts boolean inputs (1 to 16) and
performs the configured sequence. It provides one Alarm output (ALMOUT) and group status
output (FLSHSTAT). (The FLASHSTAT is further connected by the user to the Annunciator
Panel function block during configuration)
The alarm annunciator is implemented as two blocks, one encapsulating the function of
individual alarm group, and one to control the lamp test, acknowledge, and reset functions.
Function • The Alarm Window function block accepts boolean inputs (1 to 16) and performs the
configured sequence. It provides one alarm output (ALMOUT) and group status output
(FLSHSTAT).
• It accepts multiple inputs (max 16) and provides system alarm in case of abnormal input.
• With R410, ALMWINDOW block allows you to configure individual values for the on-
delay time and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO)
is introduced for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Inputs • ALMIN [1..16] - Boolean inputs whose transitions need to be monitored. The block supports
16 inputs. By default, only four inputs are exposed.
• The NUMIN input parameter decides the number of alarm inputs that can be connected to
the block.
Outputs • FLSHSTAT - It takes the states, FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH, LAMPSTEADY, and
LAMPOFF.
• ALMOUT - OR of all inputs the Alarm WIndow.

218 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMIN[1..16] INALM

ALMOUT NAME
ALMSEQ NUMIN
FLSHSTAT OFFNRMALM.FL
HIALM.PR
OFFNRMALM.PR
HIALM.SV
OFFNRMALM.SV
HIALM.TYPE
OFFNRMALM.TM
OFFNRMALM.TMO
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ALMWINDOW
Block.

3.18.2 ANNPANEL (Annunciator Panel - Alarm Annunciator) block

Attention
The ANNPANEL block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.

Description This Annunciator Panel function block accepts FLSHSTAT from the Alarm Window function block
and provides Lamp output for the annunciation windows with synchronized lamp flash sequence
and hooter annunciation. This block also accepts the TEST input which forces the entire Lamp out
to glow steady. This block establishes a hidden connection with the Alarm window function block
to pass the RESET and ACK parameter values.
Function • Accepts multiple window block output (max 32) and provides lamp and hooter outputs.
• The FLSHSTAT can take several states including FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH,
LAMPSTEADY, and LAMPOFF.
• Enables an input to be wired as the operator acknowledge button.
• Enables an input to be wired as the operator RESET button.
• Enables an input to be wired as the operator lamp test button.
• Description is fetched from the preceding Alarm window block.
Be sure the Control Module containing the ANNPANEL block is configured for an Execution
Period of 100 milliseconds or faster. The flashing rate of the annunciator panel only works as
expected when the block is placed in a 100 millisecond or faster CM.
Inputs • FLSHSTAT[1..32] - It can take several states including FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH,
LAMPSTEADY, and LAMPOFF
• LAMP TEST
• RESET
• ACK
Outputs • LAMPOUT[1..32] - It can take several states including FASTFLASH, SLOWFLASH,
LAMPSTEADY, and LAMPOFF.
• OUTHORN1 - It turns ON if any of FLSHSTAT is in flastflashing mode
• OUTHORN2 - It turns ON if any of FLASSTAT is in slowflashing mode.
Parameters ACK NUMANNWIN
ALMWINTXT[1..32]
OUTHORN1
FLSHSTAT[1..32]
OUTHORN2
FSTFLSHSPD
RESET
LAMPOUT[1..32]
SLWFLSHSPD
LAMPTEST

219
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the ANNPANEL Block.

3.18.3 DIGACQ (Digital Acquisition) block

Attention
The DIGACQ block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.

Description The Digital Acquisition function block uses a combination of a DICHANNEL and SEL/FLAG
where PVSOURCE is defined by the operator. The Digital Acquisition block recieves input from
the DI Channel block. This block is independent of Channel type that feeds the block.
Function • Enables the user to specify the source of the process variable - AUTO, SUB or MAN.
– AUTO: Value is taken from the Switch
– SUB: Value is taken from the PROGRAM or other CM
– MAN: input is Operator specified
• Enables manual force OPEN or CLOSE of the field digital input by operators during
maintenance of field switches.
• Supports alarm generation, when the current process variable state is different from the
configured NORMAL state.
• With R410, DIGACQ block allows you to configure individual values for the on-delay time
and off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced
for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Inputs • IN - Input parameter
• PVFL (In case PVSOURCE is SUB)
Outputs • PV - Currently selected input based on the PVSOURCE selection
• PVFL - Actual State Flag
• INVPVFL - Inverted State Flag
• Depending on the value of PVSRCOPT and PVSOURCE, the output is set to one of the
following input values:
PVSRCOPT PVSOURCE PV
Only Auto AUTO Value of PVAUTOFL
ALL AUTO Value of PVAUTOFL
ALL MAN Value of PVFL
ALL SUB Value of PVFL
• The PVFL and PV parameters are always matched. When the PVSOURCE is changed to
MAN, the value of PVFL/PV is retained at the last value. This value can be changed as
needed.
• INVPVFL is a read-only value which is inverse of the PVFL value.

220 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADPVALM.FL OFFNRMALM.SV

BADPVALM.PR
OFFNRMALM.TM
BADPVALM.SV
OFFNRMALM.TMO
BADPVALM.TM PV
BADPVALM.TMO PVAUTOFL
DABLOCKSINCM PVFL
HIALM.PR PVSOURCE
HIALM.SV PVSRCOPT
HIALM.TYPE PVSTS
IN PVSTSFL.BAD
INALM PVSTSFL.MAN
INVPVFL PVSTSFL.NORM
NAME PVSTSFL.UNCERTN
NORMAL STATE0
OFFNRMALM.FL STATE1
OFFNRMALM.PR STATETEXT[0..1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the DIGACQ Block.

3.18.4 EXECTIMER
Attention
The EXECTIMER Block can only be used with C300, C300 20MS, C200E, ACE, SIMC300, SIMC200E, and
SIMACE. It is not supported for use on C200 controller.

Description EXECTIMER is a CEE utility block used to measure execution timing of other CEE blocks.
Function EXECTIMER is used by creating two instances. One instance marks the beginning of a time
interval, that is, the “BEGTIME” instance. The other instance marks the end of a time interval,
that is, the “ENDTIME” instance. The output parameter BEGTIME.TIMEOUT is then connected
to the input parameter ENDTIME.TIMEIN. With this configuration, any module, block, group of
modules or group of blocks which execute between the two EXECTIMER instances is included in
the time measurement.
Inputs The input parameter is ENDTIME.TIMEIN. There is no input for the BEGTIME instance that
marks the beginning of a time interval.
Outputs The output parameter is BEGTIME.TIMEOUT. There is no output for the ENDTIME instance
that marks the end of a time interval.
Parameter DTANORM DTIMESTDPRC
DTAOFFSET ENABLE
DTASCALE MAXMINRATIO
DTIME REJFACTOR
DTIMEAVG RESET
DTIMEAVGCOMP TAU
DTIMEMAX TIMEIN
DTIMEMIN TIMEOUT
DTIMESTD

221
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference, for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory, for more information on the EXECTIMER
Block.

3.18.5 FIRSTOUT (First Out Detection) block

Attention
The FIRSTOUT block can only be used with C300, C200E, and ACE Controllers.

Description A First Out logic enables you to identify the digital input signal that was first to transition from
its normal state, amongst a set of digital inputs connected to an equipment or a device. Usually,
this block is associated with critical equipment. An equipment's or a drive's protection interlocks
and stop commands are connected as input to the First up block. When an input signal
transitions from its configured NORMAL state, the output flag of the First Out logic is raised. In
addition, the input responsible for the First Out flag is recorded. All the logic processing is
performed during runtime processing of the block. The recording is locked until a reset is
applied to the block after all inputs are back to Normal state.
Function • The block provides the First Out function. A First Out logic enables you to identify which
digital input signal was first to transition from NORMAL state, amongst a set of digital
inputs connected to the block.
• The set of digital inputs connected to the block is scanned in ascending order and once a
transition (from NORMAL state) is detected, the First Out is flagged and further scanning is
stopped for rest of the cycles until a RESET.
In a scenario where more than one input transitions in a single cycle, say 2 and 8, from the
NORMAL state, the FIRSTOUTACTED flag is set. This leads to INPUTACTED [2] and
INPUTACTED [8] to turn ON. The FIRSTOUTINPUT takes the value of “Multiple”.
• The block provides an output which is an OR of all NORMAL state inputs and it goes high
if any input goes to ABNORMAL state. It resets when all inputs come back to NORMAL
state.
• Enables you to reset the First Out flag using a raising edge pulse input only when all inputs
come back to NORMAL state.
• Provides an alarm once a First Out is detected. If a single input transitions from NORMAL
state, the input that caused the alarm is identified and its description (INDESC[*]) is used
for alarm. In case of multiple input transitions in a single cycle, the alarm description is as
defined in the MULTIINPTDESC (Multiple Input description field).
Inputs • IN [1..24] - Boolean inputs whose transitions need to be monitored. The block supports 24
inputs. By default, only eight inputs are exposed.
• You can view the configured normal state of input at the faceplate of the function block
without opening the configuration page. The hollow diamond symbol indicates that the input
pin on the faceplate is configured with the normal input state as “True.”
In the Monitoring view, the hollow symbol is indicated in the color configured under the
Pins and Wires tab of the System preferences.
• RESET - This parameter is used to reset the First Out recordings.
• TRAN+SMON (Transition monitoring) - This parameteris enabled by a user with Engineer
access. If FIRSTOUT has already acted, TRANSMON cannot be enabled. However, if
TRANSMON is enabled before FIRSTOUT acted, it will continue to monitor upto 64,534
cycles and capture the list of inputs that became ABNORMAL in each cycle.

222 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs • FIRSTOUTACTED - This flag is set when there is an input transition from its configured
normal state.
• INPUTACTED[1..24] - Indicates whether the corresponding input has transitioned from
NORMAL state.
• FIRSTOUTINPUT - This is an enumeration that indicates which input triggered First Out.
• OREDOUT - It is an OR of all NORMAL state inputs and it goes high if any input goes to
ABNORMAL state. It resets when all inputs come back to NORMAL state.
Parameters FIRSTOUTACTED FIRSTOUTACTED
FIRSTOUTALM.FL FIRSTOUTALM.FL
FIRSTOUTALM.PR FIRSTOUTALM.PR
FIRSTOUTALM.SV FIRSTOUTALM.SV
FIRSTOUTINPUT FIRSTOUTINPUT
HIALM.PR HIALM.PR
HIALM.SV HIALM.SV
HIALM.TYPE HIALM.TYPE
IN[*] IN[*]
INDESC[*] INDESC[*]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FIRSTOUT Block.

3.18.6 FLAG block

Description Provides storage for a single two-state value which can be accessed as a simple Boolean (OFF or
ON) value using the PVFL parameter, or as one of two user-configured state values (for
example, Running and Stopped) via the PV parameter.
Function • Used to define two separate states (for example, Running/Stopped, Off/On) to indicate status
of a particular input.
• There are 2 user-configurable state descriptors, STATETEXT[0] and STATETEXT[1] that
are used to describe STATE0 and STATE1 respectively.
• Current state of flag can be changed/read using PVFL (Boolean) or using PV (either
STATETEXT[0] or STATETEXT[1]).
• Block also supports:
– configurable access lock which determines who can write a value to the block (such as
operator, engineer, or other function block).
– an off-normal alarm whereby one of the flag's states is configured as the normal state;
whenever the flag changes state, the off-normal alarm is generated.
– an off-normal alert whereby one of the flag's states is configured as the normal state;
whenever the flag modifies state, the off-normal alert is generated.
• With R410, FLAG block allows you to configure individual values for the on-delay time and
off-delay time for the individual alarms. A new parameter (xxxxALM.TMO) is introduced
for individual alarms to configure the off-delay time.
Note: The ALTENBOPT parameter can be used to enable the block to generate an off-normal
alarm or an off-normal alert whenever the flag's state differs from the configured normal state.
• When ALTENBOPT is set to ON, the FLAG block can be configured to generate an alert on
an off-normal condition.
• When ALTENBOPT is set to OFF, the FLAG block can be configured to generate an alarm
on an off-normal condition.
Inputs/Outputs PVFL is the only exposed block connection, but you can expose other block parameters through
the Configure Block form in Control Builder.

223
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCLOCK OFFNRMALM.PR

ALTENBOPT OFFNRMALM.SV
DESC
OFFNRMALM.TM
EUDESC
OFFNRMALM.TMO
HIALM.PR
ORDERINCM
HIALM.SV
PV
HIALM.TYPE
PVFL
INALM
STATE0
INALT
STATE1
NAME
STATETEXT[0..1]
NORMAL
OFFNRMALM.FL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FLAG Block.

3.18.7 FLAGARRAY block

Description Provides storage for up to 1000 2-state values. The value can be accessed as a simple Boolean
(Off or On) using the PVFL[n] parameter. Where “n” is the number of the flag.
Function • Used to define two separate states (Off/On) to indicate status of a particular input.
• Number of flag values (NFLAG) is user configurable.
Current state of flags can be changed/read using flag value (PVFL[n]) (Boolean).
Inputs/Outputs Boolean output flags (PVFL[1..1000])
Parameters ACCLOCK PVFL[1..1000]
NAME
NFLAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the FLAGARRAY
Block.

3.18.8 MESSAGE block

Description Provides up to 16 user configurable messages (MESSAGE[n]) that can be triggered by a client
of the block. Where “n” is the number of the message. A client can be the output from a Step
block in a Sequential Control Module (SCM).

224 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • Each message type can be configured (MSGTYPE[0..15]) to be either:

– Information,
– Confirmable,
– Single Signature*, or
– Double Signature*
* You must have the Electronic Signature system license to use Single Signature and Double
Signature message types.
• When a client triggers a given send flag (SENDFL [n]) input, the corresponding message
(MESSAGE[n]) is sent to the Message and the Event Summary displays in the Station
application.
• For information) only type (INFO) messages, the client trigger sets the corresponding
SENDFL[n] to True. Since the SENDFL[n] is a pulse trigger, it is automatically set to False
during the next execution cycle. This means the MESSAGE block is ready to send the same
message again in the next cycle.
• For confirmation type (CONFIRM) messages, the client trigger pulses the corresponding
SENDFL[n] to send the MESSAGE[n] to the Server. The client of the MESSAGE block
checks for the confirmed parameter (CONFIRMED[n]) to be set to True. The
CONFIRMED[n] parameter indicates whether the MESSAGE block has received a
confirmation.
• For single signature type (SINGLESIGNATURE) messages, the client trigger pulses the
corresponding SENDFL[n] to send the MESSAGE[n] to the Server. Once a user
acknowledges the message twice to confirm it through the Message Summary Display in
Station, a Single Signature user interface appears for the user to record an electronic
signature. The MEANINGPRI[n] parameter provides an indication for the meaning of the
primary signature. Once the message is acknowledged and signature is obtained, the
Message Summary Display sends a confirmation to the MESSAGE block that turns on the
CONFIRMED[n] parameter to show that the message has been confirmed.
• For double signature type (DOUBLESIGNATURE) messages, the client trigger pulses the
corresponding SENDFL[n] to send the MESSAGE[n] to the Server. Once a user
acknowledges the message twice to confirm it through the Message Summary Display in
Station, a Single Signature and Double Signature user interface appear for the user to record
the required electronic signatures. The MEANINGPRI[n] and MEANINGSEC[n]
parameters provide indications for the meaning of the primary and secondary signatures,
respectively. Once the message is acknowledged and signatures are obtained, the Message
Summary Display sends a confirmation to the MESSAGE block that turns on the
CONFIRMED[n] parameter to show that the message has been confirmed. In addition, the
MINLVLSECSIG[n] parameter lets users define the minimum security level required for a
secondary signature.
• If the Message block is connected to a block whose output is a Boolean and the Boolean
becomes True, the Message block will generate the message every time the Message block
executes until the Boolean output turns False. If the desired behavior is to generate a one-
time message, then the message block should be driven by a Pulse Output.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 16 inputs (SENDFLAG[0..15]) and 16 outputs (CONFIRMED[0..15]), depending on the
message types configured.
Parameters CONFIRM[0..15] MEANINGSEC[0..15]
CONFIRMED[0..15] MESSAGE[0..15]
DESC MINLVLSECSIG[0..15]
EUDESC MSGTYPE[0..15]
MEANINGPRI[0..15] NAME
ORDERINCM
SENDFL[0..15]

225
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the MESSAGE Block.

3.18.9 NUMERIC block

Description Provides storage for a floating point value that is accessible via the PV configuration parameter.
Function • Used to store up to 8 bytes of a floating point value within defined upper and lower limits
for use in a control strategy.
• Configurable high and low limits are also provided.
• Also supports a configurable access lock which determines who can write a value to the
block (such as operator, engineer, or another function block.).
Inputs/Outputs PV is only exposed block connection, but you can expose other block parameters through the
Configure Block form in Control Builder.
Parameters ACCLOCK PVFORMAT
ORDERINCM PVHILM
PV PVLOLM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the NUMERIC Block.

3.18.10 NUMERICARRAY block

Description Provides storage for up to 200 floating point values that are accessible through the
corresponding PV configuration parameter (PV[n]). Where“n” is the number of the numeric.
Function Use outputs (PV[1..200]) as source parameters to provide predefined analog constants to other
function blocks. A bad numeric output parameter typically has the value NaN (Not-a-Number).
Number of Numeric Values (NNUMERIC) is user configurable.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 200 outputs (PV[1..200]), depending on the number of numeric values (NNUMERIC)
configured
Parameters ACCLOCK PV[1..200]
NAME PVFORMAT
NNUMERIC
Reference R Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the
NUMERICARRAY Block.

3.18.11 PUSH block

Description The PUSH function block provides store/push capability of different data types to the output
destination.
The block fetches input value and stores in this cycle to a destination parameter. The output is
stored only if the output store enable flag (STOREENB) is true. When STOREENB is true, and
store on change (STORONCHGENB) is true, the output is stored upon change of CM or CEE
state, or when the input changes.

226 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function The PUSH function block supports all the data types supported by the TypeConvert function
block.
Once the first store is successful, the block has features to store only on change for outputs of
BOOLEAN and FLOAT64 data type. This feature is provided to prevent the unnecessary traffic
on the network if the stores are peer-to-peer.
The function block performs the type conversion and clamping before it pushes the value to the
destination. The destinations are configured either by using parameter connector edit box using
point picker in the control builder or by using wire connections.
Inputs/Outputs If the PUSH block is able to fetch the value, then it is pushed to the destination.
There are two statuses provided; EXECSTS and STORESTS. These will give the user indication
of the status of fetching input and status of output store.
If STORONCHGENB is set to ON, the input values are stored to the destination ONLY when
the input is changed. In the case of floating point number, the value is considered changed only
if the absolute value of the difference between the new value and the last value is larger than the
configured INPUTCHGDB.
BOOLVALUEOFF, BOOLVALUEON and ENUMTOBOOLMAP[0..63] behave the same as in
type convert block.
Parameters BOOLVALUEOFF OUT.BOOLEAN
BOOLVALUEON OUT.ENUM
ENUMBOOLMAP[0..63] OUT.FLOAT32
EXECSTS OUT.FLOAT64
IN.BOOLEAN OUT.INT8
IN.ENUM OUT.INT16
IN.FLOAT32 OUT.INT32
IN.FLOAT64 OUT.SDENUM
IN.INT8 OUT.UINT16
IN.INT16 OUT.UINT32
IN.INT32 PVFL
IN.SDENUM SDENUMTEXT
IN.UINT16 STATE0
IN.UINT32 STATE1
INPUTCHGDB STATETEXT[0..1]
NAME STOREENB
LASTSTORESTS STORESTS
LASTSTORESTSN STORONCHGENB
ORDERINCM THRESHOLD
TRUNCATEOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the PUSH Block.

3.18.12 TEXTARRAY block

Description Provides storage for up to 120 text strings that are accessible through the corresponding string
configuration parameter (STR[n]). Where “n” is the number of the text string.

227
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Function • Provides predefined text (STR[1..120]) strings to other blocks.

• Number of string values (NSTRING) is user configurable.
• The length of the text strings (STRLEN) is user configurable as 8, 16, 32, or 64 characters
• Supports a maximum size of 960 two-byte characters. The maximum data combinations that
you can configure through NSTRING and STRLEN values are as follows.
– If NSTRING is 15 and STRLEN is 64, then the STR[n] range is 1 to 15.
– If NSTRING is 30 and STRLEN is 32, then the STR[n] range is 1 to 30.
– If NSTRING is 60 and STRLEN is 16, then the STR[n] range is 1 to 60.
– If NSTRING is 120 and STRLEN is 8, then the STR[n] range is 1 to 120.
Inputs/Outputs Up to 120 output strings (STR[1..120]), depending on the number of string (NSTRING) and
length of string (STRLEN) values configured.
Parameters ACCLOCK ORDERINCM
NAME STR[1..120]
NSTRING STRLEN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TEXTARRAY
Block.

3.18.13 TEXTCOMMENT (Text Comment) block

Description The Text Comment function block can be used to insert comments into charts. The Text
Comment block does not contain any logic and does not participate in control execution.
The Text Comment block can be used with the container modules such as CM, SCM, RCM, and
UCM. The Text Comment block can be imported/exported like other function blocks. There is
no restriction on the number of Text Comment blocks that can be inserted into a chart. The Text
Comment block can be loaded while active without inactivating the strategy or setting the CEE
to IDLE.
Function The Text Comment block can be used only to insert comments into a chart.
Inputs/Outputs The Text Comment block does not contain any logic and also does not have any pin connections.
Parameters ORDERINCM TEXTCOLOR
TEXTCOMMENT TEXTSIZE
BKGCOLOR
FONTSTYLE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TEXTCOMMENT
block.

3.18.14 TIMER block

Description Provides capability to time process events or create known delays.

Function Used to keep track of elapsed time during a process and provides indication when elapsed time
reaches predefined limit.

228 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs/Outputs • SO is only exposed block connection, but you can expose other block parameters through
the Configure Block form in Control Builder.
• Commands are sent to timer in one of two ways:
– By operator using COMMAND parameter.
– Through connections to parameters STARTFL, STOPFL, RESETFL, and RESTARTFL.
Parameters COMMAND SO
NAME SP
ORDERINCM STARTFL
PV STATE
RESETFL STOPFL
RESTARTFL TIMEBASE
RV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TIMER Block.

3.18.15 TYPECONVERT block

Description Provides the ability to convert one data type to another for connecting parameters of different
data types.
Function • Supports data type conversions for all combinations among the following major data types.
– Boolean
– Integer (unsigned/signed 8/16/32-bit integers)
– Real (32-bit and 64-bit IEEE floating point numbers)
– Enumeration
– If data type conversion is not necessary, then none will be done.
• Used to connect one input parameter to one or many output parameters with different data
types. The TYPCONVERT block reads the input value and only provides the converted
output when the block connected to its output runs.
Inputs/Outputs Up to nine inputs and nine outputs. The pins for the four most common inputs (IN.BOOLEAN,
IN.INT32, IN.FLOAT64, IN.ENUM) and outputs (OUT.BOOLEAN, OUT.INT32,
OUT.FLOAT64, OUT.ENUM) are exposed by default.

229
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BOOLVALUEOFF ORDERINCM

BOOLVALUEON OUT.BOOLEAN
ENUMBOOLMAP[0..63] OUT.ENUM
EXECSTS OUT.FLOAT32
IN.BOOLEAN OUT.FLOAT64
IN.ENUM OUT.INT8
IN.FLOAT32 OUT.INT16
IN.FLOAT64 OUT.INT32
IN.INT8 OUT.SDENUM
IN.INT16 OUT.UINT8
IN.INT32 OUT.UINT16
IN.SDENUM OUT.UINT32
IN.UINT8 SDENUMTEXT
IN.UINT16 THRESHOLD
IN.UINT32 TRUNCATEOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Component Theory for more information on the TYPECONVERT
Block.

230 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

3.19 EtherNet/IP channel blocks

Related topics
“EtherNet/IP IO channel blocks” on page 231
“EtherNet/IP drive and relay channel blocks” on page 233

3.19.1 EtherNet/IP IO channel blocks

Related topics
“AICHANNEL” on page 231
“AOCHANNEL” on page 231
“DICHANNEL” on page 232
“DOCHANNEL” on page 232

3.19.1.1 AICHANNEL

Description Provides standard analog interface to control function blocks.

Function • Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
• Assigns BAD status to PV parameter when appropriate.
Inputs Input data received from the field.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Parameters BADPVFL PVSTS
CHANNUM SIMMODE
CONTAINEDIN SIMVALUE
FETCHMODE
IOP
ORDERINCM
PV
PVRAW
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with the physical AI hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.1.2 AOCHANNEL

Description Provides a standard analog output signal for operating final control elements.
Function • Brings OP data from connected blocks and conveys OP data to be stored in an associated
IOM block.
• Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
• Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if AOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications error
occurs.
• Reverses OP direction if OPTDIR option is REVERSE.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.

231
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.

Parameters BACKCALOUT INITREQLATCH
BLKASSIGNSUPPORTED INITVAL
BLOCKLOGO IOCTYPE
BLKSTIDX IOP
BLKTYPE OP
CHANNUM OPFINAL
COMMFAILFL OPSOURCE
CONTAINEDIN OPTDIR
INITREQ SIMVALUE
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with the physical AO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.1.3 DICHANNEL

Description Provides a standard digital interface to control blocks.

Function • Brings PV data from an associated IOM block.
• Assigns BAD status to PV parameter when appropriate.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV and PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Parameters BADPVFL SIMMODE
CHANNUM SIMVALUE
CONTAINEDIN
FETCHMODE
INBADOPT
IOP
ORDERINCM
PVFL
Associated Block Prior to loading, the block must be associated with 1 channel of the corresponding IOM block
that interfaces with physical Digital Input hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.1.4 DOCHANNEL

Description Generates status output [0 or 1), based on origin of input and parameters.
Function Brings SO from connected blocks and stores value in an associated IOM block.
Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
Stops SO if INTREQ is TRUE
Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if DOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications error
occurs.
Inputs Only one control block can interface to this block.
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value

232 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters INITVAL CONTAINEDIN

INITREQ BLKSTIDX
BACKCALOUT IOCTYPE
SO CHANNUM
SOSOURCE IOP
INITREQLATCH BLKASSIGNSUPPORTED
BLKTYPE BLOCKLOGO
Associated Block Prior to loading, the block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with the physical DO hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay channel blocks

Related topics
“PowerFlex Drive input channel” on page 233
“PowerFlex Drive output channel” on page 234
“E3 and E3 plus IN channels” on page 235
“E3 and E3 plus OUT channels” on page 236

3.19.2.1 PowerFlex Drive input channel

Description Provides standard analog interface and Drive-specific parameters to control function blocks.
Function • Brings PV data from an associated Drive block.
• Brings Drive specific data from an associated Drive block.
• Assigns BAD status to PV and also sets BADDATA parameter (used for Drive-specific
parameters) when appropriate.
Inputs Input data received from the field.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units for PV.
Other Drive-specific parameters.

233
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCELERATING FLTBUSV

ACTDIRECT IOP
ACTIVE JOGGING
ALARM JOGOWNER
ATHOME LASTFLTCODE
ATLIMIT LASTSTARTSRC
ATSPEED LASTSTOPSRC
ATZEROSPEED MANUAL
BADDATA MOTOROVRLD
BADPVFL OPCURRENT
BUSFREQREG ORDERINCM
CHANNUM POSMODE
CLRFLTOWNER PV
CMDDIRECT PVFL
CONTAINEDIN PVRAW
CURLIMIT PVSTS
DBACTIVE REGEN
DCBRAKE RUNNING
DECELERATING RUNREADY
EDITLOCK SIMMODE
ELAPSEDKWH SIMVALUE
ELAPSEDMWH SPDREFSRC
ELSRUNTIME SPEEDMODE
ENABLED SPREFID
FAULTAMPS STARTOWNER
FAULTED STOPOWNER
FAULTFREQ STOPPING
FETCHMODE STRTINH
TRQMODE
Associated Block Prior to loading, the block must be associated with 1 channel of the corresponding IOM block
that interfaces with the physical Drive hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.2.2 PowerFlex Drive output channel

Description Provides a standard analog output signal and Drive-specific commands for operating final
control elements.
Function • Brings OP data and Drive specific commands from connected blocks and conveys the data
to be stored in an associated Drive block.
• Sets INITVAL parameter to an appropriate value, based on echo data.
• Assigns safe OP value if status is BAD or UNCERTAIN.
• Sets INITREQ to TRUE value if AOC or IOM block is inactive or a communications error
occurs and also sets BADDATA parameter (used for Drive-specific commands) when
appropriate.

234 www.honeywell.com
 3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Inputs Inputs from blocks connected to the channel.

Outputs Floating point value in engineering units for PV.
Other Drive-specific parameters.
Parameters ACCELTIME JOGADTIME
ACCELTIME1 JOGSPD1
ACCELTIME2 JOGSPD2
BADDATA MANUALCMD
CHANNUM MAXFWDSPD
CLEARFAULT MAXREVSPD
CMDDIRECTION NORMALSTOP
COASTSTOP OP
COMMFAILFL OPCURRENT
CONTAINEDIN OPFINAL
CURRLIMSTOP ORDERINCM
DECELTIME OVERSPDLIMIT
DECELTIME1 REFSELECTOR
DECELTIME2 RUN
EDITLOCK SIMMODE
FETCHMODE SPDREFASTPT
INITREQ SPDREFBSTPT
INITREQLATCH SPDREFSCALE
INITVAL START
IOP STOPMODEA
JOG1 STOPMODEB
JOG2 ZEROSPDLIMIT
Associated Block Prior to loading, the block must be associated with 1 channel of the corresponding IOM block
that interfaces with the physical Drive hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.2.3 E3 and E3 plus IN channels

Description Provides standard digital interface and Relay specific parameters to control function blocks.
Function • Brings digital input data from an associated Relay block.
• Brings Relay-specific data from an associated Relay block.
• Sets BADDATA parameter (used for Device specific parameters) when appropriate.
Inputs Input data received from the field.
Outputs Digital Inputs value.
Other Relay-specific parameters.

235
3 REFERENCE DATA FOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK TYPES

Parameters Parameters for E3 Parameters for E3 plus

• E3 Device Status • E3 Device Status
• E3 Data Status • E3 Data Status
• E3_0_L1_CURR • E3_0_L1_CURR
• E3_0_L2_CURR • E3_0_L2_CURR
• E3_0_L3_CURR • E3_0_L3_CURR
• DeviceNet Scanner Status • DeviceNet Scanner Status
• E3 Advance Data Status • E3 Advance Data Status
• CHANNUM • CHANNUM
• CONTAINEDIN • CONTAINEDIN
• EDITLOCK • EDITLOCK
• IOP • IOP
• ORDERINCM • ORDERINCM
• SIMMODE • SIMMODE
• EDITLOCK • EDITLOCK
• FETCHMODE • FETCHMODE
• SIMVALUE • BADDATA
• SIMVALUE
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding IOM block that
interfaces with the physical relay hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

3.19.2.4 E3 and E3 plus OUT channels

Description Provides a standard digital output signal and Relay specific commands for operating final
control elements.
Function • Brings Digital Output data and relay-specific commands from connected blocks and
conveys the data to be stored in an associated Relay block.
• Sets INITVAL parameter to appropriate value based on echo data.
• Sets BADDATA parameter (used for Device specific commands) when appropriate.
Inputs Inputs from blocks connected to the channel.
Outputs Digital Output value.
Other Drive specific commands.
Parameters Parameters for E3 Parameters for E3 plus
CHANNUM CHANNUM
CONTAINEDIN CONTAINEDIN
EDITLOCK EDITLOCK
SIMMODE SIMMODE
FETCHMODE FETCHMODE
IOP IOP
ORDERINCM ORDERINCM
BADDATA BADDATA
SIMVALUE SIMVALUE
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding relay block that
interfaces with the physical relay hardware module at execution runtime.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

236 www.honeywell.com
4 Reference Data for Physical Equipment Block Types

This section provides detailed reference data for each physical equipment block type that is part of the hardware
relation category for the Control Builder. The reference data is organized by the major block type and then
alphabetically within the IOM function block by the given module's model number and input or output type.
The reference data for each block covers these topics as applicable:
• description
• function
• inputs and input ranges
• outputs and output ranges
• parameters

Related topics
“Control Processor Module Block” on page 238
“Control Execution Environment Block” on page 246
“Input/Output Link Interface Module Block” on page 259
“Input/Output Link Block” on page 260
“OLE for Process Control Server Block” on page 268
“Inter Cluster Gateway Block” on page 269
“Redundancy Module Block” on page 272
“Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block” on page 274
“Input Type I/O Module Blocks” on page 277
“Output Type I/O Module Blocks” on page 290
“Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block” on page 302
“Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks” on page 303
“Series C Input/Output (Series C I/O) Blocks” on page 322
“Speed Protection Module (SPM)” on page 331
“Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module ” on page 339
“Universal Input/Output (UIO) Module” on page 346
“Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) Blocks” on page 350
“PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Blocks” on page 358
“Foundation FieldBus Interface Module (FIM) Blocks” on page 360
“Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM) Block” on page 362
“EtherNet/IP blocks” on page 364
This topic provides reference information about EtherNet/IP I/O devices, PowerFlex drives, E3, and E3
plus relays.
“ControlLogix and UDT blocks” on page 376

237
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.1 Control Processor Module Block

Related topics
“CPM Block (C200 Controller)” on page 238
“C200E Controller” on page 240
“C300 Block” on page 242
“Application Control Environment (ACE) Block” on page 245

4.1.1 CPM Block (C200 Controller)

Description Identifies the primary and secondary Control Processor Modules (CPM) and associated CEE to
implement the control strategy built in the Control Builder application. This block's parameters
characterize the redundant CPM as a whole.
This block always runs at an execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Supports C200 Controller Redundant Chassis Pair hardware configurations.
Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CPM.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire CPM.
Secondary waits to take control if the“Primary” fails.
The address of the Secondary chassis equals the address of the Primary chassis plus one.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.

238 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMFREEDESC

BATTERYNOTOK NUMREGDESC
BLCKCOMMENT1 NUMUSEDBLKS
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMUSEDDESC
BLCKCOMMENT3 PCMCOMMAND
BLCKCOMMENT4 PCMSTATE
CCLCNT RAMSCRUBERRS
CCLINFO RAMSWEEPERR
CCLLOADSTAT RDNCAPABILITY
CCLNAME RDNCHASSISID
CEECOMMAND RDNCMPT
CEESTATE RDNDELAYAVG
CPMCOMMAND[0..numChans-1] RDNDELAYMAX
CPMSTATE RDNLOS
CPUFREEAVG RDNSYNCSTATE
CPUFREEMIN RDNXFERAVG
CURTIME RDNXFERMAX
DAY SCANASSOCDSP
DAYLIGHTTIME SCANCTRLLVL
DESC SCANGRPDTL
DIRECTSYNC SCANPNTDTL
DRIVERNAME SECMODNAME
ENBMEMALMFL SECNAMESTRING
EUDESC SECOND
FREEMEM SECTMPNAME
FREEMEMINK SLOTNUMBER
GROUP.NUMPARAMS STATSRESET
HIST.NUMPARAMS TASKSTACKHILM
HOUR TASKSTACKSIZE
IMAGEVER TASKSTACKUSED
INALM TIMEZONE
INDRCTSYNC TOTALMEM
INDSYNCCMD TOTALMEMINK
LASTOPMNAME TREND.NUMPARAMS
MAXFREEBLKSZ ULCNBMAC
MAXFREEINK USEDMEM
MINUTE USEDMEMINK
MODISREDUN USESIM
MONTH WEEKDAY
MULREDUNSTAT WEEKDAYFMT
NAME YEAR
NETWORKTYPE YEARFMT

239
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

NTOTMEMDESC
NUMEXTBLKS
NUMFREEBLKS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.1.2 C200E Controller

Description Identifies the primary and secondary C200E controllers and associated CEE to implement the
control strategy built in the Control Builder application. This block's parameters characterize the
redundant C200E as a whole.
This block always runs at an execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Supports C200E Controller Redundant Chassis Pair hardware configurations.
Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the C200E.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire C200E.
Secondary waits to take control if the “Primary” fails.
The address of the Secondary chassis equals the address of the Primary chassis plus one.
Supports Controller Redundancy with switchover time < 500 mSec.
Supports Exchange Block connections to Rockwell PLC devices also using the CIP protocol and
PCCC protocol.
Supports Experion Batch Manager (EBM) functionality for the Sequential Control Module
(SCM), Recipe Control Module (RCM), Unit Control Module (UCM) and Phase block.
Supports Whole Array Transfer.
Supports 200 maximum instantiated CDB types.
SIM-C200E does not have a separate module function block. It can be created in a similar way as
the C200E and enabling the simulation environment in the Simulation tab.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communication
Outputs Refer to the description.

240 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMFREEDESC

BATTERYNOTOK NUMREGDESC
BLCKCOMMENT1 NUMUSEDBLKS
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMUSEDDESC
BLCKCOMMENT3 PCMCOMMAND
BLCKCOMMENT4 PCMSTATE
BOOTIMAGEVER PROCESS_ID
CCLINFO RAMSCRUBERRS
CCLNAME RAMSWEEPERR
CEECOMMAND RDNCAPABILITY
CEESTATE RDNCHASSISID
CNISLOTNUM RDNCMPT
CNETCONNECT RDNCTLABILITY
CPMCOMMAND[0..numChans-1] RDNDELAYAVG
CPMSTATE RDNDELAYMAX
CURTIME RDNINHIBITSYNC
DAY RDNHISTTIME
DESC RDNHISTSTATE
DIRECTSYNC RDNHISTREASON
DRIVERNAME RDNISTIMEMAX
ENBMEMALMFL RDNSOTIMEMAX
EUDESC RDNLOS
FREEMEM RDNROLESTATE
FREEMEMINK RDNOPMFRZTIME
FWREVISION RDNSYNCSTATE
GROUP.NUMPARAMS RDNSYNCPROG
HIST.NUMPARAMS RDNXFERAVG
HOSTIPPRI RDNXFERMAX
HOSTNAMEPRI SCANASSOCDSP
HOUR SCANCTRLLVL
HWREVMAJ SCANGRPDTL
HWREVMIN SCANPNTDTL
IMAGEVER SECMODNAME
INALM SECNAMESTRING
INDRCTSYNC SECOND
INDSYNCCMD SERIALNUM
LASTOPMNAME SECTMPNAME
MAXFREEBLKSZ SIMTARGET
MAXFREEINK SIM_C200MACID
MINUTE SIMCOMMAND
MODISREDUN SYNCTIMEBEG
MODTYPE SYNCTIMEEND

241
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

MONTH SLOTNUMBER
MULREDUNSTAT TASKSTACKHILM
NAME TASKSTACKSIZE
NETWORKTYPE TASKSTACKUSED
NTOTMEMDESC TOTALMEM
NUMEXTBLKS TOTALMEMINK
NUMFREEBLKS TREND.NUMPARAMS
ULCNBMAC
USEDMEM
USEDMEMINK
USESIM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.1.3 C300 Block

Description Identifies the primary and secondary C300 Controllers and associated CEE to implement the
control strategy built in the Control Builder application. This block's parameters characterize the
redundant C300 as a whole.
This block always runs at an execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Supports C300 Controller Redundant Partner hardware configurations.
Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the C300.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire C300.
Secondary waits to take control if the “Primary” fails.
The address of the Secondary controller equals the address of the Primary plus one.
With R410, you can configure native peer-to-peer communication between the CEE points and
non-CEE points such as PMD, Safety Manager points and Experion Server points (SCADA, TPS,
OPC Advanced, DSA). The peer-to-peer communication between CEE and the Experion Server
points are licensed using "Experion Server Peer Responder" feature.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.

242 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAXNODEID

ALTSYNCCMD MINUTE
AUXDESC MODIFIEDBY
BACKUPRAMSCRUBERRS MODISREDUN
BACKUPRAMSWEEPERR MONTH
BADIPCSUM NAME
BADUDPCSUM NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT
BATTERYNOTOK NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH
BECMPRICMD NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
BLCKCOMMENT1 NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMACEINCON
BLCKCOMMENT3 NUMACEOUTCON
BLCKCOMMENT4 NUMCPMINCON
BOOTIMAGEVER NUMCPMOUTCON
CONTCUTOUT NUMFIMINCON
C300COMMAND NUMFIMOUTCON
C300MODTYPE NUMFTENODES
C300STATE NUMIOLMINCON
CMAXTEMP NUMIOLMOUTCN
CMINTEMP NUMSIGS
CPUFREEAVG NUMSIOLMINCN
CPUFREEMIN NUMSIOLMOUCN
CPUFREERESET NUMC3INCON
CREATEDBY NUMC3OUTCON
CTEMP NUMEFIMINCON
CTRLCONFIRM NUMEFIMOUTCON
CURDEVICEIDX PRIMARYSIG
CURTIME QUALSTATE
DATECREATED RAMSCRUBERRS
DAY RAMSWEEPERR
DAYLIGHTTIME RDNAUTOSYNC
DEBUGFLOAT RDNCAPABILTY
DEBUGINT RDNCMPT
DESC RDNDELAYAVG
DEVFLAG RDNDELAYMAX
DEVICEIDX RDNHISTREASON
DIRECTSYNC RDNHISTSTATE
DSBLSYNCCMD RDNLOS
ENBLSTBYCMD RDNROLESTATE
ENBLSYNCCMD RDNSYNCPROG
ESIG RDNSYNCSTATE
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT RDNXFERAVG

243
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

FTEMARTAVGDEPTH RDNXFERMAX
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT REASONSET
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH SCANAREA
FWREVISION SCANASSOCDSP
GOBACKREL SCANCTRLLVL
GROUP SCANEUHI
GROUP SCANEULO
GROUP.NUMPARAMS SCANGRPDTL
GROUP.PARAM SCANPNTDTL
GROUP.POSITION SCRIPTOR
HIST SECMODNAME
HIST.EXTD SECNAME
HIST.FAST SECNAMESTRG
HIST.GATEPARAM SECOND
HIST.GATESTRING SECONDARYSIG
HIST.GATEVALUE SECTMPNAME
HIST.NUMPARAMS SERIALNUM
HIST.PARAM SIMDEVICEIDX
HIST.STD SIMENABLE
HOUR SIMIPADDRESS
HWREVMJ STATSRESET
HWREVMN SWITCHCMD
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS SYNCTIMEBEG
ICMPINECHOREPS SYNCTIMEEND
ICMPINECHOS TASKSTACKHILM
ICMPINERRORS TASKSTACKSIZE
ICMPINMSGS TASKSTACKUSED
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS TCPACTIVEOPENS
ICMPOUTECHOREPS TCPATTEMPTFAILS
ICMPOUTECHOS TCPCURRESTAB
ICMPOUTERRORS TCPESTABRESETS
ICMPOUTMSGS TCPINERRS
ICONSTATE TCPINSEGS
IMAGEVER TCPOUTRESETS
INALM TCPOUTSEGS
INDRCTSYNC TCPPASSIVEOPENS
INDSYNCCMD TCPRETRANSSEGS
INITCOMPLETE TIMELASTSKEW
INTERLANFAILED TIMELASTSYNC
IPADDRESS TIMESOURCE
IPFRAGCREATES TIMESYNCSTAT
IPFRAGFAILS TIMEZONE

244 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

IPFRAGOKS TMBTCPAVGXMITMSGPS
IPINADDRERRORS TMBTCPMAXXMITMSGPS
IPINDELIVERS TMBTCPAVGRCVMSGPS
IPINDISCARDS TMBTCPMAXRCVMSGPS
IPINHDRERRORS
TNUMPMDINCON
IPINRECEIVES
TNUMPMDOUTCON
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS
TNUMQCSINCON
IPOUTDISCARDS
TNUMQCSOUTCON
IPOUTNOROUTES
TNUMSCADAINCON
IPOUTREQUESTS
TNUMSMINCON
IPREASSEMFAILS
TREND
IPREASSEMOKS
TREND.NUMBER
IPREASSEMREQS
TREND.NUMPARAMS
IPROUTINGDISCARDS
TREND.PARAM
JOURNALONLY
TREND.POSITION
LANAFAILED
UDPINDGRAMS
LANBFAILED
UDPINERRORS
LASTOPMNAME
UDPLISTENERS
MACADDRA
UDPNOPORTS
MACADDRB
UDPOUTDGRAMS
MACADDRR
VERSION
MAXFTENODES
VERSIONDATE
VERSIONNUM
WDTMAXREFRESH
WDTMINREFRESH
WEEKDAY
WEEKDAYFMT
YEAR
YEARFMT
XOVERFAILED
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.1.4 Application Control Environment (ACE) Block

Refer to the Application Control Environment (ACE) User’s Guide for more information about this block.

245
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.2 Control Execution Environment Block

Related topics
“CEEC200 Block” on page 246
“CEEC200E Block” on page 248
“CEEC300 Block” on page 251
“C300 - 20mS CEE” on page 255
“CEEACE Block” on page 258

4.2.1 CEEC200 Block

Description Provides control functionality for associated Control Processor Module block. This block's
parameters characterize the CEE within the CPM. In the future, multiple CEEs may be assigned
to a single CPM.
This block always runs at an execution period of 2 seconds.
There are two versions of the CEE available, the standard version CEE-50ms, and the fast version
CEE-5ms.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Runs on the CPM hardware platform. In the future, CEE will run on other platforms as well.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the CPM as a whole.
Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer communications.
Supports peer-to-peer communications among CEEs assigned to CPMs located in the same
management domain.
Supports configurable subscription rate and store response time for specific peer environment.
Sequential Control Module function blocks are supported. Special care should be taken in
configuring the SCMs in 5 msec CEE.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.

246 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE IPEERCONNERRCODE

BASEPERIOD IPEERCONNERRINFO
BLCKCOMMENT1 IPEERCONNSTS
BLCKCOMMENT2 IPEERNAME
BLCKCOMMENT3 IPEERPATH
BLCKCOMMENT4 LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40]
BLKTYPCOUNT MAXBLKTYPES
BLKTYPDESC NUMACEOUTCON
BLKTYPHELPTXT NUMBLKTYPES
BLKTYPLIB NUMCCLRQU
BLKTYPSIZE NUMCPMINCON
CDISPAVGPPS NUMCPMOUTCON
CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMEXCRQUAVG
CDISPAVGSPSCONN NUMEXCRQUMAX
CDISPMAXPPS NUMEXCRSPAVG
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMEXCRSPMAX
CDISPMAXSPSCONN NUMFIMINCON
CEECOMMAND NUMFIMOUTCON
CEESTATE NUMIOLMINCON
CPEERAVGPPS NUMIOLMOUTCN
CPEERAVGPPSCONN NUMNTFRQUAVG
CPEERAVGSPSCONN NUMNTFRQUMAX
CPEERMAXPPS NUMPARRSPAVG
CPEERMAXPPSCONN NUMPARRSPMAX
CPEERMAXSPSCONN NUMPEERENV
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39] NUMSCEINCON
CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39] NUMSCEOUTCON
CPUFREEAVG NUMSIOLMINCN
CPUFREEMIN NUMSIOLMOUCN
CRCYCLEOVRN[0..40] PEERENV
DESC PEERGETAVG[1..30]
EUDESC PEERSTRAVG[1..30]
EXTGETRQUAVG PEERSTRRESP
EXTGETRQUMAX PEERSUBSCPER
EXTSTRRQUAVG RDISPDEGIMRCONN[1…
RDISPCONNMAX]
EXTSTRRQUMAX
RPEERNAME[1…RPEERCONNMAX]
GROUP.NUMPARAMS
SCANASSOCDSP
HIST.NUMPARAMS
SCANCTRLLVL
INALM
SCANGRPDTL
NAME
SCANPNTDTL
NUMACCRQUAVG
STATSRESET
NUMACCRQUMAX
STRRESP

247
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

NUMACEINCON SUBSCPERIOD
TREND.NUMPARAMS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.2.2 CEEC200E Block

Description Provides control functionality for associated C200E block. This block's parameters characterize
the CEE within the C200E controller.
The base execution cycle for CEEC200E block 50 mSec.
The execution periods for function blocks loaded to the CEE controller may be set to any of the
same values supported by these execution cycles.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Runs on the C200E hardware platform.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the C200E as a whole.
Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer communication.
Supports peer-to-peer communication among CEEs assigned to controllers located in the same
management domain.
Supports peer connections to other controllers (C200, C200E, C300, and ACE Nodes) through
FTEB.
Supports configurable subscription rate and store response time for specific peer environment.
Sequential Control Module function blocks are supported.
With R410, C200E-CEE supports native peer-to-peer communication with non-CEE controllers
such as Safety Manager and PMD points, and Experion Server points such as SCADA and TPS
points.The peer-to-peer communication between CEE and the Experion Server points are licensed
using "Experion Server Peer Responder" feature.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs Refer to the description.

248 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE IPEERCONNERRCODE

BASEPERIOD IPEERCONNERRINFO
BLCKCOMMENT1 IPEERCONNSTS
BLCKCOMMENT2 IPEERNAME
BLCKCOMMENT3 IPEERPATH
BLCKCOMMENT4 LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40]
BLKTYPCOUNT MAXBLKTYPES
BLKTYPDESC NUMACEOUTCON
BLKTYPHELPTXT
NUMBEVENTSAV
BLKTYPLIB
NUMBEVENTSMAX
BLKTYPSIZE
NUMBLKTYPES
CCLCNT
NUMCCLRQU
CCLLOADSTAT
NUMCPMINCON
CDISPAVGPPS
NUMCPMOUTCON
CDISPAVGPPSCONN
NUMEXCRQUAVG
CDISPAVGSPSCONN
NUMEXCRQUMAX
CDISPMAXPPS
NUMEXCRSPAVG
CDISPMAXPPSCONN
NUMEXCRSPMAX
CDISPMAXSPSCONN
NUMFIMINCON
CEECOMMAND
NUMFIMOUTCON
CEESTATE
NUMIOLMINCON
CPEERAVGPPS
NUMIOLMOUTCN
CPEERAVGPPSCONN
NUMNTFRQUAVG
CPEERAVGSPSCONN
NUMNTFRQUMAX
CPEERMAXPPS
NUMPARRSPAVG
CPEERMAXPPSCONN
NUMPARRSPMAX
CPEERMAXSPSCONN
NUMPEERENV
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39]
CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39] NUMPMDINCON
CPUFREEAVG NUMPMDOUTCON
CPUFREEMIN
NUMQCSINCON
CRCYCLEOVRN[0..40]
DESC NUMQCSOUTCON
DAYLIGHTTIME NUMSCADAINCON
EUDESC NUMSCEINCON
EXTGETRQUAVG NUMSCEOUTCON
EXTGETRQUMAX NUMSIOLMINCN
EXTSTRRQUAVG NUMSIOLMOUCN
EXTSTRRQUMAX
NUMSMINCON
GROUP.NUMPARAMS
PEERENV
HIST.NUMPARAMS
PEERGETAVG[1..30]
INALM
PEERSTRAVG[1..30]

249
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

NAME PEERSTRRESP
NUMACCRQUAVG PEERSUBSCPER
NUMACCRQUMAX RDISPDEGIMRCONN[1…
RDISPCONNMAX]
NUMACEINCON
RPEERNAME[1…RPEERCONNMAX]
SCANASSOCDSP
SCANCTRLLVL
SCANGRPDTL
SCANPNTDTL
STATSRESET
STRRESP
SUBSCPERIOD
TREND.NUMPARAMS

TIMEZONE

TNUMACEINCON

TNUMC3INCON

TNUMCPMINCON
TNUMSCFIMINCON
TNUMSCEINCON
TNUMLIOMINCON

TNUMACEOUTCON
TNUMC3OUTCON
TNUMCPMOUTCON
TNUMSCFIMOUTCON
TNUMSCEOUTCON
TNUMLIOMOUTCON
TNUMNTFRQUAVG
TNUMNTFRQUMAX
TINUMINMSGAVGPS
TINUMINMSGMAXPS
TINUMOUTMSGAVGPS
TINUMOUTMSGMAXPS
TRNUMINMSGAVGPS
TRNUMINMSGMAXPS
TRNUMOUTMSGAVGPS
TRNUMOUTMSGMAXPS
YEARFMT
WEEKDAYFMT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

250 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.2.3 CEEC300 Block

Description Provides control functionality for associated C300 block. This block's parameters characterize the
CEE within the C300 controller. In the future, multiple CEEs may be assigned to a single C300.
Execution periods for this block may be 50 mSec, 100 mSec, 200 mSec, 500 mSec, 1 sec, or 2 sec.
The execution cycle for CEEC300 block is 50ms.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Runs on the C300 hardware platform. In the future, CEE will run on other platforms as well.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the C300 as a whole.
Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer communications.
Supports peer-to-peer communications among CEEs assigned to controllers located in the same
management domain.
Supports configurable subscription rate and store response time for specific peer environment.
Sequential Control Module function blocks are supported.
With R410, C300-CEE supports native peer-to-peer communication with non-CEE controllers
such as Safety Manager and PMD points, and Experion Server points such as SCADA and TPS
points.The peer-to-peer communication between CEE and the Experion Server points are licensed
using "Experion Server Peer Responder" feature.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See above.

251
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMBLKTYPES

AUXDESC NUMCCLRQU
BASEPERIOD NUMCYCLE
BLCKCOMMENT1 NUMEXCRQUAVG
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMEXCRQUMAX
BLCKCOMMENT3 NUMEXCRSPAVG
BLCKCOMMENT4 NUMEXCRSPMAX
BLKTYPCOUNT NUMEXTBLKS
BLKTYPDESC NUMFREEBLKS
BLKTYPHELPTXT NUMFREEDESC
BLKTYPLIB NUMMBTCPXMITMSGAVG
BLKTYPSIZE NUMMBTCPXMITMSGMAX
CDISPAVGLPS NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEAVG
CDISPAVGLPSCONN NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEMAX
CDISPAVGPPS NUMMBTCPRCVMSGAVG
CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMMBTCPRCVMSGMAX
CDISPAVGSPSCONN NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEAVG
CDISPMAXLPS NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEMAX
CDISPMAXLPSCONN MBTCPINVALIDRCVMSGCOUNT
CDISPMAXPPS MBTCPFREEBUFCOUNT
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMNTFRQUAVG
CDISPMAXSPSCONN NUMNTFRQUMAX
CEECOMMAND NUMPARRSPAVG
CEESTATE NUMPARRSPMAX
CONTCUTOUT NUMPEERENV
CPEERAVGLPS NUMREGDESC
CPEERAVGLPSCONN NUMSIGS
CPEERAVGPPS NUMUSEDBLKS
CPEERAVGPPSCONN NUMUSEDDESC
CPEERAVGSPSCONN PEERENV
CPEERMAXLPS PEERGETAVG
CPEERMAXLPSCONN PEERSTRAVG
CPEERMAXPPS PEERSTRRESP
CPEERMAXPPSCONN PEERSUBSCPER
CPEERMAXSPSCONN PRIMARYSIG
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39] QUALSTATE
CPUCYCLEMAX RACYCIMRAVAIL
CRCYCLEOVRN RACYCIMRMAX
CREATEDBY RACYCIMRUSED
CTRLCONFIRM RACYCLGREQAVAIL
DATECREATED RACYCLGREQMAX
DESC RACYCLRQUSED

252 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

ENBMEMALMFL RACYCSMREQAVAIL
ESIG RACYCSMREQMAX
EXTGETRQUAVG RACYCSRQUSED
EXTGETRQUMAX RCYCIMRAVAIL
EXTSTRRQUAVG RCYCIMRMAX
EXTSTRRQUMAX RCYCIMRUSED
FRC RCYCLGREQAVAIL
FREEMEM RCYCLGREQMAX
FREEMEMINK RCYCLRQUSED
GROUP RCYCSMREQAVAIL
GROUP.NUMBER RCYCSMREQMAX
GROUP.NUMPARAMS RCYCSRQUSED
GROUP.PARAM RDEGRADALM
GROUP.POSITION RDISPAVGLPS
HIST RDISPAVGLPSCONN
HIST.EXTD RDISPAVGPPS
HIST.FAST RDISPAVGPPSCONN
HIST.GATEPARAM RDISPCONN
HIST.GATESTRING RDISPCONNMAX
HIST.GATEVALUE RDISPDEGIMRCONN
HIST.NUMPARAMS RDISPMAXLPS
HIST.PARAM RDISPMAXLPSCONN
HIST.STD RDISPMAXPPS
IACYCIMRAVAIL RDISPMAXPPSCONN
IACYCIMRMAX REASONSET
IACYCIMRUSED RPEERAVGLPS
IACYCIMRUSEDCONN RPEERAVGLPSCONN
IACYCLGREQAVAIL RPEERAVGPPS
IACYCLGREQMAX RPEERAVGPPSCONN
IACYCLGREQUSED RPEERCONN
IACYCLGREQUSEDCONN RPEERCONNMAX
IACYCSMREQAVAIL RPEERDEGIMRCONN
IACYCSMREQMAX RPEERMAXLPS
IACYCSMREQUSED RPEERMAXLPSCONN
IACYCSMREQUSEDCONN RPEERMAXPPS
ICYCIMRAVAIL RPEERMAXPPSCONN
ICYCIMRMAX RPEERNAME
ICYCIMRUSED RPEERSUBPER
ICYCIMRUSEDCONN RTOTACYCIMR
ICYCLGREQAVAIL RTOTACYCLGREQ
ICYCLGREQMAX RTOTACYCSMREQ
ICYCLGREQUSED RTOTCYCIMR

253
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

ICYCLGREQUSEDCONN RTOTCYCLGREQ
ICYCSMREQAVAIL RTOTCYCSMREQ
ICYCSMREQMAX SCANAREA
ICYCSMREQUSED SCANASSOCDSP
ICYCSMREQUSEDCONN SCANCTRLLVL
INALM SCANEUHI
IPEERAVGLPS SCANEULO
IPEERAVGPPS SCANGRPDTL
IPEERCONN SCANPNTDTL
IPEERCONNMAX SCRIPTOR
IPEERMAXLPS SECONDARYSIG
IPEERMAXPPS SECSIGSECLVL
IPEERNAME SIMCOMMAND
JOURNALONLY SIMSTATE
LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40] SCANAREA
MAXBLKTYPES SCANASSOCDSP
MAXFREEBLKSZ SCANCTRLLVL
MAXFREEINK SCANEUHI
MODIFIEDBY SCANEULO
NEXTPHASE SCANGRPDTL
NOTIFINHIBIT SCANPNTDTL
NTOTMEMDESC STATSRESET
NUMACCRQUAVG TASKSTACKHILM
NUMACCRQUMAX TASKSTACKSIZE
NUMASSIGNFBS TASKSTACKUSED
TNUMQCSINCON
TNUMQCSOUTCON
TNUMSCADAINCON
TNUMSMINCON
TREND.PARAM
TREND.POSITION
TOTALMEM
TOTALMEMINK
USEDMEM
USEDMEMINK
VERSION
VERSIONDATE
VERSIONNUM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

254 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.2.4 C300 - 20mS CEE

Attention
• A separate license is required to use the C300 - 20mS CEE controller. For details on the license, refer to Control
Hardware Planning Guide.
• C300 - 20mS CEE controller does not support native peer-to-peer communication with non-CEE controllers such
as Safety Manager and PMD points, and Experion Server points such as SCADA and TPS points.

Description Provides control functionality for associated C300 block. This block's parameters characterize the
CEE within the C300 - 20mS CEE controller.
The base execution period for C300 - 20mS CEE block is 20ms.
Control Module assigned to this block can be configured with the execution period of 20mSec, 40
mSec, 80 mSec, 200 mSec, 400 mSec or 800 mSec.
Function Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the CEE.
Processes the computation of statistical parameters and notification reporting.
Runs on the C300 hardware platform. In the future, CEE will run on other platforms as well.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the CEE rather than
the C300 as a whole.
Supports configurable subscription rate for peer-to-peer communications.
Supports peer-to-peer communications among CEEs assigned to controllers located in the same
management domain.
Supports configurable subscription rate and store response time for specific peer environment.
Supports Speed Protection Module (SPM) and Servo Valve Positioner Module (SVPM).
Inputs
Outputs

255
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMEXCRSPAVG

AUXDESC NUMEXCRSPMAX
BASEPERIOD NUMEXTBLKS
BLCKCOMMENT1 NUMFREEBLKS
BLCKCOMMENT2 NUMFREEDESC
BLCKCOMMENT3 NUMMBTCPXMITMSGAVG
BLCKCOMMENT4 NUMMBTCPXMITMSGMAX
BLKTYPCOUNT NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEAVG
BLKTYPDESC NUMMBTCPXMITBYTEMAX
BLKTYPHELPTXT NUMMBTCPRCVMSGAVG
BLKTYPLIB NUMMBTCPRCVMSGMAX
BLKTYPSIZE NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEAVG
CDISPAVGLPS NUMMBTCPRCVBYTEMAX
CDISPAVGLPSCONN MBTCPINVALIDRCVMSGCOUNT
CDISPAVGPPS MBTCPFREEBUFCOUNT
CDISPAVGPPSCONN NUMNTFRQUAVG
CDISPAVGSPSCONN NUMNTFRQUMAX
CDISPMAXLPS NUMPARRSPAVG
CDISPMAXLPSCONN NUMPARRSPMAX
CDISPMAXPPS NUMPEERENV
CDISPMAXPPSCONN NUMREGDESC
CDISPMAXSPSCONN NUMSIGS
CEECOMMAND NUMUSEDBLKS
CEESTATE NUMUSEDDESC
CONTCUTOUT PEERENV
CPEERAVGLPS PEERGETAVG
CPEERAVGLPSCONN PEERSTRAVG
CPEERAVGPPS PEERSTRRESP
CPEERAVGPPSCONN PEERSUBSCPER
CPEERAVGSPSCONN PRIMARYSIG
CPEERMAXLPS QUALSTATE
CPEERMAXLPSCONN RACYCIMRAVAIL
CPEERMAXPPS RACYCIMRMAX
CPEERMAXPPSCONN RACYCIMRUSED
CPEERMAXSPSCONN RACYCLGREQAVAIL
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39] RACYCLGREQMAX
CPUCYCLEMAX RACYCLRQUSED
CRCYCLEOVRN RACYCSMREQAVAIL
CREATEDBY RACYCSMREQMAX
CTRLCONFIRM RACYCSRQUSED
DATECREATED RCYCIMRAVAIL
DESC RCYCIMRMAX

256 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

ENBMEMALMFL RCYCIMRUSED
ESIG RCYCLGREQAVAIL
EXTGETRQUAVG RCYCLGREQMAX
EXTGETRQUMAX RCYCLRQUSED
EXTSTRRQUAVG RCYCSMREQAVAIL
EXTSTRRQUMAX RCYCSMREQMAX
FRC RCYCSRQUSED
FREEMEM RDEGRADALM
FREEMEMINK RDISPAVGLPS
GROUP RDISPAVGLPSCONN
GROUP.NUMBER RDISPAVGPPS
GROUP.NUMPARAMS RDISPAVGPPSCONN
GROUP.PARAM RDISPCONN
GROUP.POSITION RDISPCONNMAX
HIST RDISPDEGIMRCONN
HIST.EXTD RDISPMAXLPS
HIST.FAST RDISPMAXLPSCONN
HIST.GATEPARAM RDISPMAXPPS
HIST.GATESTRING RDISPMAXPPSCONN
HIST.GATEVALUE REASONSET
HIST.NUMPARAMS RPEERAVGLPS
HIST.PARAM RPEERAVGLPSCONN
HIST.STD RPEERAVGPPS
IACYCIMRAVAIL RPEERAVGPPSCONN
IACYCIMRMAX RPEERCONN
IACYCIMRUSED RPEERCONNMAX
IACYCIMRUSEDCONN RPEERDEGIMRCONN
IACYCLGREQAVAIL RPEERMAXLPS
IACYCLGREQMAX RPEERMAXLPSCONN
IACYCLGREQUSED RPEERMAXPPS
IACYCLGREQUSEDCONN RPEERMAXPPSCONN
IACYCSMREQAVAIL RPEERNAME
IACYCSMREQMAX RPEERSUBPER
IACYCSMREQUSED RTOTACYCIMR
IACYCSMREQUSEDCONN RTOTACYCLGREQ
ICYCIMRAVAIL RTOTACYCSMREQ
ICYCIMRMAX RTOTCYCIMR
ICYCIMRUSED RTOTCYCLGREQ
ICYCIMRUSEDCONN RTOTCYCSMREQ
ICYCLGREQAVAIL SCANAREA
ICYCLGREQMAX SCANASSOCDSP
ICYCLGREQUSED SCANCTRLLVL

257
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

ICYCLGREQUSEDCONN SCANEUHI
ICYCSMREQAVAIL SCANEULO
ICYCSMREQMAX SCANGRPDTL
ICYCSMREQUSED SCANPNTDTL
ICYCSMREQUSEDCONN SCRIPTOR
INALM SECONDARYSIG
IPEERAVGLPS SECSIGSECLVL
IPEERAVGPPS SIMCOMMAND
IPEERCONN SIMSTATE
IPEERCONNMAX SCANAREA
IPEERMAXLPS SCANASSOCDSP
IPEERMAXPPS SCANCTRLLVL
IPEERNAME SCANEUHI
JOURNALONLY SCANEULO
LSCYCLEOVRN[0…40] SCANGRPDTL
MAXBLKTYPES SCANPNTDTL
MAXFREEBLKSZ STATSRESET
MAXFREEINK TASKSTACKHILM
MODIFIEDBY TASKSTACKSIZE
NEXTPHASE TASKSTACKUSED
NOTIFINHIBIT TREND.PARAM
NTOTMEMDESC TREND.POSITION
NUMACCRQUAVG TOTALMEM
NUMACCRQUMAX TOTALMEMINK
NUMASSIGNFBS USEDMEM
NUMBLKTYPES USEDMEMINK
NUMCCLRQU VERSION
NUMCYCLE VERSIONDATE
NUMEXCRQUAVG VERSIONNUM
NUMEXCRQUMAX
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.2.5 CEEACE Block

Refer to the Application Control Environment (ACE) User’s Guide for more information about this block.

258 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.3 Input/Output Link Interface Module Block

Related topics
“IOLIM block” on page 259

4.3.1 IOLIM block

Description Identifies the primary and secondary I/O Link Interface Modules (IOLIM) and associated I/O
Link that serve as the communication bridge between the control system and the Process Manager
(PM) Input/Output Processors (IOPs).
Function Supports C200 Controller Redundant Chassis Pair hardware configurations.
Supports both the publish/subscribe and the client/server communication methods to access
process data and maintenance information from the IOP devices
Publishes parameters describing the status and configuration of the IOPs.
Reports run-time diagnostics and statistical information for the IOLIMs.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the entire PM I/O.
Secondary waits to take control if the “Primary” fails.
Inputs Communications bridge between Integrated Control Processor (ICP)/ControlNet and I/O Link
Outputs See above.
Parameters BUFXMAX[0..5] NVSUSED
BUFXTOTAL[0..5] PEERRATEAVG
BUFXUSED[0..5] PEERRATEMAX
COMPNVSCMD PURGEDBCMD
CPUFREEAVG RDNCAPABILITY
CPUFREEMIN RDNCHASSISID
CURTIME RDNCMPT
DISPRATEAVG RDNDELAYAVG
DISPRATEMAX RDNDELAYMAX
DRIVERNAME RDNLOS
ENCMDS RDNSYNCSTATE
IOLIMSTATE RDNXFERAVG
MAXIMR RDNXFERMAX
MODISREDUN SCANASSOCDSP
NAME SCANCTRLLVL
NETWORKTYPE SCANGRPDTL
NOTRATEAVG SCANPNTDTL
NOTRATEMAX SHUTDOWNCMD
NUMCCLRQU SLOTNUMBER
NUMCPMINCON STATRESET
NUMCPMOUTCON ULCNBMAC
NUMIMR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

259
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.4 Input/Output Link Block

Related topics
“IOLINK block” on page 260
“IOLINK Block (C300 Controller)” on page 262
“IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE)” on page 265

4.4.1 IOLINK block

Description Provides interface functionality for associated I/O Link Interface Module (IOLIM) block.
Function Provides supervisory scanning, diagnostic, and performance throughput information for
monitoring I/O Link network status.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

260 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACTPRIM[1..40] PHYSIOPSTS1

CFIFORATEA PHYSMODTYPE1
CFIFORATEM PRICHNERRA
COMMAND PRICHNERRB
CRCYCLEOVRN[0..40] PRICHNSILA
DBVALID PRICHNSILB
DESC PRICOMMERR
DUPIOLADDR PRIIFCARD
FMWREV[1..8] PRIIFCHNERRA
HDWREV[1..8] PRIIFCHNERRB
IOLCHNFAILA PRIIFCHNSILA
IOLCHNFAILB PRIIFCHNSILB
IOLCHNSTSA PRIIFCOMMERR
IOLCHNSTSB PRIIFFILE
IOLDAUGHSF PRIIFRCVCHN
IOLFREE PRIIFSTS
IOLMAXERR PRIRCVCHN
IOMCMD[1..40] SCANASSOCDSP
IOMSTS[1..40] SCANCTRLLVL
IOMTYPE[1..40] SCANGRPDTL
IOPORCUR[1..40] SCANPNTDTL
IOPORPREV[1..40] SCANRATE [1…40]
IOSSTALLTIME SECCHNERRA
IOSTKNDROP SECCHNERRB
LASTIOLCMD SECCOMMERR
LINKNUM SECIFCHNERRA
LSCYCLEOVRN[0..40] SECIFCHNERRB
NAME SECIFCHNSILA
NOTACTSUPV SECIFCHNSILB
NUMCACHE[1..40] SECIFCOMMERR
OVERRUNSCUR SECIFRCVCHN
OVERRUNSPREV SECRCVCHN
PARTMISMATCH STATE
PARTNOTVIS STATRESET
PDFIFORATEA SYNCHSTS
PDFIFORATEM TOTCHNERRA
PERSWAPENB TOTCHNERRB
PERSWAPTHRES TOTCHNSILA
PHYCHNERRA1 TOTCHNSILB
PHYCHNERRB1 WITHBIAS[1..40]
PHYCHNSILA1 WITHBIASENM[1..40]
PHYCHNSILB1 WRFIFORATEA

261
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

PHYLHFSTA WRFIFORATEM
PHYRCVCHN1
PHYSDSA1
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.4.2 IOLINK Block (C300 Controller)

Description Provides interface functionality for associated I/O Link Interface.

Function Provides supervisory scanning, diagnostic, and performance throughput information for
monitoring I/O Link network status.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

262 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACTPRIM PHYCHNSILB1

AUXDESC PHYCOMMERR1
AVGWRTIME PHYRCVCHN1
BLCKCOMMENT1 PHYSDSA1
BLCKCOMMENT2 PHYSIOPSTS1
BLCKCOMMENT3 PHYSMODTYPE1
BLCKCOMMENT4 PRIBLOCKNAME
CFIFORATEA PRICHNERRA
CFIFORATEM PRICHNERRB
COMMAND PRICHNSILA
CREATEDBY PRICHNSILB
CTRLCONFIRM PRICOMMERR
DATECREATED PRIIFCARD
DBVALID PRIIFCHNERRA
DESC PRIIFCHNERRB
DUPIOLADDR PRIIFCHNSILA
ESIG PRIIFCHNSILB
FMWREV1 PRIIFCOMMERR
FREESMSOVRRUN PRIIFFILE
GROUP PRIIFRCVCHN
GROUP.NUMBER PRIIFSTS
GROUP.NUMPARAMS PRIMARYSIG
GROUP.PARAM PRIRCVCHN
GROUP.POSITION QUALSTATE
HDWREV1 REASONSET
HIPRIRATE SCANAREA
HIST SCANASSOCDSP
HIST.EXTD SCANCTRLLVL
HIST.FAST SCANEUHI
HIST.GATEPARAM SCANEULO
HIST.GATESTRING SCANGRPDTL
HIST.GATEVALUE SCANPNTDTL
HIST.NUMPARAMS SCANRATE
HIST.PARAM SCRIPTOR
HIST.STD SECBLOCKNAME
IOLCHNFAILA SECCHNERRA
IOLCHNFAILB SECCHNERRB
IOLCHNHISTA SECCHNSILA
IOLCHNHISTB SECCHNSILB
IOLCHNSTSA SECCOMMERR
IOLCHNSTSB SECIFCHNERRA
IOLDAUGHSF SECIFCHNERRB

263
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

IOLFREE SECIFCHNSILA
IOLMAXERR SECIFCHNSILB
IOLOVRRUN SECIFCOMMERR
IOLSOFTFAIL SECIFRCVCHN
IOMCOMMAND SECONDARYSIG
IOMSTS SECRCVCHN
IOMTYPE SECSIGSECLVL
IOPBLOCKNAME STATE
IOPORCUR STATRESET
IOPORPREV STTEXT
IOSSTALLTIME STTEXTA
IOSTKNDROP STTEXTB
LASTIOLCMD SUPVFIFORATEA
LINKNUM SUPVFIFORATEM
LOPRIRATE SWTCHACT
MAXNUMPRIIOP SYNCHSTS
MEDPRIRATE TOTCHNERRA
MODIFIEDBY TOTCHNERRB
MONREADPARAM TOTCHNSILA
MONSTATES TOTCHNSILB
NOTACTSUPV TREEBITMAP
NUMCACHE TREND
NUMPRIIOP TREND.NUMBER
NUMSIGS TREND.NUMPARAMS
OVERRUNSCUR TREND.PARAM
OVERRUNSPREV TREND.POSITION
OVRRUNCURHR VERSION
OVRRUNPREVHR VERSIONDATE
OVRSIGNA VERSIONNUM
PARTMISMATCH WITHBIAS
PARTNOTVIS WITHBIASENM
PDFIFORATEA WRFIFORATEA
PDFIFORATEM WRFIFORATEM
PERSWAPENB
PERSWAPTHRES
PHYCHNERRA1
PHYCHNERRB1
PHYCHNSILA1
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

264 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.4.3 IOLINK Block (C300 - 20mS CEE)

Description Provides interface functionality for associated I/O Link Interface.

Function Provides supervisory scanning, diagnostic, and performance throughput information for
monitoring I/O Link network status.
Reports a “Pre-Fetch Overrun” diagnostic alarm if rate of increase of pre-fetch overruns exceeds 1
in 200 seconds. This indicates that the end-to-end response time is larger than expected. Once this
alarm is reported, it will RTN after a period of 200 seconds provided no new overrun occurs
during this interval.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

265
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACTPRIM PFOVERRUNSCUR

AUXDESC PFOVERRUNSPREV
AVGWRTIME PHYCHNSILB1
BASEPERIOD PHYCOMMERR1
BLCKCOMMENT1 PHYRCVCHN1
BLCKCOMMENT2 PHYSDSA1
BLCKCOMMENT3 PHYSIOPSTS1
BLCKCOMMENT4 PHYSMODTYPE1
CFIFORATEA PRIBLOCKNAME
CFIFORATEM PRICHNERRA
COMMAND PRICHNERRB
CREATEDBY PRICHNSILA
CTRLCONFIRM PRICHNSILB
DATECREATED PRICOMMERR
DBVALID PRIIFCARD
DESC PRIIFCHNERRA
DUPIOLADDR PRIIFCHNERRB
ESIG PRIIFCHNSILA
FMWREV1 PRIIFCHNSILB
FREESMSOVRRUN PRIIFCOMMERR
GROUP PRIIFFILE
GROUP.NUMBER PRIIFRCVCHN
GROUP.NUMPARAMS PRIIFSTS
GROUP.PARAM PRIMARYSIG
GROUP.POSITION PRIRCVCHN
HDWREV1 QUALSTATE
HIPRIRATE REASONSET
HIST SCANAREA
HIST.EXTD SCANASSOCDSP
HIST.FAST SCANCTRLLVL
HIST.GATEPARAM SCANEUHI
HIST.GATESTRING SCANEULO
HIST.GATEVALUE SCANGRPDTL
HIST.NUMPARAMS SCANPNTDTL
HIST.PARAM SCANRATE
HIST.STD SCRIPTOR
IOLCHNFAILA SECBLOCKNAME
IOLCHNFAILB SECCHNERRA
IOLCHNHISTA SECCHNERRB
IOLCHNHISTB SECCHNSILA
IOLCHNSTSA SECCHNSILB
IOLCHNSTSB SECCOMMERR

266 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

IOLDAUGHSF SECIFCHNERRA
IOLFREE SECIFCHNERRB
IOLINKTYPE SECIFCHNSILA
IOLMAXERR SECIFCHNSILB
IOLOVRRUN SECIFCOMMERR
IOLSOFTFAIL SECIFRCVCHN
IOMCOMMAND SECONDARYSIG
IOMSTS SECRCVCHN
IOMTYPE SECSIGSECLVL
IOPBLOCKNAME STATE
IOPORCUR STATRESET
IOPORPREV STTEXT
IOSSTALLTIME STTEXTA
IOSTKNDROP STTEXTB
LASTIOLCMD SUPVFIFORATEA
LINKNUM SUPVFIFORATEM
LOPRIRATE SWTCHACT
MAXNUMPRIIOP SYNCHSTS
MEDPRIRATE TOTCHNERRA
MODIFIEDBY TOTCHNERRB
MONREADPARAM TOTCHNSILA
MONSTATES TOTCHNSILB
NOTACTSUPV TREEBITMAP
NUMCACHE TREND
NUMPRIIOP TREND.NUMBER
NUMSIGS TREND.NUMPARAMS
OVERRUNSCUR TREND.PARAM
OVERRUNSPREV TREND.POSITION
OVRRUNCURHR VERSION
OVRRUNPREVHR VERSIONDATE
OVRSIGNA VERSIONNUM
PARTMISMATCH WITHBIAS
PARTNOTVIS WITHBIASENM
PDFIFORATEA WRFIFORATEA
PDFIFORATEM WRFIFORATEM
PERSWAPENB
PERSWAPTHRES
PHYCHNERRA1
PHYCHNERRB1
PHYCHNSILA1
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

267
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.5 OLE for Process Control Server Block

Related topics
“OPC block” on page 268

4.5.1 OPC block

Description Provides the representation of an OPC server to the control system. It does not have an associated
Control Execution Environment block or any blocks assigned to it.
Function Serves as an independent block to provide a communications path to an OPC server.
Does not have a corresponding run-time object in the system and no run-time status is obtained
directly from the OPC server.
Inputs OPC compatible data exchange
Outputs See above.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 HOSTNAMEPRI
BLCKCOMMENT2 NAME
BLCKCOMMENT3 PROGID[0..40]
BLCKCOMMENT4 SCANASSOCDSP
DESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXTREF SCANGRPDTL
EXTREFSTRUCT SCANPNTDTL
GROUP.NUMPARAMS TREND.NUMPARAMS
HIST.NUMPARAMS
HOSTIPPRI
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

268 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.6 Inter Cluster Gateway Block

Related topics
“Inter Cluster Gateway (ICG) Block” on page 269

4.6.1 Inter Cluster Gateway (ICG) Block

Description Provides a path for the transfer of data between ACE nodes in two separate Experion clusters.
Function This block acts as the means of communicating between Experion clusters. It makes CDA data
from one Experion cluster available to the other Experion cluster. It can act as the client to the
corresponding block in the other Experion cluster.
Inputs Regulatory control data from OPC Gateways or Inter Cluster Gateways residing in ACE nodes in
another Experion cluster
Outputs Set point data pushed to regulatory control points resident in its Experion cluster

269
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE GWPID

BLCKCOMMENT1 GWSTATSRESET
BLCKCOMMENT2 GWUTCCONVERT
BLCKCOMMENT3 HIST.NUMPARAMS
BLCKCOMMENT4 HOSTIPPRI
CDISPAVGPPS HOSTNAMEPRI
CDISPAVGPPSCONN IMAGEVER
CDISPAVGSPSCONN INALM
CDISPMAXPPS IPEERCONNERRCODE
CDISPMAXPPSCONN IPEERCONNERRINFO
CDISPMAXSPSCONN IPEERCONNSTS
CPEERAVGPPS IPEERNAME
CPEERAVGPPSCONN IPEERPATH
CPEERAVGSPSCONN JOURNALONLY
CPEERMAXPPS MODIFIEDBY
CPEERMAXPPSCONN NAME
CPEERMAXSPSCONN NUMACCRQUAVG
CREATEDBY NUMACEINCON
CTRLCONFIRM NUMACTIVEPOINTS
DATECREATED NUMCLIENTCONN
DESC NUMCPMINCON
EEGSTATE NUMFAILEDGETITEM
GWCOMMAND NUMFIMINCON
GWHCIFLAG NUMIOLMINCON
GWHOSTIPPRI NUMNTFRQUAVG
GWHOSTNAMEPRI NUMPARRSPAVG
GWOPCCONNSTATUS NUMPARRSPMAX
GWOPCCONNSTR NUMPOINTSREADS
GWOPCDCPS NUMPOINTSWRITES
GWOPCGETERR NUMSCEINCON
GWOPCGSTATE NUMSIGS
GWOPCPARAMCNT NUMSIOLMINCN
GWOPCPMONERR PRIMARYSIG
GWOPCPMONNAME RDISPDEGIMRCONN
GWOPCPMONQUAL REASONSET
GWOPCPMONSTR RPEERNAME
GWOPCSRVSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
GWOPCSTOREERR SECONDARYSIG
GWOPCSTOREPS SECSIGSECLVL
GWOPCVERSION TOTALNUMGETITEM
TOTALNUMPOINTSREADS
TREND.NUMPARAMS

270 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

VERSIONDATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

271
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.7 Redundancy Module Block

Related topics
“RM block” on page 272

4.7.1 RM block

Description Identifies the Primary and Secondary Redundancy Modules connected by a dedicated redundancy
cable in a Redundant Chassis Pair (RCP). It associates the Primary RM with its “partner”
Secondary RM block.
This block always runs at an execution period of 2 seconds. It is redundancy compliant.
Function Provides parameters describing the status and configuration of the RM.
Handles notification reporting.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the RM as a whole.
Inputs Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Redundancy communications through the redundancy cable.
Outputs See above.

272 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MULREDUNSTAT

AREVISION NETWORKTYPE
AUTOSYNCCMD NUMSLOTS
AUTOSYNCOPT PREVISION
AUTOSYNCSTAT PRODCODE
AVERSION PRODTYPE
BECMPRICMD PRODTYPEA
BREVISION PROGCMD
BVERSION PROGCMDRECOG
CHANINUSE[0..31] QUALPROGA
CJDISABLE READINESS
CLKADJUST READINESSA
CLKTIME RECOVMSGIDX
CLKZONE REDUNSTATE
CONFIGURED REDUNSTATEA
DISPPOS REFRESHMS
DISQSECCMD SCANASSOCDSP
DRIVERNAME SCANCTRLLVL
ENTERSBYCMD SCANEUHI
ERRFL SCANEULO
ERRORCODE SCANGRPDTL
ERRORMSGIDX SCANPNTDTL
EUDESC SECMODNAME
GENSTATE SECNAMESTRING
GENSTATEA SECTMPNAME
HIALM SERIALNUM
INTISWCMD SLOTNUMBER
IPADDRESS STDTIME
KEYWORD SWAPCTRLCMD
LASTSYNCABRT SWAPPOSCMD
LASTSYNCARES SWAPSBYCMD
MAJRECFAULT SYNCSECCMD
MAJURECFAULT ULCNBMAC
MINRECFAULT VENDORID
MINURECFAULT WCTCLKTIME
MODCOMPATA
MODTYPEA
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

273
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.8 Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge Module Block

Related topics
“FTEB block” on page 274

4.8.1 FTEB block

Description Provides representation of the Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) Bridge module to support
supervisory level communications over Honeywell's Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) network.
Function Provides parameters describing the status and configuration of the FTE Bridge module.
Serves as a faceplate for any parameters whose scope corresponds to that of the Fault Tolerant
Ethernet Bridge module as a whole.
Supports non-redundant and redundant C200 Controller and Fieldbus Interface Module chassis
configurations.
Supports direct communication between Series A chassis I/O and C300
Supports C300 communication with ControlNet devices when mounted in a Series A chassis
having a CNI
Secondary waits to take control if the “Primary” fails.
The device index of the Secondary FTE Bridge equals the address of the Primary FTE Bridge plus
one.
Inputs TCP/IP communications and Integrated Control Protocol (ICP) communications
Outputs See Above

274 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADIPCSUM MAXFTENODES

BADUDPCSUM MAXNODEID
BLCKCOMMENT1 MODIFIEDBY
BLCKCOMMENT2 MODISREDUN
BLCKCOMMENT3 NAME
BLCKCOMMENT4 NONFTEMARTADDRCOUNT
CONNCLOSEFAIL NONFTEMARTAVGDEPTH
CONNERR NONFTEMARTCOLLCOUNT
CONNOPENFAIL NONFTEMARTMAXDEPTH
CONNOPENREJECT NUMFTENODES
CONNSENDERR NUMIOM
CONSTAT NUMSIGS
CPUFREEAVG ORIAPPCONNID[1..48]
CPUFREEMIN ORICONNSTATE[1..48]
CREATEDBY ORIPATH[1..48]
CTRLCONFIRM ORITCLASS[1..48]
DATECREATED ORMUXED[1..48]
DESC PRIMARYSIG
DEVICEIDX RDNCHASSISID
FTEBBLOCK RDNCMPT
FTEMARTADDRCOUNT RDNLOS
FTEMARTAVGDEPTH RDNSYNCSTATE
FTEMARTCOLLCOUNT REASONSET
FTEMARTMAXDEPTH RECVCLOSEREQ
GROUP.NUMPARAMS RECVCLOSERSP
HIST.NUMPARAMS RECVNAKS
ICMPINDESTUNREACHS RECVOPENREQ
ICMPINECHOREPS RECVOPENRSP
ICMPINECHOS SCANASSOCDSP
ICMPINERRORS SCANCTRLLVL
ICMPINMSGS SCANGRPDTL
ICMPOUTDESTUNREACHS SCANPNTDTL
ICMPOUTECHOREPS SECNAMESTRG
ICMPOUTECHOS SECONDARYSIG
ICMPOUTERRORS SECSIGSECLVL
ICMPOUTMSGS SENDCLOSEREQ
ICPSTATRESET SENDCLOSERESP
IMAGEVER SENDOPENREQ
INTERLANFAILED SENDOPENRSP
IOMASAPH SLOTNUMBER
IOMGRCLI STATRESET
IOMNAME TCPACTIVEOPENS

275
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

IPADDRESS TCPATTEMPTFAILS
IPFRAGCREATES TCPCONNTABLE
IPFRAGFAILS TCPCURRESTAB
IPFRAGOKS TCPESTABRESETS
IPINADDRERRORS TCPINERRS
IPINDELIVERS TCPINSEGS
IPINDISCARDS TCPOUTRESETS
IPINHDRERRORS TCPOUTSEGS
IPINRECEIVES TCPPASSIVEOPENS
IPINUNKNOWNPORTS TCPRETRANSSEGS
IPOUTDISCARDS TGTAPPCONNID[1..24
IPOUTNOROUTES TGTCONNSTATE[1..24
IPOUTREQUESTS TGTTCLASS[1..24]
IPREASSEMFAILS TREND.NUMPARAMS
IPREASSEMOKS UDPINDGRAMS
IPREASSEMREQS UDPINERRORS
IPROUTINGDISCARDS UDPLISTENERS
LANAFAILED UDPNOPORTS
LANARXRATE UDPOUTGRAMS
LANARXRATEMAX UNCONNSENDERR
LANATXRATE VERSIONDATE
LANATXRATEMAX XOVERFAILED
LANBFAILED
LANBRXRATE
LANBRXRATEMAX
LANBTXRATE
LANBTXRATEMAX
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

276 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.9 Input Type I/O Module Blocks

Attention
Model numbers beginning with the prefix “TK” are for a coated version of the I/O module.

Related topics
“TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Input)” on page 277
“TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 (6 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Isolated - Analog Input)” on page 277
“TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 (16 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Input)” on page 278
“TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 (16 Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Input)” on page 279
“TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated - Digital Input)” on page 280
“TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated - Digital Input)” on page 281
“TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 (16 Channel - 120Vac Isolated - Digital Input)” on page 282
“TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 (16 Channel - 220Vac Isolated - Digital Input)” on page 283
“TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 (8 Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic Input)” on page 284
“TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Diagnostic Input)” on page 285
“TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input)” on page 286
“TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input)” on page 287
“TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 (6 Channel - RTD Input)” on page 288

4.9.1 TC-HAI081/TK-HAI081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters BADCAL[0..numChans-1] HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1]
CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] INPUTRANGE[0..numChans-1]
COMMFAULT IOMLOCATION
COMMTHRESHOLD LOWENG[0..numChans-1]
DIGFILTER[0..numChans-1] LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1]NOTCHFILTE
R[0..numChans-1]
HANDLETIMEOUT
PV[0..numChans-1]
HART[0..numChans-1]
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.2 TC-IAH061/TK-IAH061 (6 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Isolated - Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.

277
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE MINORREV
ASACONNSTS NOTCHFILTER[0..numChans-1]
ASAERRCODE NUMCHANS
ASAERRINFO NUMCONN
BADCAL[0..numChans-1] NUMDISCONN
CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER OHMOFFSET[0..numChans-1]
CEESTATE ORDERINCEE
CHANTEXT ORDERINCM
CJDISABLE OVERRANGE[0..numChans-1]
CJOFFSET PERIOD
CJOFFSET[0..numChans-1] PHASE
DESC PRODTYPE
DIGFILTER[0..numChans-1] PVRAW[0..numChans-1]
DLCNBSLOT RTPPRESENT
ESTWEIGHT SAMPLERATE
EUDESC SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
HIALM SCANEUHI
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SCANEULO
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] SCANGRPDTL
IFTRANS SCANPNTDTL
INALM SENSORTYPE[0..numChans-1]
INPUTRANGE[0..numChans-1] SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
IOMSLOT TEMPMODE
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UNDERRANGE[0..numChans-1]
LOWENG[0..numChans-1] UPDATOPT
LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] VENDOR
MAJORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.3 TC-IAH161/TK-IAH161 (16 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.

278 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCONN
ASACONNSTS NUMDISCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMSHUTDOWN
ASAERRINFO ORDERINCEE
CATNUMBER ORDERINCM
CEESTATE PERIOD
CHANTEXT PHASE
DESC PRODTYPE
DLCNBSLOT SCANASSOCDSP
ESTWEIGHT SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC SCANEUHI
EXECSTATE SCANEULO
HIALM SCANGRPDTL
INALM SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT ULCNBMAC
IOMTYPE UPDATOPT
KEYWORD VENDOR
MAJORREV
MINORREV
NUMCHANS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.4 TC-IDA161/TK-IDA161 (16 Channel - 120Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

279
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV

ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
ASAERRINFO NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER NUMCONN
CEESTATE NUMDISCONN
CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN
COS[0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ELOF[0..numChans-1] PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FILTEROFF[0..numChans / 8] SCANEULO
FILTERON[0..numChans / 8] SCANGRPDTL
HIALM SCANPNTDTL
HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
INALM UPDATOPT
IOMSLOT VENDOR
IOMTYPE WIREOFF[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.5 TC-IDD321/TK-IDD321 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated - Digital Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 32 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value.)
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

280 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV

ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
ASAERRINFO NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER NUMCONN
CEESTATE NUMDISCONN
CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN
COS[0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ELOF[0..numChans-1] PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FILTEROFF[0..numChans / 8] SCANEULO
FILTERON[0..numChans / 8] SCANGRPDTL
HIALM SCANPNTDTL
HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
INALM UPDATOPT
IOMSLOT VENDOR
IOMTYPE WIREOFF[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.6 TC-IDJ161/TK-IDJ161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated - Digital Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value.)
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

281
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV

ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
ASAERRINFO NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER NUMCONN
CEESTATE NUMDISCONN
CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN
COS[0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ELOF[0..numChans-1] PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FILTEROFF[0..numChans / 8] SCANEULO
FILTERON[0..numChans / 8] SCANGRPDTL
HIALM SCANPNTDTL
HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
INALM UPDATOPT
IOMSLOT VENDOR
IOMTYPE WIREOFF[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.7 TC-IDK161/TK-IDK161 (16 Channel - 120Vac Isolated - Digital Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

282 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV

ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
ASAERRINFO NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER NUMCONN
CEESTATE NUMDISCONN
CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN
COS[0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ELOF[0..numChans-1] PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FILTEROFF[0..numChans / 8] SCANEULO
FILTERON[0..numChans / 8] SCANGRPDTL
HIALM SCANPNTDTL
HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
INALM UPDATOPT
IOMSLOT VENDOR
IOMTYPE WIREOFF[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.8 TC-IDW161/TK-IDW161 (16 Channel - 220Vac Isolated - Digital Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

283
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV

ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
ASAERRINFO NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER NUMCONN
CEESTATE NUMDISCONN
CHANTEXT NUMSHUTDOWN
COS[0..numChans-1] ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ELOF[0..numChans-1] PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EWIREOFF[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
FILTERHDR[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FILTEROFF[0..numChans / 8] SCANEULO
FILTERON[0..numChans / 8] SCANGRPDTL
HIALM SCANPNTDTL
HWFAULT[0..numChans-1] ULCNBMAC
INALM UPDATOPT
IOMSLOT VENDOR
IOMTYPE WIREOFF[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.9 TC-IDX081/TK-IDX081 (8 Channel - 120Vac Diagnostic Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Supports the following diagnostics, which are user configurable for each channel:
• Open Wire Detection: Senses when current input for a given channel falls below a certain
value. When an input uses dry contacts, you must include a bleed resistor in the input. You
may not need a bleed resistor for solid state contacts.
• Loss of Field Power: Senses when field power of a group of channels is lost.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

284 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS

ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR;
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter
Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.10 TC-IDX161/TK-IDX161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Diagnostic Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Supports the following diagnostic, which is user configurable for each channel:
• Open Wire Detection: Senses when current input for a given channel falls below a certain
value. When an input uses dry contacts, you must include a bleed resistor in the input. You
may not need a bleed resistor for solid state contacts.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

285
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS

ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.11 TC-IXL061/TK-IXL061 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

286 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS

ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.12 TC-IXL062/TK-IXL062 (6 Channel - Thermocouple Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC. This module is a
replacement for the previous TC-IXL061 module.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

287
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NOTCHFILTER

ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE NUMCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMDISCONN
CALBIAS NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANNUM PERIOD
CHANTEXT PHASE
CHANTYPE PRODTYPE
DESC PUBRATE
DIGFILTER SAMPLERATE
DLCNBSLOT SCANASSOCDSP
ESTWEIGHT SCANCTRLLVL
EUDESC SCANEUHI
EXECSTATE SCANEULO
HIALM SCANGRPDTL
INALM SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT SENSORTYPE
IOMTYPE SIPTYPE
INPUTRANGE TEMPMODE
KEYWORD ULCNBMAC
MAJORREV UPDATOPT
MINORREV VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.9.13 TC-IXR061/TK-IXR061 (6 Channel - RTD Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

288 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS

ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

289
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.10 Output Type I/O Module Blocks

Attention
Model numbers beginning with the prefix“TK” are for a coated version of the I/O module.

Related topics
“TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Output)” on page 290
“TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA - Analog Output)” on page 291
“TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 (6 Channel - 10V - Analog Output)” on page 291
“TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 (8 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Output)” on page 292
“TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 (16 Channel - 120/220Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Output)” on page 293
“TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated Digital Output)” on page 294
“TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated Digital Output)” on page 295
“TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 (16 Channel - 120/220Vac Isolated - Digital Output)” on page 296
“TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 (8 Channel - 120Vac- Diagnostic Output)” on page 297
“TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc- Diagnostic Output)” on page 298
“TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Relay Output)” on
page 299
“TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 (16 Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Contact Output)” on page 300

4.10.1 TC-HAO081/TK-HAO081 (8 channel HART - 10V / 4 to 20mA - Analog Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters BADCAL[0..numChans-1] LOWENG[0..numChans-1]
CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1]
COMMFAULT OP[0..numChans-1]
COMMTHRESHOLD PV[0..numChans-1]
FAULTVALUE[0..numChans-1] SHEDMODE[0..numChans-1]
HART[0..numChans-1] SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SLOT0[0..numChans-1]
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] SLOT1[0..numChans-1]
IDLEMODE[0..numChans-1] SLOT2[0..numChans-1]
IOMLOCATION SLOT3[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

290 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.10.2 TC-OAH061/TK-OAH061 (6 Channel - 4 to 20mA - Analog Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV
ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NUMCHANS
ASAERRINFO NUMCONN
BADCAL[0..numChans-1] NUMDISCONN
CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER OPFINAL[0..numChans-1]
CEESTATE ORDERINCEE
CHANTEXT ORDERINCM
DESC PERIOD
DLCNBSLOT PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC SAMPLERATE
EXECSTATE SCANASSOCDSP
FAULTVALUE[0..numChans-1] SCANCTRLLVL
HIALM SCANEUHI
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SCANEULO
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] SCANGRPDTL
INALM SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
LOWENG[0..numChans-1] VENDOR
LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.3 TC-OAV061/TK-OAV061 (6 Channel - 10V - Analog Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.

291
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 6 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1]
ASACONNSTS MAJORREV
ASAERRCODE MINORREV
ASAERRINFO NUMCHANS
BADCAL[0..numChans-1] NUMCONN
CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMDISCONN
CATNUMBER NUMSHUTDOWN
CEESTATE OPFINAL[0..numChans-1]
CHANTEXT ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ESTWEIGHT PHASE
EUDESC PRODTYPE
EXECSTATE SAMPLERATE
FAULTVALUE[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
HIALM SCANCTRLLVL
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD ULCNBMAC
LOWENG[0..numChans-1] UPDATOPT
VENDOR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.4 TC-OAV081/TK-OAV081 (8 Channel - 10V / 4 to 20mA Non-Isolated - Analog Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

292 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE MAJORREV

ASACONNSTS MINORREV
ASAERRCODE NUMCHANS
ASAERRINFO NUMCONN
BADCAL[0..numChans-1] NUMDISCONN
CALBIAS[0..numChans-1] NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER OPFINAL[0..numChans-1]
CEESTATE ORDERINCEE
CHANTEXT ORDERINCM
DESC PERIOD
DLCNBSLOT PHASE
ESTWEIGHT PRODTYPE
EUDESC SAMPLERATE
EXECSTATE SCANASSOCDSP
FAULTVALUE[0..numChans-1] SCANCTRLLVL
HIALM SCANEUHI
HIGHENG[0..numChans-1] SCANEULO
HIGHSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] SCANGRPDTL
INALM SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT SIPTYPE[0..numChans-1]
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
LOWENG[0..numChans-1] VENDOR
LOWSIGNAL[0..numChans-1] WIREOFF[0..7]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.5 TC-ODA161/TK-ODA161 (16 Channel - 120/220Vac Non-Isolated - Digital Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

293
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NOLOAD[0..numChans-1]

ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE NUMCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMDISCONN
CATNUMBER NUMSHUTDOWN
CEESTATE ORDERINCEE
CHANTEXT ORDERINCM
DESC PERIOD
DLCNBSLOT PHASE
ENOLOAD[0..numChans-1] PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT PVSTS
ETRANS PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EUDESC PWMPERIOD[0..numChans-1]
EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
EXECSTATE SCANASSOCDSP
EZCROSS[0..numChans-1] SCANCTRLLVL
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE SHORT[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD ULCNBMAC
MAJORREV UPDATOPT
MINORREV VENDOR
NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1] VERIFYLOST[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.6 TC-ODD321/TK-ODD321 (32 Channel - 24Vdc Non-Isolated Digital Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 32 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is “triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

294 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS

ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ENOLOAD[0..numChans-1] PVSTS
ESTWEIGHT PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
ETRANS PWMPERIOD[0..numChans-1]
EUDESC SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
EZCROSS[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] SCANEULO
HIALM SCANGRPDTL
INALM SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT SHORT[0..numChans-1]
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV VERIFYLOST[0..numChans-1]
NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
NOLOAD[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.7 TC-ODJ161/TK-ODJ161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc Isolated Digital Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

295
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS

ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ENOLOAD[0..numChans-1] PVSTS
ESTWEIGHT PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
ETRANS PWMPERIOD[0..numChans-1]
EUDESC SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] SCANASSOCDSP
EXECSTATE SCANCTRLLVL
EZCROSS[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] SCANEULO
HIALM SCANGRPDTL
INALM SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT SHORT[0..numChans-1]
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV VERIFYLOST[0..numChans-1]
NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1]
NOLOAD[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.8 TC-ODK161/TK-ODK161 (16 Channel - 120/220Vac Isolated - Digital Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

296 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NOLOAD[0..numChans-1]

ASACONNSTS NUMCHANS
ASAERRCODE NUMCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMDISCONN
CATNUMBER NUMSHUTDOWN
CEESTATE ORDERINCEE
CHANTEXT ORDERINCM
DESC PERIOD
DLCNBSLOT PHASE
ENOLOAD[0..numChans-1] PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT PVSTS
ETRANS PVVAL[0..numChans-1]
EUDESC PWMPERIOD[0..numChans-1]
EVERIFY[0..numChans-1] SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
EXECSTATE SCANASSOCDSP
EZCROSS[0..numChans-1] SCANCTRLLVL
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE SHORT[0..numChans-1]
KEYWORD ULCNBMAC
MAJORREV UPDATOPT
MINORREV VENDOR
NOFIELDPWR[0..numChans-1] VERIFYLOST[0..numChans-1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.9 TC-ODX081/TK-ODX081 (8 Channel - 120Vac- Diagnostic Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.

297
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Supports the following diagnostics, which are user configurable for each channel with the
exception of the Short Circuit Protection/Overload diagnostic which is always enabled:
• Short Circuit Protection/Overload: Senses when current draw for a given channel is above
the limit and protects the device from damage.
• Loss of Field Power: Senses lack of power for a channel, if zero-crossing on the ac-line
power is not detected which causes the output state to change.
• No Load/Hardware Point Fault: Senses when the output current draw falls below the
threshold or a hardware output failure occurs. It only works when the output is in the OFF
state.
• Output Verification: Verifies if the actual output state matches the commanded output state
for field side verification. It only works when the output is in the ON state.
• Pulse Test: Periodically checks the output to verify that it still has the ability to change states
without causing the load to transition. (This function only operates in systems with software
version R120 or greater.)
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS
ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.10 TC-ODX161/TK-ODX161 (16 Channel - 24Vdc- Diagnostic Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC and provides
selected diagnostic information for associated channels.

298 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Supports the following diagnostics, which are user configurable for each channel with the
exception of the Short Circuit Protection/Overload diagnostic, which is always enabled.
• Short Circuit Protection/Overload: Senses when current draw for a given channel is above
the limit and protects the device from damage.
• No Load/Hardware Point Fault: Senses when the output current draw falls below the
threshold or a hardware output failure occurs. It only works when the output is in the OFF
state.
• Output Verification: Verifies if the actual output state matches the commanded output state
for field side verification. It only works when the output is in the ON state.
• Pulse Test: Periodically checks the output to verify that it still has the ability to change states
without causing the load to transition. (This function only operates in systems with software
version R120 or greater.)
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 16 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC. Data is“triggered”, or is current digital
(Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMCHANS
ASACONNSTS NUMCONN
ASAERRCODE NUMDISCONN
ASAERRINFO NUMSHUTDOWN
CATNUMBER ORDERINCEE
CEESTATE ORDERINCM
CHANTEXT PERIOD
DESC PHASE
DLCNBSLOT PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
HIALM SCANEULO
INALM SCANGRPDTL
IOMSLOT SCANPNTDTL
IOMTYPE ULCNBMAC
KEYWORD UPDATOPT
MAJORREV VENDOR
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.11 TC-ORC081/TK-ORC081 (8 Channel - 8 n.c., 8 n.o. 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Relay Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.

299
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 NAME
BLCKCOMMENT2 SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
BLCKCOMMENT3 SCANASSOCDSP
BLCKCOMMENT4 SCANCTRLLVL
DESC SCANEUHI
DLCNBSLOT SCANEULO
EXECSTATE SCANGRPDTL
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT ULCNBMAC
IOMTYPE UPDATOPT
IOCONNSTATUS VENDOR
MAJORREV
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.10.12 TC-ORC161/TK-ORC161 (16 Channel, 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac Isolated - Contact Output)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM to provide links to associated IOC.
Function Defines type of IOM, number of channels, execution state, and communications path for data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM.
Executes once every cycle.
Includes IOC assignment to one of 8 channels (points), as part of IOM configuration.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured IOC.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

300 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 NAME

BLCKCOMMENT2 SAFESTATE[0..numChans-1]
BLCKCOMMENT3 SCANASSOCDSP
BLCKCOMMENT4 SCANCTRLLVL
DESC SCANEUHI
DLCNBSLOT SCANEULO
EXECSTATE SCANGRPDTL
FAILSTATE[0..numChans-1] SCANPNTDTL
IOMSLOT ULCNBMAC
IOMTYPE UPDATOPT
IOCONNSTATUS VENDOR
MAJORREV
MINORREV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

301
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.11 Serial Interface Module (SIM) I/O Module Block

Related topics
“TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Array Channel Function Blocks)” on page 302

4.11.1 TC-MUX021/TK-MUX021 (Up to 32 Array Channel Function Blocks)

Description Identifies the physical Serial Interface Module (SIM) for the CPM to provide links to associated
Array Channel blocks and provides selected diagnostic events for associated channels.
Function Provides configuration and communication software to enable devices to communicate via an
ASCII serial protocol to perform bi-directional data exchange directly with the Experion PKS
Control Processor.
Stores are not guaranteed during a failover. That is, the store attempt may occur in the primary,
but not reach the IO Module before the failover occurs. The secondary will not attempt to re-
send the information.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured FTAs.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.
Parameters ALMENBSTATE KEYWORD
ASACONNSTS[0..7] MAJORREV
ASAERRCODE[0..7] MINORREV
ASAERRINFO[0..7] NUMCHANS
CATNUMBER NUMCONN[0..7]
CEESTATE NUMDISCONN[0..7]
CHANINUSE[0..31] NUMSHUTDOWN[0..7]
CHANSTS[0..31] ORDERINCEE
DESC ORDERINCM
DLCNBSLOT PERIOD
ERRCODE[0..31] PHASE
ERRFL[0..31] PRODTYPE
ESTWEIGHT SCANASSOCDSP
EUDESC SCANCTRLLVL
EXECSTATE SCANEUHI
FTAAOVRNFL SCANEULO
FTAASTS SCANGRPDTL
FTABOVRNFL SCANPNTDTL
FTABSTS ULCNBMAC
INALM VENDOR
IOMSLOT
IOMTYPE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

302 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.12 Process Manager Input/Output (PMIO) Blocks

Related topics
“AICHANNEL (PMIO) block” on page 303
“HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block” on page 304
“AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block” on page 306
“HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) block” on page 307
“DICHANNEL (PMIO) block” on page 309
“DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block” on page 310
“HLAI block” on page 310
“HLAIHART block” on page 312
“LLMUX block” on page 313
“STI_MV block” on page 314
“AO16 block” on page 315
“AO16HART block” on page 317
“DI24V block” on page 318
“DISOE block” on page 319
“DI block” on page 320
“DO32 block” on page 321

4.12.1 AICHANNEL (PMIO) block

Description The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on one of the following I/O
Processors: HLAI, HLAI-100, LLAI, LLMUX, RHMUX, and STI.
The analog input point converts an analog signal received from a field sensor to engineering
units for use by control function blocks in the Experion PKS system.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection

303
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CHANNUM PVEXEULO

CJTACT PVEXHIFL
COMMAND PVEXLOFL
DAMPING PVRAW
DECONF PVRAWHI
DESC PVRAWLO
INPTDIR PVSTS
IOP PVTEMP
IOPTYPE SECVAR
LASTPV SENSRTYP
LOCUTOFF SERIALNO
LRL SLWSRCID
LRV STATE
NAME STI_EU
PIUOTDCF STIDBDISCRE
PNTFORM STIPVNUMBER
PTEXECST STISCRATCHPAD
PV STISTATUS
PVCALC STISWVER
PVCHAR STITAG
PVCLAMP TCRNGOPT
PVEUHI TF
PVEULO URL
PVEXEUHI URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.2 HAICHANNEL (PMIO) block

Description The HAI channel block represents a single analog input point on the HLAIHART I/O Processor.
The analog input point converts an analog signal received from a field sensor to engineering
units for use by control function blocks in the Experion PKS system.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection
Additionally, the HAI channel supports HART digital data received from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic and device
variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control system.

304 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCEPTDEV HCMD16

ACCEPTRNG HCMD48BT[1..200]
CHANNUM HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200]
CJTACT HCMD48STRNGS[1..200]
COMMAND HCMDFAIL
CONTAINEDIN HCMDRESP
DEVICE HCOMERFL
DECONF HCOMFAIL
DESC HCOMHYS
HCFGDEV HCOMSTS
HCMD00 HCOMTHRS
HCMD12 HDAY
HCMD13 HSWREV
HCMD14 HTAG
HDESC HTDEU
HDEVID HTDLRL
HDEVIDFL HTDMINSPAN
HDEVIDCD HTDSN
HDEVMFG HTDURL
HDEVMISM HUCMDREV
HDEVMSG HWRTPRCTCODE
HDEVREV HYEAR
HDEVST INPTDIR
HDEVTYP IOP
HDVMFGCD IOPTYPE
HDVREVCD LASTPV
HDVTYPCD LOCUTOFF
HDVTYPCDNAME LRL
HDYNDESC[1..4] LRV
HDYNDVC[1..4] NAME
HDYNEU[1..4] PIUOTDCF
HDYNNAME[1..4] PNTFORM
HDYNVAL[1..4] PTEXECST
PV
HENABLE
PVCALC
HEU
PVCHAR
HFASSYNO
PVCLAMP
HFLAGS
PVEUHI
HHWREV
PVEULO
HISHART5
PVEXEUHI
HMONTH
PVEXEULO
HNCOMERR
PVEXHIFL
HNMSMINPRE

305
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

HREVMISM PVEXLOFL
HPHYSIG PVRAW
HPVALMCODE PVRAWHI
HPVCHAR PVRAWLO
HPVDAMP PVSTS
HPVLRV PVTEMP
HPVMISM RESETHCOMERR
HPVTLDST SECVAR
HPVURV SENSRTYP
HPVXFRCODE SLWSRCID
HSCANCFG STATE
HSCANOVR TCRNGOPT
HSLOTDSC[1..4] TF
HSLOTDVC[1..4] URL
HSLOTEU[1..4] URV
HSLOTNAME[1..4]
HSLOTVAL [1..4]
HSMSTRFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.3 AOCHANNEL (PMIO) block

Description The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for operating
final control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. The OP parameter value can be
controlled from a Experion PKS regulatory point, the operator, or an SCM.
To convert the OP value to a 4-20 mA signal, the AO channel performs:
• Direct/Reverse Output Function
• Nonlinear Output Characterization
The AO channel block can be associated with either an AO8 or AO16 IOP.

306 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CHANNUM OPIN2

COMMFAILFL OPIN3
DESC OPIN4
FAILOPT OPIN5
INITREQ OPOUT0
INITVAL OPOUT1
IOP OPOUT2
IOPTYPE OPOUT3
NAME OPOUT4
OP OPOUT5
OPCHAR OPTDIR
OPFINAL PNTFORM
OPIN0 PTEXECST
OPIN1 STDBYMAN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.4 HAOCHANNEL (PMIO) block

Description The HAO channel block represents a single analog output point on the AO16HART I/O
Processor.
The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for operating
final control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. The OP parameter value can be
controlled from a Experion PKS regulatory point, the operator, or an SCM. To convert the OP
value to a 4-20 mA signal, the AO channel performs:
• Direct/Reverse Output Function
• Nonlinear Output Characterization
Additionally, the HAO channel supports HART digital data received from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic and device
variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control system.

307
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCEPTDEV HDAY

CHANNUM HDESC
COMMFAILFL HDEVID
CONTAINEDIN HDEVIDFL
DESC HDEVIDCD
DEVICE HDEVMFG
FAILOPT HDEVMISM
HCFGDEV HDEVMSG
HCMD00 HDEVREV
HCMD12 HDEVST
HCMD13 HDEVTYP
HCMD14 HDVMFGCD
HCMD16 HDVREVCD
HCMD48BT[1..200] HDVTYPCD
HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200] HDVTYPCDNAME
HCMD48STRNGS[1..200] HDYNDESC[1..4]
HCMDFAIL HDYNDVC[1..4]
HCMDRESP HDYNEU[1..4]
HCOMERFL HDYNNAME[1..4]
HCOMFAIL HDYNVAL[1..4]
HCOMHYS HENABLE
HCOMSTS HEU
HCOMTHRS HFASSYNO
HHWREV HFLAGS
HISHART5 ICONSTATE
HMONTH INITREQ
HNCOMERR INITVAL
HNMSMINPRE IOP
HREVMISM IOPTYPE
HPHYSIG NAME
HPVALMCODE OP
HPVDAMP OPCHAR
HPVLRV OPFINAL
HPVTLDST OPIN0
HPVURV OPIN1
HPVXFRCODE
OPIN2
HSCANCFG
OPIN3
HSCANOVR
OPIN4
HSLOTDSC[1..4]
OPIN5
HSLOTDVC[1..4]
OPOUT0
HSLOTEU[1..4]
OPOUT1
HSLOTNAME[1..4]
OPOUT2

308 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

HSLOTVAL [1..4] OPOUT3

HSMSTRFL OPOUT4
HSWREV OPOUT5
HTAG OPTDIR
HTDEU PNTFORM
HTDLRL PTEXECST
HTDMINSPAN RESETHCOMERR
HTDSN
HTDURL
HUCMDREV
HWRTPRCTCODE
HYEAR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.5 DICHANNEL (PMIO) block

Description The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on a DI, DI24V, or DISOE I/O
Processors.
A digital input point converts a digital PVRAW signal received from the field to a PV that can be
used by other data points in the control strategy.
Control strategies can test for a bad Digital Input PV. Parameter BADPVFL is set ON when:
• The PV source has been switched to Substituted, and the point is inactive or the module status
is Idle.
• The PV source is AUTO and the PV is not being updated, because, either the point is inactive,
the module is idle, there is a slot soft failure, or the FTA is missing.
The digital input point is a single-input point that can be configured as a status input or a latched
input, as described in the following sections.
Parameters ALMOPT IOPTYPE
BADPVFL NAME
CHANNUM OFFNRMFL
DEBOUNCE PNTFORM
DESC PTEXECST
DITYPE PV
DLYTIME PVCHGDLY
EVTOPT PVNORMAL
HIGHAL PVRAW
INPTDIR PVSOURCE
IOP PVSRCOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

309
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.12.6 DOCHANNEL (PMIO) block

Description The DO channel block represents a single discrete input point on a DO32 I/O Processor.
The digital output point provides a digital output to the field based on the origin of the input and
the configured parameters. The digital output point does not have any modes.
Parameters OFFPULSE
CHANNUM ONPULSE
COMMFAILFL OP
DESC OPTDIR
DOTYPE PERIOD
FAILOPT PNTFORM
INITREQ PTEXECST
INITVAL SO
IOP SOINITVAL
IOPTYPE SOREADFAIL
NAME STDBYMAN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.7 HLAI block

Description The analog input point converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to engineering
units for use by other data points in the control strategy, as shown in the following figure. To
accomplish this function, the analog input point performs the following functions.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection

310 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CALIBSTS NAME

DBVALID NONREDFTABA
DBVALIDCMD NONREDFTABB
DESC NOTREDCNFGA
FTAPRESA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAPRESB NOTSAMEFTAA
FTAREVERSEDA NOTSAMEFTAB
FTAREVERSEDB NUMCHANS
FWINVALIDA PTEXECST
FWINVALIDB PV
IOMCARDA PVSTS
IOMCARDB REDDATAA
IOMFILEA REDDATAB
IOMFILEB RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFWREVA SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFWREVB SCANCTRLLVL
IOMHWREVA SCANGRPDTL
IOMHWREVB SCANPNTDTL
IOMLHFSTA SCANRATE
IOMLHFSTB SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMNUM SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMOPERA SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMOPERB TYPEINVALIDA
IOMSTATE TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTSA WARMSTRTA
IOMSTSB WARMSTRTB
IOMTYPE
IOREDOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

311
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.12.8 HLAIHART block

Description High Level Analog Input IOP, HART Capable, 16 Channel.

Each input channel is capable of scanning (100 ms sampling) a standard analog input (0 to
100%) and supporting digital data transfer using HART communications protocol.
The analog input point converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to engineering
units for use by other data points in the control strategy. To accomplish this function, the
HLAIHART point performs the following functions.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection
Additionally, the IOP can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic and device
variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control system. IOP
allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued from host/master devices.

312 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CALIBSTSDBVALID IOMLHFSTB

DBVALIDCMD IOMNUM
DESC IOMOPERA
DEVICELOCATION IOMOPERB
FTACONNA IOMSTATE
FTACONNB IOMSTSA
FTAPRESA IOMSTSB
FTAPRESB IOMTYPE
FTAREVERSEDA IOREDOPTNAME
FTAREVERSEDB NONREDFTABA
FWINVALIDA NONREDFTABB
FWINVALIDB NOTREDCNFGA
ICONSTATE NOTREDCNFGB
HCUAVAIL NOTSAMEFTAA
IOMPLREVA NOTSAMEFTAB
IOMPLREVB NUMCHANS
IOPLOCATION REDDATAA
IOMCARDA REDDATAB
IOMCARDB RESETERRORSCMD
IOMDESCA SCANRATE
IOMDESCB SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMFILEA SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMFILEB SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMFWREVA TYPEINVALIDA
IOMFWREVB TYPEINVALIDB
IOMHWREVA WARMSTRTA
IOMHWREVB WARMSTRTB
IOMLHFSTA
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.9 LLMUX block

Description Low Level Multiplexer IOP, generally used for Data Acquisition points.

313
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CALIBFTA1STS NAME

CALIBFTA2STS NONREDFTABA
DBVALID NOTREDCNFGA
DBVALIDCMD NOTSAMEFTAA
DESC NUMCHANS
FREQ6050 PTEXECST
FTAPRESA PV
FTAREVERSEDA PVSTS
FWINVALIDA RESETERRORSCMD
IOMCARDA SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFILEA SCANCTRLLVL
IOMFWREVA SCANGRPDTL
IOMHWREVA SCANPNTDTL
IOMLHFSTA SCANRATE
IOMNUM SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMSTATE SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMSTSA TYPEINVALIDA
IOMTYPE WARMSTRTA
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.10 STI_MV block

Description The STIMV IOP supports all the Smart Transmitters listed above and multi-PV Smart
Transmitter types such as the following:
• SCM3000 Smart Flow Transmitter (Coriolis method)
• Drexelbrook SLT Level Transmitter
• SMV 3000 Multivariable Pressure Transmitter
• SGC 3000 Gas Chromatograph
An STIMV IOP allows up to four multi-PV transmitters or a mix of multi-PV and single PV
transmitter inputs that total no more than 16. A multi-PV transmitter is configured as if it were
in“n” contiguous slots where“n” equals the number of PVs expected. The STITAG parameter
value for each contiguous slot must be identical

314 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters DBVALID IOREDOPT

DBVALIDCMD NAME
DESC NONREDFTABA
FREQ6050 NONREDFTABB
FTAPRESA NOTREDCNFGA
FTAPRESB NOTREDCNFGB
FTAREVERSEDA NOTSAMEFTAA
FTAREVERSEDB NOTSAMEFTAB
FWINVALIDA NUMCHANS
FWINVALIDB PTEXECST
IOMCARDA PV
IOMCARDB PVSTS
IOMFILEA REDDATAA
IOMFILEB REDDATAB
IOMFWREVA RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFWREVB SCANASSOCDSP
IOMHWREVA SCANCTRLLVL
IOMHWREVB SCANGRPDTL
IOMLHFSTA SCANPNTDTL
IOMLHFSTB SCANRATE
IOMNUM SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMOPERA SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMOPERB SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMSTATE TYPEINVALIDA
IOMSTSA TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTSB WARMSTRTA
IOMTYPE WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.11 AO16 block

Description Analog Output IOP, 16 channel.

315
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CALIBSTS NAME

DBVALID NONREDFTABA
DBVALIDCMD NONREDFTABB
DESC NOTREDCNFGA
FAILOPT NOTREDCNFGB
FTAPRESA NOTSAMEFTAA
FTAPRESB NOTSAMEFTAB
FTAREVERSEDA NUMCHANS
FTAREVERSEDB OP
FWINVALIDA OPFINAL
FWINVALIDB PTEXECST
INITVAL REDDATAA
IOMCARDA REDDATAB
IOMCARDB RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFILEA SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFILEB SCANCTRLLVL
IOMFWREVA SCANGRPDTL
IOMFWREVB SCANPNTDTL
IOMHWREVA SCANRATE
IOMHWREVB SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMLHFSTA SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMLHFSTB STDBYSTSA
IOMNUM STDBYSTSB
IOMOPERA SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMOPERB TYPEINVALIDA
IOMSTATE TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTSA WARMSTRTA
IOMSTSB WARMSTRTB
IOMTYPE
IOREDOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

316 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.12.12 AO16HART block

Description Analog Output HART IOP, 16 channel.

Each channel is capable of supplying a standard analog output (4 to 20mA) and supporting
digital data transfer using HART communications protocol.
To accomplish this function, the AO16HART point performs the following functions.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection
Additionally, the IOP can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOP. Dynamic and device
variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control system. IOP
allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued from host/master devices.

317
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CALIBSTS IOMOPERA

DBVALID IOMOPERB
DBVALIDCMD IOMPLREVA
DESC IOMPLREVB
DEVICELOCATION IOMSTATE
EUDESC IOMSTSA
FAILOPT IOMSTSB
FTACONNA IOMTYPE
IOREDOPT
FTACONNB
IOPLOCATION
FTAPRESA
NAME
FTAPRESB
NONREDFTABA
FTAREVERSEDA
NONREDFTABB
FTAREVERSEDB
NOTREDCNFGA
FWINVALIDA
NOTREDCNFGB
FWINVALIDB
NOTSAMEFTAA
HAUTODET[1..16]
NOTSAMEFTAB
HCUAVAIL
NUMCHANS
ICONSTATE
REDDATAA
IOMCARDA
REDDATAB
IOMCARDB
RESETERRORSCMD
IOMDESCA
SCANRATE
IOMDESCB
SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMFILEA
SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMFILEB
STDBYSTS
IOMFWREVA
SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMFWREVB
TYPEINVALIDA
IOMHWREVA
TYPEINVALIDB
IOMHWREVB
WARMSTRTA
IOMLHFSTA
WARMSTRTB
IOMLHFSTB
IOMNUM
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.13 DI24V block

Description Digital Input IOP, 24 Vdc.

318 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADPVFL NAME

DBVALID NONREDFTABA
DBVALIDCMD NONREDFTABB
DESC NOTREDCNFGA
FTAPRESA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAPRESB NOTSAMEFTAA
FTAREVERSEDA NOTSAMEFTAB
FTAREVERSEDB NUMCHANS
FWINVALIDA PTEXECST
FWINVALIDB PV
IOMCARDA PVSTS
IOMCARDB REDDATAA
IOMFILEA REDDATAB
IOMFILEB RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFWREVA SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFWREVB SCANCTRLLVL
IOMHWREVA SCANGRPDTL
IOMHWREVB SCANPNTDTL
IOMLHFSTA SCANRATE
IOMLHFSTB SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMNUM SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMOPERA SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMOPERB TYPEINVALIDA
IOMSTATE TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTSA WARMSTRTA
IOMSTSB WARMSTRTB
IOMTYPE
IOREDOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.14 DISOE block

Description Digital Input Sequence of Events

319
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADPVFL NAME

CHNLNAME[1..NUMCHAN] NONREDFTABA
DBVALID NONREDFTABB
DBVALIDCMD NOTREDCNFGA
DESC NOTREDCNFGB
FTAPRESA NOTSAMEFTAA
FTAPRESB NOTSAMEFTAB
FTAREVERSEDA NUMCHANS
FTAREVERSEDB PTEXECST
FWINVALIDA PV
FWINVALIDB PVSTS
IOMCARDA REDDATAA
IOMCARDB REDDATAB
IOMFILEA RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFILEB SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFWREVA SCANCTRLLVL
IOMFWREVB SCANGRPDTL
IOMHWREVA SCANPNTDTL
IOMHWREVB SCANRATE
IOMLHFSTA SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMLHFSTB SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMNUM STMCHLASTOVERRUNTIMEA (Partner A)
IOMOPERA STMCHLASTOVERRUNTIMEB (Partner B)
IOMOPERB STMCHMAXOVRRUNTIMEA (Partner A)
IOMSTATE STMCHMAXOVRRUNTIMEA (Partner B)
IOMSTSA STMCHOVRRUNSA (Partner A)
IOMSTSB STMCHOVRRUNSB (Partner B)
IOMTYPE SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOREDOPT TYPEINVALIDA
TYPEINVALIDB
WARMSTRTA
WARMSTRTB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.15 DI block

Description
Parameters DBVALID
DBVALIDCMD

320 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

4.12.16 DO32 block

Description Digital Output, 32 channel.

Parameters DBVALID NAME
DBVALIDCMD NONREDFTABA
DESC NONREDFTABB
FAILOPT NOTREDCNFGA
FTAPRESA NOTREDCNFGB
FTAPRESB NOTSAMEFTAA
FTAREVERSEDA NOTSAMEFTAB
FTAREVERSEDB NUMCHANS
FWINVALIDA OP
FWINVALIDB PTEXECST
IOMCARDA REDDATAA
IOMCARDB REDDATAB
IOMFILEA RESETERRORSCMD
IOMFILEB SCANASSOCDSP
IOMFWREVA SCANCTRLLVL
IOMFWREVB SCANGRPDTL
IOMHWREVA SCANPNTDTL
IOMHWREVB SCANRATE
IOMLHFSTA SELECTCABLEACMD
IOMLHFSTB SELECTCABLEBCMD
IOMNUM SO
IOMOPERA SOINITVAL
IOMOPERB SWAPPRIMARYCMD
IOMSTATE TYPEINVALIDA
IOMSTSA TYPEINVALIDB
IOMSTSB WARMSTRTA
IOMTYPE WARMSTRTB
IOREDOPT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the PMIO Blocks.

321
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.13 Series C Input/Output (Series C I/O) Blocks

Related topics
“AICHANNEL (Series C)” on page 322
“AOCHANNEL (Series C)” on page 323
“DICHANNEL (Series C)” on page 325
“DOCHANNEL (Series C)” on page 325
“AI-HART” on page 326
“AI-LLMUX” on page 327
“AI-LLAI” on page 327
“AO-HART” on page 329
“DI-HV” on page 329
“DI-24” on page 330
“DO-24B” on page 330

4.13.1 AICHANNEL (Series C)

Description The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on one of the following
Series C Processors: “AI-HART” on page 326; “AI-LLMUX” on page 327,“AI-LLAI”
on page 327
Function The analog input channel converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to
engineering units for use by other function blocks in the C300, and by the rest of
Experion PKS
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding “AI-
HART” on page 326 or “AI-LLMUX” on page 327 or“AI-LLAI” on page 327 block
that interfaces with the physical AI hardware module at execution runtime.

322 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCEPTDEV HEXTDEVST

ACCEPTRNG HLOCKBYPRIMARYMASTER
ALMENBSTATE HLOCKPERMANENT
ASSOCASSET HLOCKSTATUS
BADPVFL HMAINTREQ
CHANNUM HMAXDEVVARS
CJTACT HNCFGCHG
PJCOMMAND HNSMMINPRE
CONTAINEDIN HPVCHNFLAGS
DAMPING HPVMISM
DECONF HSCANCFG
DEVICELOCATION HSCANOVR
DVRNGEXT HSLOTCC[1..4] (HART Revision 6.0)
EURNGEXT HSLOTST [1..4]
HARTVERSION HSLOTVAL [1..4]
HCFGDEV HTAG
HCMD00 HVARALERT
HCMD12 INPTDIR
HCMD13 IOP
HCMD14 IOPTYPE
HCMD16 JOURNALONLY
HCMD48BT[1..200] LRL
HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200] LRV
HDEVID PNTFORM
HDEVMFG PNTTYPE
HDEVREV PTEXECST
HDEVST PV
HDEVSTSTATUS PVCHAR
HDEVTYPE PVRAWHI
HDEVTYPENAME PVRAWLO
HDYNCC[1..4] PVSTS
HDYNEU[1..4] REDTAG
HDYNST[1..4] SENSRTYP
HENABLE URL
URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.2 AOCHANNEL (Series C)

Description The AO channel block represents a single analog input point on the Series C “AO-
HART” on page 329 Processor

323
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for
operating final control elements such as valves and actuators in the field. The OP
parameter value can be controlled from a Experion PKS regulatory point, the operator,
or an SCM.
Inputs OP value from
• a single Regulatory Control block
• an operator input
• a program
• an SCM block
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding “AO-
HART” on page 329 block that interfaces with the physical AO hardware module at
execution runtime.
Parameters ACCEPTDEV HLOCKBYPRIMARYMASTER
CHANNUM HLOCKPERMANENT
COMMFAILFL HLOCKSTATUS
CONTAINEDIN HMAINTREQ
DEVICELOCATION HMAXDEVVARS
FAULTOPT HNCFGCHG
FAULTVALUE HNSMMINPRE
HALARMENABLE HPVCHNFLAGS
HARTVERSION HSCANCFG
HCFGDEV HSCANOVR
HCMD00 HSLOTCC[1..4] (HART Revision 6.0)
HCMD12 HSLOTST[1..4] (HART Revision 6.0)
HCMD13 HSLOTVAL [1..4]
HCMD14 HTAG
HCMD16 HVARALERT
HCMD48BT[1..200] IOP
HCMD48NOTIFY[1..200] IOPTYPE
HDEVREV INITREQ
HDEVST INITVAL
HDEVST OP
HDEVSTSTATUS OPCHAR
PNTFORM
HDEVTYPE
PNTTYPE
HDEVTYPENAME
PTEXECST
HDYNCC[1..4]
REDTAG
HDYNEU[1..4]
HDYNST[1..4]
HENABLE
HEXTDEVST

324 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.3 DICHANNEL (Series C)

Description The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on a Series C “DI-HV” on
page 329, or “DI-24” on page 330 Processor.
Function The DI channel block converts a PVRAW signal received from the field to a PV that
can be used by other data points in the Experion PKS system
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Associated Blocks Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding “DI-HV”
on page 329 or “DI-24” on page 330 block that interfaces with the physical DI
hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters ALMOPT IOP
BADPVFL IOPTYPE
CHANNUM PNTFORM
CONTAINEDIN PNTTYPE
DEBOUNCE PTEXECST
DEVICELOCATION PV
DITYPE PVSOURCE
DLYTIME PVSRCOPT
EVTOPT REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.4 DOCHANNEL (Series C)

Description The DO channel block represents a single discrete input point on a Series C “DO-24B”
on page 330 I/O Processor.
Function The DO channel block provides a digital output to the field based on the origin of the
input and the configures parameters
Inputs SO, PO, ONPULSE, or OFFPULSE value from
• a single Regulatory Control block
• an operator input
• a program
• an SCM block
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Associated Blocks Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of corresponding “DO-24B”
on page 330 block that interfaces with the physical DO hardware module at execution
runtime.

325
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters CHANNUM INITREQ

COMMFAILFL IOP
CONTAINEDIN IOPTYPE
DEVICELOCATION OP
DOSTYPE PNTFORM
DOTYPE PNTTYPE
FAULTOPT PTEXECST
FAULTVALUE REDTAG
SO
SOREADFAIL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.5 AI-HART

Description High Level Analog Input with HART, 16 Channel.

This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
CU-PAIH01
CC-PAIH01
Each input channel is capable of scanning (100 ms sampling) a standard analog input (0
to 100%) and supporting digital data transfer using HART communications protocol.
The analog input point converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to
engineering units for use by other data points in the control strategy. To accomplish this
function, the AI-HART point performs the following functions.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection
Additionally, the IOM can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from
HART capable devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOM.
Dynamic and device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use
by the control system. IOM allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued
from host/master devices.
Parameters CALIBALL IOMBTREVA
CALIBSTS IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGA IOMPLREVA
CPUFREEAVGB IOMPLREVB
CPUFREEMINA REDTAG
CPUFREEMINB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

326 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.13.6 AI-LLMUX

Description Low Level Mux Input, 64 Channel

This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
CU-PAIM01
CC-PAIM01
Parameters CALIBALL HCUAVAIL
CALIBSTS IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGA IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB PVSTS
CPUFREEMINA REDTAG
CPUFREEMINB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.7 AI-LLAI

Description Low Level Analog Input, 16 Channel, is designed to operate with the low voltage
devices such as Thermocouples and RTDs.
This block is used for the Series C IOMs CC-PAIM51.
Function AI-LLAI channel accepts a new RTD input type CU:50 ohm (CU50rtd) in addition to
all the inputs that are supported by the AI-LLMUX. In addition, the operating
temperature range of each channel is extended from (0 to +60 deg C) to (-40 to +70 deg
C).

327
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCEPTRNG PV
BADPVFL PVAUTO
BLCKCOMMENT1 PVAUTOST
BLCKCOMMENT2 PVCALC
BLCKCOMMENT3 PVCHAR
BLCKCOMMENT4 PVCLAMP
CHANNUM PVEUHI
CONTAINEDIN PVEULO
CPUFREEAVGA PVEXECST
CPUFREEAVGB PVEXEUHI
CPUFREEMINA PVEXHIFL
CPUFREEMINB PVEXEULO
DESC PVEXLOFL
DEVICELOCATION PVRAW
HCUAVAIL PVRAWHI
HPVMISM PVRAWLO
INPTDIR PVSRCOPT
IOMBTREVA PVSOURCE
IOMBTREVA PVSTS
IOPTYPE PVTEMP
LASTPV SENSRTYP
LOCUTOFF TF
LRV TCRNGOPT
LRL URL
OWDENBL URV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

328 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.13.8 AO-HART

Description Analog Output with HART IOM, 16 channel.

This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
CU-PAOH01
CC-PAOH01
Each channel is capable of supplying a standard analog output (4 to 20mA) and
supporting digital data transfer using HART communications protocol.
To accomplish this function, the AO-HART point performs the following functions.
• Analog-to Digital Conversion
• PV Characterization
• Range Checking and PV Filtering
• PV Source Selection
• Alarm Detection
The IOM can issue HART protocol commands and receive data from HART capable
devices. Device Id data is read from the device and cached in the IOM. Dynamic and
device variable data and device status is collected from the device for use by the control
system. IOM allows for servicing of any pass-through commands issued from host/
master devices.
Parameters CALIBALL HCUAVAIL
CALIBSTS IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGA IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB IOMPLREVA
CPUFREEMINA IOMPLREVB
CPUFREEMINB REDTAG
HAUTODET[1..16]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.9 DI-HV

Description High Voltage Digital Input (IOM supports both 120 and 240 volts AC), 32 Channel
This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
• CU-PDIH01
• CC-PDIH01
Parameters BADPVFL CPUFREEMINB
CPUFREEAVGA IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEMINA REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

329
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.13.10 DI-24

Description Low Voltage Digital Input (24 volts DC); 32 Channels

This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
• CU-PDIL01
• CC-PDIL01
Parameters BADPVFL CPUFREEMINB
CPUFREEAVGA IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEAVGB IOMBTREVA
CPUFREEMINA REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

4.13.11 DO-24B

Description Bussed Low Voltage Digital Output (24 volts DC); 32 Channels
This block is used for the following Series C IOMs:
CU-PDOB01
CC-PDOB01
Parameters CPUFREEAVGA
CPUFREEAVGB
CPUFREEMINA
CPUFREEMINB
IOMBTREVA
IOMBTREVA
REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the Series C
IO Blocks.

330 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.14 Speed Protection Module (SPM)

Related topics
“Speed Protection Module (SPM) Block” on page 331
“SP_AI” on page 331
“SP_AO” on page 332
“SP_DI” on page 333
“SP_DO” on page 334
“SP_SPDVOTE” on page 335
“SP_SPEED” on page 337

4.14.1 Speed Protection Module (SPM) Block

Refer to the following documents for Turbine Control-related documentation for this block.
• Turbine Control User’s Guide
• Honeywell Turbine Control Solution Parameter Reference

4.14.2 SP_AI

Description The AI channel block represents a single analog input point on the Speed Protection
(SP) Module.
Function The analog input channel converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor to
engineering units for use by other function blocks in the C300 - 20msCEE Controller,
and by the rest of Experion PKS.
To accomplish this function, the AI channel performs the following operation on the
analog PV signal.
• Analog-to digital conversion
• PV characterization
• Range Checking and PV filtering
• PV source selection
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.

331
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADPVFL PVAUTO

BLCKCOMMENT1 PVAUTOSTS
BLCKCOMMENT2 PVCALC
BLCKCOMMENT3 PVCHAR
BLCKCOMMENT4 PVCLAMP
CHANNUM PVEUHI
CONTAINEDIN PVEULO
DESC PVEXHIFL
DEVICELOCATION PVEXLOFL
INPTDIR PVEXEUHI
IOP PVEXEULO
IOPTYPE PVRAW
LASTPV PVSOURCE
LOCUTOFF PVSRCOPT
NAME PVSTS
OWDENBL SENSRTYP
PNTTYPE TF
PTEXECST
PV
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.14.3 SP_AO

Description The AO channel block represents a single analog output point on the Speed Protection
(SP) Module.
Function The AO channel block converts the output value (OP) to a 4-20 mA output signal for
operating control elements such as valves and actuators in the field.
To convert the OP value to a 4-20 mA signal, the AO channel performs the following
functions.
• Direct/Reverse Output Function
• Linear or non-linear Output Characterization
In addition, the SP_ AO channel supports input connections from SP_SPEED, SP_AI,
and SP_SPDVOTE channels within the same SPM IOM. This can be configured by
connecting the OP parameter to one of the following parameters.
• VOTPVx of voting logic channel, where x can be 1 or 2
• PV of any SP_SPEED channel
• PV of any SP_AI channel
The default values for MODE and MODEATTR parameters of SP_AO channel are
CAS and PROGRAM, respectively.
Inputs OP value from the
• a single Regulatory Control block
• an operator input
• SP_AI channel
• SP_SPDVOTE channel
• SP_SPEED channel

332 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.

Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 NMODATTR
BLCKCOMMENT2 NMODE
BLCKCOMMENT3 OP
BLCKCOMMENT4 OPCHAR
CHANNUM OPFINAL
COMMFAILFL OPIN0
CONTAINEDIN OPIN1
DESC OPIN2
DEVICELOCATION OPIN3
FAULTOPT OPIN4
FAULTVALUE OPIN5
INITREQ OPOUT0
INITREQLATCH OPOUT1
INITVAL OPOUT2
IOP OPOUT3
IOPTYPE OPOUT4
MODE OPOUT5
MODEATTR OPTDIR
MODEPERM PNTTYPE
NAME PTEXECST
REDTAG
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.14.4 SP_DI

Description The DI channel block represents a single digital input point on the Speed Protection
(SP) Module.
Function This digital input channel converts a digital PVRAW signal received from the field to a
PV that can be used by other data points in the Experion PKS.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV value that can be used by other data points in system.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SP
module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.

333
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BADPVFL IOP

BLCKCOMMENT1 IOPTYPE
BLCKCOMMENT2 OWDENBL
BLCKCOMMENT3 PNTTYPE
BLCKCOMMENT4 PTEXECST
CHANNUM PV
CONTAINEDIN PV.FLWRST
DESC PVAUTO
DEVICELOCATION PVRAW
DITYPE PVSOURCE
NAME PVSRCOPT
INPTDIR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.14.5 SP_DO

Description The SP_DO channel block represents a single discrete output point on the Speed
Protection (SP) Module.
Function The SP_DO channel provides a digital output to the field based on the origin of the
input and the configured parameters. This channel supports upto 8 interlock inputs that
can be used to trip the output.
The interlock input source can be one of following flags.
• PV and PV.FLWRST of any DI Channel block of the same SP IOM only.
• XXXX. FL, where XXXX can be any one of VOTPVxHIALM,
VOTROCxPOSHIALM, VOTPVxHHALM or VOTROCxPOSHHALM where
x=1,2 of the SP_SPDVOTE channel of the same SPM IOM.
• XXXX. FLWRST, where XXXX can be any one of VOTPVxHHALM or
VOTROCxPOSHHALM where x=1,2 of the SP_SPDVOTE channel of the same
SP IOM.
• YYYY. FL, where YYYY can be any one of PVHIALM, ROCPOSHIALM,
PVHHALM or ROCPOSHHALM of the SP_SPEED channel of the same SP IOM.
• YYYY. FLWRST, where YYYY can be any one of PVHHALM or
ROCPOSHHALM of the SP_SPEED channel of the same SP IOM.
Inputs SO, or ONPULSE value from
• a single Device Control block
• an operator input
• a program
Outputs Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real) value.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of corresponding SP
module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.

334 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 I7
BLCKCOMMENT2 I7INPTDIR
BLCKCOMMENT3
I7STS
BLCKCOMMENT4
I8
CHANNUM
I8INPTDIR
COMMFAILFL
I8STS
CONTAINEDIN
INLCKINPTSRC [1..8]
DESC
INITREQ
DEVICELOCATION
INITREQLATCH
DOTYPE
IOP
FAULTOPT
IOPTYPE
FALUTVALUE
I1 LASTTRIPREASON
I1INPTDIR LASTTRIPTIME
MODE
I1STS
MODEATTR
I2
MODEPERM
I2INPTDIR
NMODATTR
I2STS
NMODE
I3
ONPULSE
I3INPTDIR
OP
I3STS OPINITVAL
I4 OPTDIR
I4INPTDIR PERIOD
PNTTYPE
I4STS
PTEXECST
I5
READY
I5INPTDIR
REDTAG
I5STS
SO
I6
SOINITVAL
I6INPTDIR
SOREADFAIL
I6STS STDBYMAN
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.14.6 SP_SPDVOTE

Description The SP_SPDVOTE channel accepts four inputs from the Speed Channel.
Function The SP_SPDVOTE channel computes the Voted PVs and Voted ROCs, and supports
alarm flags for over speed and over acceleration.
The Voted PV and Voted ROC can be connected as an input to C300 function blocks or
to the OP parameter of local SP_AO channel. Alarm flags are available as output pins
for use as interlock input parameters of the SP_DO channel.
Inputs Accepts four inputs (PVs) from the SP_SPEED channels of the parent IOM.

335
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Voted PV and Voted ROC values.

Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 VOTPV1
BLCKCOMMENT2 VOTPV2
BLCKCOMMENT3 VOTPV1HHALM.FL
BLCKCOMMENT4 VOTPV2HHALM.FL
CHANNUM VOTPV1HHALM.FLWRST
CONTAINEDIN VOTPV2HHALM.FLWRST
DESC VOTPV1HHALM.TP
DEVICELOCATION VOTPV2HHALM.TP
GRP1IGNORD VOTPV1HIALM.FL
GRP2IGNORD VOTPV2HIALM.FL
GRP1IGNORDFL VOTPV1HIALM.TP
GRP2IGNORDFL VOTPV2HIALM.TP
GRP1NMIN VOTPV1OVRTSTENB
GRP2NMIN VOTPV2OVRTSTENB
GRP1VOTCHENB [1..4] VOTPV1STS
GRP2VOTCHENB [1..4] VOTPV2STS
NAME VOTPVMAX
IOP VOTPVONTRIP
IOPTYPE VOTROC1
LASTTRIPREASON VOTROC2
LASTTRIPTIME VOTROC1POSHHALM.FL
LASTVOTPV1 VOTROC2POSHHALM.FL
LASTVOTPV2 VOTROC1POSHHALM.FLWRST
LASTVOTROC1 VOTROC2POSHHALM.FLWRST
LASTVOTROC2 VOTROC1POSHHALM.TP
MEDOPT1 VOTROC2POSHHALM.TP
MEDOPT2 VOTROC1POSHIALM.FL
PNTTYPE VOTROC2POSHIALM.FL
PTEXECST VOTROC1POSHIALM.TP
PV1 VOTROC2POSHIALM.TP
PV2 VOTROCPOSHHONTRIP
PV3 VOTROC1STS
PV4 VOTROC2STS
VOTALG1
VOTALG2
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

336 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.14.7 SP_SPEED

Description The SP_SPEED channel accepts a pulse input on the Speed Protection (SP) Module.
Function The SP_SPEED channel converts pulse signals received from a field sensor to a PV
value in RPM. The PV value is used by the SPM and other function blocks in C300 -
20msCEE Controller. Additionally, the channel also computes ROC of speed. In
addition, with R410, SP_SPEED channel supports flow measurement. To accomplish
this, you need to configure the MEASUREMENTTYPE parameter as
“Flow_Measurement.” The SP_SPEED channel measures the flow in Engineering Unit
(EU).
SP_Speed channel performs the following functions:
• PV computation and Diagnostics
• PV source selection
When the SP_SPEED channel is configured for Flow_Measurement, the following
options are not supported in the SP_SPEED channel.
• Connection with SP_AO channel
• Connection with voting logic channel (SP_SPDVOTE)
• GEARRATIO parameter
• NMSPEED parameter
• Rate Of Change (ROC) parameters
– LASTROCPOSHHDRNMSPD
– ROCPOSHHALM.FL
– ROCPOSHHALM.FLWRST
– ROCPOSHHALM.TP
– ROCPOSHIALM.FL
– ROCPOSHIALM.TP
– ROCPV
Inputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Outputs Floating point value in engineering units.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SP
module that interfaces with the physical SP hardware module at execution runtime.

337
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 PNTTYPE

BLCKCOMMENT2 PV
BLCKCOMMENT3 PVAUTO
BLCKCOMMENT4 PVAUTOSTS
BADPVFL PVCALC
CHANNUM PTEXECST
CONTAINEDIN PVHHALM.FL
DEFMPULFL PVHHALM.FLWRST
DESC PVHHALM.TP
DEVICELOCATION PVHIALM.FL
EDGEDETECT PVHIALM.TP
GEARRATIO PVRAW
IOP PVSOURCE
IOPTYPE PVSRCOPT
LASTPV PVSTS
LASTROCPOSHHDRNMSPD ROCPOSHHALM.FL
KFACTOR
ROCPOSHHALM.FLWRST
ORDEROFKFACTOR
ROCPOSHHALM.TP
MEASUREMENTTYPE
ROCPOSHIALM.FL
MISGPULFL
ROCPOSHIALM.TP
NAME
ROCPV
NMSPEED
SENSRTYP
TOOTHCNT
ZEROSPDFL
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

338 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.15 Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module

Related topics
“Servo Positioner Valve Module (SVPM) Block” on page 339
“SVP_AI” on page 339
“SVP_AO” on page 340
“SVP_DI” on page 341
“SVP_REGCTL” on page 342

4.15.1 Servo Positioner Valve Module (SVPM) Block

Refer to the following documents for Turbine Control-related documentation for this block.
• Turbine Control User’s Guide
• Honeywell Turbine Control Solution Parameter Reference

4.15.2 SVP_AI

Description The SVP_AI accepts a single analog input or LVDT/RVDT/ Resolver inputs on the
Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module.
Function The analog input channel converts an analog PV signal received from a field sensor or
LVDT/RVDT to engineering units for use by other function blocks in the C300 -
20msCEE Controller, and by the rest of Experion PKS.
With R410, SVP_AI channel supports angular measurement using the Resolver. To
accomplish this, you need to configure the SENSRTYP parameter as “Resolver.”
To accomplish this function, the AI channel performs the following operation on the
analog PV signal.
• Analog-to-digital conversion
• PV characterization
• Range Checking and PV filtering
• PV source selection
When the SENSRTYP parameter is configured as “Resolver,” the SVP_AI channel
does not support the following parameters.
• LVDTCOREFALLOUT
• OWDENBL
• TF
• LOCUTOFF
• INPTDIR
• PVCHAR
• PVCLAMP
• PVEUHI
• PVEULO
• PVEXHIFL
• PVEXLOFL
• PVEXEUHI
• PVEXEULO
Inputs Floating point values in engineering units.

339
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Floating point values in engineering units.

Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters ACTUALANGLE OWDENBL
ANGLEOFFSET PNTTYPE
APPLYOFFSET PTEXECST
BADPVFL PV
BLCKCOMMENT1 PVAUTO
BLCKCOMMENT2 PVAUTOSTS
BLCKCOMMENT3 PVCALC
BLCKCOMMENT4 PVCHAR
CALIBVAL PVCLAMP
CHANNUM PVEUHI
CONTAINEDIN PVEULO
DESC PVEXHIFL
DEVICELOCATION PVEXLOFL
EXCITNAMPFL PVEXEUHI
PVEXEULO
EXCITNFBAFL
PVRAW
EXCITNFBBFL
PVSOURCE
EXCITNFREQDRIFTFL
PVSRCOPT
EXCITNVLTG
PVSTS
FBINPUTSFL
SENSRTYP
INPTDIR
TF
IOP
UNSTABLEINPUTFL
IOPTYPE
VALVECALIBSTS
LASTPV
VALVECALIBENB
LOCUTOFF
VDTMODE
LVDTCOREFALLOUTFL
XMTRWIRESLCT
NAME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.15.3 SVP_AO

Description Two AO channels are present in the Servo Valve Positioner (SVP) Module. The AO
channel supports unipolar and bipolar current output in addition to standard 4-20 mA
analog output.
Function The AO channel converts the output value (OP) to an output signal for operating final
control elements such as valves and actuators in the field.
To convert the OP value to a configured signal value, the AO channel performs:
• Direct/Reverse Output Function
• Linear or nonlinear Output Characterization
Inputs Accepts values from AUXILIARY function blocks executing in C300 - 20msCEE
Controller or OP value from a local SVP_REGCTL block.

340 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Output signals are connected to servo valves or external servo valve positioner.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.
Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 OPBIASCUR
BLCKCOMMENT2 OPCHAR
BLCKCOMMENT3 OPFINAL
BLCKCOMMENT4 OPTDIR
CHANNUM OPHICURRENT
COMMFAILFL OPIN0
CONTAINEDIN OPIN1
DESC OPIN2
DEVICELOCATION OPIN3
DITHERAMPL OPIN4
DITHERFREQ OPIN5
FAULTOPT OPLOCURRENT
FAULTVALUE OPOUT0
INITREQ OPOUT1
INITREQLATCH OPOUT2
INITVAL OPOUT3
INTRLOCKFAILOPT1 OPOUT4
INTRLOCKFAILOPT2 OPOUT5
IOP OPTYPE
IOPTYPE PNTTYPE
MODE PRCSAFEOP1
MODEATTR PRCSAFEOP2
MODEPERM PRCSINTRLOCK1
NAME PRCSINTRLOCK2
NMODE PTEXECST
NMODEATTR REDTAG
OP STROKENB
OPACTION
SECDIAGCURR
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.15.4 SVP_DI

Description The DI channel block represents a single discrete input point on the Servo Valve
Positioner (SVP) Module.
Function The DI channel block converts a PVRAW signal received from the field to a PV that
can be used by other data points in the Experion system.
Inputs Digital (PV) signals received from the field.
Outputs PV status value that can be used by other data points in system.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.

341
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters BLCKCOMMENT1 IOPTYPE

BLCKCOMMENT2 OWDENBL
BLCKCOMMENT3 PNTTYPE
BLCKCOMMENT4 PTEXECST
BADPVFL PV
CHANNUM PVAUTO
CONTAINEDIN PVRAW
DESC PVSOURCE
DEVICELOCATION PVSRCOPT
DITYPE
INPTDIR
IOP
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.15.5 SVP_REGCTL

Description The SVP_REGCTL channel operates as Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)

controller and supports the ideal form of calculating the PID terms.
Function Accepts 2 analog inputs by default - process variable (PV1) and set point (SP);
produces output calculated to reduce the difference between PV1 and SP. Provides anti-
windup protection, and control initialization.
Note: SVP_REGCTL supports an optional analog input PV2, which can be used as an
alternate to PV1 based on the PV1STS.
The SVP_Regctl block functionality is similar to C300 PID with reduced features.
SVP_Regctl block performs the following functions.
1. Input Processing
PV Processing: PV processing fetches the input value, status and range from the
configured AI channels and updates appropriate PV parameters.
SP Processing: SP processing is performed to execute SP limit checking.
2. Mode Processing
Mode processing identifies the source of stores which may be accepted by
SVP_REGCTL on SP and OP parameters.
3. Initial Control Processing
This function verifies if a SVP_REGCTL cascade strategy has been broken, when
the SVP_REGCTL blocks are in a cascade strategy. If the cascade strategy is
broken, this function initializes the blocks, and builds an initialization request for its
primary.
4. Algorithm Calculation
SVP_REGCTL blocks only support Equation A (incremental algorithm) and E (full
value algorithm).
5. Output Processing
This function derives the control output (OP) from the algorithm's calculated
variable (CV).
6. Feedback Propagation
This function drives the ARWSTS parameter to provide the information to the
upstream block in the cascade mode to stop the integral calculation.

342 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Inputs Accepts PV as input from any of the local SVP_AI channels.

Outputs OP value can be connected only to the SVP_AO channels, with OPACTION configured
as incremental.
Note: Use of control equation A or E is independent of OPACTION parameter of
SVP_AO.
Block has following initializable outputs:
• OP = Calculated output in percent.
• OPEU = Calculated output in engineering units
that the default OP connection pin is exposed on the blocks and the implicit/hidden
connection function automatically makes the appropriate value/status parameter (OPX/
OPEUX) connection when required.
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be“associated” with 1 channel of the corresponding SVP
module that interfaces with the physical SVP hardware module at execution runtime.

343
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ARWNET OPEXLOLM

ARWOP OPEXHIFL
BLCKCOMMENT1 OPEXLOFL
BLCKCOMMENT2 OPHIFL
BLCKCOMMENT3 OPHILM
BLCKCOMMENT4 OPLOFL
BADCTLFL OPLOLM
BADCTLOPT OPMINCHG
BADPVFL OPTOL
CHANNUM OUTIND
CONTAINDEIN PNTTYPE
CTLACTN PREFPVSRC
CTLEQN PRIMDATA.ARWSTS
CTLSTATE PRIMDATA.INITSTS
CV PRIMDATA.INITVAL
CVEUHI PTEXECST
CVEULO PV
DESC PV1
DEVICELOCATION PV1STS
EQNEUNITSOPT PV2
EUDESC PV2STS
GAINHILM PVEUHI
GAINLOLM PVEULO
GAINOPT PVSTS
INITMAN PVSTSFL.BAD
INITREQ PVSTSFL.NORM
INITVAL PVTRAKOPT
IOP PVTRAKOPTAI
IOPTYPE REDTAG
K SECDATA
LASTGOODPV SECDATA.ARWSTS
MODE SECDATA.INITSTS
MODEATTR SECDATA.INITVAL
MODEATTRFL.NORM SP
MODEATTRFL.OPER SPHIFL
MODEATTRFL.PROG SPHILM
MODEFL.CAS SPLOFL
MODEFL.MAN SPLOLM
MODEFL.NORM SPTOL
MODEPERM T1
NMODE T1HILM
NMODATTR T1LOLM

344 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

OP T2
OPBIAS T2HILM
OPBIAS.FIX T2LOLM
OPBIAS.RATE TMOUTFL
OPEU TMOUTMODE
OPEXHILM TMOUTTIME
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

345
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.16 Universal Input/Output (UIO) Module

Related topics
“UIO module” on page 346

4.16.1 UIO module

Description UIO module supports 32 input/output channels. These channel types can be configured
as one of the following:
• analog input channels
• analog output channels
• digital input channels
• digital output channels
Function The UIO channel supports multiple functionalities. It can function as an analog input/
output channel and/or a digital input/output channel at the same time. The function of
the UIO channel is identical to the existing analog input/output channels and/or the
digital input/output channels depending on the configured channel type. In addition, it
monitors the temperature of the module.
With R430, UIO module supports the following functions.
• DO channel ganging
• Pulse counting using DI channel
Inputs The input to the UIO channel varies depending on the channel configuration. The
following table defines the inputs for each channel type.
Channel Type Input
Analog input channel Floating point value in engineering units
Analog output channel OP value from
• a single Regulatory Control block
• an operator input
• a program
• an SCM block
Digital input channel Digital (PV) signals received from the field
Digital output channel SO, PO, ONPULSE, or OFFPULSE value
from
• a single Regulatory Control block
• an operator input
• a program
• an SCM block
Outputs The output of the UIO channel varies depending on the channel configuration. The
following table defines the outputs for each channel type.
Channel Type Output
Analog input channel Floating point value in engineering units.
Analog output channel Floating point value in engineering units.
Digital input channel PV status value that can be used by other
data points in system.

346 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Digital output channel Digital (Boolean) value or pulsed (real)

value.
Associated Block Prior to loading UIO block, the block must be “associated” with one channel of
corresponding UIO block that interfaces with the physical UIO hardware module at
execution runtime.

347
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters AICHNLNAME IOMSTATE

AIPTEXECST IOMSTSA
AOCHNLNAME IOMSTSB
AOPTEXECST IOMTYPE
ASSOCASSET IOPDESCA
BADPVFL IOPDESCB
BLCKCOMMENT1 IOPLOCATION
BLCKCOMMENT2 IOREDOPT
BLCKCOMMENT3 LRL
BLCKCOMMENT4 LRV
CHNLNAME NAME
CPUFREEAVGA MODIFIEDBY
CPUFREEAVGB NUMCHANS
CPUFREEEMINA NUMSIGS
CPUFREEMINB OP
CREATEDBY OPFINAL
CTRLCONFIRM OPTINITVAL
DATECREATED PARTNERINCOMPATIBLEA
DBVALID PARTNERINCOMPATIBLEB
DESC PNTTYPE
DICHNLNAME PRIMARYSIG
DIPTEXECST PV
DOCHNLNAME PVFL
DOOP PVSTS
DOPTEXECST RDNAUTOSYNC
FWINVALIDA REASONSET
FWINVALIDB REDDATAA
GROUP.NUMPARAMS REDDATAB
HCUAVAIL SCANCTRLLVL
HDEVID SCANRATE
HDEVMFG SCANASSOCDSP
HDEVREV SCANGRPDTL
HDEVTYPE7 SCANPNTDTL
HDEVTYPENAME SECONDARYSIG
HENABLE SECSIGSECLVL
HIST.NUMPARAMS SERIALNUMA
HSCANCFG SERIALNUMB
HSCANOVR SO
HTAG SOINITVAL
INITVAL SOREADFAIL
IOLINK STATRESETA
IOLINKCOLOR TEMPCURA

348 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

IOMBTREVA TEMPCURB
IOMBTREVB TEMPHILM
IOMCOMMAND TEMPLOLM
IOMFWREVA TEMPMAXA
IOMFWREVB TEMPMAXB
IOMHWREVA TEMPMINA
IOMHWREVB TEMPMINB
IOMLHFSTA TREND.NUMPARAMS
IOMLHFSTB TYPEINVALIDA
IOMNUM TYPEINVALIDB
IOMOPERA URL
IOMOPERB URV
IOMPLD1REVA VERSIONDATE
IOMPLD1REVB
IOMPLD2REVA
IOMPLD2REVB
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Control Builder Components Theory for more information on the UIO
Blocks.

349
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.17 Peer Control Data Interface (PCDI) Blocks

Related topics
“PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master device) Block” on page 350
“PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag Array Channel) Block” on page 353
“PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Numeric Array Channel) Block” on page 354
“PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text Array Channel) Block” on page 355

4.17.1 PCDI_MASTER (Peer Control Data Interface Master device) Block

Description Identifies the physical Safety Manager or Modbus TCP end device or
gateway for the C300 to provide links to associated Array Request
Channel blocks and provides selected diagnostic events for associated
channels.
Function Provides configuration and communication software to enable devices to
communicate over Honeywell's Fault Tolerant Ethernet media to perform
bi-directional data exchange directly with the Experion C300 Controller.
The request for the data in Honeywell's Safety Manager or Modbus end
device, whether it is a native Modbus TCP device or a Modbus RTU
device connected to the serial bus of a gateway, is generated by a PCDI
Array Request Channel function block. These blocks will be instantiated
in a Control Module (CM).
Inputs Real-time data transmission from configured peer device
Outputs Real-time data transmission to physical device.

350 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ALMENBSTATE NUMDISCONN[0..1]

AVGRCVBYTESPERS NUMSIGS
EC
NUMUIDS
AVGRCVMSGPERSEC
ORPHANRESPCNT
AVGSMITBYTESPERS
PREFERREDCONN
EC
PRIMARY
AVGSMITBYTESPERS
EC PRIMARYSIG
AVGXMITMSGPERSE PRIMCONNSTS
C PRIMERRCNT
BLCKCOMMENT1 PRIMERRCODE
BLCKCOMMENT2 PRIMERRFL
BLCKCOMMENT3 PRIMERRINFO
BLCKCOMMENT4 PRIMIP
CHANFBNAME[0..63]PRIMIPMON
CHANLASTMBERR[0. PRIMLASTCONNTIME
.63]
PRIMLASTDISCONNTIME
CHANLASTMBERRTI
ME[0..63] PRIMLASTERRTIME
CHANMBERRCNT[0.. PRIMLOOPDATA
63] PRIMNUMCONN
CHANMBERRFL PRIMNUMCONNATMPT
CHANREQRSPRCVD[ PRIMNUMDISCONN
0..63]
PRIMNUMDISCONNTIME
CHANREQSENT[0..63
] PRIMTCP
CHANRSTSTATS PRIMTCPMON
CHANSTS[0..63] QUEUEDREQCNT[0-15]
CONINUSE REASONSET
CONINUSEMON REDSWITCHPERIOD
CONNSTS[0..1] REQRSPRCVD
CONTOUSE REQRTRY
CREATEDBY REQRTRYCNT[0-15]
CTRLCONFIRM RSTERRCNT
CYCLETIME[0..63] RSTSTATS
DATECREATED SCANASSOCDSP
DEFTIMOUT SCANCTRLLVL
DESC SCANPNTDTL
DEVSTS SECCONNSTS
DEVSUPCMDS[0..15] SECERRCNT
[0..39] SECERRCODE
DEVTYPE SECERRFL
DIAGREQRSPRCVD[0 SECERRINFO
-15]
SECIP
DIAGREQSENT[0..15]
SECIPMON

351
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

ENABLEDEVICE[0..15 SECLASTCONNTIME
]
SECLASTDISCCONNTIME
ENITITYNAME
SECLASTERRTIME
ERRCNT[0..1]
SECLOOPDATA
ERRCODE[0..1]
SECNUMCONN
ERRFL[0..1]
SECNUMCONNATMPT
ERRINFO[0..1]
SECNUMDISCONN
GROUP.NUMPARAMS
SECONDARYSIG
HIST.NUMPARAMS
SECSIGSECLVL
INALM
SECTCP
IOMSTATE
SECTCPMON
LASTCONNTIME[0..1]
STATUS
LASTDISCONNTIME[
STUBIOM
0..1]
TIMOUT[0..15]
LASTERRTIME[0..1]
TIMOUTCNT[0-15]
LASTMBERR[0..15]
TOTALREQSENT
LASTMBERRTIME[0..
15] TREND.NUMPARAMS
LOOPADDR UIDDEVTYPE[0..15]
LOOPDATA UIDDEVTYPEMON[0..15]
LOOPDATACHG UIDLOOPADDR[0..15]
LOOPMODE UIDLOOPDATA[0..15]
LOOPRATE UIDLOOPDATACHG
LOOPTYPE UIDLOOPMODE[0..15]
MASTERID UIDLOOPRATE[0..15]
MASTERSTATE UIDLOOPTYPE[0..15]
MAXPENDREQ UIDORPHANRESPCNT[0-15]
MAXRCVBYTESPERS UIDREQRSPRCVD[0-15]
EC UIDREQSENT[0..15]
MAXRCVMSGPERSE UNITID[0..15]
C
UNITIDMON[0..15]
MAXUIDREQ
USEKEEPALIVE
MAXXMITBYTESPER
SEC VENDOR[0..15]
MAXXMITMSGPERS VERSIONDATE
EC
MBERRCNT [0..15]
MBERRFL[0..15]
MODIFIEDBY
MSGDELAY
NAME
NUMCHANS
NUMCONN[0..1]
NUMCONNATMPT[0..
1]

352 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each
parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about
configuring and using the PCDI_MASTER block.

4.17.2 PCDIFLAGARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Flag Array Channel) Block

Description Provides a read/write interface to a Boolean array of data from Honeywell's Safety Manager,
Modbus TCP native device or a serial device through a Modbus TCP Gateway/Bridge.
Function • Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field device. Or, reads
data from the associated field device and makes it available to the connected block.
• Supports up to 2000 Boolean values (PVFL[1..2000] from the device.
• The start index along with the read or writes defines the function code for the request. The
bit types represent read and write forms depending on the address range as follows: Provides
access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time or whole array access.
– 000001-065535: read or write from 1 to 2000 bit flags.
– 100001-165535: read only from 1 to 2000 bit flags.
• Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and generates a
detailed error code (ERRCODE).
• Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL).
Inputs Boolean value from device or another block
Outputs Boolean value
Parameters ACCLOCK NAME
AUTOTRIGGER NFLAG
BADPVFL ORDERINCM
BLCKCOMMENT1 PVFL
BLCKCOMMENT2 PVSTS
BLCKCOMMENT3 RDYFL
BLCKCOMMENT4 REQSTATE
CHANNAME SENDFL
CHANSTS SIMMODE
DEVADDR SIMVALUE[1..1968]
DONEFL STARTINDEX
ERRCODE SUBVAL
ERRFL SUBVALTYPE
IOCNUMBER USERSYMNAME
IOCSTATE WRITEOPT
LASTERRTIME
MASTERID
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of
corresponding PCDI_MASTER block that interfaces with physical peer device at execution
runtime. For optimum performance, assign channels to PCDI_MASTER block for given device
contiguously. For example, if you have four PCDIFLAGARRCH blocks to use with the device,
assign them to PCDI_MASTER block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.

353
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring and using
the PCDI_MASTER block.

4.17.3 PCDINUMARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Numeric Array Channel) Block

Description Provides a read/write interface to a Numeric array of data from Modbus TCP native device or a
serial device through a Modbus TCP Gateway /Bridge.
Function • Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field device. Or, reads
data from the associated field device and makes it available to the connected block.
• The start index along with the read or writes defines the function code for the request. The
floating point data types represent all word and byte swapped forms depending on the
address range as follows:
– 200001-265535: read or write from 1 to 60 contiguous Word Swapped IEEE floating
point numbers.
– 300001-365535: read from 1 to 120contiguous Signed Integer numbers. This is read
only addresses. Read/Write Option setting is ignored.
– 400001-465535: read from 1 to 120 or write a single Signed Integer numbers.
– 700001-765535: read or write from 1 to 60 contiguous IEEE floating point numbers.
– 800002-865535: read or write from 1 to 60 contiguous IEEE floating point numbers
Addr-1.
– 900001-965535: read from 1 to 120 or write a single Unsigned Integer numbers.
• Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time or whole array
access.
• Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and generates a
detailed error code (ERRCODE).
• Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL).
Inputs Up to 248 bytes of Real, Integer, or Byte type data from the device.
Outputs See above.

354 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters ACCLOCK NNUMERIC

AUTOTRIGGER ORDERINCM
BADPVFL PV
BLCKCOMMENT1 PVEUHI
BLCKCOMMENT2 PVEULO
BLCKCOMMENT3 PVRAW
BLCKCOMMENT4 PVRAWHI
CHANNAME PVRAWLO
CHANSTS PVSTS
CONVTOLONG RDYFL
DEVADDR REQSTATE
DONEFL SENDFL
ERRCODE SIMMODE
ERRFL SIMVALUE[1..120]
EUDESC STARTINDEX
IOCNUMBER SUBVAL
IOCSTATE SUBVALTYPE
LASTERRTIME USERSYMNAME
MASTERID WRITEOPT
NAME
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated” with 1 channel of
corresponding PCDI_MASTER block that interfaces with physical peer device at execution
runtime. For optimum performance, assign channels to PCDI_MASTER block for given device
contiguously. For example, if you have four PCDINUMARRCH blocks to use with the device,
assign them to PCDI_MASTER block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.
Refer to the Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring and using
the PCDINUMARRCH block.

4.17.4 PCDITEXTARRCH (Peer Control Data Interface Text Array Channel) Block

Description Provides a read/write interface to a Text (or String) array of data from Modbus TCP native
device or a serial device through a Modbus TCP Gateway /Bridge.

355
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function • Reads data from the connected block and writes data to the associated field device. Or, reads
data from the associated field device and makes it available to the connected block.
• Supports up to 16 Text values (STR[1..16]) from the device. Since the maximum size of the
interface to the device is 128 bytes, the valid range of values depends on the combination of
number of string values (NSTRING) and length of string values (STRLEN) as follows.
– If NSTRING is 1 and STRLEN is 128, valid STR[1..16] range is 1.
– If NSTRING is 2 and STRLEN is 64, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 2.
– If NSTRING is 4 and STRLEN is 32, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 4.
– If NSTRING is 8 and STRLEN is 16, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 8.
– If NSTRING is 16 and STRLEN is 8, valid STR[1..16] range is 1 to 16.
• The start index along with the read or writes defines the function code for the request. The
ASCII encoded bytes represent read and write forms depending on the address range as
follows:
– 500001-565535: read or write from 16 of 8, 8 of 16, 4 of 32, 2 of 164, or 1 of 128 ASCII
encoded bytes.
– 600000: Loopback test
– 600001-665535: write vendor information.
– 699999: read vendor information
• Provides access to the array of data by other blocks - one element at a time or whole array
access.
• Sets an overall error flag (ERRFL) ON when the array data is invalid and generates a
detailed error code (ERRCODE).
• Provides bad PV flag (BADPVFL).
Inputs Up to 8 string values depending on whether the length of the string is 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128
characters.
Outputs See above.
Parameters ACCLOCK MASTERID
AUTOTRIGGER NSTRING
BADPVFL ORDERINCM
BLCKCOMMENT1 RDYFL
BLCKCOMMENT2 REQSTATE
BLCKCOMMENT3 SENDFL
BLCKCOMMENT4 SIMMODE
CHANNAME SIMVALUE[1..16]
CHANSTS STARTINDEX
CONVTOASCII STR
DEVADDR STRLEN
DONEFL SUBVAL
ERRCODE SUBVALTYPE
ERRFL USERSYMNAME
IOCNUMBER WRITEOPT
IOCSTATE
LASTERRTIME
Associated Block Prior to loading, block must be “associated"” with 1 channel of corresponding PCDI_MASTER
block that interfaces with physical peer device at execution runtime. For optimum performance,
assign channels to PCDI_MASTER block for given device contiguously. For example, if you
have four PCDITEXTARRCH blocks to use with the device, assign them to PCDI_MASTER
block channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 rather than 0, 2, 4, and 6.

356 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter. Refer to the
Peer Control Data Interface Reference for information about configuring and using the.
PCDITEXTARRCH block.

357
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.18 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Blocks

Related topics
“PROFIBUS Module Gateway (PGM) Block” on page 358
“PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Secondary Block” on page 358
“Protocol Block (PBLINK)” on page 358
“Device Support Block (DSB)” on page 358
“PROFIBUS Input/Output Module (PIOM) Block” on page 358
“PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library” on page 30
“PBAICHANNEL” on page 359
“PBAOCHANNEL” on page 359
“PBDICHANNEL” on page 359
“PBDOCHANNEL” on page 359

4.18.1 PROFIBUS Module Gateway (PGM) Block

Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.2 PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Secondary Block

Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.3 Protocol Block (PBLINK)

Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.4 Device Support Block (DSB)

Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.5 PROFIBUS Input/Output Module (PIOM) Block

Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

358 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.18.6 PROFIBUS Interface (PBUSIF) Library

The PROFIBUS Interface Library includes the interface blocks associated with linking PROFIBUS devices
with the Experion PKS system through the interface modules. Refer to the PROFIBUS Interface Implementation
Guide for complete details about the PROFIBUS Interface components.

4.18.7 PBAICHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.8 PBAOCHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.9 PBDICHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

4.18.10 PBDOCHANNEL
Refer to the following documents for PGM-related documentation for this block.
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) User’s Guide
• PROFIBUS Gateway Module (PGM) Parameter Reference

359
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.19 Foundation FieldBus Interface Module (FIM) Blocks

Related topics
“FIM Block” on page 360
“FIMS Block” on page 360
“FIM4 Block” on page 360
“FIM4SEC Block” on page 360
“FIM8 Block” on page 360
“FIM Block” on page 360
“FFLINK” on page 361

4.19.1 FIM Block

For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide
• Series C FIM User’s Guide

4.19.2 FIMS Block

For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide
• Series C FIM User’s Guide

4.19.3 FIM4 Block

For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide
• Series C FIM User’s Guide

4.19.4 FIM4SEC Block

For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide
• Series C FIM User’s Guide

4.19.5 FIM8 Block

For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide
• Series C FIM User’s Guide

4.19.6 FIM Block

For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide

360 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

• Series C FIM User’s Guide

4.19.7 FFLINK
For more information about FIM and device-related operations, refer to the following documents:
• Series A FIM User’s Guide
• Series C FIM User’s Guide

361
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.20 Enhanced High-Performance Process Manager (EHPM) Block

Related topics
“EHPM block” on page 362

4.20.1 EHPM block

Description The EHPM block represents the EHPM hardware and is used for defining the EHPM Controller in
Control Builder. EUCN points and strategies are executed in the EHPM Controller environment.
The EHPM block has standard tabs like Main tab, Statistics tab, peer-to-peer communication and
so on. These tabs represent the parameters which are mostly for viewing the current status of
EHPM and statistics values. A new tab has been introduced, the EUCN tab, which shows the
EHPM and ENIM specific information and their relationship. Parameters and information in this
tab can be modified or added as per the requirements.
The EHPM block is designed to be stand-alone and it belongs to the independent block category.
Function • The EHPM block defines the EHPM controller in the Control Builder and represents this
controller in the Experion server.
• In the Control Builder Project tree view, identification data and certain configuration
parameters can be configured. The EHPM state and statistical parameters are view or read
only.
• On the Main tab, the FTE Device Index shows the unique identification of the module. The
value of redundant module parameter indicates whether the EHPM is redundant or non-
redundant and how it should be loaded.
• Once the EHPM block is loaded to the Monitoring view, the EHPM state reflects the state of
the EHPM Controller.
• The EHPM block functionality is similar to that of a C300 controller block. However, a CEE
is not associated with the EHPM block and hence the EHPM block can perform only basic
execution of its parameters. Also, the EHPM controller state cannot be changed from the
Control Builder; it can be changed only from TPN.
• The EHPM block can directly process parameter read and write requests initiated by CDA
peer devices (C300 and ACE), only after it is loaded to the Monitoring view.
• The EHPM Data Access parameter allows you to optionally download the EHPM points to
the Experion Server so that standard history can be collected through CDA. All the EHPM
points under an EHPM Controller are configured as per the value of EHPM Data Access
parameter (Peer to Peer Only or Peer to Peer and ExpServer) defined on the EHPM block
in Control Builder.
• EHPM points and control functions are configured using TPN configuration tools. The EHPM
block must be configured in Control Builder and loaded to the monitoring side to enable:
– CDA peer access between the ACE/C300 Controller and the EHPM Controller
– CDA data access to the EHPM points from the Experion Server

Note
Loading of the EHPM block to the Monitoring view is limited by the EHPM
Connections license. For more information on EHPM license, contact your Honeywell
representative.

Inputs CDA communication

Outputs Refer to the description.

362 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters AUTHSERVERIPADDR HPM_FWREV

AUTHSTATE HPM_HWREV
AVGRDRRESPONSETIMEUS HPM_IOL_HWREV
DATEPTIMPORT # HPMNODENO
EAGN NOPERDB #
EHPMDATAACCESS RCVNONRDRFRAMECOUNT
EHPMSTATE RCVRDRREQUESTCOUNT
EHPM_ERRCODE RCVRDRRESPONSECOUNT
EHPM_SELFTEST RDRRETRYCOUNT
HPM_CNTRLPERSREV SIMULATEDIO
HPM_CNTRLPERSVER TOTALREQRESPCOUNT
HPM_COMMPERSREV UCNADDRESS
HPM_COMMPERSVER UCNNW
UNEXPECTEDRDRRESPONSECOUNT
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

363
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.21 EtherNet/IP blocks

This topic provides reference information about EtherNet/IP I/O devices, PowerFlex drives, E3, and E3 plus
relays.

Related topics
“Input and output type EtherNet/IP I/O module blocks” on page 364
“EtherNet/IP drive and relay module blocks” on page 373

4.21.1 Input and output type EtherNet/IP I/O module blocks

Related topics
“1738–AENT (ArmorPoint adapter)” on page 364
“1738-IB4DM12 ( ArmorPoint 24V DC 4-channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics)” on page 365
“1738-IB8M12 ( ArmorPoint 24V DC 8-channel Digital Input Module)” on page 365
“1738-IE2CM12 (Armor Point 2-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Module)” on page 366
“1738-IE4CM12 (ArmorPoint 4-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Module)” on page 366
“1738-IR2M12 (Armor Point, 2-Channel RTD Analog Input)” on page 367
“1738-IT2IM12 (Armor Point, 2-Channel Thermocouple Analog Input)” on page 367
“1738-OA2M12AC3 (Armor Point - 2 channel - 120/230V ac Output Module w/ 2 AC 3 pin)” on page 368
“1738-OB2EPM12 (Armor Point - 2 channel - 24V dc Digital Output Module)” on page 369
“1738-OB8EM12 (Armor Point - 8 channel, 24V dc Digital Output Module)” on page 369
“1738-OE2CM12 (Armor Point 2-Channel 24V dc Analog Output Module)” on page 370
“1738-OE4CM12 (Armor Point 4-Channel 24V dc Analog Output Module)” on page 370
“1732E-IB16M12DR (ArmorBlock 24V DC 16-channel Digital Input Dual-Port EtherNet Module with
Diagnostics)” on page 371
“1732E-IF4M12R (ArmorBlock 4-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Module)” on
page 371
“1732E-IR4IM12R (Armor Block, 4 - Channel RTD Analog Input)” on page 372
“1732E-IT4IM12R (Armor Block, 4 – Channel Thermocouple Analog Input)” on page 372
“1732E-OF4M12R (Armor Block- 4 channel – 24V DC Analog Output Module)” on page 373

4.21.1.1 1738–AENT (ArmorPoint adapter)

Description Identifies the physical adapter that Armor Point I/O modules communicate through.
Function Defines the number of IOMs in this chassis behind the adapter, communication path for all
IOMs attached to this adapter, and execution state of the adapter.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

364 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters • ALMACTIVE • IOCCONNEXTSTS

• ALMDESC • IOCONNSTATUS
• ALMENBSTATE • IPADDRESS
• ALMPRI • OPENWIRE
• ALMSEV • OTRPI
• ALMSTR • OWDENBL
• DESC • PVFL
• EIOMTYPE • SHORTCIRCUIT
• EXECSTATE • SLOT
• FILTEROFF • TORPI
• FILTERON
Associate Blocks 1738-IB4DM12, 1738-IB8M12, 1738-IE2CM12, 1738-IE4CM12, 1738-IR2M12, 1738-
IT2IM12, 1738-OA2M12AC3, 1738-OB2EPM12, 1738-OB8EM12, 1738-OE2CM12, 1738-
OE4CM12
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.2 1738-IB4DM12 ( ArmorPoint 24V DC 4-channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module hardware is read and displayed.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters • ALMACTIVE • FILTEROFF
• ALMDESC • FILTERON
• ALMENBSTATE • IOCONNSTATUS
• ALMPRI • IPADDRESS
• ALMSEV • OPENWIRE
• ALMSTR • OTRPI
• AUTOBAUDDISABLE • OWDENBL
• BADPVFL • PVFL
• DESC • SHORTCIRCUIT
• DRIVERNAME • SLOT
• EIOMTYPE • TORPI
• EXECSTATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.3 1738-IB8M12 ( ArmorPoint 24V DC 8-channel Digital Input Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

365
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters • ALMENBSTATE • IOCCONNEXTSTS

• DESC • IOCONNSTATUS
• DRIVERNAME • IPADDRESS
• EIOMTYPE • OTRPI
• EXECSTATE • PVFL
• FILTEROFF • SLOT
• FILTERON • TORPI
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.4 1738-IE2CM12 (Armor Point 2-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module hardware is read and displayed.
The Input raw value obtained from IO module hardware is scaled between the PVRAW ranges
and sent to the IOC.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters • ALMACTIVE • NOTCHFILTER
• ALMDESC • OTRPI
• ALMENBSTATE • OVERRANGE
• ALMPRI • PV
• ALMSEV • PVRAW
• ALMSTR • PVRAWHI
• DESC • PVRAWLO
• DIGFILTER • PVSTS
• DRIVERNAME • RANGE
• EIOMTYPE • SLOT
• EXECSTATE • TORPI
• IOCCONNEXTSTS • UNDERRANGE
• IOCONNSTATUS • UPDATERATE
• IPADDRESS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.5 1738-IE4CM12 (ArmorPoint 4-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO hardware module is read and displayed.
The Input raw value obtained from IO module hardware is scaled between the PVRAW ranges
and sent to the IOC.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

366 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters • ALMACTIVE • NOTCHFILTER

• ALMDESC • OTRPI
• ALMENBSTATE • OVERRANGE
• ALMPRI • PV
• ALMSEV • PVRAW
• ALMSTR • PVRAWHI
• DESC • PVRAWLO
• DIGFILTER • PVSTS
• DRIVERNAME • RANGE
• EIOMTYPE • SLOT
• EXECSTATE • TORPI
• IOCCONNEXTSTS • UNDERRANGE
• IOCONNSTATUS • UPDATERATE
• IPADDRESS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.6 1738-IR2M12 (Armor Point, 2-Channel RTD Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path for
data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters • ALMENBSTATE • OTRPI
• DESC • OVERRANGE[0 - 1]
• DIGFILTER[0 - 1] • PVRAW[0 - 1]
• DRIVERNAME • PV[0 - 1]
• EIOMTYPE • PVSTS[0 - 1]
• EXECSTATE • PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 1]
• IOCCONNEXTSTS • PVHISIGNAL[0 - 1]
• IOCONNSTATUS • SENSORTYPE[0 - 1]
• IPADDRESS • SLOT
• NOTCHFILTER • TEMPUNITS[0 - 1]
• TORPI
• UNDERRANGE[0 - 1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.7 1738-IT2IM12 (Armor Point, 2-Channel Thermocouple Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.

367
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path for
data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module hardware is read and displayed.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters • ALMENBSTATE • OTRPI
• DESC • OVERRANGE[0 - 1]
• CJNOTCHFLT • PVRAW[0 - 1]
• CJMODE • PV[0 - 1]
• CJENABLE[0 - 1] • PVSTS[0 - 1]
• CJOFFSET[0 - 1] • PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 1]
• CJTEMP • PVHISIGNAL[0 - 1]
• CJUNDERRANGE • SLOT
• CJOVERRANGE • SENSORTYPE[0 - 1]
• DIGFILTER[0 - 1] • TEMPUNITS[0 - 1]
• DRIVERNAME • TORPI
• EIOMTYPE • UNDERRANGE[0 - 1]
• EXECSTATE
• IOCCONNEXTSTS
• IOCONNSTATUS
• IPADDRESS
• NOTCHFILTER[0 - 1]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.8 1738-OA2M12AC3 (Armor Point - 2 channel - 120/230V ac Output Module w/ 2 AC 3 pin)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC DRIVERNAME
EIOMTYPE FAULTVALUE
IPADDRESS FAULTMODE
SLOT FAULTSTATE
TORPI OPFL
OTRPI OPINITVAL
EXECSTATE
ALMENBSTATE
IOCONNSTATUS
IOCONNEXTSTS

368 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.9 1738-OB2EPM12 (Armor Point - 2 channel - 24V dc Digital Output Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module is read and displayed.
The final output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC DRIVERNAME
EIOMTYPE FAULTVALUE
IPADDRESS FAULTMODE
SLOT FAULTSTATE
TORPI ENBNOLOAD
OTRPI RESETMODE
EXECSTATE ENBLATALM
ALMENBSTATE OPFL
IOCONNSTATUS OPINITVAL
IOCONNEXTSTS CHNSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.10 1738-OB8EM12 (Armor Point - 8 channel, 24V dc Digital Output Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module is read and displayed.
The final output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.

369
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters DESC DRIVERNAME

EIOMTYPE FAULTVALUE
IPADDRESS FAULTMODE
SLOT FAULTSTATE
TORPI ENBNOLOAD
OTRPI RESETMODE
EXECSTATE ENBLATALM
ALMENBSTATE OPFL
IOCONNSTATUS OPINITVAL
IOCONNEXTSTS CHNSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.11 1738-OE2CM12 (Armor Point 2-Channel 24V dc Analog Output Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module is read and displayed.
The output obtained from channel is scaled between the OPFINAL ranges and sent to the IOM.
Performs Fault handling, based on the configuration made.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC DRIVERNAME
EIOMTYPE RANGE
IPADDRESS OPFINALLORANGE
SLOT OPFINALHIRANGE
TORPI FAULTVALUE
OTRPI FAULTACT
EXECSTATE OP
ALMENBSTATE INITVAL
IOCONNSTATUS OPFINAL
IOCONNEXTSTS CHNFLTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.12 1738-OE4CM12 (Armor Point 4-Channel 24V dc Analog Output Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module is read and displayed.
The output obtained from channel is scaled between the OPFINAL ranges and sent to the IOM.
Performs Fault handling, based on the configuration made.

370 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.

Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters DESC DRIVERNAME
EIOMTYPE RANGE
IPADDRESS OPFINALLORANGE
SLOT OPFINALHIRANGE
TORPI FAULTVALUE
OTRPI FAULTACT
EXECSTATE OP
ALMENBSTATE INITVAL
IOCONNSTATUS OPFINAL
IOCONNEXTSTS CHNFLTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.13 1732E-IB16M12DR (ArmorBlock 24V DC 16-channel Digital Input Dual-Port EtherNet Module with Diagnostics)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module hardware is read and displayed.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters • ALMACTIVE • IOCCONNEXTSTS
• ALMDESC • IOCONNSTATUS
• ALMENBSTATE • IPADDRESS
• ALMPRI • OPENWIRE
• ALMSEV • OTRPI
• ALMSTR • OWDENBL
• DESC • PVFL
• EIOMTYPE • SHORTCIRCUIT
• EXECSTATE • SLOT
• FILTEROFF • TORPI
• FILTERON
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.14 1732E-IF4M12R (ArmorBlock 4-Channel 24V DC Analog Input Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module hardware is read and displayed.
The Input raw value obtained from IO module hardware is scaled between the PVRAW ranges
and sent to the IOC.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.

371
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

Parameters • ALMACTIVE • IPADDRESS
• ALMDESC • OTRPI
• ALMENBSTATE • OVERRANGE
• ALMPRI • PV
• ALMSEV • PVRAW
• ALMSTR • PVRAWHI
• DESC • PVRAWLO
• DIGFILTER • PVSTS
• EIOMTYPE • RANGE
• EXECSTATE • SLOT
• IOCCONNEXTSTS • TORPI
• IOCONNSTATUS • UNDERRANGE
• UPDATERATE
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.15 1732E-IR4IM12R (Armor Block, 4 - Channel RTD Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path for
data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Parameters • ALMENBSTATE • OTRPI
• DESC • OVERRANGE[0 - 3]
• DIGFILTER[0 - 3] • PVRAW[0 - 3]
• EIOMTYPE • PV[0 - 3]
• EXECSTATE • PVSTS[0 - 3]
• IOCCONNEXTSTS • PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 3]
• IOCONNSTATUS • PVHISIGNAL[0 - 3]
• IPADDRESS • SENSORTYPE[0 - 3]
• NOTCHFILTER • TEMPUNITS[0 - 3]
• TORPI
• UNDERRANGE[0 - 3]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.16 1732E-IT4IM12R (Armor Block, 4 – Channel Thermocouple Analog Input)

Description Identifies the physical IOM for the CPM/C300 to provide links to the associated IOC.
Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, execution state and communications path for
data.
Provides link to IOC through IO manager software resident in the CPM/C300.
Executes at the rate of CEE Base Execution Period.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from physical device.

372 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.

Parameters OTRPI OVERRANGE[0 - 3] PVSTS[0 - 3] • OTRPI
SENSORTYPE[0 - 3] TEMPUNITS[0 - 3] • OVERRANGE[0 - 3]
TORPI
• PVLOSIGNAL[0 - 3]
• ALMENBSTATE • PVHISIGNAL[0 - 3]
• CJENABLE[0 - 3] • PVSCALEFACTOR[0 - 3]
• CJOFFSET[0 - 3] • PVRAW[0 - 3]
• CJMODE • PV[0 - 3]
• CJSTATUS[0 – 3] • SENSORTYPE[0 - 3]
• CJTEMP[0 - 3] • TEMPUNITS[0 - 3]
• DESC • TORPI
• DIGFILTER[0 - 3] • UNDERRANGE[0 - 1]
• EIOMTYPE
• EXECSTATE
• IOCCONNEXTSTS
• IOCONNSTATUS
• IPADDRESS
• NOTCHFILTER[0 - 3]
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.1.17 1732E-OF4M12R (Armor Block- 4 channel – 24V DC Analog Output Module)

Description Represents the physical IOM for C300.

Function Defines the type of IOM, number of channels, and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The channel status information sent back by the IO module is read and displayed.
The final output obtained from the channel is sent to the IOM.
Performs fault handling
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters • DESC • IOCONNEXTSTS
• EIOMTYPE • RANGE
• IPADDRESS • OPFINALLORANGE
• SLOT • FAULTVALUE
• TORPI • FAULTACT
• OTRPI • OP
• EXECSTATE • INITVAL
• ALMENBSTATE • OPFINAL
• IOCONNSTATUS • CHNFLTSTS
•
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.2 EtherNet/IP drive and relay module blocks

Related topics
“PF755 (PowerFlex 755 AC Drive)” on page 374

373
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

“193DNEN_E3 (E3 Overload Relay)” on page 374

“193DNEN_E3P (E3 Plus Overload Relay)” on page 375

4.21.2.1 PF755 (PowerFlex 755 AC Drive)

Description Represents the physical drive for C300.

Function Defines the type of drive module and the execution state
Executes at the rate of the base execution period.
The Input status information and reference sent back by the module hardware is read and
displayed.
The output obtained from the output channel is scaled between the EULO/EUHI ranges and sent
to the drive.
Additionally, commands obtained from the output channel or the drive module is sent to the
drive.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated channel.
Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to the configured IOC.
Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters • ALMACTIVE • IOCCONNEXTSTS
• ALMDESC • IOCONNSTATUS
• ALMENBSTATE • IPADDRESS
• ALMPRI • OPENWIRE
• ALMSEV • OTRPI
• ALMSTR • OWDENBL
• DESC • PVFL
• EIOMTYPE • SHORTCIRCUIT
• EXECSTATE • SLOT
• FILTEROFF • TORPI
• FILTERON
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.2.2 193DNEN_E3 (E3 Overload Relay)

Description Represents the physical E3 Relay connected by using the 193-DNENCATR adaptor for C300.
Function Defines the type of E3 Relay module and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The Input status information sent back by the E3 Relay hardware through the 193-DNENCATR
adaptor is read and displayed.
The output / commands obtained from the Output channel or the 193DNEN_E3 Module is sent
to E3 Relay Hardware through the 193-DNENCATR adaptor.
Supports 2 digital input as status and 1 digital output as command.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated Channel.
Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Real-time data transmission to the physical device.

374 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

Parameters • ALMENBSTATE • IOCONNSTATUS

• DESC • IPADDRESS
• DL_RPI • OTRPI
• EUDESC • OWDENBL
• EIOMTYPE • OPENWIRE
• EXECSTATE • TORPI
• IOCCONNEXTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

4.21.2.3 193DNEN_E3P (E3 Plus Overload Relay)

Description Represents the physical E3 Relay connected by using the 193-DNENCATR adaptor for C300.
Function Defines the type of E3 Plus Relay module and execution state.
Executes at the rate of Base Execution Period.
The Input status information sent back by the E3 Plus Relay hardware through the 193-
DNENCATR adaptor is read and displayed.
The output / commands obtained from the Output channel or the 193DNEN_E3 plus module is
sent to E3 Plus Relay Hardware through the 193-DNENCATR adaptor.
Supports 4 digital input as status and 2 digital output as command.
Inputs Real-time data transmission from the associated Channel.
Real-time data transmission from physical device.
Outputs Real-time data transmission to configured IOC.
Real-time data transmission to the physical device.
Parameters • ALMENBSTATE • IOCONNSTATUS
• DESC • IPADDRESS
• DL_RPI • OTRPI
• EUDESC • OWDENBL
• EIOMTYPE • OPENWIRE
• EXECSTATE • TORPI
• IOCCONNEXTSTS
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

375
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.22 ControlLogix and UDT blocks

Related topics
“User Defined Tag block” on page 376
“ControlLogix gateway block” on page 377

4.22.1 User Defined Tag block

Description Provides a data interface to read from/write to a UDT defined in the Control Logix PLC. This
block will be loaded and run in a control module and will have the ability to read from or write
to a UDT defined in the Control Logix PLC.
Function • Reads data from the UDT defined in the PLC that this block is mapped to and makes it
available to the connected block or reads data from the connected block (or a user entered
value) and writes data to the mapped UDT in the PLC.
• Supports the following data types:
– INT32
– FLOAT32
– INT16
– INT8
– BOOL
– STRING (Only Read, writes of string are not supported.)
• Supports any combination (arrayed or non-arrayed) of the above mentioned data types,
provided they are mapped exactly to an existing UDT in the PLC.
• Provides information on status of the block execution through the TAGEXECSTATUS
parameter.
• This is not an alarming block and thus will not generate alarms by itself.
Inputs This Block needs to be configured with the information of the gateway block that it will be
associated with, through which it will obtain the information of the address of the PLC to
establish communication with.
Information about the User defined tag in the PLC that this block represents should also be
provided. Communication will be based on the Tag Name. Therefore, it is required to configure
the Tag name to match the tag name provided in the PLC.
The Configuration information cannot be modified at run-time. If changes must be made to the
configuration of a UDT Block, these changes must be made in the Project Database and the
block must be reloaded to the controller for the changes to take effect.
Outputs Read/write of data
Parameters • BLOCKTYPEID • TORPI
• CLX_GATEWAY • INBADOPT
• CLX_TAG • TAGEXECSTATUS
• DESC • TAGRDGENSTATUS
• EUDESC • TAGRDEXTSTATUS
• READSTATUS •
Associated Blocks CONTROLLOGIXMODULE block
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

376 www.honeywell.com
 4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

4.22.2 ControlLogix gateway block

Description The Gateway block is a representation of the Control Logix PLC, with which communication
from C300 must be established.
Function This block does not get loaded to the controller. However the address information is passed on
to the associated UDT blocks during load.
Inputs This Block needs to be configured with the address information of the PLC, the IPADDRESS of
the ENET module and Slot number of the PLC in the chassis, which would form a unique path
to the PLC that is intended to be communicated with.
Outputs —
Parameters • IPADDRESS
• SLOT
• MATRIKON_OPC_HOST
• MATRIKON_OPC_PROGID
• MATRIKON_OPC_ABPLUGIN
• MATRIKON_OPC_PLC
Associated Blocks “User Defined Tag block” on page 376
Reference Refer to the Control Builder Parameter Reference for definitions of each parameter.

377
4 REFERENCE DATA FOR PHYSICAL EQUIPMENT BLOCK TYPES

378 www.honeywell.com
5 Notices

Trademarks
Experion®, PlantScape®, SafeBrowse®, TotalPlant®, and TDC 3000® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.
OneWireless™ is a trademark of Honeywell International, Inc.

Other trademarks
Microsoft and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks that appear in this document are used only to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention
of trademark infringement.

Third-party licenses
This product may contain or be derived from materials, including software, of third parties. The third party
materials may be subject to licenses, notices, restrictions and obligations imposed by the licensor. The licenses,
notices, restrictions and obligations, if any, may be found in the materials accompanying the product, in the
documents or files accompanying such third party materials, in a file named third_party_licenses on the media
containing the product, or at http://www.honeywell.com/ps/thirdpartylicenses.

379
5 NOTICES

5.1 Documentation feedback

You can find the most up-to-date documents on the Honeywell Process Solutions support website at:
http://www.honeywellprocess.com/support
If you have comments about Honeywell Process Solutions documentation, send your feedback to:
hpsdocs@honeywell.com
Use this email address to provide feedback, or to report errors and omissions in the documentation. For
immediate help with a technical problem, contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact
Center (CCC) or Honeywell Technical Assistance Center (TAC) listed in the “Support and other contacts”
section of this document.

380 www.honeywell.com
 5 NOTICES

5.2 How to report a security vulnerability

For the purpose of submission, a security vulnerability is defined as a software defect or weakness that can be
exploited to reduce the operational or security capabilities of the software.
Honeywell investigates all reports of security vulnerabilities affecting Honeywell products and services.
To report a potential security vulnerability against any Honeywell product, please follow the instructions at:
https://honeywell.com/pages/vulnerabilityreporting.aspx
Submit the requested information to Honeywell using one of the following methods:
• Send an email to security@honeywell.com.
or
• Contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact Center (CCC) or Honeywell Technical
Assistance Center (TAC) listed in the “Support and other contacts” section of this document.

381
5 NOTICES

5.3 Support and other contacts

For support, contact your local Honeywell Process Solutions Customer Contact Center (CCC).

North America
Country Phone Facsimile Email
Canada and United States 800-822-7673 973-455-5000 askssc@honeywell.com

Northern Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Denmark 07:00 – 18:00 80–252165 +45 6980 2349 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Finland 08:00 – 19:00 0800–9–15938 +358 (0)9 2319 4396 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Ireland 06:00 – 17:00 1800939488 +353 (0)1 686 4905 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Netherlands 07:00 – 18:00 0800 020 3498 +31 (0)20 524 1609 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Norway 07:00 – 18:00 800–11478 47–852–287–16 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Sweden 07:00 – 18:00 0200883167 +46 (0)8 509 097 84 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
United 06:00 – 17:00 08002797226 +44 (0)20 3031 1064 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Kingdom

Southern Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Belgium 07:00 – 18:00 080048580 +32 (0)2 791 96 02 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
France 07:00 – 18:00 0805100041 +33 (0)1 72 74 33 44 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Luxembourg 07:00 – 18:00 8002–8524 +352 24611292 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Spain 07:00 – 18:00 800099804 +34 91 791 56 25 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Portugal 06:00 – 17:00 800–8–55994 +34 91 791 56 25 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com

Eastern Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Bulgaria 08:00 – 19:00 700 20771 +359 (0)2 489 7384 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Croatia 07:00 – 18:00 0800 80 6392 +420 227 204 957 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Czech 07:00 – 18:00 800 142 784 +420 227 204 957 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Republic
Hungary 07:00 – 18:00 06 800 20 699 +36 (06) 1 577 7371 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Poland 07:00 – 18:00 00 800 121 50 46 +48 22 485 35 10 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Romania 08:00 – 19:00 0 800 800 178 +40 (0)31 710 7590 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Russia 09:00 – 20:00 8.10.80 02-412 50 11 +7 495 796 98 94 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Federation

382 www.honeywell.com
 5 NOTICES

Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email

Business
Hours
Slovakia 07:00 – 18:00 0800 002 340 +421 (0)2 3301 0376 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com

Central Europe
Country Local Time Phone Facsimile Email
Business
Hours
Austria 07:00 – 18:00 0800 006438 +43 (0)1 253 6722 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
4904
Germany 07:00 – 18:00 0800 7239098 +49 (0)30 6908 8463 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Greece 08:00 – 19:00 00800 12 9493 +30 21 1 268 6973 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Israel 08:00 – 19:00 1 809 407 309 +972 (0)2 591 6148 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Italy 07:00 – 18:00 8000 35205 +39 06 96681356 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Switzerland 07:00 – 18:00 00 080 035 +41 (0)31 560 41 60 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com

Middle East and South Africa

Country Local Time Business Hours Phone Email
Bahrain 08:00 – 19:00 8008 1343 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Oman 08:00 – 19:00 8007 7595 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Qatar 08:00 – 19:00 800 5460 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Saudi Arabia 08:00 – 19:00 800 844 5309 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
South Africa 07:00 – 18:00 0800 983 634 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Turkey 08:00 – 19:00 00800 448823587 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
United Arab 09:00 – 20:00 8000 444 0300 hpscustomersupport@honeywell.com
Emirates

Other regions
In other regions, contact your local Honeywell Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for support.
Region Phone Facsimile Email
Pacific 1300-364-822 (toll free +61-8-9362-9564 GTAC@honeywell.com
within Australia)
+61-8-9362-9559 (outside
Australia)
India +91-20-6603-2718 / 19 +91-20-6603-9800 Global-TAC-India@honeywell.com
1800-233-5051
Korea +82-80-782-2255 (toll free +82-2-792-9015 Global-TAC-Korea@honeywell.com
within Korea)
People’s Republic +86-21-2219-6888 Global-TAC-China@honeywell.com
of China
800-820-0237
400-820-0386
Singapore +65-6823-2215 +65-6445-3033 GTAC-SEA@honeywell.com
Japan +81-3-6730-7228 Global-TAC-
JapanJA25@honeywell.com

383
5 NOTICES

World Wide Web

Honeywell Process Solutions support website:
http://www.honeywellprocess.com/support

Elsewhere
Contact your nearest Honeywell office.

384 www.honeywell.com
 5 NOTICES

5.4 Training classes

Honeywell holds technical training classes on Experion PKS. These classes are taught by experts in the field of
process control systems. For more information about these classes, contact your Honeywell representative, or
see http://www.automationcollege.com.

385
5 NOTICES

386 www.honeywell.com